Skip to main content

Full text of "Constitutiones Societatis Iesu. Anno 1558. Romae, in aedibus societatis Iesu, 1558. Reprinted from the original edition: with an appendix containing a translation, and several important documents"

See other formats


This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the pubHc domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge thafs often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginaha present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
pubHsher to a Hbrary and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize pubHc domain materials and make them widely accessible. PubHc domain books belong to the 
pubHc and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrainfrom automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at http : //books . google . com/| 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Wi^ 







of tbe 
mniversiti? of Misconein 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



CONSTITVTIONES 



SOCIETATIS lESV. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



CONSTITVTIONES 



SOCIETATIS lESV. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 



AeW-i 



IXXL 



CONSTITVTIONES 

80CIETATI8 lESV. 

ANNO 1558. 



ROMiE, IN iEDIBVS SOCIETATIS lESV. 1558. 



Heptititeti fvom m ^tigitial iBUtion x 

WITH 

AN APPENDIX, 

COMTAIKIMG 

A TRANSLATION, AND SEVERAL IMPORTANT DOCUMENTS. 

CJEEGUM SGELUS OMNE. VIRG. 

LONDON: 

J. G. AND F. RIVINGTON, ST. PAUL'S CHURCH-YAIID, AND WATERLOO 

PLACB, PALL MALL; 8IMPKIN, MAR8HALL, AND CO., 8TAT10NER8' 

HALL COURT ; AND J. LE8L1E, GREAT QUEEN 8TREET. 

1838. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Constitutiones scrlbi jussit Julius Pontifez, Pauli successor. Et Ignatias 
diu atque meditatb incubuit. Divina quoque lumina inter commentandum, 
lacrymas inter scribendum expertus. Quin et Christipara ad edocendum 

quoque Magistra descendit. Cseterum Constitutiones judicatse sunt spiritu 

Dei plense. 

Damiani Synopsis primi ScbcuH Societatis Jem. I. Ldb. Cap. VIL 

ex Hispanico in Latinum verterat Polancus ; Typis Calcographis 

ediderat Romse Collegium, 1558. 

Dam. Syn. IL Ub. Cap. X. 

Praeposito Assistentes quatuor, Natalem, Consalvium, Polancum, Ma- 

dridium (assignatos) 

£t Polanco insuper Admonitoris munus k Patribus, Secretarii et Procuratoris 

Generalis 2i Preposito additum. 

Dam. Syn. IL Lib. Cap. 11. 

1577— Joannes Polancus occubuit — ^libellorum utilis Scriptor. 

Dam. Syn. IV. Lib. Cap. VIL 



PRINTED BY ROBERT BEST EDE, DORKING. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



458454 

AUG - J 1938 



PREFACE. 



Whatever degree of notoriety the Constitutions of the Society 
of Jesus might have attained, their authoritative promulgation did 
not occur until 1761, when in the course of the celebrated suit of 
the MM. Lionci and Father La Valette,* the Jesuits were "so 
inconsiderate as to produce the mysterious volume of their institute. 
By the aid of these authentic records, the principles of their 
govemment may be dehneated, and the sources of their power 
investigated, with a degree of certainty and precision, which pre- 
vious to that event it was impossible to attain.^f 

The authors of this extraordinary code, conscious of the just 
clamour which would be excited by its publication, obliged all 



♦ "Cette question fournit au parlement une occasion toute naturelle de 
demander k voir ces constitutions fameuses, qui jamais n' avaient 4t4 ni exam- 
inees, ni approuv€es avec lec formes requises. L* examen de ces constitutions, 
et ensuite celui de leurs livres, a fourni des moyens juridiques plus que 
suffisans pour d^clarer leur institut contraire aux louv du royaume^ h V obeisance 
due au souverain, ci la sureU de sa personne^ etala tranquillite de V etat." 

D' Alemberfs Essai sur la destruction dcs 
Jesuitcs. pp. 112. 113. ed. 1765. 
t Dr. Robertson. Charles V. vol. ii. p. 460. Ist. ed. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



U PREFACE. 

members of the order to mEiintain a profound secrecy respecting it.* 
The whole of their mysterious poHty was never discovered to the 
ordinary, nor even to all the professed Jesuits. '* To the novices 
are communicated only the ApostoHcal Letters of Julius III. the 
abridgment of the Constitutions, and the common rules. Nor 
have the other Jesuits access to auy additional information con- 
ceming the nature of their Institutes, but such as relates to the 
charge with which they are immediately intrusted."t No Jesuit 
therefore, who might be expelled from the Society, could possibly 
reveal its secrets in any complete and satisfactory manner.t In a 
lettei* from one of the assistants of the order at Rome, written 
towards the middle of the eighteenth century, there are expressions 
of the foUowing import. " It is only since my arrival here, that I 
understand any thing of the nature of our Society. Its govem- 
ment is a separate science, of which the Provincials themselves 
know nothing. It is necessary to be in the post which I occupy 
to begin to comprehend it."§ The still further precaution was 
adopted by the General of using cyphers in his correspondence ; 
and it was directed, that immediately on the death || of any person, 
who had in his possession letters from the General, the Assistants, 



* Regulse Communes, §. 38. cited Monarchie des Solipses, p. 120. 

+ Monarchie des Solipses, p. 78. Declar. in Exam. cap. i. cited Hist, Gen. 
des Jes. iii. 239. 

X Historie du Paraguay sous les Jesuites, per Bemardo Ibanes de Echavarri, 
3 vol. 8vo. Amst. et Leipsic. 1780. vol. i. p. 187. 

§ Ibid. 194. See Monarchie des Solipses. p. 5.5. note (2). and Erreurs 
impies et s^ditieuses que les Jesuites ont enseign^es, &c. 

Recueil des D^crets Apostoliques, &c. vol. i. p. 308 

II Constitutiones. Part VI. Cap. iv. 2. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PREFACE. Ul 

or the Provincial of the order, such letters should inBtantlj be 
bumed without being read.* 

Of the edicts which possessed the force of laws amon^ the 
Jesuits, there are many, it is believed, which they have never 
printed ;t and even the Constitutions, properly so called, they have 
seldom committed to the press, but in the coUeges of the order. 
"Whenever they ventured to print this work elsewhere, they always 
took precautions to secure the whole impression.t It was, however, 
clearly impossible, that these precautions could be univetsally suc- 
cessful. The order has at all times had too many enemies to be 
able, for any long period, to retain the exclusive possession of a 
volume, numerous copies of which were prilited, though not 
published, and which all the activity of mali^e was exerted to 
procure. 

Hospinian, in the Historia Jesuitica, published in 1619, gives a 
complete abstract of the Constitutions. They are quoted, with 
accurate knowledge, in the Catechisme des Jesuites of Padquier, 
who died in 1615. They are also set forth in the Historia Jesuitica 
of M. Ludovicus Lucius, Basle, 1627. M. Benard, the author of 
the Histoire de la Compagnie de Jesus, printed at Utrecht in 1741, 
refers to the edition of Lyons in 1607 j and mention has been 
somewhere made of an edition in 1599. The extracts from the 
Constitutions of the Jesuits, which are to be found in the Mercure 



* Chalotais, 160, 161. Echavarri, Histoire du Paraguay, i. 195, 196. "On 
ne prend ces pr^cautions qu' avec les ennemis. Le regime des Jesuites est-il 
en etat de guerre avec tous les empires V* Chalotais, ubi sup. 

t Chalotais, p. 20. 

X Ibid. p. 27. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



IV PREFACE. 

Jesuite, are taken from an edition printed at Rome in 1583. There 
is a volume of the CONSTITUTIONES, in small 8vo, in the 
Britidi Museimi, Romse, 1570. 

The edition of Prague, in 2 vols. fol. 1757, is that which was 
produced on the trial of La Valette, wherem the CONSTITUTI- 
ONES occupies 91 pages : "and although it is clear to me," says 
Mr. Penrose,* "that numerous additions have incontestably been 
made to the original Constitutions, some, perhaps, such as partially 
to supersede them, yet no alteration in the letter of the statute has 
taken place : and whatever infidelities may have been committed in 
othef instances, there is no reason to apprehend that the text of 
the CONSTITUTIONES SOCIETATIS JESU, ROMiE, 1570, 
has at any time been violated. This also, I believe, was a re- 
impression from a preceding edition in 1550.'* (1558.) 

It was in 1558, that the volume of CONSTITUTIONES, 
translated from the Spanish of Loyola by Father John Polancus, 
was originally committed to the press by the College of the Society 
in Rome : a copy of this edition has fallen into the Editor^s hands ; 
it is in small 8vo, and so exceedingly rare, that he has no where 
seen it mentioned except in the Synopsis of Damianus, a work of 
almost equal scarcity, and in the foregoing paragraph where it 



* I have coUated several pages, and the most essential passages, of the 
edition printed at Rome in 1570, and that of Antwerp in 1702, which have 
both of them the sanction of the Society. So far as I have compared them, 
they are precisely similar. The chapters and sections are apparently the same 
in each. 

Bampton Lectures, mdcccviii. by the rev. John Penrose, ma. of 
Corpus Christi College, Oxford; Appendiz XVII. which has 
furnished the materials for much of this preface. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PREPACE. V 

seems to be obscurely and incorrectly adverted to ; this book has 
supplied the text from which this FIRST ENGLISH EDITION 
has been faithfiilly and accuratdy reprinted. 

The partial CoUation made by Mr. Penrose has been thoroughly 
accomplished by subjecting the Roman Copy of 1558, to a scrutiny 
with that printed at Antwerp in 1 702, bdonging to the University 
Library of Cambridge, and the result is appended to the Con- 
stitutiones. 

Of the Translation it may be sufficient to say that its only merit 
is imdeviating fidelity to the Original, every other consideration 
being made subordinate to the essential object of giving the exact 
sense of Loyola's legislation to the English Reader, with a view to 
call his attention to the insidious practices employed by this frater- 
nity of "vigorous and experienced Rowers," who after a suppression 
of forty years have been resuscitated as one amongst "the aids 
which the special Providence of God had put in the power" of 
the Sovereign Pontiff, to enable him to pilot " St. Peter's Bark" 
through the storms of his own raising, to the re-establishment of 
his usurped domination over the Christian Republick. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



CONSTITVTIONES 



80CIBTATIS lESV. 



ANNO 1558. 



ROMiB, IN iEDIBVS SOCIETATIS lESV. 
1558. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



P R E M I U M 

CONSTITUTIONUM. 



1 /^^UANVIS summa Sapientia et bonitas Dei Creatoris 
\Vj nostri ac Domini sit, quae conservatura est, guber- 
natura, atque promotura in suo sancto servitio hanc 
minimam Societatem Jesu, ut eam dignata est inchoare ; 
ex parte vero nostra interna Charitatis et Amoris illius 
lex, quam Sanctus Spiritus scribere, et in cordibus 
imprimere solet^ potius, quam ullae externae Consti- 
tutiones, ad id adjutura sit : Gluia tamen suavis dis- 
positio divinae providentiae suarum creaturarum co- 
operationem exigit ; et quia Christi Domini nostri 
Vicarius id statuit ; et sanctorum exempla, et ratio ipsa 
nos id docet in Domino : necessarium esse arbitramur, 
Constitutiones conscribi; quae juvent ad meUus in via 
incoepta divini obsequii procedendum juxta Instituti 
nostri rationem. 

2 Quanvis primum illud sit^ et maximi momenti in nostra 
intentione, quod ad corpus universae Societatis spec- 
tat; cujus unio, et bonum regimen, et conservatio in 
suo bono statu ad majorem Dei gloriam in primis 

B 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PROOEMIUM CONSTITUTIONUM. 

quaeritur : quia tamen corpus hoc ex suis membris 
. constat, et in ipsa executione primo loco occurrit quod 
ad singulos spectat, tam in ipsis admittendis, quam in 
promovendis, ac deinde per vineam Christi Domini 
nostri dividendis; hinc exordium sumetur eo favore, 
quem lux aetema nobis ad honorem et laudem suam 
conferre dignabitur. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PRIMA PARS 

C ONSTITUTIONUM 

de admissione ad Probationem. 



DE EO, QUI ADMITTENDI PACULTATEM HABET. 
CAP. I. 

1 IJlACULTAS admittendi ad probationem quorum, 
Jjj et quanta sit ; judicio Praepositi Generalis relin- 
quatur ; qui in ea communicanda considerabit, quid ad 
majus servitium Dei ac Domini nostri conveniat. 

2 Quando aliquis, qui idoneus videatur, ad nostrum insti- 
tutum sequendum, ad eum accederet, qui hujusmodi ad- 
mittendi potestatem non habet, mittere eum poterit ad 
illum, penes quem ea sit; vel scribere ei, significando 
qualis ille sit, et quibus praeditus Dei donis, qui admitti 
petit ; et exequatur quod ei in Domino praescriptum 
fuerit : si quidem ille in absentia id praescribendi facul- 
tatem habebit. 

3 Quia refert plurimum ad divinum servitium, conveni- 
entem haberi delectum eorum, qui admittuntur, et 
diligentiam adhiberi, ut intelligantur quae ad eorum 
personam et vocationem attinent ; qui talem admittendi 
facultatem habet, si per se ipsum id ipse non praestet, 
habeat in iis, qui assidue apud se agunt, aliquem, cujus 
opera utatur ad cognoscendum eos, qui ingrediuntur, ad 

B 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



5 CONSTITUTIONUM 

agendum cum illis, eosque examinandum ; qui quidem 
prudentia praeditus sit, et non ignoret agendi modum, 
qui cum tam variis generibus et conditionibus perso- 
narum est tenendus ; ut majori cum intelligentia, et 
utriusque partis satisfactione negotium ad Dei gloriam 
transigatur. 

4 Tam ille, penes quem est facultas admittendi, quam is, 
cujus opera ille utitur, habeat oportet cognitionem rerum 
Societatis, ac Zelum boni progressus ipsius ; ut nuUa 
ratione dimoveri ab eo possit, quod in Domino conveni- 
entius ad divinum servitium in hac Societate judi- 
caverit ; quod ut consequatur, moderatus admodum sit 
oportet in admittendi desiderio. Et ut liberior sit ab 
omni minus ordinato affectu; ubi vitii hujusmodi occasio 
esse posset (ut cum consanguineis, et amicis) ille, in quo 
aliquid pericuK hujusmodi timeretur, examinandi officio 
non fungatur. 

5 Quicunque autem eo fungetur, in scriptis habeat quae ad 
tale officium pertinent ; quo melius et certius id posset 
praestare, quod in hac parte ad divinum servitium quae- 
ritur. 



DE ADMITTENDIS IN SOCIETATEM. 
CAP. II. 

In universum loquendo de iis, qui admittendi sunt, quo 
pluribus Dei donis naturaUbus et infusis praediti ad 
promovendum juxta Societatis institutum divinum ser- 
vitium, et quo certioribus experimentis perspecti fuerint; 
eo magis idonei erunt, ut in eam admittantur. 
Ut particulatim de his loquamur, qui in Coadjutores 
admittuntur ad res temporales, vel exteriores curandas, 
(qui plures esse non debent, quam qui necessarii sint, ad 
sublevandum Societatem in iis rebus, in quibus occupari 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS PRIMA. 



alii non possunt sine detrimento majoris boni) esse eos 
oportet (quod ad animam spectat) bonae conscientiae, 
quietos, tractabiles, amatores virtutis ac perfectionis, 
propensos ad devotionem, qui domesticis et extemis aedi- 
ficationi sint, qui sorte Marthae in Societate contenti, et 
ad ejus institutum bene affecti, eam juvare ad Dei 
gloriam exoptent. 

3 Gluod ad externa attinet; honesta specie^ sanitate, aetate, 
et viribus ad labores corporis, in Societate sufferendos 
praediti esse deberent ; et qui habere, vel certe habituri 
e^se aliquando talentum aliquod ad eam juvandam vide- 
rentur. 

4 Admittere homines difficili admodum in^enio, vel inutiles 
Congregationi, licet ipsismet non inutile foret, admitti ; 
considerantes tamen instituti nostri finem, ac agendi 
rationem ; persuademus nobis in Domino ad ipsius 
majus servitium et laudem non expedire. 

5 Qui ad hoc admitterentur, ut in rebus spiritualibus 
Societatem juvarent, considerando quid hujusmodi minis- 
terium requirat, ut animae proximorum juventiir, se- 
quentibus donis Dei ornari eos necesse est. 

6 Quod ad intellectum attinet, doctrina sana, vel apti- 
tudine ad eam addiscendam, et in rebus agendis discre- 
tione, vel certe indole boni judicii ad eam acquirendam. 

7 Quod ad memoriam, aptitudine ad percipiendum, et 
percepta retinendum. 

8 Quod ad voluntatem, ut universae virtutis et perfectionis 
spiritualis studiosi sint, quieti, constantes, strenui in iis, 
quae ad divinum servitium aggrediuntur ; quique Zelo 
accensi sint pro animarum salute ; et ea de causa ad 
nostrum institutum (quod ad illas juvandas et dispo- 
nendas ad ultimi sui finis de manu Dei creatoris nostri 
ac Domini consecutionem recta tendit) sint affecti. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



10 CONSTITUTIONUM 

9 In exterioribus exoptanda est sermonis facultas ad 
agendum cum proximis pernecessaria. 

10 Species honesta^ quae aedificationi esse solet iis, quibus 
cum agitur. 

11 Bona valetudo, ac vires, quibus ferre possit instituti 
nostri labores. 

1 2 JEtas, quae ad ea quae dicta sunt, conveniat, quae quidem, 
ut admittantur ad Probationem, excedere debet Decimum 
quartum annum ; ut ad Professionem vero, Vigesimum 
quintum. 

13 Dona externa, nobilitatis, divitiarum, existimationis, et 
similia ut non satis sunt, si desint alia; ita, cum sup- 
petent, non erunt necessaria : quatenus tamen ad aedifi- 
cationem faciunt^ reddunt magis idoneos, ut admittantur, 
qui sine ipsis alioqui essent idonei propter dotes alias 
praedictas ; in quibus quo magis praecelluerit qui admitti 
cupit, eo magis erit ad hanc Societatem aptus ad Dei 
Domini nostri gloriam ; quo vero minus erit in eo quod 
excellat; eo minus erit idoneus. Quae tamen mensura 
omnibus in rebus teneri debeat, unctio sancta divinae 
Sapientiae eos docebit, qui id curae ad ejus obsequium 
ac laudem uberiorem susceperunt. 



DE IIS, QUiE IMPEDIUNT, NE QUIS IN SOCIETATEM 

ADMITTATUR. 

CAP. III. 

1 QuANVis Charitas et Zelus animarum, in quo se Societas 
haec exercet juxta instituti sui finem^ omnia hominum 
genera complectatur^ ut eorum serviat spirituaK utilitati, 
ac ad beatitudinem consequendam in Domino juvet ; ut 
tamen in Societatis ipsius corpus admittat, amplecti non 
debet, ut dictum est, nisi quos judicabit ad propositum 
Soeietatis finem utiles fore. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS PRIMA. 11 

2 Ex impedimentis ad admissionem nonnulla eos,qui vellent 
ingredi, omnino excludunt: quia rationes multae et graves, 
nos ad id in Domino movent. Ea vero hujusmodi sunt. 

3 Aliquando a gremio sanctae Ecclesiae abscessisse, Fidem 
abnegando inter infideles, vel incidendo in errores contra 
eam, in quibus reprobatus fuerit per publicam sen- 
tentiam : vel se more Scismatorum ab Ecclesiae unitate 
sejunxisse. 

4 Perpetrasse homicidium : vel esse propter enormia pec- 
cata infamem. 

5 Assumpsisse Religionis habitum : vel Eremitam ali- 
quando cum vestitu monachah fuisse. 

6 Matrimonii \Tinculo, vel servitutis legitimae Ugatum esse. 

7 Capitis infirmitatem pati, unde accidat obscurari, et 
parum sanum esse judicium ; vel si notabilem habeat ad 
illud dispositionem ; ut in Examine fusius tractatiu*. 

8 Caetera impedimenta quanvis sigillatim accepta a Socie- 
tate non omnino excludant, reddunt tamen minus ido- 
neum eum, qui admitti exoptat ; et posset tanti momenti 
esse defectus ; ut e servitio Dei non esset futimim, cum 
eo quenquam admitti. 

9 Impedimenta autem haec secundaria, de quibus modo 
est sermo, hujusmodi sunt. Quod ad interiora attinet, 
passiones vel affectus, qui domari non posse videantur ; 
vel peccatorum habitus, de quibus non adeo magna emen- 
datio speretur. 

10 Intentio minus recta, quam par esset, ad ReUgionis in- 
gressum ; ut quae cum humano aUquo fine sit admixta. 

1 1 Inconstantia, vel remissio animi notabilis, ex qua qui de 
ingressu agit, inutiUs credatur ad Societatis munera 
obeunda. 

12 Indiscretae devotiones, quae saepe in causa esse solent, ut 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



12 CONSTITUTIONUM 

aliquis in illusiones Daemonis, et non exigui momenti 
errores incidat. 

13 Litterarum ignorantia; vel ingenii, aut memoriae, ad 
eas addiscendas, vel linguae ad explicandum defectus, in 
illis, qui prae se ferunt intentionem vel desiderium ul- 
terius progrediendi, quam solent Coadjutores temporales. 

14 Judicii defectus, et notabilis in proprio sensu obduratio ; 
quae Congregationibus multum solet facessere negotii. 

15 In exteriori homine, defectus in integritate corporis, 
morbus, debilitas, vel notabilis deformitas. ^Etas valde 
tenera, vel plus satis provecta. ^s alienum : vel civiles 
obligationes. 

16 Quo hujusmodi defectibus quis magis est obnoxius, eo 
minus est idoneus, ut Deo Domino nostro in hac Socie- 
tate ad animarum auxilium serviat : et qui facultatem 
habet admittendi, videat, ne charitatis particularis af- 
fectus universali praevaleat ; quae ut magis ad gloriam et 
honorem Christi Domini nostri facit^ ita semper praeferri 
debet. 



DE MODO ADMITTENDI. 

CAP. IV. 

QuiA nobis in Domino persuademus, ad hoc, ut divina et 
summa Majestas ministerio hujus minimae Societatis uti 
dignetur, multum referre, ut qui ad eam admittuntur, 
non solum diu probentur antequam in ejus corpus co- 
optentur, veriim etiam ut valde noti sint, antequam ad 
Probationem eam admittantur, quae fit in communi con- 
victu cum domesticis : expedit habitationem aliquam 
nostrae communi conjunctam designari, ubi, qui ad 
Probationem admittuntur, hospitum more Duodecim dies, 
vel usque ad Viginti, et amplius, prout Superiori vide- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS PRIMA. 13 

bitur^ diversentur ; ut id temporis de iis, quae pertinent 
ad Societatem, illi certiores reddantur ; et Societas 
eosdem plenius in Domino nostro cognoscat. 
In hanc domum, quae primae Probationis dicitur, facilius 
admitti possunt, qui id optant ; si clare ad Dei et 
Domini nostri JESU Christi obsequium idonei in hac 
Societate esse viderentur ; et contra, qui clare non esse 
tales cemerentur, consilio (et siquid aliud charitas sug- 
gerit) adjuti, ut ahbi Deo ac Domino nostro servire 
ciwent, statim dimitti poterunt. 

Quod si res non esset Societati tam clara, quam opor- 
teret ; postquam qui admitti cupit, voluntatem sUam 
proposuerit, et de primis impedimentis decenter interro- 
gatus fuerit, summam nostri instituti, probationesque ac 
difficultatesj quae in ea sunt, intellexerit ; quanvis effica- 
citer desiderare videatur in Societatem admitti, ut in ea 
perpetuo vivat (quod quidem si deesset, ut plurimum 
nemo ad Probationem admitti deberet) responsum tamen, 
ac deUberatio ultima ahquandiu differatur ; ut eo tem- 
pore res melius considerari, et Deo commendari possit, 
ac diKgentia conveniens adhiberi ; ut magis cognoscatur, 
et ut de ejus constantia periculum fiat. Quantum autem 
differri oporteat, et quae diligentia sit adhibenda, pru- 
denti considerationi iUius, qui admittendi facultatem 
habet reUnquendum est; qui semper quod Deo magis 
placere poterit, intuebitur. 

i Postquam in Domino statuetur, quod ad Probationem 
aUquem admitti conveniat; soUtis vestimentis indutus, 
aut pro cujusque devotione (nm aliud Superiori vide- 
bitur) ingredi poterit, et in praedicta Probationis Domo, 
seu in loco ad id destinato ut hospes constituetur ; ac 
postridie, quomodo eo in loco se gerere debeat, ei de- 
clarabitur, ac nominatim, ne verbo, aut scripto [nisi 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



14 CONSTITUTIONUM 

Superiori aliqua de causa non levis momenti aliud vide- 
tur) cum externis, vel domesticis agat, praeterquam cum 
iis, qui ad id designati a Superiore fuerint. Gluod fit, ut 
liberius secum et cum Deo perpendat vocationem suam, 
ac propositum divinae ac summae Majestati in hac Socie- 
tate serviendi. 

5 Elapsis duobus aut tribus diebus post ingressum in 
domum Probationis, examinari accuratius incipiat, prout 
in officio Examinatoris declaratur : et relinquatur ei 
scriptum Examen, ut solus id maturius consideret ; 
postea eidem ostendantur Diplomata Apostolica ; ac 
Constitutiones, et Regulae in Societate ac domo, quam 
ingreditur, observandae ; et qui litteris operam dederunt, 
de singulis facultatibus, in quibus versati sunt, singulas 
praelegant lectiones, et id coram eis, qui a Superiore ad 
ejus talentum in doctrina, et proponendi modo cognos- 
cendum sunt constituti. 

6 Eodem hoc tempore primae Probationis conscientiam 
suam Superiori, vel ei, quem ipse delegaverit, aperiet 
{nisi id negotii cum Superioris consensu in aliud tempus 
differretur) et generaliter confitebitur (si nondum id 
fecisset) et illi quidem Confessario, qui a Superiore 

fuerit ad id destinatus. Et ciim in libro ad id designato 
scriptum fuerit, et manu ejus subscriptum, quicquid 
domum tulit, et ejus consensus ad observanda omnia ei 
proposita ; postremo post reconciliationem accepto sanc- 
tissimo Eucharistiae Sacramento, ingredietur in domum 
communis habitationis ; ubi cum aliis versari, et in 
secunda Probatione diutius exerceri solent novitii. 

7 Gluod dictum est de iis, qui tunc primum ad Societatem 
admittuntur, bona ex parte cum illis observabitur, qui a 
studiis, aut aUis locis Societatis, ubi diligenter examinati 
non fuerint, veniunt ; qui quidem non, ut Professi, vel 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SECUNDA. 15 

Coadjutores formati, in corpus Societatis admissi simt ; 
ut quo majori cum luce procedetur, eo quisque con- 
stantior in sua vocatione maneat ; et ipsa etiam Societas 
melius discernat, an conveniat ad majorem laudem, et 
gloriam Dei et Domini nostri illum apud se retinere. 



SECUNDA PARS 

qiuB ad eos dimittendos pertinet^ qui ad Probationem admissi 
fueranty et parum apti ad Societatem inveniuntur. 



QUI DIMITTI POSSUNT, ET PER QUOS. 

CAP. I. 

1 TTT autem ad propositum huic societati finem divini 

^^ obsequii et auxilii animarum convenit conservari, et 
numero augeri operarios idoneos ac utiles ad Dei opus 
promovendum ; ita dimitti eos oportet, qui tales non 
fuerint; et successu temporis deprehendatur, vel quod 
non sit eorum vocatio, vel quod ad commime bonum 
Societatis non conveniat, ut in ea maneant. Sed tamen 
ut non nimis faciles esse ad admittendum, ita neque ad 
dimittendum imo miniis oportet : sed mature omnino et 
considerate in Domino procedendum est. Et quanvis 
causas ad dimissionem dignas eo graviores esse oportet, 
quo quis arctius Societatis corpori conjunctus est ; 
quantumhbet tamen quisque sit conjunctus, in quibus- 
dam casibus separari ab ea posset, ac deberet : ut se- 
quenti capite videbitur. 

2 Dimittendi facultas in primis ad universam Societatem 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



16 CONSTITUTIONUM 

pertinet, quando in Congregationem generalem con- 
veniret : Eadem erit penes Praepositum generalem in 
omnibus^ praeterquam si quid ad ipsius personam per- 
tineret. Penes reliquos ex Societate tantum erit hujus 
facultatis, quantum eis a capite collatum fuerit. Prae- 
positis tamen Provincialibus amplam satis conferri ex- 
pediet, ac debita proportione etiam Praepositis Localibus, 
et Rectoribus Collegiorum^ quibus videbitur esse con- 
ferenda; ut eo melius in toto Societatis corpore sub- 
ordinatio sanctce Obedientice servetur, quo clarius intelli- 
gent inferiores se a suis immediate Superioribus pendere, 
et quod conveniat plurimum, imo necesse sit in omnibus 
eis subesse propter Christum Dominum nostrum. 



DE CAUSIS, PROPTER QUAS DIMITTI ALI- 
QUEM CONVENIAT. 

CAP. II. 

1 Causas eas^ quae ad aliquem dimittendum sufficiant, 
ponderare coram Domino debebit prudens charitas Su- 
perioris, qui hujusmodi facultatem habuerit; sed gene- 
ratim loquendo, quatuor eorum genera fore videntur. 

2 Primum, si in Domino judicaretur, contra ipsius ho- 
norem et gloriam fore, quod is in hac Societate maneret, 
qui videatur in quibusdam pravis affectibus aut vitiis, 
quae divinam offendunt Majestatem, corrigi non posse; 
quae eo minus tolerari deberent, quo graviora essent, et 
plus culpae haberent; licet aliis nullum offendiculum 
(quod manifesta non essent) praeberent. 

3 Alterum est, si existimaretur in Domino, ahquem re- 
tinere, contra Societatis bonum fore, quod cum univer- 
sale sit, haud dubie bono particulari aUcujus praeferri ab 
eo debet, qui syncere divinum obsequium quaerit. Tale 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SECUNDA. 17 

quid esset, si in Probationum decursu aliqua impedi- 
menta, vel insignes defectus in Examine suppressi 
detegerentur ; vel si experimento comperiretur, valde 
inutilem fore eum, et per quem praepedienda magis, 
quam adjuvanda esset Societas, propter ejus insignem 
ad quaevis ejus munera ineptitudinem, et multo magis 
dimitti oporteret^ si Societati damnum allaturus malo 
vitae exemplo videatur, ac praecipue si inquietm esset^ et 
verbis aut actibus offendiculum aliis praeberet. Hoc 
enim tolerare, charitatis non esset, sed vitii contrarii in 
eo quidem, qui tenetur conservare quietem, et bonum 
statum Societatis sibi commissae. 

4 Tertium, si judicaretur, id fore contra Societatis, ac 
simul ipsius dimittendae personae bonum ; quod ex parte 
corporis posset accidere, si tempore Probationis in 
aliquo morbus, aut debilitas hujusmodi cemeretur, cum 
qua eum non posse progredi in laboribus instituto 
nostro, ac procedendi modo convenientibus ad Deo 
serviendum videretur : ex parte rerum animi, quando, 
qui ad probationem admissus fuit, se componere ad 
vitam sub Obedientia et juxta modum procedendi Socie- 
tatis ducendam non posset; quod nequeat, vel nolit 
proprium suum senmm aut judidum infringere ; vel 
propter alia impedimenta, quae a natura, vel a consue- 
tudine permanarent. 

5 Quartum^ si cerneretur id fore contra bonum aliorum, 
qui de Societate non sunt : Ut si detegeretur vinculum 
matrimonii, vel servitutis legitimae, vel aes alienum 
magni momenti : quibus in rebus, dum initio examina- 
retur, veritatem subticuisset. Gluaevis harum quatuor 
causarum satis esse videtur, ut Deo gratius fore judi- 
cemus, honeste dimitti eum, in quo locum habuerint, 
quam imprudentem in eo retinendo charitatem exercere. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



18 CONSTITUTIONUM 



DE MOOO DIMITTENDI. 
CAP. III. 

1 CuM iis, qui dimittendi erunt, observari eum modum 
conveniet, qui in conspectu Dei dimittenti, dimisso^ et 
aliis domesticis, et externis maxime satisfaciat. Quod 
attinet ad dimittentem ob causas superius dictas tria 
observentur. 

2 Primum est, ut oret ipse Dominum, et domi orari ea 
intentione curet (quanvis particularia non intelligantur) 
ut significare Dominus noster dignetur ea in re, de qua 
agitur, suam sanctissimam voluntatem. 

3 Alterum, ut conferat cum aliquibus^ seu aliquo ex 
domesticis, qui ad hoc negotium aptiores videantur ; et 
audiat^ quid iUi sentiant. 

4 Tertium, ut omnem exuendo affectum, et majori Dei 
gloria prae oculis constituta, ac communis boni, tum 
etiam (quoad ejus fieri poterit) particularis ratione habita, 
expendat hinc inde causas^ et statuat, an dimittere 
debeat, nec ne. 

5 Quod ad dimissum attinet, tria itidem observentur. 
Primum exterius; ut recedat ex domo, quantum fieri 
possit, sine dedecore vel ignominia, ac secum omnia sua 
ferat. 

6 Alterum interius ; ut eum dimittendum Superior curet, 
conservata, quantum fieri potest, charitate ac bene- 
volentia mutua erga domum, et quanta cum consolatione 
in Domino fieri poterit. 

7 Tertium ; ut circa statum vitae studeat eum dirigere ut 
aliquam convenientem viam serviendi Deo ineat, vel 
in ReUgione, vel extra eam ; prout divinae voluntati con- 
venientius fore videbitur. Demum consilio et oratione, 
et si quid aliud charitas dederit, juvare curet. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SECUNDA. 19 

8 Ut satisfiat aliis domesticis, et externis, tria etiam ob- 
serventm*. 

Primmn est, ut sedulo cmetm", ne quid pertmbationis in 
alicujus animo propter dimissionem maneat, ratione 
reddita, quantmn satis erit, quibus reddi opus sit : ab- 
stinendo, quantum fieri poterit, a defectibus, qui publici 
non fuerint, declarandis ; quanvis in eo, qui dimittitur, 
nonnulli deprehensi fuissent. 

9 Alterum ; ut studeatur, ne male affecti maneant^ erga 
dimissum, et quantum fieri possit, ne de eo male sen- 
tiant ; sed potius ejus vicem doleant, et in Christo eum 
diligant^ ac divinae Majestati in suis orationibus^ ut eum 
dirigere, et ei Misericordiam impendere dignetm* com- 
mendent. 

10 Tertium, ut detur opera, ut ejus exemplo juventur, si 
qui minori cum aedificatione, quam par esset domi ver- 
santur; et timeant, ne sibi tantundem accidat, si non 
annitantur proficere. Et externi itidem, quibus id in- 
notuerit, aedificationem accipiant, quod domi non tole- 
rentur, quos tolerari ad Dei gloriam non convenit. 



QUOMODO SE GERAT SOCIETAS CUM IIS, QUI SUA SPONTE 
RECEDERENT, VEL aUOS IPSA DIMITTERET. 

CAP. IV. 

1 Qui dimittuntur, vel injussi discedunt ab aliquo loco in 
alium ejusdem Societatis^ videntur nobis in Domino 
admittendi non esse^ nisi prius qui dimisit, vel qui loco 
praeest^ unde injussus discessit, vel alioqui Generalis^ aut 
qui ejus vices gerit, admonitus suum praestiterit as- 
sensum ; ne defectus cognitionis rerum^ aut perso- 
narum alicujus erroris in Dei offensam causa sit. 

2 Communicationem autem facultatum, aut gratiarum. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



20 CONSTITUTIONUM 

quee iis ut Societatis membris concessae fuerant, simul 
atque membra esse desierint, constat cessare. 

3 Declaretur iis, qui dimittuntur, quod absoluti maneant 
a votis simplicibus, si ea juxta formulam Societati con- 
suetam (quae in quinta parte videbitur) emiserint ; quod- 
que nulla alia dispensatione indigeant. 

4 Ad eos reducendos, qui sine licentia recederent, si prius 
parum idonei ad Societatem habebantiu', nulla diligentia 
opus erit ; sed potius dirigantiu* ad aliud institutum, ubi 
Deo servire possint^ rekuvatis votis, si ea emiserint, ut 
omnes scrupuli eis eximantiu*. 

5 Si hujusmodi essent, ut Deo gratum fore videretur eos 
iion sic reUnquere, praecipue, si ex ahqua vehementi 
tentatione, aut ab aliis decepti egressi videantur, dili- 
gentia adhiberi ad eos reducendos poterit ; et privilegiis 
ad negotium hujusmodi concessis a sede ApostoUca, 
quantum Superiori in Dojnino videbitiu", uti licebit. Et 
ciim aliquis horum sic reductus esset, committetur pru- 
dentiae ejusdem Superioris ; ut videat, num satisfactione 
aliqua opus sit, an meUus omnino censeat, in spiritu 
mansuetudinis procedere; qua in re et ejus, qui reductus 
est, bonum, et aedificatio domesticorum spectanda est. 

6 Si quis sponte sua ad CoUegium, vel domum, unde 
sine facultate recesserat, rediret, et aUoqui idoneus ad 
Deo serviendum in ea judicaretur; considerandum erit, an 
veram perseverandi voluntatem afferat, et an sit paratus 
ad quamvis satisfactionem et probationem : quod si secus 
esset, ut qui verae poenitentiae signa non ostendit^ admitti 
non merebitur, 

7 Si, qui fuit merito dimissus^ ad eandem domum, unde 
dimissus est, rediret, ad quamvis satisfactionem paratus ; 
Si adhuc eaedem rationes, propter quas fuit dimissus, 

perspicuum est, non esse admittendum: Si 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TERTIA. 21 

non manerent, et qui dimisit, judicaret Deo gratum 
fdre, ut denuo reciperetur in eandem, vel aliam domum ; 
admoneat Generalem, vel Provincialem Praepositum ; et 
quod ab eo praescriptum fuerit, exequatur. 
8 Sive recesserit sponte sua, sive dimissus qui redit ; si 
admittatur, denuo examinari debet, et generalem con- 
fessionem ipso in ingressu ab ultima, quam domi fecit, 
inchoando instituere ; et aliis probationibus et experi- 
mentis exercebitur : prout Superiori, habita ratione aedi- 
ficatioriis universalis et particularis, ad gloriam Dei 
videbitur. 



TERTIA PARS, 

de iis conservandisy et promovendis^ qui in probatione manent. 



DE CONSERVATIONE IN IIS, QUM AD ANIMAM ET 
PROFECTUM IN VIRTUTIBUS PERTINENT. 

CAP. I. 

1 TTT in iis admittendis, quos ad nostrum institutum 
^^ vocat Deus talentum ad id conveniens concedendo; 
et in dimittendis illis, qui, cum eo careant, se a divina 
sapientia non esse vocatos ostendunt ; consideranda 
sunt^ quae superius attigimus : ita in eis conservandis 
in sua vocatione, qui retinentur et probantur in domibus 
et CoUegiis, et in eisdem juvandis, ut sic proficiant in 
via Dei spiritu et virtutibus, ut sanitatis et virium cor- 
poris, quae ad laborandum in vinea Domini necessariae 
simt, ratio habeatur ; consideratione ac providentia 

c 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



22 CONSTITUTIONUM 

debita opus est : et ita agetur primo loco quidem dc iis, 
quae ad animam ; secundo de iis, quae ad corpus per- 
tinent. 

2 Quod ad animam attinet^ cum tanti referat, eos, qui in 
probationibus versantur, ab omnibus imperfectionibus 
et quibusvis impedimentis majoris spiritualis profectus 
removere ; multum ad id confert, omnem communica- 
tionem per verba, et scripta ut abjiciant cimi iis, qui in 
proposito sibi instituto intepescendi causa esse possent, 
et ut in via spirituali incedendo cum iis duntaxat per- 
sonis, et iis de rebus agant, quae juvent in divino 
obsequio ad id consequendum, quod in ingressu Socie- 
tatis sibi ut scopum praefigebant. 

3 Eadem de causa egredi domo non debent, nisi quando, 
et cum quo socio Superiori visum fuerit. Nec domi hi 
cum illis libere pro suo arbitratu colloquantur, sed cum 
iis tantum, qui a Superiore praescripti fuerint ; quorum 
exemplo et spiritualibus coUoquiis aedificationem ac- 
cipiant, non autem offensionem, et proficiant in Domino. 

4 Omnes diligentissime curent portas sensuum suorum 
(oculorum praecipue, aurium, et linguae) ab omni intem- 
perantia vel vitio custodire, ac se in pace et vera humili- 
tate intema conservare, et eam in silentio, ciim id 
observandum est; cum autem loquendum in circuu- 
spcctione et aedificatione verborum, et modestia vultus, 
ac decore sive gravitate incessus motuumque omnium 
sine uUo impatientiae aut superbiae signo exhibere; in 
omnibus procurando atque optando potiores partes aliis 
deferre, omnes in animo suo tanquam sibi Superiores 
ducendo, et exterius honorem ac reverentiam, quam 
exigit cujusque status, cum simplicitate et moderatione 
reUgiosa cxhibcndo : atque ita fiat^ ut sc mutuo con- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TERTIA. 23 

siderantes, in devotione crescant ; Deumque Dominum 
nostrum laudent, quem quisque in alio, ut in illius 
imagine^ agnoscere studeat. 

5 In refectione corporis curandum est, ut temperantia, 
modestia^ et decentia interius, et exterius in omnibus 
observetur, Praemittatur benedictio, et sequatur actio 
gratiarum, quas omnes agere debent cum ea, quae par 
est, devotione et reverentia. Et dum corpus edendo 
reficitur ; sua etiam animis refectio praebeatur libro 
aliquo pio potius, quam difficili, quem capere, et e quo 
omnes juvari possint legendo ; vel id temporis aliquis^ 
cui a Superiore id injungetur, concionabitur ; vel aliquid 
simile ad Dei gloriam fiet. 

6 Omnes quandiu corpore bene valent, in spiritualibus vel 
exterioribus rebus habeant in quo occupentur. Et, qui 
officium vel ministerium aliquod certum habent^ ut de 
auxiUo providendum est eis, si sit necessarium ; ita cum 
vacant, aUis rebus occupari deberent ; ne otium malorum 
omnium origo, quoad ejus fieri possit^ domi uostrae locum 
habeat. 

7 Ut experiri incipiant sanctiB Pauperfafis virtutem, doce- 
antiu" omnes, quod nuUa re tanquam propria uti debeant; 
quanvis necesse non sit probationis tempore possessione 
bonorum suorum se abdicare; nisi id Superior post elap- 
sum primum annum juberet judicans in hujusmodi bonis 
tentationum occasionem et minus proficiendi in spiritu 
habere aUquem, ut qui iUis adhaereat aUquo immoderato 
amore vel confidentia ; et tunc qui se exuit bonis suis, 
sequatur Christi consiUa: pro sua tamen devotione adhoc 
potius, quam iUud opus dispensare bona sua, vel eorum 
partem poterit ; prout inteUexerit ad divinum benepla- 
citum magis convenire ; ut in Examinc dictum est. 

8 InteUigant etiam quod mutuo dare, vel accipere, vel 

c 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



24 CONSTITUTIONUM 

dispensare quicquam de iis, quae domi sunt^ minime 
possunt^ nisi Superior conscius consensum praestiterit. 
9 Glui in ingressu ipso, vel post ingressum ad Obedientiam 
motus sua devotione, vellet bona sua vel eorum partem 
in Societatis subsidium dispensare ; haud dubie opus 
faceret majoris perfectionis^ alienationis^ et abnegationis 
universi amoris proprii non descendendo tenero quodam 
affectu ad particularia loca, nec juxta illum sua bona 
huic potius, quam illi applicando: quin potius exoptando 
majus et universaUus bonum Societatis (quae tota ad 
majorem Dei gloriam, ac universale bonum, et utiUtatem 
animarum instituta est) hoc judicium ei reUnquat, qui 
ejus universae curam habet, num appUcari huic loco 
potius, quam iUi in eadem Provincia debeat : quando- 
quidem iUe meUus, quam quisquam aUus inteUigere 
potest, quid maxime conveniat, et quid maxime urgeat 
in omnibus ejus locis, ratione habita Regum, Principum^ 
ac aUorum Potentatuum ; ne eis causa uUa offensionis 
detur; sed ad majorem aedificationem omnium, et spi- 
ritualem utiUtatem animarum, et gloriam Dei omnia 
cedant. 

10 Doceantur quomodo ab iUusionibus Daemonis in suis 
spirituaUbus exercitationibus caveant, et quomodo se 
contra omnes tentationes tueantur : simul rationes 
sciant^ quam fieri potest, diUgentissime conquisitas, 
quibus et ad superandas tentationes utantur, et ad 
veras soUdasque virtutes consequendas insistant ; sive 
plures adsint visitationes spirituales, sive pauciores : 
curent vero semper in via divini servitii progressum 
facere. 

11 Utantur quotidie conscientiae suae examinatione consueta, 
et octavo quoque die saltem ad Confessionis et Com- 
munionis sacramenta accedant ; nisi aUqua de causa 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TERTIA. 25 

aliud Superiori videretur: et unus omnium sit Con- 
fessarius ab eodem Superiore constitutus, quod si fieri 
non poterit, quisque certe suum stabilem habeat Con- 
fessarium, cui suam conscientiam prorsus aperiat. Qui 
quidem Confessarius non ignoret, qui casm Superiori 
reserventur. Illi autem reservabuntur, quos ab eo cog- 
nosci necessarium videbitur, aut valde conveniens ; quo 
melius et remedium adhibere possit, et suae curae com- 
missos praeservare ab omnibus, quae nocitura sunt. 
12 Perutile erit, esse domi aliquem virum fidelem et in 
rebus spirituaKbus sufficienter versatum, qui instruat 
eos ac doceat, quomodo et interius, et exterius sese 
habere debeant juxta Societatis institutum ac religipnem, 
et ad id eos hortetur, et in memoriam redigat, et amanter 
admoneat: quem omnes qui in probatione sunt, diligant, 
ad quem in suis tentationibus confugiant, cui confidenter 
sua omnia detegant, et a quo consolationem et auxilium 
in omnibus sperent in Domino : et admoneantiu*^ quod 
nullam debeant celare tentationem, quam huic, vel Con- 
fessario, vel Superiori non aperiant, imo vero totam 
animam suam illis integr^ manifestam esse^ pergratum 
habeant : nec solum defectus aperiant, sed etiam poeni- 
tentias, vel mortificationes, et devotiones, ac virtutes 
omnes, vohintate pura optantes ab illis dirigi, sicubi a 
rectitudine deflecterent, nolentes suo proprio sensu duci ; 
nisi conveniat cum judicio illorum, quos CAm^i Domini 
nostri loco habent. 

13 Antevertere oportet tentationes, adhibitis earum con- 
trariis : ut cum quis animadvertitur ad superbiam esse 
propensus, exerceri is debet in rebus abjectioribus quae 
ad humiliandum ipsum utiles futmrae videantur: et sic 
de aliis pravis animae propensionibus. 

14 Praeterea honestatis et decentiae ratione convenit, foe- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



26 CONSTITUTIONUM 

minas non ingrcdi domos nostras^ nec Collegia^ sed 
tantum ecclesias, et arma nulla nec instrumenta rerum 
vanarum domi haberi ; sed tantum ea, quae faciunt ad 
finem illum divini servitii et laudis, quem sibi prajfixit 
Societas. 

15 In correctionibus et poenitentiis injungendis qui modus 
teneri debeat, prudenti charitati Superioris, et eorum, 
quos sibi substituerit, relinquetur ; qui in eis rationem 
habebunt dispositionis personarum, et aedificationis uni- 
versalis et particularis earum ad gloriam Dei. Poeni- 
tcntias vero hujusmodi prompta voluntatc quisque ad- 
.mittere deberet cum vero emendationis et spiritualis 
profectus desiderio; etiam si propter defectum culpa 
vacantem injungerentur. 

16 Syndicus, vel censor domi constituatur : cujus erit 
officium, observare in omnibus quod ad honestatem et 
decentiam externam pertinet, ecclesiam et domum per- 
lustrando, et siquid non conveniat, adnotando, et Su- 
periori referendo, vel eundem, qui errat, commonefaci- 
endo : si id facultatis ei, ut utilius in Domino suo 
fungatur officio, tribuetur. 

17 Curent omnes ex morbis corporis, cum acciderint, fruc- 
tum aliquem capere non solum ad suam, sed etiam 
aliorum aedificationem, non impatientes aut morosos 
se exhibendo, sed potius patientiam veram habendo 
interius, et exterius prae se ferendo, ac obedientiam 
medico, et infirmorum praefccto pracstando, verbis piis et 
aedificationem facientibus utendo, quae ostendant aegri- 
tudinem ut donum de manu Creatoris ac Domini nostri 
(quandoquidem non inferius est sanitate) admitti. 

18 Idem sapiamus, idem, quoadejus fieri possit, dicamus 
omnes, juxta Apostolum. Doctrince igitur dissonantes 
non admittantur nec verbo in concionibus publicis^ nec 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TERTIA. 2? 

etiam scriptis libris ; qui quidem sine approbatione 
atque consensu Pnepositi Generalis (qui censune trium^ 
ut minimum^ doctrina ac claro judicio in ea facultate 
prtBditorum eos subjiciatj in titcem emitti non poterunt, 
Imo et judiciorum de rebus agendis diversitas, quae 
mater esse solet discordiae et inimica unionis voluntatum, 
quantum fieri potest, evitari debet : et contra unio et 
conformitas mutua diligentissime curanda, nec, quae ei 
adversantiu", permittenda sunt : quo juncti invicem 
fratemae charitatis vinculo melius et efficacius possint se 
divino obsequio, et auxilio proximorum impendere. 

19 Quia ad progressum in virtutibus faciendum multum 
confert antiquorum exemplum, quo reliqui ad eorum 
imitationem animentur ; qui praeest aliis (si aliter pecu- 
liares ob causas non judicaretiu" convenire) et omnes alii 
sacerdotes, qui ei videbuntm*, aliquando singulis annis 
officium, vel officia eorum, qui inserviimt domi, ad 
tempus aliquod obibunt, quo aliis gratius reddatur 
hujusmodi ministerium, in quo ad majus Dei servitium 
et gloriam sunt constituti. 

20 Explicetur aliquot diebus in singulis hebdomadibus 
Doctrina Christiana, ac modus bene et cmn fructu con- 
fitendi, communicandi, missam audiendi, et in eadem 
ministrandi, orandi ' itidem, meditandi, et legendi pro 
captu uniuscujusque tradatm* ; cmreturque non solum 
ut addiscant quae conveniunt, sed etiam ut memoria 
teneant, et exerceant quae didicerint : omnesque suum 
tempus rebus spiritualibus impendant, et devotioni quae- 
rendae pro mensura gratiae Dei ipsis communicatae in- 
sistant ; ad quod conferet aliqua exercitia spiritualia illis, 
qui nondum se exercuerunt in eis, vel omnia tradcre ; 
prout unicuique convenire in Domino judicabitm". 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



28 CONSTITUTIONUM 

21 Convenit omnes exerceri (si aliquem Superior non 
eximeret) in concionibus domesticis; ut praeterquam 
quod utiliter expendetur aliqua hora a prandio, ani- 
mentur et assuescant aliqua ratione (quod ad vocem et 
modum attinet et ad reliqua) ad munus exercendum ; et 
ut specimen etiam ejus talenti, quod in hoc genere 
Dominus eis communicat, praebeant ; et ut suos bonos 
conceptus ad suam et proximorum aedificationem expri- 
mant^ de iis crebro tractantes, quae ad sui abnegationem 
et in virtutibus profectum, et omnimodam perfectionem 
attinent ; ad ea se invicem exhortando, et praecipue ad 
unionem et charitatem fratemam. 

22 Magnopere conferet, devote, quoad fieri poterit, ea 
munera obire, in quibus prae caeteris exercetiu* humiUtas 
et charitas. Et in universum loquendo, quanto aliquis 
se arctius cum Deo conjunxerit, et liberaUorem erga 
summam Majestatem se praestiterit ; tanto eum in se 
largiorem experietur ; et ipse in dies magis idoneus erit 
ad gratias et dona spirtualia uberiora recipienda. 

23 Expedit in primis ad profectum, imo necessarium est, ut 
omnes perfectcB ObedientuB se dedant, Superiorem (qui- 
cunque iUe sit) tanquam Christum Dominum intuentes^ 
et intema reverentia et amore eum prosequentes ; iiec 
solum in executione externa eorum, quae injungit; in- 
tegre, prompte^ fortiter, et cum humiUtate debita^ sine 
excusationibus, et obmurmurationibus obediant, Ucet 
difficiUa et sensuaUtati repugnantia jubeat ; verum 
etiam nitantur resignationem et veram abnegationem 
proprice volnntatis et judicii habere ; velle ac sentire 
suum cum eo^ quod Superior vult et sentit in omnibus 
rebus (ubi pcccatum non cern^fretur) omnino confor- 
manteSy proposita sibi volurttate ac judido Superioris 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TSRTIA. 29 

pro regula stue voluntntis et judicii ; quo exac^tius con- 
formentur primae ac summae reguke omnis bonae volim- 
tatis et judicii^ quae est aetema bonitas^ et sapientia. 

24 Et ut magis in Obedientiae virtute se exerceant, con- 
venit, im6 etiam necessarium est, ut non solum Supe- 
riori totius Societatis vel domus^ sed etiam subordinatis 
ministris^ qui ex illo authoritatem acceperunt, in iis 
omnibus^ in quibus potestatem habent^ obediant^ et 
assuescant non intueri, quis ille sit, cui obediunt^ sed 
potius quis ille, propter quem obediunt^ qui est Christus 
Dominus. 

25 Diligant omnes Paupertatem, ut matrem, et juxta men- 
suram sanctse discretionis suis temporibus ejus effectus 
aUquos experiantur ; et, ut in Examine dictum est, post 
primum annum exactum parati sint ad temporalia bona 
distribuenda, quandocunque a Superiore injunctum id 
fuerit, et ea ratione servata, quae in Examine proposita 
fuit. 

26 Omnes rectissimam habere intentionem non soliim in 
statu vitae, veriim etiam in rebus omnibus particularibus 
enitantur, id semper in eis syncere spectantes, ut servire 
et placere divinae bonitati propter seipsam et propter 
charitatem, et eximia beneficia, quibus praevenit nos 
potius, quam timorem poenarum, vel spem praemiorum 
(quamvis hinc etiam juvari dcbeant) ut in omnibus 
quaerant Deum, exuentes se, quantum fieri potest^ amore 
omnium creaturarum; ut affectum universum in ipsarum 
Creatorem conferant, eum in omnibus amando, et omnes 
in eo juxta sanctissimam ac divinam ipsius voluntatem. 

27 Studium, in quod incumbpnt qui in domibus Societatis 
probantur, id esse debet, quod eos magis ad superius 
dictam abnegationem sui, et in virtutibus ac devotione 
profectum juvabit. Studia vero Utterarum, in univer- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



30 CONSTITUTIONUM 

sum loquendo, in domibus non erunt; nisi in quibus- 
dam, peculiaribus de causis^ dispensatione opus esse 
videretur. Collegia enim ad litteras addiscendas^ domus 
vero ad eas, quas didicerint, exercendas, vel ad prae- 
parandum earum fundamentum^ humilitatis scilicet, ac 
omnis virtutis in iis, qui operam eis sunt daturi, com- 
paratae sunt. 
28 Sit aKquis domi, qui singulis hebdomadis, vel certe 
decimo quinto quoque die, haec et similia omnibus in 
memoriam redigat; vel iUi haec legere teneantur: ne pro 
nostrae fragilis naturae conditione obliti ab eorum exe- 
cutione cessent. Et aKquoties singulis annis omnes a 
Superiore sibi poenitentias injungi propter defectum ob- 
servationis Regularum petant ; ut haec cura indicium sit 
illius^ quam de suo profectu spirituali in via Dei quisque 
habere debet. 



DE CONSERVATIONE CORPOBIS. 

CAP. II. 

1 Ut nimia solicitudo in iis, quae ad corpus pertinent, 
reprehensibilis est; ita cura moderata tuendae, ad di- 
vinum obsequium valetudinis aq virium corporis laude 
digna^ et ab omnibus adhibenda est : et ea de causa, 
cum animadverterint aliquid sibi nocere, vel quid alium 
necessarium esse circa victum, vestitum, habitationem, 
ofEciorum exercitationem, et sic de aliis rebus, admo- 
neant omnes ea de re Superiorem, vel quem ad id 
Superior constituerit, duo interim observantes : Primum, 
ut antequam ad eum quid referant, se ad orandum 
recipiant, et post orationem, si senserint rem deferendam 
ad Superiorem, id faciant ; Alterum, ut ciim verbo aut 

. scripto brevi (ne excidat memoria) Superiori rem ex- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS TERTIA. 31 

posuerint, ei totam curam rei expositae relinquant : et 
quicquid ille statuerit, optimum ducant ; nec contendere 
aut urgere per se vel alium (sive concedatur quod petitur, 
sive non) pergant : quandoquidem sibi persuadere de- 
bent, id magis expedire ad divinum bene-placitum ac 
suum majus bonum, quod Superiori, re intellecta, in 
Domino visum fuerit. 

2 Statuatur tempus edendi, cubandi, surgendi^ quod com- 
muniter omnes observent. 

3 In iis, quae ad victum, vestitum, et habitationem, et alia 
corpori necessaria pertinent, curetur cum divino auxilio ; 
ut quanvis sit, in quo probetur virtus, et sui ipsius ab- 
negatio, non desit tamen, quo sustentetur natura, et ad 
divinum obsequium laudemque conservetur, habita con- 
venienti ratione personarum in Domino. 

4 Ut non expedit tanto labore corporali quenquam onerari, 
ut spiritus obruatur, et corpus detrimentum patiatur; 
ita aliqua corporalis exercitatio, quae utrunque juvet, 
omnibus communiter convenit, etiam iUis, qui mentali- 
bus exercitiis debent insistere; quae quidem extemis 
interrumpi deberent, et non continuari, nec sine mensura 
discretionis assumi. 

5 Corporis castigatio immoderata esse non debet, nec in- 
discreta in vigiUis et abstinentiis, et aliis poenitentiis ac 
laboribus externis ; quae et nocumentum afferre, et ma- 
jora bona impcdire solent. Ideo suo Confessario detegi 
ab unoquoque convenit quicquid in hac parte faciat; 
qui si judicat excedi mensuram, aut perte dubitat de 
excessu, illud ad Superiorem remittat. Haec autem 
omnia eo fiunt ; ut clarius procedatur, et in animis cor- 
poribusque nostris Deo Domino nostro major gloria 
deferatur. 

6 Sit aliquis domi, qui priesit in iis, quae ad corporis 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



32 CONSTITUTIONUM 

bonam valetudinem pertinent tum conservandam in 
sanis et quidem in iis praesertim^ qui ex aetate^ vel aliis 
de causis sunt debiliores^ tum restituendam in segro- 
tantibus : cui debent omnes^ si male se habere senserint, 
id referre; ut de remedio, prout charitas exigit, con- 
venienti provideatur. 
7 In iis, quae pertinent ad rerum temporalium conserva- 
tionem, prseter curam illam, quam omnibus charitas et 
ratio imponit, sequum erit^ alicui demandari hoc munus, 
ut tanquam bona Domini nostri Jesu Christi propria ea 
curet. Ad alias etiam ftinctiones^ et eas praecipue, quae 
honestius domi^ quam foris fiimt, curandum est, ut 
officialium necessarius numerus constituatur ; et hujus- 
modi officia Coadjutores in rebus extemis^ si ea ignorant, 
addiscant^ omnia ad majorem gloriam Dei Creatoris et 
Domini nostri semper dirigendo. 



QUARTA PARS; 

de iis, qui in Societate retinentuTy instruendis in litteris et 
aliiSf qv4B ad proximos juvandos conferunt. 



PROOEMIUM. 
1 /^UM scopus, ad quem Societas recta tendit, sit, 
\^ suas ac proximorum animas ad finem ultimum con- 
sequendum, ad quem creatae fuerunt, juvare ; cumque 
ad id praeter vitae exemplum, doctrina et modus eam 
proponendi sint necessaria ; postquam in iis, qui ad- 
missi sunt ad probationem, jactum esse videbitur abne- 
gationis propriae et profectus in virtutibus necessarii 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 33 

bonum fundamentum ; de litterarum sedificio et modo 
eis utendi agendum erit ; quo juvare possint ad magis 
cognoscendum magisque serviendum Deo Creatori ac 
Domino nostro. Ad hoc Collegia, et aliquando etiam 
Universitates, vel Studia generalia Societas amplectitur ; 
in quibus qui bonum sui specimen in domibus proba- 
tionum praebuerunt, nec tamen doctrina ad nostrum 
institutum necessaria satis instructi accesserunt, in ea 
et in aliis rebus, quae ad juvandas animas conferunt, 
instruantur. Prius ergo de iis^ quae ad Collegia; Deinde 
de iis, quae ad Studia generalia pertinent^ dicetur, cum 
eo favore, quem divina Sapientia ad majorem gloriam 
laudemque suam nobis dare dignabitur. 



DE MEMORIA HABENDA FUNDATORUM, ET BENE DE 
COLLEOIIS MERITORUM. 

CAP. I. 

QUONIAM id maxime rationi consentaneum vide- 
tur, ut, quantum in nobis situm sit, eorum a nobis 
pietati ac beneficentiae satisfiat, quibus divina bo- 
nitas ad fundationem ac dotationem Collegiorum utitur 
administris: Primiim in quovis nostrae Societatis Col- 
legio perpetuo singulis hebdomadibus Missae semel pro 
ejus Fimdatore et benefactoribus vivis et mortuis cele- 
brentur. 

Initio item cujusque mensis omnes sacerdotes, qui in 
Collegio fuerint, pro eisdem semel ofFerre idem sacri- 
ficium perpetuo debent. Singulis insuper annis eo die, 
quo Collegii cujusque possessio Societati tradita est, 
cum solennitate Missa pro fundatore et benefactoribus 
celebretur : et id temporis in eodem CoUegio quicunque 
sacerdotes adfuerint, eodem sua referent sacrificia. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



34 CONSTITUTIONUM 

3 Eodem die candela cerea Fundatori offeratur, aut uni ex 
suis, qui ipsi sit cognatione proxime conjunctus, aut illi 
demum, quem ipse Fundator designaverit : in qua 

• candela armorum Fundatoris, aut devotionis insignia 
extent. Illa vero testabitur Societas, quam Fundatori 
in Domino debet^ gratitudinem. 

4 Ciim primum Societas in Collegii alicujus possessionem 
venerit; Praepositus Generalis curet indici per univer- 
sam Societatem, ut quilibet Sacerdos ter sacrum faciat 
pro superstite Fundatore ipsius Collegii ac benefactori- 
bus ; ut illos sua benignitate Dominus in rebus omnibus 
dirigat^ et suis donis semper augeat. Rursus cum ex hac 
vlta illi excesserint, curabit idem Praepositus Generalis, 
ubi primum resciverit^ ut per totam Societatem singuli 
Sacerdotes ter Sacrum pro animabus illorum faciant. 
Quoties autem dictum est, Missas esse a Sacerdotibus 
celebrandas ; Caeteri omnes^ qui in Collegiis degunt, ac 
sacerdotes non sunt^ ad eandem illam intentionem orare 
debent ; quandoquidem ejusdem gratitudinis nomine 
ubique obligantur in Domino. 

5 Fundatores praeterea ac benefactores CoUegiorum par- 
ticipes efflciuntur omnium bonorum operumy quae tum 
in ipsis CoUegiis^ tum in reliqua Societate Dei gratia 
fiunt. 

6 In universum autem tum Fundatoribus, tum etiam ipso- 
rum necessanis et quoad vivunt, et postquam obierint^ 
peculiariter sese devinctam esse Societas ex charitate 
cognoscat, ut omni officio illos prosequatur, quod a 
nobis praestari juxta minimam hanc nostram professio- 
nem ad divinam gloriam possit. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 35 

DE IIS, QVJE AD ADMITTENDA ET RELINQUENDA COL- 
LBGIA^ ET EORUM RES TEMPORALES PERTINENT. 

CAP. 11. 

1 Ad Collegia, quae libere Societati oflFeruntur, ut juxta 
suas Constitutiones omnino eis utatur, admittenda, Prae- 
positus Generalis nomine totius Societatis plenam potes- 
tatem habebit. 

2 Si Fundator aliquas conditiones exigeret ordini ac modo 
procedcndi Societati consueto minime consentaneas ; 
eidem Prseposito Generali (auditis sententiis aliorum, 
quos ipse de hujusmodi rebus melius judicare censebit) 
considcrandum relinquatur, an omnibus perpensis utile 
sit futurum Societati ad finem divini servitii, quem sibi 
praefixit, hujusmodi CoUegium admittere, nec ne. Sed 
si temporis decursu se gravaii eo onere animadvertet 
Societas, poterit ipsa in Congregatione generali id pro- 
ponere, et statuere, ut relinquatur Collegium hujusmodi ; 
vel prospicere, ut onus temperetur, vel certe, ut ad onus 
id ferendum vires majores praebeantur. Hoc tamen 
^ictum sit, si ante Congregationem hujusmodi Prae- 
positus Generalis huic incommodo, prout in Domino 
convenit, non occurrerit. 

3 Ad relinquenda, vel alicnanda Collegia, aut domoa jam 
admissas Praepositus Generalis simul cum ipsa Societate 
potestatem habebit. Ciun enim id sit perinde, ac si 
membrum ab ejus corpore praescinderetur, et res alioqui 
perpetua et majoriB momenti sit ; cum ea universa com- 
municari melius est. 

4 In CoUegiis Societatis ncc curae animarum nec obliga- 
tiones ad Missas celcbrandas, neque aliae hujusmodi 
admittantur, quae a studiis distrahere admodum, et ea, 
quae in iUis ad divinum obsequium qua^runtur, impedire 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



36 CONSTITUTIONUM 

solent : Quemadmodum neque in domibus aliis^ vel ec- 
clesiis Societatis professae ; quae quoad ejus fieri potest, 
expedita ad sedis Apostolicae missiones obeundas, aliaque 
pietatis opera ad Dei obsequium et animarum auxilium 
esse debet, 

5 Possessionem Collegiorum cum rebus temporalibus, quae 
ad ipsa spectant, capiet Societas ; et Rectores, qui ad 
id mimus conveniens habeant talentum, constituet ; qui 
curam suscipiant conservandi atque administrandi res 
ipsorum temporales, ac provideant necessitatibus tam 
materialis aedificii, quam Scholarium (qui in ipsis Col- 
legiis degunt) eorumque, qui probantur, ut ad illa ad- 
iliittantur, atque eorum etiam, qui extra CoUegia gerunt 
illorum negotia. Totius vero administrationis ratio Rec- 
toribus constet : ut eam reddere, quando et cui per 
Praepositum Generalem constituetur^ possint. At Gene- 
ralis cum nec in suum nec in ullorum consanguineorum 
suorum^ nec in professae Societatis usum bona tempo- 
ralia Collegiorum possit convertere ; eo purius sese in 
eorum superintendentia ad majorem gloriam et servitium 
Dei gerere poterit. 

6 In iis CoUegiis, quae duodecim Scholasticos (praeter 
Praeceptores) ex propriis redditibus alere possunt, ob 
majorem populi aedificationem nec petantur eleemosynae, 
nec illae^ aut dona ulla oblata admittantur. Si redditus 
minores fuerint, quam huic numero alendo sufficiant; 
admitti quidem, non autem peti eleemosynae possent ; 
nisi tanta paupertate Collegium premeretur, ut etiam 
petere, saltem a quibusdam^ esset necessarium. Tunc 
enim (divinum obsequium et universale bonum prae 
ocuUs semper habendo) peti eleemosynae, imo et ostiatim 
ad tempus, quandocunque necessitas id exigeret^ emen- 
dicari poterunt. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 37 

DE SCHOLASTICIS, QUI IN COLLE6IIS CONSTITUENTUR. 
CAP. III. 

1 QuoD ad Scholasticos attinet, ad quorum institutionem 
Collegia assumuntur, in primis quales esse debeant, ut 
ad ea vel mittantur, vel admittantur, considerare in 
Domino oportebit. 

2 Primum omnium cum aliquo ex quinque illis impedi- 
mentis in Secunda Parte dictis nullus in Collegio aliquo 
Societatis inter Scholasticos coUocari poterit. Et praeter 
Coadjutores ad ministeria vel auxilium CoUegii neces- 
sarios, reUqui hujusmodi esse debent, ut secundum ratio- 
nem sperari possit, idoneos ad vineam Christi Domini 
nostro exemplo ac doctrinam excolendam esse evasuros. 
Hi autem quo magis ingeniosi, bonisque moribus omati, 
et sani corpore ad ferendos studiorum labores fuerint; 
eo magis idonei, et citius ad CoUegia mitti, vel in eisdem 
admitti possunt. 

3 Ad haec, ilU solum in Scholasticos approbatos admitten- 
tur, qui in domibus vel CoUegiis ipsis probati fuerint, et 
biennio in variis experimentis et probationibus exacto, 
ac votis cum promissione de Societatis ingressu jam 
emissis, ad vitam in ipsa perpetuo ducendam ad gloriam 
Dei admittentur. 

4 Praeter hos, studia quibusdam conceduntur, qui ante 
biennium et probationes hujusmodi ad CoUegia ex 
domibus destinantur (quod sic in Domino expedire 
videatur) aut in eisdem admittuntur ; non tamen appro- 
bati Scholastici censentur, donec biennio exacto et votis 
ac promissione iUa emtssis, in approbatorum numerum 
referantur. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



38 CONSTITUTIONUM 

DE SCHOLASTICIS ADMISSIS CONSERVANDIS. 
CAP. IV. 

1 Ad rerum temporalium et extemanim ac CoUegialium 
conservationem in iis quae ad corpus pertinent, quod in 
Tertia Parte dictum est^ sufficiet. Id tamen peculiaii cura 
animadvertendum erit, ut temporibus valetudini corporis 
incommodis Scholastici non studeant^ ut somno quantum 
temporis satis sit, tribuant; et in laboribus mentis 
modum servent. Sic enim fiet, ut diutius in iUis per- 
severare tam in Utteris addiscendis^ quam in eisdem 
exercendis ad Dei gloriam possint. 

2 Quod attinet ad spirituaUa ; eadem erit ratio eorum, qui 
in CoUegus, et qui in Domibus admittuntur, quamdiu in 
probationibus versantur. Post probationem, cum studiis 
vacant, ut est cavendum, ne fervore studiorum intepescat 
soUdarum virtutum^ ac reUgiosae vitae amor ; ita morti- 
ficationibus^ orationibus, ac meditationibus proUxis, eo 
tempore non adeo multum loci tribuetur. Quandoqui- 
dem Utteris dare operam, quae syncera cum intentione 
divini servitii addiscuntur, et quodammodo totum homi- 
nem requirunt, non minus, quam in iUis versari tempore 
studiorum^ imo magis Deo ac Domino nostro gratum 
erit. 

3 Itaque praeter sacramenta Confessionis ac Communionis 
(ad quae octavo quoque die accedendum erit) et praeter 
Missam, quam quotidie audient ; horam unam impen- 
dent recitando BeatissimaeVirginis officio^ ac examinandis 
bis quotidie suis conscientiis ciim aUis orationibus pro 
cujusque devotioni usque ad praedictam horam explen- 
dam^ si expleta non fuerit. Quae omnia juxta ordinatio- 
nem ac judicium majorum suorum, quibus obedientiam 
Christi loco praestare debent, facient. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 39 

4 Aliqui (cujusmodi esse posseut Coadjutores illi, qui 
legere non didicerunt) praeter Missam^ horam etiam 
unam recitando Rosario vel Coronae Beatse Mariae Vir- 
ginis cum duplici examine quotidiano^ vel aliis orationi- 
bus pro cujusque devotione, ut de Scholasticis dictum 
est, impendent. 

5 Ad devotionis augmentum^ et ad excitandam qua Deo 
obstricti sunt, obligationis memoriam, et ad majorem 
studentium in sua vocatione confirmationem, bis annis 
singulis^ in festis videlicet Resurrectionis, ac Nativitatis, 
simplicia vota^ quae juxta formulam in Quinta Parte, 
capite IV. dicendam emiserunt, congruum erit renmare, 
£t qui ea non emisisset, exacto biennio probationis, ut 
in Examine proponitur, emittet. 

6 Cum ad publicas Scholas eundum erit (nam alia loca 
injussu Superiorum non petent) eant et redeant invicem 
associati cum ea modestia interiori ac exteriori, quae ad 
sui et aliorum aedificationem conveniat ; et eorum collo- 
quia cum Scholasticis extemis sint solum de rebus ad 
litteras vel profectum spiritus pertinentibus ; prout ad 
majorem Dei gloriam omnibus utiUus fore judicabitur. 

DE DOCTRINA, CUI SCHOLASTICI 80CIETATIS 
STUDERE DEBENT. 

CAP. V. 
1 CuM doctrinae, quae in hac Societate addiscitur, hic 
scopus sit, suis et proximorum animis Dei favore aspi- 
rante prodesse ; haec erit in imiversuiii et in particulari- 
bus personis mensura, ex qua quibus facultatibus ad- 
discendis nostri incumbere, et quousque in eis progredi 
debeant, statuatur. Et quia generatim loquendo, litterae 
humaniores diversarum linguarum, Logica itidem, Natu- 

D 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



40 CONSTITUTIONUM 

ralis ac Moralis Philosophia, Metaphysica, et Theologia 
tam quae Scholastica, quam quae Positiva dicitur, ct 
sacra Scriptura ad id adjuvant: harum facultatum studiis 
operam dabunt qui ad CoUegia mittuntur; et quidem 
majori cum diUgentia illis vacabunt, quae ad finem prae- 
dictum, habita ratione temporis, loci^ et personarum, 
supremus Moderator studiorum magis in Domino con- 
venire judicabit. 

2 Ad particulares personas descendendo, quid hi vel illi 
addiscere debeant, Superiorum prudentiae relinquetur. 
Qui tamen indole ingenii praeditus esset, quo in dictis 
facultatibus soUdiorem doctrinam consequetur, eo rem 
utiliorem faceret, 

3 De tempore alicui ex his Scientiis impendendo, et quando 
^d utiUores sit progrediendum, Rector adhibita examina- 
tione convenienti considerabit, et statuet. 

4 Sequantur in quavis facultate securiorem et magis ap- 
probatam doctrinam, et eos authores, qui eam docent: 
cujus rei penes Rectorem (qui, quod statuetur in uni- 
versa Societate ad majorem Dei gloriam, sequuturus est) 
cura sit. 



QUOMODO JUVENTUR SCHOLASTICI AD HAS FACULTATES 
BENE ADDISCENDAS. 

CAP. VI. 

1 Ut autem Scholastici plurimum in doctrina proficiant ; 
in primis animae puritatem custodire, ac rectam studio- 
rum intentionem habere conentur, nihil aliud in litteris, 
quam divinam gloriam, et animarum fructum quaerentes ; 
et in suis orationibus gratiam, ut in doctrina proficiant 
ad hunc finem, crebro petant. 

2 Praeterea serio et constanter animum studiis applicare 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 41 

deliberent, sibique pcrsuadeant^ nihil gratius se Deo 
facturos in CoUegiis, quam si cum ea intentione, de qua 
dictum est^ studiis se diligenter impendant. Et licet 
nunquam ad exercenda ea, quae didicerint, perveniant ; 
illum tamen studendi laborem ex obedientia et charitate 
(ut par est) susceptum, opus esse magni meriti in con- 
spectu divinae ac summae Majestatis apud se statuant. 

3 Impedimenta etiam remov^antur, quae a studiis animum 
avocant, tam devotionum ac mortificationum, quae vel 
nimiae vel sine ordine debito suscipiuntur, quam curarum 
et occupationum, quae domi in officiis domesticis, et foris 
colloquiis, confessionibus, atque aliis erga proximos 
functionibus assumuntur: quatenus ab eis declinari in 
Domino poterit. Est enim laudabile^ quo aliis postea 
utiliores cum doctrina, quam didicerint^ se praebeant, 
hujusmodi exercitia (Kcet pia) donec studia sint absoluta, 
difFerri. Et haec quidem omnia majori cum studio 
obsequii et gloriae divinae fiant. 

4 In disciplinis ordo servandus est^ ut prius in Latina 
lingua solidum jaciant fundamentum, quam Artium 
Uberalium, et in iis, antequam Theologiae Scholasticae, et 
quidem in hac, antequam Positivae studiis se dedant. 
Sacrae scripturae vel eodem tempore, vel postea tractari 
poterunt. 

5 Liuguae vero illae, in quibus scriptae vel versae fuerunt^ 
prius, aut posterius, ut Superiori pro varietate causarum 
occurrentium^ ac diversitate personanmi videbitur, disci 
poterunt. Itaque ordo temporis ejus prudentiae relin- 
quetur. Sed si linguarum studio nostri vacant, inter 
caetera, ad quae discentium intentio feratur, iUud sit^ ut 
versionem ab Ecclesia approbatam defendant. 

6 Scholastici omnes lectiones publicorum Professorum 
juxta Rectoris Collegii arbitrium audiant: quiquidem 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



42 CONSTITUTIONUM 

Professores sive de Societate illi sint, sive extemi, op- 
tandum est^ ut docti^ diligentes^ et assidui^ et profectus 
studentium tam in lectionibus, quam in aliis litterariis 
exercitationibus studiosi sint. 

7 Bibliotheca communis, si fieri potest, in Collegiis habe- 
atur; cujus clavis illis, qui juxta Rectoris judicium 
habere debebunt, tradatur. Praeter hos autem^ quisque 
libros alios^ qui necessarii fuerint, habebit. 

8 Scholastici in audiendis lectionibus sint assidui^ et in eis 
praevidendis diligentes ; et postquam eas audierint^ re- 
petendis, iis, quae non intellexerint^ interrogandis^ aliis 
vero, quae oportuerit, adnotandis ; quo in posterum 
memoriae defectui consulatur. 

9 Rector autem Collegii id curae habeat^ ut videat^ num 
Magistri, et discipuli suum in Domino officium faciant^ 
nec ne. 

10 Cum perutiUs sit (praesertim Artium, ac Theologiae 
Scholasticae studiosis) disputandi usus ; intersint Scho- 
lastici communibus Scholarum^ ad quas accedunt (licet 
non sint sub cura Societatis) disputationibus^ et 
singulare sui specimen in doctrina praebere, modeste 
tamen, curent. Convenit etiam singuUs Dominicis, vel 
aliquo alio die hebdomadae in Collegio nostro aUquem 
ex quavis Classe^ Artium ac Theologiae studiosorum a 
Rectore designatum a prandio (si aliqua ex causa pecu- 
liari impedimentum non accideret) aliquas positiones 
tuendas suscipere ; quae pridie ejus diei sub vesperum 
valvis Scholarum (quo ad disputandum vel audiendum, 
qui veUent, convenirent) essent affigendae ; quibus brevi- 
ter ab eo, qui responsurus est, confirmatis, argumentari 
ex domesticis vel extemis Uceat cuicunque Ubuerit : aU- 
quis tamen praesit oportet, qui argumentantes dirigat, et 
ex ea concertatione eUciat declaretque ad audientium 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 43 

utilitatem doctrinam, quae tenenda sit ; qui signum 
etiam det finiendi iis, qui disputant^ ac tempus sic dis- 
tribuat ; ut omnibus^ quoadejus fieri poterit^ disputandi 
locus detur. 

1 1 Praeter haec duo disputationum praedictarum genera, quo- 
tidie aliquod tempus designandum^ quo in Collegiis prae- 
sidente aliquo, ut diximus^ disputetur; ut ea ratione et 
ingenia magis exerceantur, et difficilia^ quae in his facul- 
tatibus occurrent, magis ad Dei gloriam elucidentur. 

12 Qui litteris humanioribus vacant^ sua etiam stata tem- 
pora ad conferendum et disputandum de iis, quae perti- 
nent ad studia illa^ coram aliquo^ qui eosdem dirigere 
possit^ habebunt : et Dominicis^ vel aliis constitutis die- 
bus altematim vel suae facuitatis positiones a prandio 
tuebuntur, vel se in componendo carmine^ aut soluta 
oratione exercebunt ; sive id ex tempore proposito ibi- 
dem themate ad explorandam promptitudinem fiat ; sive 
domi composita de re prius proposita illic publice legan- 
tur. 

13 Omnes quidem, sed praecipue humaniorum litterarum 
studiosi latine loquantur communiter ; et memoriae quod 
a suis Magistris praescriptum fuerit, commendent, ac 
stylum in compositionibus diligenter exerceant; nec 
desit qui eisdem corrigendis operam suam impendat. 
Licebit etiam nonnullis juxta Rectoris arbitrium praeter 
eos authores, qui praeleguntur, quosdam etiam alios pri- 
vato studio legere; et singulis hebdomadis die aliquo 
designato unus ex provectioribus a prandio orationem 
latinam aut graecam de re aliqua ad aedificationem do- 
mesticorum pertinente, qua ad perfectiora in Domino 
animentur, habeat. 

14 Praeterea Artium et Theologiae studiosi potissimum, sed 
et reliqui suum habeant privatum studium et quietum, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



44 CONSTITUTIONUM 

quo melius et exactius ea, quae tractata sunt^ intelligant. 

15 Ut reprimi oportet quorundam cursum plus aequo con- 
citatum in studiis ; ita movendi, incitandi, et animandi 
ad studia sunt alii, quibus id necessarium est ; quod ut 
melius praestare possit Rector, intelligat oportet per se, 
et per aliquem, alium cui Syndici, vel Visitatoris studi- 
orum curam ipse dederit, quomodo Scholastici suum 
officium faciant. Quod si animadverteret aliquem in 
studiis tempus inutiliter terere, quod nolit, aut certe 
non possit progressum in litteris facere ; expedit illum 
ab eis removere, et ejus loco alium, qui ad scopum 
divini servitii in CoUegiis praefixum ma^s proficiat, con- 
stituere. 

16 Absoluto studio alicujus facultatis, eandem privatim 
repetere conveniet, authorem unum aliquem, vel plures, 
quam prius, juxta Rectoris arbitrium legendo. Poterit 
autem ex eis, quae ad eam facultatem pertinent, si eidem 
Rectori visum fuerit, in scripta brevius, distinctius, et 
accuratius, redigere ea, quae prius in lectionum decursu 
scripserat, cum* minori doctrina praeditus erat, quam 
peracto studiorum curriculo. 

17 Suis constitutis temporibus se ad publicos actus ex- 
aminationum ac responsionum praeparent ; et ad gradus 
consuetos, qui per diUgentem examinationem digni in- 
venientur, promoveri poterunt. Loca tamen certa, ut 
ab omni ambitionis specie atque ab aliis affectibus 
parum temperatis recedant^ quanvis ea in Universitate, 
ubi gradum accipiunt, dari soleant, non accipiant ; sed 
simul omnes extra numerum se constituant ; nec sump- 
tus, qui pauperes non deceant, in gradibus hujusmodi 
faciant ; ad quos sine humilitatis detrimento, non ob 
aliud, quaiii ut possint proximis ad Dei gloriam esse 
utiUores, promoveri debent. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 45 

18 Num autem his, qui jam studiorum suorum cursum 
peregerunt, praelegere privatim vel publice ad suam, vel 
aliorum utilitatem conveniat ; penes Superiorem id erit 
judicium, qui quod magis in Domino expedire videbitur, 
statuet. 



DE SCHOLIS GOLLE6IORUM SOCIETATIS. 

CAP. VII. 

1 Habita ratione non solum profectus in litteris Scholas- 
ticorum nostrorum, sed etiam profectus in litteris et 
moribus externorum, quos in nostris Collegiis institu- 
endos suscepimus, Scholae publicae, ubi commode id 
fieri poterit, aperiantur, saltem in disciplinis humaniori- 
bus. In gravioribus autem disciplinis pro locorum, in 
quibus Collegia fuerint, ratione, semper, quid Deo 
gratius sit, ante oculos habendo, aperiri poterunt. 

2 Teneatur in hujusmodi SchoUs is modus, quo externi 
Scholastici in iis, quae ad doctrinam Christianam perti- 
nent, bene instituantur ; cureturque • quoadejus fieri po- 
terit, ut singulis mensibus ad sacramentum Confessionis 
accedant, et verbum Dei frequenter audiant, et demum 
cum litteris mores etiam Christianis dignos hauriant. 
Et quia in rebus particularibus multum varietatis esse 
oportcbit, pro varietate locorum, et personarum singula 
persequi non est hujus loci. Id tamen dictum sit ; in 
quovis CoUegio regulas, quae ad omnia necessaria de- 
scendant, constitui debere. Hoc tamen commendatum 
hoc loco volumus, ne extemis Scholasticis correctio, 
quoad ilUs opus erit, desit ; quae tamen per aliquem de 
ipsa Societate exercenda non erit. 

3 Cum tam proprium sit nostrae professionis, nullum tem- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



46 C0N8TITUTI0NUM 

porale pramium accipere pro spiritualibus ministeriis, in 
quibus juxta nostrum institutum in proximorum auxili- 
um occupamm* : non convenit ullam Collegii dotationem 
admittere, per quam ad dandum Concionatorem, aut 
Confessarium, aut Lectorem aliquem Theologiae, Socie- 
tas obligetur. Quanvis enim aequitatis et gratitudinis 
ratio nos ad serviendum cum majori diligentia in dictis 
ministeriis, quse nostri instituti simt propria, moveat : in 
Collegiis tamen, quae majori cum liberalitate et devo- 
tione fundata sunt, non sunt recipiendae obligationes vel 
conditiones, quae synceritatem impediant nostri in pro- 
cedendo modi, qui est, dare gratis, quae gratis accepi- 
mus: quanvis pro eorum substentatione, qui communi 
bono Collegiorum serviunt, vel propter illud student, 
dotatio, quam Fundatorum charitas assignare ad gloriam 
divinam solet, admittatur. 



DE SCHOLASTICIS INSTITUENDIS IN IIS, QVJE AD PROX- 

IMOS SUOS JUVANDOS PERTINENT. 

CAP. VIII. 

1 ScopUM illum intuendo, ad quem studia Societatis diri- 
guntur, sub ipsorum finem congruum erit, ut ad arma 
spiritualia in proximorum auxilium tractanda assuescere 
incipiant. Quanvis enim id proprie magis et diutius in 
domibus fiat, poterit tamen in CoUegiis inchoari. 

2 Primiim illi, qui juxta Superioris judicium ad sacros 
ordines erunt promovendi, in ratione Missae dicendae, ut 
praeter intelligentiam, et devotionem intemam^ decentem 
etiam habeant exteriorem modum ad audientium aedifi- 
cationem^ instituantur : et ceremoniis eisdem omnis So- 
cietas, quantum fieri potest, utatur: in quibus usum 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 47 

Romanum ut magis universalem^ et quem peculiari 
quadam ratione Sedes Apostolica amplexa est^ quantum 
patietur r^onum varietas, sequetur. 

3 In concionibus etiam^ et in sacris lectionibus eo modo 
proponendis^ qm aedificationi populi conveniat (qui a 
Scholastico diversus est) se etiam exerceant^ studeantque 
ad id munus obeundum linguam populo vemaculam 
bene addiscere. Res etiam alias vidisse oportet, et prae 
manibus habere^ quae ad hoc officium utiles futurae 
simt ; ac demum^ ut meUus et cum majori fructu ani- 
marum id munus obeant^ ommbuB mediis utantuvy quibus 
commode juvari possint. 

4 In ministerio etiam Sacramentorum Confessionis^ et 
Communionis sese exerceant ; et non solum quod ad ipso- 
rum, sed etiam quod ad poenitentium^ et commimicantium 
officium pertinet, ut bene ac utili;ter ad Dei gloriam ea 
percipiant, et frequentent, perspectum habere ac exequi 
curent. 

5 Ad exercitia spiritualia aliis tradenda^ postquam qmsque 
in se ea fuerit expertus, assuescant; et dent operam 
omnes^ ut et eorum reddere rationem, et in hoc armorum 
spiritualium genere tractando (quod Dei gratia ad ipsius 
obsequium tantopere conferre cemitur) dexteritatem ha- 
bere possint. 

6 Studium etiam congmum ad piodum tradendse doctrinae 
Christianae addiscendum^ qui sit captui pueromm ac 
rudium accommodatus, adhibeatur. 

7 Ut in superius dictis proximi ad bene vivendum juvan- 
tur : ita curandum est, ut ea, quae ad bene moriendum 
illis confemnt, percipiantur ; quique modus in eo tem- 
pore, in quo tantum est momenti ad finem ultimum 
aetemae feUcitatis consequendum, vel ab ea excidendum, 
teneri debeat, intelUgatur. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



48 CONSTITUTIONUM 

8 In universum loquendo, edoceri eos convenit, quem 
modum tenere oporteat hujus Societatis operarios, qui 
in tam variis mundi regionibus, cumque tam diversis 
hominum generibus versari debent, antevertendo incom- 
moda^ qua^ possunt accidere; et emolumenta, qtuB ad 
mqjm Dei servitium conferunty captando^ omnibus ratio- 
nibus adhibitiSy qtue poasunt adhiberi. Et quanvis hoc 
sola unctio sancti Spiritus, et ea prudentia^ quam com- 
municare solet Dominus illis^ qm in divina sua Majestate 
confidunt, docere possit ; via certh aliquo modo quibus- 
dam documentis, quae juvent, et ad effectum divinae 
gratiae disponant, aperiri potest. 



DE SCHOLASTICIS A STUDIO LITTERARUM EDUCENDI8. 

CAP. IX. 

1 Ex Collegiis nonnuUi propter causas in secunda Parte 
dictas, et modo inibi explicato educuntur ; ut «lii, qui 
ad divinum servitium magis proficiant, eisdem suc- 
cedant. Eadem siquidem in hac parte domorum, et 
Collegiorum est ratio. 

2 Aliqui etiam aliquando educentur, quod ipsis ad majorem 
in spiritu vel in litteris profectum alio transferri, vel 
quod ad univ^rsale bonum Societatis conveniat; ut 
accideret, si, qui Artium curriculum in aliquo Collegio 
emensus esset, ut easdem alibi praelegeret ante Theologiae 
studium educeretur. Et idem dictum sit, si qua in re 
aUa ad majus Dei obsequium et gloriam essent occu- 
pandi. 

3 Communis autem modus educendi Scholasticos ex Col- 
legio aliquo, ubi omnes praedictae Scientiae traduntur, 
timc erit ; cum quisque studia sua jam absolverit, per- 
acto Artium curriculo, et quatuor annis Theologiae studio 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 



PARS QUARTA. 49 

impensis. Et sub hujus temporis finem suarum esse 
partium Rector intelligat, Prdepositum Generalem^ vel 
Provincialem admonerey et quantum hi profecerint, re- 
ferre ; ac postmodum quod ei praescriptum fuerit ad Dei 
gloriam, exequetur. 



DE GUBERNATI6NE COLLEOIOBUM. 

CAP. X. 

1 SuPREMAM curam vel superintendentiam Collegiorum 
juxta Sedis Apostolicae litteras professa Societas habebit. 
Cum enim quicquam privatae utilitatis ex redditibus 
quaerere, vel in suum usum convertere non possit; 
rationi valde consonum est, quod majori cum puritate 
ac spiritu constantius ac diuturnius procedet in iis, quae 
ad bonum regimen Collegiorum ad majus Dei ac Domini 
nostri obsequium provideri convenit. 

2 PrcBter id autem^ quod ad Constitutiones, et dissolutio- 
Tuemy vel alienationem hujtismodi Collegiorum pertinet, 
universa potestas et administratio^ et (ut in genere dica- 
tur) hujus superintendentiae ewecutio penes Propositum 
Generalem erit, qui finem illum, ad quem CoUegia et 
Societas tota contendit, prae oculis habens, meUus, quid 
eisdem conveniat, intelliget. 

3 Per se ergo, vel per alium, cui suam facultatem com- 
municaverit, in hac parte, Praepositus Generalis Rec- 
torem, ut praesit cuicimque Collegio, aliquem ex Coadju- 
toribus Societatis constituet ; qui Praeposito, Provinciali, 
vel cui Generalis praescripserit, rationem sibi assignati 
muneris reddet. Et penes eundem erit Praepositum, 
Rectorem amovere, talique cura, prout ei convenientius 
in Domino videbitur, Uberare. 

4 Curandum est autem, ut iUe cui Rectoris officium, im- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



50 CONSTITUTIONUM 

ponitur, magni sit exempli, magnae aedificationis, magnae 
etiam mortificationis in omnibus pravis inclinationibus^ 
et in Obedientia praecipue, ac humilitate probatus ; qui 
donum etiam discretionis habeat, ad gubemandum 
idoneus^ in rebus agendis versatus, in spiritualibus exer- 
citatus sit ; qui severitatem suo tempore et loco cum 
benignitate miscere noverit; qui solicitus, qui patiens 
laborum, qui etiam in litteris eruditus sit; et demum 
ejusmodi^ cui confidere, cuique suam potestatem tuto 
communicare Praepositi superiores possint; quandoqui- 
dem quo haec potestas major erit, eo melius regi CoUegia 
ad majorem Dei gloriam poterunt. 
5 Rectoris officium erit, in primis oratione et sanctis de- 
sideriis totum Collegium velut humeris suis sustinere ; 
Deinde curare, ut Constitutiones observentur, omnibus 
Collegialibus cum omni solicitudine invigilare, eosdem- 
que ab iis, quae nocere possint domi et foris, defendere, 
tum praeveniendo, tum etiam, siquid mali accideret, 
remedium adhibendo ; ut ad singulorum et universale 
bonum convenit ; utque in virtutibus et litteris pro- 
ficiant, curando ; sanitatem eorum, et bona etiam Col- 
legii tam stabiUa, quam mobilia conservando ; eos, qui 
officia gerant domestica, prudenter constituendo ; et 
quomodo suis fungantur officiis, considerando ; et, prout 
in Domino convenire judicabit, vel in eisdem ministeriis 
detinendo, vel ab iisdem removendo : et generatim lo- 
quendo, curet, ut quae in superioribus capitibus dicta 
sunt, quae quidem ad Coflegia spectant, observentur. 
Memor sit etiam subordinationis integre observandae in 
Obedientia, non solum ad Generalem, sed ad Provinci- 
alem quoque, certiorem eum, de quibus oportet, red- 
dendo, ad eumque referendo, quae majoris erunt mo- 
menti et quae ab ipso injuncta fuerint (quandoquidem 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 51 

ipsum Superiorem habet) exequendo ; ut sequum est ad 
se referri, sibique obedientiam praestari ab iis, qui in 
Collegio degunt : Glui quidem Rectorem suum magno- 
pere revereri ac venerari, ut qui Christi Damini nostri 
vices gei^ity debebunty liberam sui ipsorum rerumque 
suarum dispositionem cum vera obedientia ipsi relin' 
quendo : nihil ei clausum^ ne conscientiam quidem pro- 
priam tenendo^ quam ei aperire (ut in Examine dictum 
est) suis constitutis temporibuSy et scepius, si causa aliqua 
id posceret, oportebit ; non repugnando, non contradi- 
cendOy nec ulla ratione judicium proprium ipsius judicio 
contrarium demonstrando ; ut per unionem ejusdem sen- 
tentiae et voluntatis, atque per debitam submissionem 
melius in divino obseqmo conserventur, et progredi- 
antur. 

6 Ad bonam domus gubemationem non solum numerum 
necessarium officialium Rector provideat ; sed ut idonei 
sint, quoadejus fieri poterit, ad suas functiones, ciu-et : 
cuique suas regulas, ubi quae ad singulorum officia per- 
tinent, contineantur, tradat ; et ne se hic in illius 
officium ingerat, videat. Praeterea, ut eis prospicere de 
subsidio, si necessarium id fuerit, debebit; ita, cum 
tempus vacuum illis fuerit, ut utiliter illud impendant 
divino servitio, curet. 

7 Inter officiales Rectori necessarios, in primis Minister 
idoneus, qui Vicerector, vel Magister domus sit, et om- 
nibus, quae ad bonum universale pertinent, provideat, 
est eligendus. Syndico etiam ad exteriora observanda, 
et aliquo, cui rerum spritualium cura sit, et duobus aliis, 
vel pluribus, quorum prudentiae et probitati multum 
confidat, opus est ; et cum eis de iis, quae difficiliora, et 
ad Dei gloriam majorem communicanda videbuntur, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



52 CONSTITUTIONUM 

conferre possit. Sunt et alii ad particularia officia 
necessarii. 

8 Curet* Rector, ut in suo officio cuique integram obedi- 
entiam Collegiales praestent; et alii officiales Ministro, 
et sibi etiam ipsi, prout idem praescripserit. IUud in 
universum admonuisse convenit ; eos, qui curam aliorum 
suae obedientiae subditorum habent^ praeire eisdem ex- 
emplo obedientiae, quam suis Superioribus Christi loco 
ipsimet praestent, oportere. 

9 Ad omnia conferet temporis ordo in studiis^ orationibus, 
missis, lectionibus, cibo, somno, et in reliquis servatus ; 
et signum constitutis horis detur; quo audito omnes 
statim vel imper/ecta littera relicta ad id, ad quod vo- 
cantur, se conferant. Erit autem penes Rectorem, vel 
eum, qui primas tenebit, id curae ; ut videat, quando 
hae horae pro temporum, vel aliarum causarum occur- 
rentium ratione mutandae sint ; et quod ipse statuerit, 
observetur. 

10 Rector ipse legere, aut docere Christianam doctrinam 
quadraginta dies debet. Videat etiam, qui ex Collegi- 
alibus, et ad quem usque Umitem domi et foris in collo- 
quiis, spiritualibus exercitiis tradendis, confessionibus 
audiendis, tum etiam in concionibus, vel lectionibus, vel 
doctrina Christiana tradenda partim ad ipsorum exer- 
citationem (praecipue sub finem studiorum) partim ob 
aliorum domesticorum, vel externorum fructum aUis se 
communicare debeant : et in omnibus quod senserit 
divinae ac summae bonitati gratius, et ad ipsius obse- 
quium ac gloriam majorem, omnibus perpensis, pro- 
videat. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 53 

DE UNIVBRSITATIBUS IN SOCIETATE ADMITTENDIS. 

CAP. XI. 

1 Eadem charitatis ratio, qua CoUegia admittuntur, et 
publicae Scholae in eis non tantum ad nostrorum, sed 
magis etiam ad extemorum aedificationem in doctrina et 
moribus tenentur, extendi poterit ad Universitatum 
curam suscipiendam ; ut in eis hic fructus extendatur, 
latiusque pateat tam in Scientiis^ quae traduntur, quam 
in hominibuS; qui ad eas conveniunt, et gradibus, ad 
quos promoventur, ut aliis in locis cum authoritate 
docere possint, quod in his bene ad Dei gloriam didi- 
cerint. 

2 Q,uibus tamen conditionibus^ et obligationibus^ quibus- 
que in locis hujusmodi Universitates admitti debeant, ei, 
qui supremam curam Societatis habet, judicandum re- 
linquitur. Glui assistentium sibi auditis sententiis, et 
aliorum, quos in consiUum adhiberi volet, per se ipsum 
deUberare poterit; an sint admittendae. Non tamen, 
postquam admissae fuerint sine Congregatione generali 
per eum dissolvi poterunt. 

3 Q,uia tamen religiosa quies, et spirituales occupationes 
nec animi distractionem, nec alia incommoda, quae judi- 
candi in rebus civiUbus vel criminalibus officium sequi 
solent, Societati permittunt; jurisdictio hujusmodi, quam 
per se, vel per aUos a se dependentes exercere debeat 
Societas, non admittatur : quanvis ad ea, quas ad bonum 
statum Universitatis proprie pertinent, conveniat Jus- 
titiae ordinariae sive secularis sive ecclesiasticae ministros 
circa puhitionem Scholasticorum voluntatem Rectoris 
Universitatis sibi significatam exequi, et generatim res 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



54 CONSTITUTIONUM 

studiorum favore suo, praesertim eum a Rectore fuerint 
commendatae^ promovere. 



DE SCIENTIXS, QUiE TRADEND^ SUNT IN UNIVER- 
STTATIBUS SOCIETATIS. 

CAP. XII. 

l CuM Societatis atque studiorum scopus sit, proximos ad 
cognitionem et amorem Dei, et salutem suarum ani- 
marum juvare ; cumque ad eum finem medium maxime 
proprium sit facultas Theologiae: in hanc potissimum 
Societatis Universitates incumbent; ac diligenter per 
idoneos admodum Praeceptores, quae ad Scholasticam 
doctrinam, et sacras Scripturas pertinent, ac etiam ex 
Positiva quae ad hunc finem nobis praefixum conveniunt 
(non attingendo tamen eam partem Canonum^ quae foro 
contentioso inservit) pertractabunt. 

I Et quia tam doctrina Theologiae, quam ejus usus exigit 
(his praesertim temporibus) Utterarum humaniorum, et 
Latinae ac Graecae, et Hebraicae linguae cognitionem: 
harum etiam idonei Professores et quidem justo numero 
constituentur. AUarum praeterea linguarum, qualis est 
Caldaica, Arabica, et Indica, ubi necessariae vel utiles 
ad dictum finem viderentur, habita regionum diver- 
sarum, et causarum, quae ad eas docendum movent, 
ratione, possent Praeceptores constitui. 
Sic etiam quoniam Artes, vel Scientiae naturales ingenia 
disponunt ad Theologiam, et ad perfectam cognitionem 
et usum illius inserviunt, et per seipsas ad eundem finem 
juvant ; qua diligentia par est, et per eruditos Prae- 
ceptores, in omnibus syncere honorem et gloriam Dei 
quaerendo, tractentur. * 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 55 

4 Medicinae, et Legum studium ut a nostro Instituto 
magis remotum in Universitatibus Societatis vel non 
tractabitur; vel saltem ipsa Societas per se id oneris non 
suscipiet. 

DE MOBO ET ORDINE PR^DICTAS FACULTATES TRAC- 
TANDI. 

CAP. XIII. 

1 Ad tractanda tam facultatum inferiorum, quam The- 
ologiae studia dispositio et ordo conveniens tam mane, 
quam vesperi servandus est. 

2 Et quanvis pro regionum, et temporum diversitate in 
ordine, et statutis horis studio tribuendis possit varietas 
accidere ; omnes tamen in eo conveniant, ut ubique fiat, 
quod inibi magis expedire ad majorem in litteris pro- 
fectum existimabitur. 

3 Nec solum lectiones sint, quae publice praelegantur ; sed 
Magistri etiam diversi pro captu et numero audientium 
constituantur : qui quidem profectum uniuscujusque 
ex suis Scholasticis speciatim procurent, ct lectionum 
rationem exigant ; utque eae reputantur, et studiosi 
litterarum humaniorum familiarem sermonem latine lo- 
quendo, ut stylum scribendo ac pronunciationem com- 
posita bene pronunciando expoliant, curent ; et his, 
ac multo magis facultatuiSi superiorum studiosis crebras 
disputationes imponant ; quibus dies et horae certae con- 
stituantur^ ubi non solum cum condiscipulis, verum 
paulo inferiores cum aUquanto provectioribus disputent 
in iis, quae ipsi capiunt; quod etiam vice versa pro- 
vectiores cum minus provectis, ad ea, quae illi tractant, 
descendendo, et Praeceptores alii cum aUis praestabunt, 
semper, qua decet, modestia observata, et aliquo prae- 

E 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



56 CONSTITUTIONUM 

sidente^ qui contentionem dirimat, et quid doctrinae elici 
oporteat ex disputatis^ declaret. 

4 Erit itidem Rectoris, per se, vel per Cancellarium semper 
observare ; ut qui novi accedunt, examinentur ; et in iis 
Classibus, cumque iis Praeceptoribus, qui ipsis con- 
veniunt, collocentiu" ; et ejus discretioni (audita sen- 
tentia eorum, qui ad id munus designati sunt) relinque- 
tur^ num diutius in eadem classe manere, an ad aliam 
ulterius progredi debeant. Ejusdem erit judicium de 
studio linguarum, praeter Latinam, num Artibus et 
Theologiae anteponi, an postponi, et quam diu in eis 
quemque haerere oporteat. Sic etiam in aliis scientiis 
superioribus propter ingeniorum et aetatum inaequalitatem 
aliaque consideratione digna ad eundem pertinebit ex- 
pendere, quando quisque eas aggredi, et quandui in eis- 
dem versari debeat: Quanvis ii, qui aetate et ingenii 
aptitudine pollent, melius sit, ut in omnibus proficere, 
et conspicui esse ad Dei gloriam enitantur. 

5 Ut assiduitas in litterario exercitio, sic et aliqua remissio 
necessaria est. Quanta haec esse debeat, et quibus tem- 
poribus, considerationi Rectoris, expensis circunstantiis 
personarum et locorum, relinquetur. 



DE LIBRIS, QUI PRiELEGENDI SUNT. 

CAP. XIV. 

1 Generatim (ut dictum est, cum de CoUegiis ageretur) 
illi praelegentur libri, qui in quanvis facultate solidioris 
ac securioris doctrincB habebuntur, Nec illi sunt attin- 
gendi, quorum doctrina, vel authores suspecti sint. Hi 
tamen particulatim in quanvis Universitate nominentur ; 
in Theologia legetur vetus et novum Testamentum, et 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 5? 

doctrina Scholastica Divi Thomae ; et in ea, quam Posi- 
tivam vocant, ehgentur ii authores, qui ad scopum no- 
strum magis convenire videbuntur. 
Quod attinet ad libros humaniorum Utterarum Latinos, 
vel Graecos ; abstineatur in Universitatibus quoque, 
quemadmodum in Collegiis, quoadejus fieri poterit, ab 
eis juventuti praelegendis, in quibus sit aliquid, quod 
bonis moribus nocere queat ; nisi prius a rebus, et 
verbis inhonestis piu-gati sint. 

In Logica, et Philosophia Naturali, et Morali, et Meta- 
physica doctrinam AristoteUs profiteri oportebit ; et in 
aliis Artibus Uberalibus, et in commentariis tam hujus- 
modi authorum, quam humaniorum Utterarum^ habito 
eorum delectu, nominentur ii, quos videre discipuU, 
quosque ipsi Praeceptores prae alus in doctrina, quam 
tradunt sequi debeant. Rector autem in omnibus, quae 
statuerit, procedet juxta id, quod in universaU Societate 
magis convenire ad Dei gloriam judicabitur. 



DE CURSIBUS, ET GRADIBUS. 

CAP. XV. 

In Utteris humanioribus, et Unguis cursus temporis 
Umitatus ad earum studium absolvendum esse nequit, 
propter ingeniorum et doctrinae auditorum varietatem, 
multasque aUas causas : quae non aUam temporis prae- 
finitionem, quam quae unicuique convenire juxta pru- 
dentis Rectoris, vel CanceUarii arbitrium videbitur, per- 
mittunt. 

In Artium studio cursus erunt ordinandi, in quibus 
Scientiae Naturales (ad quas minus, quam trium anno- 
rum, spatium satis non erit) praelegantur ; praeter quos 
medius adhuc annus ad audita repetenda, et actus 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



58 CONSTITUTIONUM 

scholasticos celebrandos, et gradum magisterii suscipi- 
endum iis, qui eum suscepturi sunt, relinquetur. Cursus 
integer trium erit annorum cum dimidio usque ad pro- 
motionem ad magisterium. Singulis autem annis unus 
hujusmodi cursus inchoabitur, et alius cum divino 
auxilio absolvetur. 

3 Theologiae curriculum sex annis emetietur. In primis 
quatuor ea omnia, quae legi oportebit, prselegentur ; in 
duobus reliquis, praeter repetitionem, actus soliti ad 
gradum doctoratus in iis, qui promovendi sunt, absol- 
ventur. Quarto quoque anno ordinarie cm*sus inchoabi- 
tur^ sic libris praelegendis distributis, ut quolibet quatuor 
annorum quivis studiosus inchoare possit ; et quod 
reliquum est incoepti quadriennii, et ejus, quod sequitur, 
quadriennii, usque ad illum terminum, unde incoeperat, 
audiendo, quatuor annis peragere omnino cursum The- 
ologiae possit. 

4 In gradibus tam magisterii Artium, quam doctoratus 
Theologiae tria observentur : Primum, nequis nisi dili- 
genter et publice examinatus (per personas designatas, 
quae bene suum ofBcium faciant) et idoneus ad praele- 
gendum eandem Scientiam inventus, promoveatur, sive 
ille de Societate sit, sive extra eam : Alterum, ut prae- 
cludatur ostium ambitioni, nullis locis certis eis, qui 
ad gradus promoventur, assignatis ; quin potius honore 
se in\dcem praevenire, nulla locorum differentia obser- 
vata, curent : Tertium, ut quemadmodum gratis docet, 
ita et ad gradus Societas gratis promoveat, et non nisi 
admodum exigui sumptus (licet voluntarii sint) extemis 
permittantur : ne consuetudo vim legis tandem obtineat, 
et in ea parte temporis decursu, mediocritatem ex- 
cedant. Videat etiam Rector, ne Magistris, vel ullis 
aUis de Societate sibi, aut CoUegio pecuniam, aut dona 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUARTA. 59 

quavis ab ullo pro re quavis in ipsorum utilitatem facta 
accipere permittat; quandoquidem prcemium noatrum 
solus Christus Dominus juxta nostrum Institutum (merces 
enim m^agna nimis) futurus est. 



DE IIS, QUiE PERTINENT AD BONOS MORES. 

CAP. XVI. 

1 DiLiGENTER curctur, ut qui litteras discendi gratia ad 
Universitates Societatis se conferunt, simul cum illis 
bonos ac Christianis dignos mores addiscant : ad quod 
multum juverit, si omnes singulis saltem mensibus 
semel ad confessionis sacramentum accedent ; si missam 
quotidie, concionem singulis diebus festis (cum ea fiet) 
audient. Ex Praeceptoribus autem quisque hoc a suis 
discipulis praestari curabit. 

2 Praelegetur etiam in Collegio, aliquo die cujuscunque 
hebdomadae, Christiana doctrina ; et ut pueri eam edis- 
cant, et recitent, omnesque etiam aduUiores, si fieri 
potest, eandem sciant, curabitur. 

3 Habebitur etiam singuUs hebdomadis (ut de Collegiis 
est dictum) ab aliquo ex Scholasticis declamatio de 
rebus, quae audientibus aedificationi sint, eosque ad 
augmentum in omni puritate ac virtute expetendum 
invitent: ut non solum stylus exerceatur; sed mores 
meliores reddantur. Omnes autem eos, qui latine sci- 
unt, hujusmodi declamationi interesse oportebit. 

4 In scholis nec juramenta, nec injuriae verbo vel facto 
illatae, nec inhonestum aut dissolutum quid in externis 
ad scholas accedentibus permittatur, Feratur autem 
Praeceptorum pecuUaris intentio tam in lectionibus, cum 
se occasio obtulerit, quam extra eas ad eosdem ad obse- 
quium et amorem Dei ac virtutum, quibus Ei placere 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



60 CONSTITUTIONUM 

oportet^ movendos^ et ut omnia sua studia ad hunc finem 
referant. Quod ut ad memoriam eis reducatur, ante 
lectionis initium dicat aliquis brevem orationem ad id 
institutam, quam Praeceptor, et discipuli omnes aperto 
capite attente audient. 
5 Propter eos, qui tam in diligentia suis studiis adhibenda^ 
quam in iis, quae ad bonos mores pertinent, peccaverint ; 
ut cum quibus sola verba bona, et exhortationes non 
sufficiunt, Corrector (qui de Societate non sitj constitu- 
atur, qui pueros in timore contineat, et eos, quibus id 
opus erit, quique castigationis hujusmodi erunt capaces^ 
castiget. Cum autem nec verba, nec Correctoris offici- 
um satis esset, et in aliquo emendatio non speraretur, 
aliisque esse offiindiculo videretur; praestat a scholis 
eum removere, quam ubi parum ipse proficit, et aliis 
nocet, retinere. Hoc autem judicium Rectori Univer- 
sitatis, ut omnia ad gloriam et servitium Dei, ut par est, 
procedant, relinquetur. 



DE OFFICIALIBUS, VEL MINISTRIS UNIVERSITATIS. 

CAP. XVII. 

1 CuBA universalis, vel superintendentia et gubernatio 
Universitatis penes Rectorem erit ; qui idem esse poterit 
qui in Collegio praecipuo Societatis praeest, et iis prae- 
ditus Dei donis, de quibus dictum est, ut possit com- 
misso sibi officio dirigendo in litteris et moribus totam 
Universitatem satisfacere. Ejus electio ad Praepositum 
Generalem, vel alium, cui ille id commiserit (cujusmodi 
esset Provincialis, vel Visitator) spectabit; confirmatio 
vero semper erit Generalis. Habebit autem Rector 
quatuor Consiliarios, vel Assistentes; qui in rebus ad 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PABS QUABTA. 61 

ipsius officium pertinentibus eum juvare, et cum quibus 
ipse, quae sunt majoris momenti, tractare possit. 

2 Erit et Cancellarius, vir in litteris egregie versatus, qui 
Zelo bono, et judicio ad ea, quae sunt ei committenda, 
polleat : cujus sit munus, generale Rectoris instru- 
mentum ease ad studia bene ordinanda, et disputationes 
in actibus publicis dirigendas, et ad discernendum, an 
sufficiens doctrina sit eorum, qui ad actus et gradus 
(quos qmdem ipsemet dabit) sunt admittendi. 

3 Sit Secretarius ex eadem Societate, qui librum habeat, 
ubi omnium Scholasticorum, qui Scholas assidue fre- 
quentant, nomina scribantur, quique eorum promissiones 
de obedientia Rectori praestanda^ et Constitutionibus 
observandis (quas ipsemet proponet) admittat ; et si- 
gillum Rectoris, et Universitatis habeat : quae tamen 
omnia sine uUis expensis Scholasticorum fient. 

4 Erit et Notarius, ut fidem publicam faciat de susccptis 
gradibus, et aliis, quae occurrent. Sint et duo, vel tres 
Bidelli, unus ad facultatis linguarum, alter ad Artium, 
tertius ad Theologiae functiones destinatus. 

5 In has tres facultates Universitas dividetur ; et in 
quavis earum sit Decanus, et duo alii Designati ex iis, 
qui melius res facultatis illius callent; qui a Rectore 
vocati possint dicere, quid sentiant ad suae facultatis 
bonum convenire: et si quid tale in mentem venerit, 
dum inter se de hujusmodi rebus agunt, ad Rectorem, 
quanvis non vocentur, referent. 

6 In rebus quae ad solam unam facultatem pertinent, 
vocabit Rector, praeter Cancellarium et suos Assistentes, 
Decanum etiam et Designatos illius facultatis: in iis, 
quae ad omnes pertinent, Decani et Designati omnium 
vocentur. Et si Rectori visum fuerit et alios de Socie- 
tate, vel extra eam ad Congregationem vocare, facere id 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



62 CONSTITUTIONUM 

poterit; ut cum omnium sententias audierit, melius, quod 
convenit, constituat. 

7 Erit Syndicus unus generalis, qui tam de personis^ quam 
de rebus (de quibus videbitur) Rectorem et Praepositum 
Provincialem et Generalem admoneat ; qui quidem Syn- 
dicus vir magnae fidelitatis et judicii esse debebit : Prae- 
ter hunc, suos habebit Syndicos particulares Rector : ut 
quae quavis in classe acciderint, quibus providere opor- 
teat^ ad ipsum referant. Et ut ipse de omnibus PrcB- 
ceptoribuSj et aliis de Societate ; ita et CollateraliSj et 
SyndicuSy et Consiliarii de ipso^ et de aliis scribent semel 
singulis annis Praposito Generali^ et bis Provinciali, qui 
Generalem (si quid oportueritj admonebit : ut in omnibus 
majori cum circunspectione et cura praestandi quod 
quisque debet, procedatur. 

8 De aliquibus insigniis, num eis Rector, Cancellarius^ 
Bidelli, Doctores, et Magistri, ut in Universitate cog- 
noscantur, vel certe in actibus publicis uti debeant, nec 
ne, et si utantur, qualia esse debeant, considerationi 
Generalis tunc existentis, ciim aliqua Universitas ad- 
mittitur, relinquetur. Ille autem per se, vel per alium^ 
expensis circunstantiis, quod judicaverit ad majorem 
Dei gloriam et obsequium, et bonum universale fore 
(qui unicus scopus in hac et in omnibus rebus nobis est) 
constituet. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



QUINTA PARS; 

de iisy qtuB ad admittendum in corpm Societatis pertinent. 



DE ADMISSIONE^ ET QUIS^ ET QUANDO DEBEAT 
ADMITTERE. 

CAP. I. 

1 /^^UI in Societate, quantum satis est, probati fuerunt, 
^P|f et tandiu ut utrinque intelligi jam possit^ num in 

eadem manere ad majus Dei obsequium et gloriam 
conveniat ; admitti debent, non, ut prius, ad probatio- 
nem, sed modo magis intemo, ut membra unius ac 
ejusdem corporis Societatis. Hujusmodi autem sunt in 
primis, qui ad professionem, vel in Coadjutores formatos 
admittuntur. Sed quia Scholastici approbati etiam 
modo quodam interiori^ quam admissi ad probationem^ 
in corpus Societatis cooptantur; de eorum quoque ad- 
missione in hac quinta parte dicetur^ quid in Domino 
observandum videatur. 

2 Primo quidem facultas admittendi in corpus Societatis 
eos, quos admitti oportebit, penes ejus caput erit; ut 
ratio postulat. Sed quia Praepositus Generalis tam 
variis locis interesse non potest ; aliis de Societate eam 
partem hujus facultatis, quae ad totius corporis hujus 
bonum facere videbitur, poterit communicare. 

3 Tempus ad admittendum modo superius dicto, in imi- 
versum loquendo, post biennium esse oportebit ; Sed si 
quis ante, quam ad studia mitteretur, vel in eisdem diu 
probatus fuisset, post illa absoluta, si ad professionem 
est admittendus^ integrum adhuc probationis annum 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



64 CONSTITUTIONUM 



habebit; ut magis perspectus sit ante, quam eam emit- 
tat. Et prorogari hoc tempus poterit (ut in Examine 
dictum est) cum Societas, vel qui ab ea hanc in Domino 
curam habet, plenius sibi satisfieri desideraret. 



QUALES ESSE DEBEANT, QUI ADMITTENDI SUNT. 

CAP. II. 

1 CuM nullo ex his modis admitti debeat, nisi qui idoneus 
in Domino fuerit existimatus ; Illi ad professionem 
idonei habebuntur, quorum vita diutumis ac diligentibus 
probationibus a Praeposito Generali (ad quem referent 
particulares Praepositi, vel alii, quorum testimonium 
Generalis requiret) perspecta valde approbata fuerit. Ad 
hoc autem conferet illis, qui ad studia missi fuerunt, 
absoluta jam ea cura et diligentia, quae ad excolendum 
intellectum adhibita fuerit, ultimae probationis tempore 
in schola afiectus diligentius se exercere, et in rebus 
spiritualibus, et corporaUbus, quae ad profectum in hu- 
militate et abnegatione universi amoris sensualis^ volun- 
tatisy et judidi proprii, et ad majorem cognitionem et 
amorem Dei conferunt, insistere; ut cum in seipsis 
profecerint, melius ad profectum spiritus alios ad gloriam 
Dei et Domini nostri juvent. 

2 Doctrina etiam in hujusmodi sufficiens esse debebit, ac 
praeter humaniores litteras, et Artes liberales, etiam in 
Theologia Scholastica et sacris litteris satis versati esse 
debebunt. Et quanvis aliqui breviori tempore non 
minorem progressum, quam alii longiori, facere possent ; 
nihilominus, ut communis aliqua mensura sumatur, 
spatium aliquod temporis praescribetur, et hoc erit, qua- 
driennium integrum post Artium liberalium et Philoso- 
phiae studia in Theologia explevisse. Ut ergo ad pro- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUINTA. 65 

fessionem quis admittatur^ in ea facultate hoc tempus se 
exercuisse, et quidem ad gloriam Dei satis in ea pro- 
fecisse convenit ; et in profectus hujusmodi testimonium 
quisque ante professionem Assertiones Logices, Philoso- 
phiae, et Theologiae Scholasticae tuebitur. Gluatuor 
autem ad argumentandum et judicandum de eorum doc- 
trina, an sit quanta oportet, prout juxta veritatem syn- 
cere senserint, deUgantur. Quod si doctrina ea praediti 
esse, quae satis sit, non invenientur ; conducibiHus erit, 
nt, donec eam consequantur, expectent : ut illos etiam 
expectare oportebit, qui in abnegatione sui ipsorum et 
virtutibus Religioso dignis testimonium, quod par esset, 
nondum omnino retulerunt. 

3 Praeter hos, nonnuUi ad trium votorum solennium pro- 
fessionem admitti possent, raro tamen, et non sine causis 
pecuharibus alicujus momenti : et hos certe septem 
annos in Societate notos fuisse, et non mediocrem sui 
talenti, ac virtutum satisfactionem ad gloriam Dei prae- 
buisse in ea oportebit. 

4 Ut quis etiam in Coadjutorem formatum admittatur, 
oportet Societati esse satisfactum de ejus vita, deque 
bono exemplo ac talento ad se juvandam vel cum Utteris 
in rebus spiritualibus, vel sine iUis in exterioribus, prout 
cuique divina bonitas dona sua communicaverit. Hoc 
ipsum autem metiatur oportet Praepositi GeneraUs pru- 
dentia; nisi alicui ex particularibus, cui multum in 
Domino confideret, id committendum videretur. 

5 Ut aUqui admittantur in Scholasticos approbatos ; qua- 
dam proportione servata, eadem requiruntur; et id 
pecuUari quadam ratione ; ut ex eorum ingenio atque 
indole in viros doctos eos evasuros Praepositi Generalis 
judicio, vel ejus, cui hoc munus ille (confidendo pru- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



66 CONSTITUTIONUM 

dentiae ac probitati a Deo ipsi donata) commiserit^ spe- 
retur. 



DE MODO ADMITTENDI AD PROFESSIONEM. 

CAP. III. 

1 GluANDO aliqui, peraeto probationis tempore, et experi- 
mentis, ac aliis, quae in Examine continentur, confectis, 
ad professionem admittendi fuerint ; ciim Societati, vel 
ejus Praeposito Generali plene sit in Domino satisfactum, 
professio hoc modo^ qui sequitur, emittetur. 

2 In primis Praepositus Generalis, vel qui accepta ab eo 
fadultate^ ad professionem admittet, postquam publicae 
missae sacrificium obtulerit in ecclesia coram domesticis 
et aliis externis, qui interfiierint, cum sanctissimo Sacra- 
mento Eucharistiae ad eum, qui professionem est emis- 
surus, se convertat : Ille autem absoluta generali con- 
fessione, et verbis, quae ante communionem dici solent, 
voce alta Votum suum scriptum (quod aliquot ante dies 
consideraverit oportet) leget ; cujus formula haec est. 

3 Ego. N. professionem facio, et promitto, omnipotenti 
Deo coram ejus Virgine matre^ et universa coelesti curia, 
ac omnibus circunstantibus, et tibi Patri Reverendo 
Praeposito Generali Societatis Jesu locum Dei tenentiy et 
successoribus tuis ; vel, tibi Reverendo Patri vice Pro- 
positi Generalis Societatis Jesu et successorum ejus^ 
locum Dei tenenti, perpetuam Paupertatem, Castitatem, 
et Obedientiam, et secundiim eam, peculiarem curam 
circa puerorum eruditionem, juxta formam vivendi in 
litteris Apostolicis Societatis Jesu^ et in ejus Constituti- 
onibus contentam. Insuper promitto specialem Obedi- 
entiam summo Pontifici circa missiones ; prout in eisdem 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUINTA. 67 

litteris Apostolicis^ et Constitutionibus continetur : Ro- 
mae, vel alibi^ tali die, mense^ et anno^ et in tali ecclesia. 
Post haec sumet sanctissimum Eucharistise Sacramen- 
tum. Quibus peractis, in hbro, quem ad hoc habebit 
Societas, ejus nomen, qui professionem emisit^ et illius^ 
in cujus manibus emisit, adnotato die, mense^ et anno^ 
scribetur ; et ejus Vota scripta asservabuntur ; ut omni- 
um ad gloriam Dei ratio semper constet. 
Glui ad professionem trium votorum solennium duntaxat 
admittentiu", in ecclesia^ ac coram domesticis et extemis, 
qui aderint, ante quam sanctissimum Christi corpus 
accipiant, ex scripto suum votum juxta formulam se- 
quentem legent. 

Ego. N. Professionem facio^ et promitto omnipotenti 
Deo coram ejus Virgine matre^ et universa coelesti curia, 
ac omnibus circunstantibus, et tibi R. Patri Praeposito 
Generali Societatis Jesu locum Dei fenentiy ac successo- 
ribus tuis ; vel, tibi R. Patri vice Praepositi GeneraUs 
Societatis Jesu, et successorum ejus^ locum Dei tenenti^ 
perpetuam Paupertatem, Castitatem, et Obedientiam, et 
secundum eam, peculiarem curam circa puerorum erudi- 
tionemy juxta formam vivendi in htteris ApostoUcis 
Societatis Jesu, et in ejus Constitutionibus contentam : 
Romae^ vel aUbi, taU die, mense, et anno; et in taU 
ecclesia. Deinde sequetur Communio, et reUqua supe- 
rius dicta. 



DE ADMITTENDIS COADJUTORIBUS FORMATIS^ 

ET SCHOLASTICIS. 

CAP. IV. 

1 Glui in Coadjutores formatos spirituales cum simpUcibus 
votis, et non solennibus admittuntur, in ecclesia, vel 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



68 CONSTITUTIONUM 

sacello domus, aut alio decenti loco, coram domesticis et 
externis, qui aderunt^ in manibus ejus, qui admissurus 
sit, votum suum emittent in hac formula^ quae sequitur, 
id legentes ; 

2 Ego. N. promitto omnipotenti Deo coram ejus Virgine 
matre, et tota coelesti curia, et tibi R. Patri Praeposito 
Generali Societatis Jesu locum Dei tenenti^ et successori- 
bus tuis; vel tibi R. Patri vice Praepositi Generalis 
Societatis Jesu, et successorum ejus, hcum Dei tenentiy 
perpetuam Paupertatem, Castitatem, et Obedientiam, et 
secundum eam, peculiarem curam circa puerorum erudi- 
tionem, juxta modum in litteris Apostolicis^ et Consti- 
tutionibus dictae Societatis expressum ; Romae^ vel alibi, 
in tali loco, die, mense, et anno. Demum sumat sanc- 
tissimum Christi corpus ; et fient reliqua, quae de Pro- 
fessis dicta sunt. 

3 Formula ad Coadjutores in rebus temporalibus admit- 
tendos eadem erit, clausula illa de puerorum institutione 
solum remota. 

Glui, peracta sua priori probatione et experimentis per 
biennium fieri solitis, in Scholasticos approbatos admit- 
tuntur, coram aliquibus domesticis, quanvis non in mani- 
bus cujusquam, vota sua emittent ad hunc modum. 

4 Omnipotens sempiterne Deus, Ego. N. licet undecunque 
divino tuo conspectu indignissimus, fretus tamen pietate 
ac misericordia tua infinita, et impulsus tibi serviendi 
desiderio voveo coram sacratissima Virgine Maria, et 
curia tua coelesti universa divinae Majestati tuae Pauper- 
tatem, Castitatem, et Obedientiam perpetuam in Socie- 
tate Jesu, et promitto eandem Societatem me ingressu- 
rum ; ut vitam in ea perpetuo degam ; omnia intelligendo 
juccta ipsius Societatis Constitutiones. A tua ergo im- 
mensa bonitate et clementia per Jesu Christi sanguinem 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS QUINTA. 69 

peto suppliciter, ut hoc holocaustum in odorem sua- 
vitatis admittere digneris ; et, ut largitus es ad hoc de- 
siderandum et ofFerendum, sic etiam ad explendum, 
gratiam uberem largiaris ; Romae, vel aUbi, tali loco, die, 
mense, et anno. Post haec perinde, ut aUi, sanctissimum 
Christi corpus sument ; et reliqua, quae superius dicta 
sunt, peragentur. 

5 Postquam aliquis in corpus Societatis co-optatus fuerit 
in aUquo gradu, ad alium progredi curare non debet; 
sed in suo perfici, et obsequio Dei et gloriae sese im- 
pendere, ac Superiori, qui sdlicet Christi Domini nostri 
vices gerity curam aliorum omnium relinquere. 

6 Qui in domibus versantur, post biennium vota eadem 
emittere, quae Scholastici, et Christo Domino nostro se 
pbstringere debent ; et id, quanvis studiis applicandi 
non videantur, nec expedire, ut tam cito in Coadjutores 
formatos, vel Professos admittantur, existimetur. Gluod 
si quis propria impulsus devotione ante id tempus 
biennii veUet votis se Deo offerre ; eandem formulam 
sequi poterit; et uno voti sui scripti exemplo tradito 
Superiori, alterum penes se retineat; ut quid Deo ac 
Domino nostro obtulerit, recordetiu*. Et ad hoc ipsum, 
simulque ad devotionem augendam conferet, statutis 
quibusdam temporibus quae congrua videbuntiu*, vota 
sua renovare. Quod quidem non est, obUgatione nova 
se obstringere, sed ejus, qua obstricti sunt in Domino 
recordari, atque eandem confirmare. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SEXTA PARS; 

de iiSy qui admissi, et in corpus Societatis cooptati sunt^ 
quod ad ipsorum personas attinet. 



DE IIS, QUiE AD OBEDIENTIAM PERTINENT. 

CAP. I. 

1 TTT illi, qui jam ad professionem, vel in Coadjutores 
11 formatos admissi sunt, uberiori cum fructu juxta 
nostrum Institutum divino servitio, et proximorum auxi- 
liis se impendant ; aliqua in se ipsis observare debent ; 
quorum praecipua licet ad ea vota, quae Deo et Creatori 
nostro juxta litteras Apostolicas obtulerunt, reducantur ; 
de illis tamen, ut magis et declarentur, et commendentur, 
in hac sexta parte dicetur. Et quoniam quae ad votum 
Castitatis pertinent, interpretatione non indigent ; cum 
constet, quam sit perfecte observanda, nempe enitendo 
Angelicam puritatem imitari et corporis, et mentis no- 
strae munditia : His suppositis, de sancta Obedientia 
dicetur ; in qua quidem virtute omnibus studiose curan- 
dum est, ut eximium progressum faciant, nec solum in 
rebus obligatoriis, sed etiam in aliis; licet nihil aliud, 
quam nutus voluntatis Superioris sine ullo ewpresso pr<B- 
ceptOy videretur. Versari autem debet ob oculos Deus 
Creator ac Dominus noster, propter quem homini obedi- 
entia praestatur: et ut in spiritu amoris, et non cum 
perturbatione timoris procedatur, curandum est, ita ut 
omnes constanti animo incumbamus, ut nihil perfectio- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 71 

nis^ quod divina gratia consequi possimus^ in absoluta 
omnium Constitutionum observatione^ nostrique Insti- 
tuti peeuliari ratione adimplenda praetermittamus : et 
exactissime omnes nervos virium nostrarum ad hanc 
virtutem Obedientiae in primis Summo Pontifici, deinde 
Superioribus Societatis exhibendam intendamus ita^ ut 
omnibus in rebus, ad quas potest ex charitate se Obedi- 
entia extendere, ad ejus vocem perinde, ac si a Christo 
Dommo egrederetur (quandoquidem ipsius hco, ac pro 
ipsius amore et revereniia obedientiam prastamttsj quam 
promptissimi simus^ re quavis^ atque adeo littera a nobis 
inchoata nec dum perfecta studio celeriter obediendi 
relicta ; ad eum scopum vires omnes ac intentionem in 
Domino convertendo ; ut sancta Obedientia tum in exe- 
cutione, tum in voluntate, tum in intellectu sit in nobis 
semper omni ex parte perfecta ; cum magna celeritate, 
spirituali gaudio^ et perseverantia, quicquid nobis in- 
junctum fuerit, obeundo; omnia justa esse, nobis per- 
suadendo; omnem sententiam ac judicium nostrum con- 
trarium cceca quadam obedientia abnegando, et id quidem 
in omnibus, quae a Superiore disponuntur^ ubi definiri 
non possit (quemadmodum dictum est) aliquod peccati 
genus intercedere. Et sibi quisque persuadeat^ quod 
qui sub Obedientia vivunt, se ferri ac regi a divina Pro- 
videntia per Superiores suos sinere debent perinde^ ac si 
cadaver essent^ quod quoquoversus ferri, et quacunque 
ratione tractari se sinit ; vel similiter, atque senis iacw- 
ItiSy qui, ubicunque, et quacunque in re velit eo uti, qui 
eum manu tenet, ei inservit. Sic enim obediens rem 
quamcunque, cui eum Superior ad auxilium totius cor- 
poris Congregationis velit impendere, cum animi hilari- 
tate debet exequi, ac omnino eadstimarcy quod ea ratione 
potius, quam re alia quavis, quam praestare possit pro- 

F 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



72 CON8TITUTIONUM 

priam voluntatem ac judicium diversum sectando, divinae 
voluntati respondebit. 

2 Omnibus itidem maxime eommendatum sit, ut multum 
reverentiae (et praecipue in interiori homine) suis Su- 
perioribus exhibeant, JESUM Christum in eisdem con- 
siderent, ac revereantur, eosdem ex animo ut patres in 
eodem diUgant, ac sic in spiritu charitatis in omnibus 
procedant ; ut nihil ex extemis vel intemis eos celent ; 
quin potius, ut omnia prorsus intelUgant, quo melius in 
via sahitis et perfectionis se dirigant, optare debent. Et 
ea de causa omnes tam Professi^ quam formati Co- 
adjutores semel singuUs annis (et saepius, si Superiori 
visum fuerit) ad suas conscientias in confessione^ vel 
secreto, vel aUa ratione eidem aperiendas propter mag- 
nam ejus rei utiUtatem (ut in Examine dictum est) parati 
esse debebunt, tum etiam ad confessionem generalem, 
quae ab ultima generaU inchoetur, ei, quem Superior sibi 
substituerit, faciendam. 

3 Omnes ad Superiorem suum res, quae eis expetendae 
occurrerint, deferre debent : nec privatus quispiam di- 
recte, vel indirecte sine ejus permissu, et approbatione, a 
Summo Pontifice, nec ab aUo extra Societatem gratiam 
uUam in suum privatum, vel alterius usum petat, aut 
petendam curet : sibique persuadeat, si per Superiorem 
suum, vel cum ejus consensu^ quod optat, non obtinu- 
erit, ne id quidem ad divinum servitium sibi convenire ; 
et, si convenit, cum Superioris consensu, ut qui Christi 
Domini nostri locum erga ipsum tenet, id se consecu- 
turum. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 73 

DE IIS, QUiE AD PAUPERTATEM, QUiEQUE EAM 
CONSEQUUNTUR, PERTINENT. 

CAP. II. 

1 Paupbrtas, ut murus Religionis finnissimus, diligenda 
et in sua puritate eonservanda est; quantum divina 
gratia aspirante fieri poterit. Et quia humanae naturae 
hostis ad hoc propugnaculum ac refugium debilitandum 
(quod Deus Dominus noster Religionibus inspiravit con- 
tra illum, aliosque ReUgiosae perfectionis adversarios) 
eniti solet ea, quae a primis Fundatoribus bene ordinata 
fuerant, immutare per declarationes, vel novas Constitu- 
tiones primo illorum spiritui minime consentaneas : ut 
quod in nobis situm fuerit, hac parte Societati pro- 
spiciamus ; Gluicunque in ea professionem emiserint, se 
ad innovationem Constitutionum in iis, quae ad Pauper- 
tatem pertinent, nihil facturos promittant, nisi aliquo 
modo pro rerum occurrentium ratione eam in Domino 
magis restringendam judicarent. 

2 In domibus, vel ecclesiis, quae a Societate ad auxilium 
animarum admittuntur, redditus nuUi, ne sacristiae qui- 
dem, aut fabricae applicati haberi possint : sed neque uUa 
aUa ratione ita, ut penes Societatem eorum sit uUa dis- 
pensatio: sed in solo Deo, cui per ipsius gratiam ea 
inservit, fiducia constituatur ; qui quidem sine redditibus 
uUis de rebus omnibus convenientibus ad ipsius majorem 
laudem et gloriam nobis prospiciet. 

3 Professi vivant ex eleemosynis, in Domibus scUicet, ciim 
aUquo non mittuntur : nec officium Rectorum ordinari- 
um in CoUegiis, vel Universitatibus Societatis habeant 
fnisi ipsarum necessitas, vel eximia utilitas id eocigeret) 
nec redditibus eorum in Domibus utantur. 

4 Coadjutores, quandiu in Domibus erunt, quae ex elee- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



72 CON8TITUTIONUM 

priam voluntatem ac judicium diversum sectando, divinae 
voluntati respondebit. 

2 Omnibus itidem maxime commendatum sit, ut multum 
reverentiae (et praecipue in interiori homine) suis Su- 
perioribus exhibeant, JESUM Christum in eisdem con- 
siderent, ac revereantur, eosdem ex animo ut patres in 
eodem diligant, ac sic in spiritu charitatis in omnibus 
procedant ; ut nihil ex extemis vel intemis eos celent ; 
quin potius, ut omnia prorsus intelligant^ quo melius in 
via saUitis et perfectionis se dirigant, optare debent. Et 
ea de causa omnes tam Professi, quam formati Co- 
adjutores semel singuUs annis (et saepius, si Superiori 
visum fuerit) ad suas conscientias in confessione^ vel 
secreto, vel alia ratione eidem aperiendas propter mag- 
nam ejus rei utilitatem (ut in Examine dictum est) parati 
esse debebunt, tum etiam ad confessionem generalem, 
quae ab ultima generali inchoetur, ei, quem Superior sibi 
substituerit, faciendam. 

3 Omnes ad Superiorem suum res, quae eis expetendae 
occurrerint, deferre debent : nec privatus quispiam di- 
recte, vel indirecte sine ejus permissu, et approbatione, a 
Summo Pontifice, nec ab aUo extra Societatem gratiam 
uUam in suum privatum, vel alterius usum petat, aut 
petendam curet : sibique persuadeat, si per Superiorem 
suum, vel cum ejus consensu, quod optat, non obtinu- 
erit, ne id quidem ad divinum servitium sibi convenire ; 
et, si convenit, cum Superioris consensu, ut qui Christi 
Domini nostri locum erga ipsum tenet, id se consecu- 
turum. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 73 

DE IIS, QVM AD PAUPERTATEM, QUiEQUE EAM 
CONSEQUUNTUR, PERTINENT. 

CAP. II. 

1 Paupbrtas, ut murus Religionis firmissimus, diligenda 
et in sua puritate conservanda est; quantum divina 
gratia aspirante fieri poterit. Et quia humanae naturae 
hostis ad hoc propugnaculum ac refugium debilitandum 
(quod Deus Dominus noster Religionibus inspiravit con- 
tra illum, aliosque Religiosae perfectionis adversarios) 
eniti solet ea, quae a primis Fundatoribus bene ordinata 
fuerant, immutare per declarationes, vel novas Constitu- 
tiones primo illorum spiritui minime consentaneas : ut 
quod in nobis situm fuerit, hac parte Societati pro- 
spiciamus ; Quicunque in ea professionem emiserint, se 
ad innovationem Constitutionum in iis, quae ad Pauper- 
tatem pertinent, nihil facturos promittant, nisi aliquo 
modo pro rerum occurrentium ratione eam in Domino 
magis restringendam judicarent. 

2 In domibus, vel ecclesiis, quae a Societate ad auxiUum 
animarum admittuntur, redditus nulli, ne sacristiae qui- 
dem, aut fabricae applicati haberi possint : sed neque ulla 
aUa ratione ita, ut penes Societatem eorum sit uUa dis- 
pensatio: sed in solo Deo, cui per ipsius gratiam ea 
inservit, fiducia constituatur ; qui quidem sine redditibus 
idUs de rebus omnibus convenientibus ad ipsius majorem 
laudem et gloriam nobis prospiciet. 

3 Professi vivant ex eleemosynis, in Domibus scilicet, ciim 
aUquo non mittuntur : nec officium Rectorum ordinari- 
um in CoUegiis, vel Universitatibus Societatis habeant 
fnisi ipsarum necessitaSy vel eximia utilitas id eooigeretj 
nec redditibus eorum in Domibus utantur. 

4 Coadjutores, quandiu in Domibus erunt, quae ex elee- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



74 CONSTITUTIONUM 

mosynis vivimt, et ipsi eodem modo vivent : In Col- 
legiis^ si Rectores fiierint, vel Leetores, aut alioqui in 
rebus necessariis, vel valde convenientibus eisdem Col- 
legiis utiles fuerint, vivent, sicut reKqui, ex eorum red- 
ditibus, quandiu eorum opera CoUegia indigebunt. Cum 
autem desierint utiles esse Collegiis, desinent in eis ha- 
bitare ; et in Domibus Societatis, ut de Professis est 
dictum, habitabunt. 

5 Non solum redditus, sed nec possessiones ullas habeant 
in particulari nec in communi Domus vel Ecclesiae 
Societatis, praeterquam quod ad habitationem, vel usum 
necjBssarium eis, aut valde conveniens fuerit ; cujusmodi 
duceretur, si in usum convalescentium, vel eorum qui, 
ut rebus spiritualibus vacent, se ab hominum frequentia 
recipiunt, locus aliquis a communi habitatione separatus, 
qui aere salubriori, et aUis commodis poUeret, admittere- 
tur ; et tunc hujusmodi iUe sit, ut nec aUis locetur, nec 
fructus, qui reddituum loco esse possint, habeat. 

6 Quanvis ad bona et sancta opera, et maxime perpetuo 
duratura incitare laudabUe sit, ob majorem tamen aedifi- 
cationem nuUus de Societate debet, nec potest quen- 
quam aUum ad eleemosynas perpetuas domibus vel eccle- 
sus ejusdem Societatis reUnquendas incitare : et si aUqui 
sponte sua eas reUnquerent; nuUum jus civUe ad eas 
petendas acquiratur ita, ut in judicio conveniri, qui non 
solveret, posset. Sed cum ad id charitas propter Deum 
eos moverit, tunc eas elargiantur. 

7 Omnes, qui sub Obedientia sunt Societatis, meminerint 
se gratis dare debere, quae gratis acceperunt, nec postu- 
lando, nec admittendo stipendium, vel eleemosynas uUas, 
quibus missae, vel confessiones, vel praedicationes, vel 
lectiones, vel visitationes, vel quodvis aUud officium ex 
iis, quae Societas juxta nostrum Institutum exercere 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 75 

potest, compensari videatur ; ut sic majori cum libertate 
possit et proximorum aedificatione in divino servitio pro- 
cedere. 

8 Ut omnis avaritiae species evitetur, praecipue in piis 
ministeriis^ quibus ad animarum auxilium Societas uti- 
tur ; nulla sit in ecclesia arca, in quam eleemosynae ab 
iis^ qui ad conciones^ missas^ vel confessiones^ et reliqua 
spiritualia ad eam conveniunt^ conjici solent. 

9 Eadem de causa mimuscula^ quae Magnatibus ad res 
majores ab ipsis obtinendas offerri solent^ ne offerantur; 
nec hujusmodi primarios viros frequenter invisere nostri 
consuescant; nisi sancto studio piorum operum duce- 
rentur, vel quando intima benevolentia in Domino tam 
essent conjucti, ut hujusmodi officium aliquando eis de- 
beri videretur. 

10 Parati sint ad mendicandum ostiatim^ quando vel obedi- 
entia^ vel indigentia id exiget. Et sit unus^ vel plures 
ad eleemosynas petendas, quibus domus sustententur^ 
destinati; et eas cum sancta simplicitate propter amorem 
Dei illi petant. 

11 Ut nihil proprium domi teneri, ita nec foris apud alios 
potest. Et quisque iis, quae de communi data fuerint 
ad usum suum necessarium aut convenientem^ resecatis 
superfluis, sit contentus. 

12 Quo melius Paupertatis puritas^ et quies illa quam 
secum affert, conservetur ; non solum particulares Pro- 
fessi, vel Coadjutores formati haereditariae successionis 
erunt expertes; verum nec Domus, nec Ecclesiae, nec 
Collegia eorum ratione succedent. Sic enim omnibus 
Utibus et controversiis praecisis, charitas cum omnibus 
ad Dei gloriam melius conservabitur. 

13 Quando summus Pontifex, vel Superior hujusmodi Pro- 
fessos, vel Coadjutores ad laborandum in vineam Domini 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



76 CONSTITUTIONUM 

mittet ; nullum viaticum petere debent, sed se liberaliter 
offerre, ut mittantur^ prout illis ad majorem Dei gloriam 
fore videbitur. 

14 Ut in hac etiam parte modo copsentaneo syncerae pau- 
pertati procedatur ; nulla in Domibus Societatis jumenta 
ad equitandum ad usum alicujus de ipsa Societate (sive 
Praepositus, sive subditus ille sit) ordinarie habeantur. 

1 5 In vestitus itidem ratione tria observentur ; Primum, ut 
honestus ille sit; Alterum, ut ad usum loci, in quo 
vivitur accommodatus ; Tertium, ut professioni pauper- 
tatis non repugnet. Videretur autem repugnare, si 
seripis, vel preciosis utcunque pannis uteremur, a quibus 
abstinendum est ; ut in omnibus humilitatis et submis- 
sionis debita ad majorem Dei gloriam ratio habeatur. 

16 In iis, quae ad rationem victus, somni, ac usus reliquarum 
rerum vitae necessariarum, vel convenientium spectant^ 
quanvis communis illa sit, minimeque diversa ab eo, 
quod medicus iUius loci, in quo vivitur, judicabit^ ita, ut 
quod quisque sibi inde subtraxerit, ex devotione, non ex 
obligatione^ subtrahat ; habenda tamen semper erit ratio 
humilitatis; paupertatis^ ac spiritualis aedificationis^ quae 
semper nobis in Domino ob oculos versari debet. 



DE IIS REBUS, IN QUIBUS OCCUPARI, ET A QUIBUS 

ABSTINERE DEBET SOCIETAS. 

CAP. III. 

1 Q,uoNiAM habita ratione temporis, ac approbationis 
vitae, quae expectatur, ut aliqui ad professionem, vel in 
Coadjutores formatos in Societate admittantur; tanquam 
certum ducitur, eos viros spirituales futuros ; et qui sic in 
via Christi Domini nostri profecerint, ut per eam currere 
possint^ quantum corporis habitudo et externae occupa- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 77 

tiones charitatis atque obedientiae permittent, non vide- 
tur in iis, quae ad orationem^ meditationem^ et studium 
pertinent, ut nec in corporali exercitatione jejuniorum, 
vigiliarum, aut aliarum rerum ad austeritatem vel cor- 
poris castigationem spectantium ulla regula eis prae- 
scribenda, nisi quam discreta charitas unicuique dicta- 
verit: dum tamen semper Confessarius consulatur, et, 
ubi dubium acciderit, quid conveniat, res ad Superiorem 
referatur. Hoc tamen dicetur in universum ; esse qui- 
dem animadvertendum, ne nimius hujusmodi rerum usus 
tantopere vires corporis debilitet, tantumque temporis 
eos distineat ; ut deinde spirituali proximorum auxilio 
juxta nostri Instituti rationem non sufficiant : nec con- 
tra tanta in iUis sit relaxatio ; ut, fervore spiritus refri- 
gescente, humani ac inferiores affectus incalescant. 

2 Sacramentorum frequentatio valde commendetur. Dif- 
ferri autem non debet Communio, aut missa celebratio 
sine causis judicio Superioris legitimis ultra octo dies : 
omnesque assignato sibi Confessario, vel alioqui juxta 
ordinem, quem quisque praescriptum habet a Superiore, 
confiteantur. 

3 Ex Regulis particularibus, quae in Domibus, ubi ipsi 
fuerint, observantur, debent operam dare, ut eam partem 
obs^rvent quae conveniens est, ac judicio Superioris ipsis 
imponetur; sive ad profectum vel aedificationem suam 
id sit, sive etiam aliorum, inter quos versautur. 

4 Q,uoniam occupationes, quae ad animarum auxilium 
assumuntur, magni momenti sunt, ac nostri Instituti 
propriae, et valde frequentes; cumque alioqui nostra 
habitatio tam sit in hoc vel in illo loco incerta: non 
utentur nostri choro ad horas canonicas, vel missas, et 
alia officia decantanda : quandoquidem illis, quos ad ea 
audienda devotio moverit, abunde suppetet ubi sibi ipsis 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



78 CON8TITUTIONUM 

satisfaciant. Per nostros autem ea traetari convenit^ 
quse nostrae vocationi ad Dei gloriam magis sunt con- 
sentanea. 

5 Cum homines itidem hujus Societatis semper parati 
esse debeant ad discurrendum per quasvis mundi partes^ 
quo fuerint a Summo Pontifice, vel a suis Superioribus 
missi ; non debent curam animarum^ neque item Muli- 
erum ReUgiosarum^ vel aliarum quarumcunque susci- 
pere, ut ordinarie illarum confessiones audiant^ vel ipsas 
regant ; Quanvis nihil repugnet semel unius Monasterii 
confessiones ob speciales causas audire. 

6 Obligari etiam ad missas perpetuas in suis ecclesiis di- 
cendas^ vel ad curam similem^ quam Ubertas nostro pro- 
cedendi modo in Domino necessaria non patitur^ minime 
convenit. 

7 Ut plenius possit Societas rebus spiritualibus juxta 
suum Institutum vacare ; quoadejus fieri poterit, a ne- 
gotiis secularibus abstineant (quaUa simt testamentari- 
orum, vel executorum, vel procuratorum rerum civilium, 
aut id genus ofiicia) nec ea ullis precibus adducti obeun- 
da suscipiant^ vel in illis se occupari sinant. Quod si 
CoUegiorum aUqua negotia tractanda fuerint^ suos ha- 
beant procuratores^ per quos ea tractent^ et jura sua 
tueantur. Si vero ad domos Societatis^ vel ad totum 
ejus corpus pertinent : quo pacem suam meUus conser- 
vare possit Societas ; idem procurator, vel aUus ex 
Coadjutoribus, vel demum aUquis extra Societatem^ aut 
FamiUa quaepiam, quae domus patrociniiun susciperet, 
jus Societatis ad majorem Dei gloriam posset defendere. 

8 Eadem de causa, utque inquietudinis a nostra professi- 
one aUenae occasiones evitentur, et meUus pax ac bene- 
volentia cum omnibus ad majorem Dei gloriam conserve- 
tur, nemo ex Professis, vel Coadjutoribus, vel etiam 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 79 

Scholasticis Societatis in causis civilibus^ nedum crimi- 
nalibus^ se exammari (nisiy qui ad peccatum obligare 
potesty compelleret) sine licentia Superioris permittat. 
Superior autem eam minime dabit, nisi in causis, quse 
ad Religionem Catholicam pertinent, vel alioqui in piis, 
quae sic cedunt in hujus favorem, ut in alterius detri- 
mentum non cedant ; Quandoquidem Instituti nostri est, 
sine cujusquam oflFensione, quantum fieri potest, omnium 
in Domino commodis inservire. 



DE AUXILIO, QUOD MORIENTIBUS IN SOCIETATE, ET DE 
SUFFRAGIIS, QU^ MORTUIS EADEM PRiESTANTUR. 

CAP. IV. 

1 Ut in vita universa, ita et in morte et midto impensius 
unusquisque de Societate eniti, et curare debet, ut in seip- 
so Deus ac Dominus noster JESUS Christus glorifice- 
tur, ipsiusque beneplacitum impleatur, et proximi aedifi- 
centur, saltem in exemplo patientise, ac fortitudinis, cum 
fide viva, ac spe, et amore bonorum illorum aetemorum, 
quae nobis Christus Dominus noster tam incompara- 
bilibus vitae suae temporalis laboribus, et morte pro- 
meruit, et acquisivit. Ciim tamen persaepe hujusmodi 
sit morbi ratio, ut usum virium animae magna ex parte 
impediat; ciimque hujusmodi sit ille a temporali vita 
transitus ut propter graves impugnationes Daemonis (a 
quo summopere refert tunc non superari) requirat pecu- 
liari modo subsidium fratemae charitatis; sollicite ad- 
vertat Superior, ut, qui juxta Medici sententiam de vita 
periclitatur, antequam usu judicii privetur, omnibus 
Sacramentis sanctis acceptis, tanquam armis a divina 
liberalitate Christi Domini nostri nobis concessis. ad 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



78 CONSTITUTIONUM 

satisfaciant. Per nostros autem ea tractari convenit^ 
quae nostrae vocationi ad Dei gloriam magis sunt con- 
sentanea. 

5 Cum homines itidem hujus Societatis semper parati 
esse debeant ad discurrendum per quasvis mundi partes, 
quo fiierint a Summo Pontifice, vel a suis Superioribus 
missi ; non debent curam animarum^ neque item Muli- 
erum Religiosarum^ vel aliarum quarumcunque susci- 
pere^ ut ordinarie illarum confessiones audiant^ vel ipsas 
regant ; Quanvis nihil repugnet semel unius Monasterii 
confessiones ob speciales causas audire. 

6 Obligari etiam ad missas perpetuas in suis ecclesiis di- 
cendas^ vel ad curam similem^ quam libertas nostro pro- 
cedendi modo in Domino necessaria non patitur^ minime 
convenit. 

7 Ut plenius possit Societas rebus spiritualibus juxta 
suum Institutum vacare ; quoadejus fieri poterit^ a ne- 
gotiis secularibus abstineant (qualia simt testamentari- 
orum^ vel executorum, vel procuratorum rerum civilium, 
aut id genus officia) nec ea ullis precibus adducti obeun- 
da suscipiant, vel in illis se occupari sinant. Quod si 
Collegiorum aliqua negotia tractanda fuerint^ suos ha- 
beant procuratores, per quos ea tractent, et jura sua 
tueantur. Si vero ad domos Societatis, vel ad totum 
ejus corpus pertinent : quo pacem suam meUus conser- 
vare possit Societas ; idem procurator, vel alius ex 
Coadjutoribus, vel demum aliquis extra Societatem, aut 
Familia quaepiam, quae domus patrocinium susciperet, 
jus Societatis ad majorem Dei gloriam posset defendere. 

8 Eadem de causa, utque inquietudinis a nostra professi- 
one alienae occasiones evitentur, et melius pax ac bene- 
volentia cum omnibus ad majorem Dei gloriam conserve- 
tur, nemo ex Professis, vel Coadjutoribus, vel etiam 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 79 

Scholasticis Societatis in causis civilibus^ nedum crimi- 
nalibus^ se exammari fnisiy qui ad peccatum ohligare 
potest, compelleretj sine licentia Superioris permittat, 
Superior autem eam minime dabit^ nisi in causis, quae 
ad Religionem Catholicam pertinent, vel alioqui in piis, 
quae sic cedunt in hujus favorem, ut in alterius detri- 
mentum non cedant ; Quandoquidem Instituti nostri est, 
sine cujusquam oflFensione, quantum fieri potest, omnium 
in Domino commodis inservire. 



DE AUXILIO, QUOD MORIENTIBUS IN SOCIETATE, ET DE 
SUFFRAGIIS, QU^ MORTUIS EADEM PRiESTANTUR. 

CAP. IV. 

1 Ut in vita universa, ita et in morte et multo impensius 
unusquisque de Societate eniti, et curare debet, ut in seip- 
so Deus ac Dominus noster JESUS Christus glorifice- 
tur, ipsiusque beneplacitum impleatur, et proximi aedifi- 
centur, saltem in exemplo patientiae, ac fortitudinis, cum 
fide viva, ac spe, et amore bonorum illorum aetemorum, 
quae nobis Christus Dominus noster tam incompara- 
bilibus vitae suae temporaKs laboribus, et morte pro- 
meruit, et acquisivit. Cum tamen persaepe hujusmodi 
sit morbi ratio, ut usum virium animae magna ex parte 
impediat; cumque hujusmodi sit ille a temporali vita 
transitus ut propter graves impugnationes Daemonis (a 
quo summopere refert tunc non superari) requirat pecu- 
liari modo subsidium fratemae charitatis; sollicite ad- 
vertat Superior, ut, qui juxta Medici sententiam de vita 
periclitatur, antequam usu judicii privetur, omnibus 
Sacramentis sanctis acceptis, tanquam armis a divina 
liberalitate Christi Domini nostri nobis concessis, ad 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



80 CONSTITUTIONUM 

transitum a temporali vita ad aetemam^ se muniat^ atque 
corroboret. 
2 Simul eum orationibus omnium domesticorum ad id 
serio adhibitis^ donec animam suo Creatori reddat, ju- 
vari curet. Et praeter alios, qui ingredi possunt, plures, 
aut pauciores pro arbitrio Superioris, aliqui delecti sint 
oportet peculiarius ut infirmum morti proximum in- 
visant, et ei assistant, et animosiorem reddant, eaque 
suggerant, eisque auxiliis juvent, quae eo tempore con- 
venient : et ciim jam alia officia parum erunt utilia, eum 
Domino commendent; donec ejus animam a corpore 
discedentem dignetur ad se recipere, qui eam tam caro 
pretio sanguinis et vitae suae redemit. 
^ 3 Posteaquam quis expiraverit, usque ad sepulturam ejus 
corpus decenter, quandiu conveniet, teneatur. Post- 
modum absoluto officio coram domesticis pro more sepeli- 
atur, et mane proximo post ejus mortem omnes sacer- 
dotes domestici pro ejus anima tnissae sacrificium offe- 
rant ; reliqui vero peculiari oratione pro eodem divinam 
implorent clementiam, atque in eo perseverent ulterius, 
juxta Superioris arbitrium, vel cujusvis privatam devoti- 
onem, vel obligationem ; si qua in Domino intercedat. 
4 Reddantur etiam certiores alii de Societate in locis illis, 
quae Superior convenire judicaverit, ut simile officium 
praestent charitatis; quae erga hos, qui vita perfuncti 
sunt, non minor, quam erga viventes, in Domino explicari 
debet. 

QUOD CONSTITUTIONES PECCATI OBLIGATIONEM 
NON INDUCUNT. 

CAP. V. 

1 CuM exoptet Societas universas suas Constitutiones, De- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEXTA. 81 

clarationes^ ac vivendi ordinem omnino juxta nostrum 
Institutum, nihil ulla in re declinando, observari ; opor- 
tet etiam nihilominus suos omnes securos esse, vel certe 
adjuvari, ne in laqeum ullius peccati, quod ex vi Consti- 
tutionum hujusmodi, aut ordinationum proveniat, inci- 
dant : Visum est nobis in Domino praeter expressum 
Votum, quo Societas Summo Pontifici pro tempore 
existenti tenetur, ac tria alia essentialia Paupertatis, 
Castitatis, et Obedientiae, nuUas Constitutiones^ Decla- 
rationes, vel ordinem ullum vivendi posse obligationem 
ad peccatum mortale vel veniale inducere ; NISI 
SUPERIOR EA IN NOMINE DOMINI NOSTRI 
JESU CHRISTI, VEL IN VIRTUTE SANCT.E 
OBEDIENTI.E JUBERET ; QUOD IN REBUS, 
VEL PERSONIS ILLIS, IN QUIBUS JUDICA- 
BITUR, QUOD AD PARTICULAREM UNIUS- 
CUJUSQUE, VEL AD UNIVERSALE BONUM 
MULTUM CONVENIET, FIERI POTERIT ; ET 
LOCO TIMORIS OFFENSiE SUCCEDAT AMOR 
OMNIS PERFECTIONIS ET DESIDERIUM : 
UT MAJOR GLORIA ET LAUS CHRISTI CRE- 
ATORIS, AC DOMINI NOSTRI CONSEQUA- 
TUR. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SEPTIMA PARS; 

de iisy qtuB pertinent ad admissos in corpus Societatis ad 

proanmorum utilitatem per vineam Domini 

distribuendos. 



DE MISSIONIBUS SUMMI PONTIFICIS. 

CAP. 1. 

1 T TT in sexta parte de iis dictum est, quae observanda 
^J sunt cuique de Societate erga se ipsum ; ita in hac 
septima de iis dicendum est, quae erga proximos (qui 
finis nostri Instituti valde proprius est) dum dividuntur 
per Christi vineam, ut in ea illius parte, atque opere, 
quod ipsis commissum fuerit, se exerceant, observari 
debent, sive a summo Christi Domini nostri Vicario, 
sive a Superioribus Societatis^ qui etiam divince Majes^ 
tatis loco ipsis prtesunty per diversa loca mittantur ; sive 
ipsimet sibi eligant ubi, et qua in re occupentur; si 
ipsorum judicio relictum fiierit, ut discurrant quacun- 
que majus Dei et Domini nostri obsequium^ et anima- 
rum profectus assequi se posse arbitrentur; sive labor 
non in diversa^ sed in stabili ac continua habitatione in 
aliquibus locis, ubi magnus divinae gloriae et obsequii 
proventus speratur, sit impendendus. Et, ut primo 
loco de missione summi Pontificis inter caeteras prae- 
cipua tractetur, animadvertendum est ; quod eo fertur 
intentio Voti illius^ quo se obedientiae summi Christi 
Vicarii sine ulla excusatione Societas obstrinxit ; ut 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEPTIMA. 83 

quocunque gentium ad majorem Dei gloriam et anima- 
rum auxilium inter fideles; vel infideles^ nos mittendos 
censuerit, nos conferamus. Nec intellexit Societas par- 
ticularem aliquem locum ; sed ut per orbem in diversas 
regiones, et loca ab eo spargeretur : cum optaret, quod 
factu optimum esset, eligere, idque speraret fiiturum, si 
hanc ipsius distributionem summus Pontifex faceret. 

2 Et in hac parte, ciim omnem proprium sensum ac volun- 
tatem Christo Domino nostro^ et ejus Vicario Societas 
subjecerit, nec Praepositus Generalis Societatis pro se 
ipso, nec quisquam alius ex inferioribus pro se vel pro 
alio curare nec tentare mediate^ vel immediate cum 
summo Pontifice, vel ejus ministris poterit ; ut residere 
vel mitti potius in hanc partem, quam in illam debeat : 
sed inferiores hanc curam universam summo Christi 
Vicario ac Superiori suo ; Superior vero, quod ad suam 
personam attinet^ summo Pontifici^ et ipsi Societati in 
Domino relinquat. 

3 Praeterea, qui a summo Pontifice designatus fuerit, ut 
aliquo se conferat; seipsum liberaliter, re temporali 
nulla pro viatico per se, vel per alium postulata, offerat ; 
quin potius sic velit a simmio Pontifice mitti, ut ejus 
Sahctitas ad gratius Dei et sedis Apostolicae obsequium 
fore, nulla rei alterius in eo habita ratione, judicaverit. 

4 Si summus Pontifex personam non designaret ; sed ali- 
quem, vel plures ad hunc, vel illum locum proficisci 
juberet, Superioris arbitrio relinquendo, qui sint ad 
hujusmodi missionem aptiores : Superior juxta ejus 
praeceptum eos, qui magis convenire^ et aptiores ad id 
fore videbuntur, designabit. Qua in re majus bonum 
universale intuebitur, et ut quam minimiun detrimentum 
alia opera^ quae ad Dei obsequium suscepta fuerint, pati- 
antur. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



84 CONSTITUTIONUM 

5 Ei, qui sic missus fiierit, plane declarari convenit pluri- 
miim missionem suam^ et scopum, quo fertur summi 
Pontificis intentio ; et hoc, si fieri potest^ in scriptis^ quo 
exactius^ quod ei injunctum fuerit, expleri possit. Eun- 
dem etiam Superior juvare consiliis ac instructione, 
quoadejus fieri poterit, curabit ; ut in omnibus ad Dei 
et sedis Apostolicae obsequium, utilius suum impendat 
ministerium, 

6 Si ad particularia loca, tempore minime limitato per 
summum Pontificem mittetur: ad tres menses ibidem 
manendum ei esse intelligatur^ et magis^ aut minus^ pro 
modo majoris aut minoris spiritualis fructus, qui inde 
percipi videbitur, vel alibi sperabitur ; vel demum ut ad 
bonum aliquod universale magis expedire judicabitur. 
QuaB omnia juxta Superioris arbitrium, qui sanctam 
intentionem Pontificis in Christi Domini nostri obsequi- 
um considerabit^ transigentur. 

7 Cum in locis designatis diutius erit residendum ; si fieri 
poterit sine detrimento principaUs missionis^ atque in- 
tentionis summi Pontificis; excursiones aliquas^ si po- 
terit, et cum fructu divini servitii eas fore judicabit, 
facere, non erit inconveniens ; ut in locis vicinis anima- 
rum auxilio serviens, postmodum ad suae residentiae 
locum redeat : in quo quidem praeter id, quod est ei 
peculiari ratione injunctum (ad quod praecipuam etiam 
conferet curam, nec propter alias occasiones, Ucet bonas^ 
divini obsequii posthabebit) potest^ et debet considerare 
quibus aliis in rebus^ quae ad Dei gloriam^ et animarum 
salutem conferant^ suam operam sine detrimento suae 
missionis (ut dictum est) possit impendere. Opportuni- 
tatem autem^ quam Deus ad id dederit, quantum in 
eodem convenire judicabit, e manibus elabi non sinet. 

8 Ad finem nostrae professionis ac promissionis melius 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEPTIMA. 85 

consequendum, Praepositus Generalis, cum novus Christi 
Vicarius in Apostolica sede fuerit constitutus, per se, 
vel per alium intra annum ab ejus creatione et coronati- 
one teneatur ejus Sanctitati declarare professionem, ac 
promissionem expressam Obedientiae, quae ipsi Societas 
peculiari voto circa missiones ad Dei gloriam se obstrin- 
xit. 



DE MISSIONIBUS SUPERIORIS SOCIETATIS. 

CAP. II. 

Quo spirituali animarum necessitati subveniri multis in 
locis majori cum facultate, ac securitate eorum, qui ad id 
fuerint destinati, possit ; Praepositi Generales Societatis, 
juxta facultatem eis a summo Pontifice concessam, mit- 
tere quosvis de Societate poterunt, quocunque magis 
expedire judicabunt; qui tamen ubicunque fuerint, ad 
obedientiam sedis Apostolicae parati erunt. Et quia 
complures sunt, qui aliquos ex nostris sibi concedi pe- 
tant, potius propriae obligationis spiritualis erga suum 
gregem, vel aliorum commodorum a fine nostro magis 
distantium ratione habita, quam communium et univer- 
salium ; Praepositus Generalis, vel qui ab eo hanc habu- 
erit facultatem, diligenter in hujusmodi missionibus 
curet, ut in suis ad hanc potius, quam ad illam partem 
mittendis, et ad hoc opus potius, quam ad illud, et ut 
hanc personam potius, quam illam mittat, hoc, vel illo 
modo, ad prolixius, vel brevius tempus^ id semper, quod 
ad majus Dei obsequium et bonum universale facit, 
statuatur. Cum hac ergo rectissima ac syncerissima 
intentione in Dei acDomini nostri conspectu habita; 
et, si ei videbitur, propter deliberationis difficultatem vel 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



86 CONSTITUTIONUM 

momentum re divinae Majestati suis et domesticorum 
orationibus ac sacrificiis commendata ; et cum aliquo 
vel pluribus ex eadem Societate^ qui videbuntur inter 
eos^ qui adfuerint^ communicata ; statuet per seipsum^ 
num mittere debeat^ nec ne ; et sic de reliquis circun- 
stantiis ; ut ad Dei majorem gloriam convenire judicabit. 
Erit autem ejus, qui mittitur, officium^ nulla ratione se 
ingerendo ad eundum, vel manendum in hoc loco potius, 
quam in illo, plenam ac omnino liberam sui dispositio- 
nem Superiori, qui eum Christi loco regit^ ad ipsius 
majus obsequium et laudem relinquere. Sic etiam^ ut 
alii maneant alicubi, vel alio se conferant, nemo quoquo 
modo sine consensu Superioris sui, per quem ille in 
Domino gubernandus est, curare debet. 
2 Quocunque Superior mittet aliquem, eum plene in- 
struere {et ordinarie in scriptis) debebit tam de modo 
procedendi, quam de mediis, quibus eum uti velit ad 
finem, quem in animo habet. Per crebram etiam litte- 
rarum communicationem^ quantum fieri potest, totius 
successus certior redditus ex eo loco, ubi ipse residet (ut 
personae, et negotia exegerint) consilio^ et aliis auxiliis, 
quaecunque adhiberi possint^ providebit, ut majus ser- 
vitium Deo fiat, magisque commune bonum per perso- 
nas Societatis juvetur : quod tanto majori cura praestari 
debebit ; quanto negotii qualitas (quod vel grave sit, vel 
difficiie) et personarum^ quae missae sunt (quod vel con- 
silio, vel instructione indigeant) id magis exigit. 



DE LIBERA AD HANC VEL ILLAM PARTEM 

PROFECTIONE. 

CAP. III. 

1 QuANVis eorum sit, qui sub obedientia Societatis vivunt. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEPTIMA. 87 

se non obtrudere directe vel indirectS ad sui missionem, 
sive a summo Pontifice, sive a suo Superiore In nomine 
Domini nostri JESU Christi mittantur : qui tamen ad 
regionem aliquam magnam (cujusmodi esset India^ vel 
alise Provinciae) missus est, si pars ejus aliqua peculiari. 
limitatione ei assignata non fuerit, potest magis^ et minus 
in hoc, vel in illo loco immorari, aut discurrere quacun- 
que omnibus perpensis (in se^ quod ad voluntatem suam 
attinet, indifferentiam sentiendo) et oratione facta, judi- 
caverit ad Dei gloriam magis expedire. Hinc colligi 
facile potest ; quod, si privatis id licet, primae et summae 
obedientiae summi Pontificis non repugnando ; multo 
magis in hujusmodi missionibus Superiori ad hanc par- 
tem potius^ quam ad LUam^ prout in Domino senserit 
convenire, eosdem dirigere licebit. 
2 Ubicunque quis maneat^ si non est ei injunctum, ut 
medio aUquo Hmitato utatur, quale esset, legere, vel 
praedicare, in eo se exercebit ex iis, quibus utitur So- 
cietas in sexta parte dictis, et proximo capite dicendis, 
quod magis convenire judicabit, et contra^ quod ibi de- 
vitandum dicitur, ad majus Dei obsequium etiam devita- 
bit. 

QUIBUS IN REBUS DOMUS ET COLLEGIA SOCIETATIS 

PROXIMUM ADJUVENT. 

CAP. IV. 

1 QuiA non solum enititur Societas discurrendo per varia 
loca, sed etiam in quibusdam continenter residendo (ut 
videre est in domibus, vel coUegiis) proximos juvare: 
operse pretium est intellexisse, quibus modis possint 
animae in hujusmodi locis juvari; ut eorum pars illa, 
quae poterit, ad gloriam Dei exerceatur. 

g2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



88 CONSTITUTIONUM 

2 Et primo quidem ad proximorum auxilium conferet 
exemplum totius honestatis ac virtutis Christianae ; ut 
non minus bonis operibus, imo magis, quam verbis, eis 
aedificationi esse, quibuscum agitur, curent. 

3 Juvatur etiam proximus sanctis desideriis, et orationibus 
in Dei conspectu pro universa Ecclesia, ac pro iis prae- 
sertim, qui majoris sunt momenti, ad ejus universale 
bonum effusis, ac pro amicis etiam, et bene de nobis 
meritis viventibus, et vita functis ; sive postulent ipsi, 
sive non postulent ; pro adversariis itidem, si qui fuerint, 
ac pro illis, in quorum auxilium peculiariter ipsi, et reU- 
qui ,de Societate in variis locis inter Fideles, et Infideles 
incumbunt ; ut Deus omnes ad gratiam suam excipi- 
endam per debilia hujus minimae Societatis instrumenta 
disponere dignetur. 

4 In Missarum etiam sacrificiis juvare possunt, et aliis 
divinis officiis, nulla pro eis eleemosyna accepta; sive 
aliqui ea obtinere curaverint; sive pro sua devotione 
quisque ea Deo obtulerit. Et quod attinet ad Missas, 
praeter eas, quae in gratiam Fundatorum dicuntur, unae, 
vel duae, aut plures (pro numero sacerdotum, et alioqui 
prout convenerit) singulis hebdomadis pro benefactoribus 
vivis, ac defunctis ofFerentur, Deum ac Dominum no- 
strum rogando, ut pro illis hoc sanctum sacrificium 
admittere, et pro infinita ac summa liberalitate sua eam 
beneficentiam remunerari, qua illi erga Societatem no- 
stram ex divino amore ac reverentia usi sunt, aeternis 
praemiis dignetur. 

5 Juvatur etiam proximus in Sacramentorum administra- 
tione, ac praecipue in audiendis confessionibus (ad quas 
aUqui a Superiore, qui eo fungantur officio, sunt desig- 
nandi) et in sancto Eucharistiae sacramento^ extra 
Paschae tamen festum, sua in Ecclesia administrando. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS SEPTIMA. 89 

6 Proponatur verbum Dei populo assidue in Ecclesia in 
concionibus, lectionibus, et in Christiana doctrina per eos, 
quos Superior probaverit, et ad tale munus destinaverit, 
et quidem iis temporibus, et modo, qui eidem ad majo- 
rem Dei gloriam et animarum aedificationem expedire 
videbitur. 

7 Potest ad hoc ipsum, quod dictum est extra Ecclesiam 
Societatis, aliis in Ecclesiis^ vel plateis^ vel aliis locis 
praestari ; quando ei, qui caeteris praeest, ad majorem 
Dei gloriam conferre videbitur. 

8 Curabunt etiam privatim proximum piis colloquiis ad 
meliora promovere tum consilio, et exhortatione ad bona 
opera, tum etiam tradendis spiritualibus exercitiis. 

9 Corporalibus etiam pietatis operibus, quantum spiritu- 
alia, quae majoris sunt momenti, permittent, quantumque 
vires patientur, incumbent ; ut in infirmis juvandis, 
praecipue in xenodochiis, eos invisendo, et aUquos, qui 
eis inserviant, mittendo; et dissidentes ad concordiam 
revocando ; sic etiam pauperes, ac in custodiis publicis 
detentos, quoadejus fieri poterit, per se sublevando, et 
ut alii sublevent, curando. Metiatur autem oportet 
Praepositi prudentia (qui majus Dei obsequium ac bonum 
universale semper ob oculos sibi proponet) quantum in 
hujusmodi rebus operae sit ponendum. 

10 In CoUegiis, et eorum Ecclesiis fiet ex iis, quae de domi- 
bus dicta sunt, quod fieri poterit; prout opportunum 
fuerit, juxta Superioris (ut dictum est) arbitrium. 

11 Qui talento praditus ad scribendos libros communi bono 
utilesy eos conscriberety in lucem^ edere non debet, nisi 
prius Pr(jepositus Generalis eos videat^ et aliorum etiam 
judicio et censur<B subjiciat ; uty si ad cedijicationem fore 
videbuntury et non aliter in publicum prodeant. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



^. 



90 CONSTITUTIONUM 

12 De iis, quae ad officia domestica et res alias particulares 
pertinent, in regulis domorum dicetur ; nec ulterius 
circa missiones, vel divisionem eorum, qui de Societate 
sunt, per vineam Domini nostri JESU Christi progredi 
necesse erit. 



OCTAVA PARS; 

de iisy qtue conferunt ad eorumy qui dispersi sunty cum mo 
capite^ et inter se mutuam unionem. 



DE IIS, QUiE JUVANT AD UNIONEM ANIMORUM. 

CAP. I. 

1 /^^UO difficilius est, membra hujus Congregationis 
\J cum suo capite et inter se invicem uniri, quod tam 
sejuncta in diversis mundi partibus inter fideles, et 
infideles sint; eo impensius, quae juvant ad unionem, 
quaerenda sunt : quandoquidem nec conservari nec regi, 
nec (quod inde sequitur) finem, ad quem tendit Societas 
ad majorem Dei gloriam, consequi potest ; si inter se et 
cum capite suo membra ejus unita non fuerint. Dicetur 
ergo de iis, quae conferunt ad animorum unionem ; de- 
inde de iis, quae ad unionem personalem in Congregatio- 
nibus vel conventibus fieri solitam pertinent. Et qui- 
dem circa animorum unionem, quaedam ex parte sub- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 91 

ditorum, quaedam ex parte Superiorum, quaedam ex 
utrorumque profecta juvabunt. 

2 Ex parte subditorum juverit magnam turbam hominum 
ad professionem non admitti ; nec quoscunque, sed selec- 
tos homines etiam inter Coadjutores formatos, aut Scho- 
lasticos retineri. Multitudo enim magna eorum, qui vitia 
sua non bene domuerint ; ut ordinem non ferre, ita nec 
imionem potest, quae in Christo Domino nostro tam 
necessaria est, ut bonus status, ac procedendi modus 
hujus Societatis conservetur. 

3 Et quia hujusmodi unio magna ex parte per obedientide 
vincultitm conficitur ; hsec semper in suo vigore conser- 
vanda est : Et qui foras ad laborandum in agro dominico 
ex domibus mittuntur, quoadejus fieri potest, in eadem 
sint exercitati : et hac in virtute, qui primas in Societate 
tenent, bono sui exemplo aliis praeluceant, et uniti 
omnino cum suo Superiore, prompte, humiUter, et de- 
vote ei obediendo, persistant. Qui autem tam egregium 
sui specimen in obedientia non dedisset, certe ei adjungi 
deberet socius, qui in ea magis esset conspicuus. Nam 
ut plurimum socius, qui in obedientia magis profecit, 
eum, qui minus in ea profecisset, cum divino favore in 
eadem juvabit. Et alioqui, quanvis ad hunc scopum 
non tenderetur, ei, qui cum alioquo munere gubernandi 
mittetur, collateraUs socius (si Superiori videbitur, quod 
sic melius commisso muneri satisfaciet) adjungi poterit : 
qui sic se geret cum eo, qui aliis praeest, et ille invicem 
cum hoc; ut obedientia ac reverentia subditorum de- 
bilior erga Superiorem non reddatur: sed ille potius 
verum ac fidelem adjutorem et sublevatorem erga suam 
personam et aliorum, qui suae fidei commissi sunt, sibi 
datum esse experiatur. 

4 Ad eandem obedientiae virtutem ordo bene observatus 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



92 CONSTITUTIONUM 

inter ipsos Superiores, quorum alii aliis subduntur, , et 
inferiorum erga illos pertinet, ita, ut singuli, qui in ali- 
qua domo vel Collegio versantur, ad suum Praepositum 
localem, seu Rectorem recurrant, et per eum in omnibus 
regi se sinant. Eis autem, qui per provinciam aliquam 
variis in locis disjuncti manent^ ad Provincialem Prae- 
positum^ vel alium localem viciniorem erit recurren- 
dum; prout eis injimctum fuerit. Omnes vero Prae- 
positi locales, vel Rectores crebra communicatione cum 
Provinciali utantur, et juxta ejus arbitrium in omnibus 
se gerant. Eodem modo Praepositi Provinciales cum 
Generali se habebunt. Sic enim, subordinatione con- 
servata, unio, quae in ea quam maxime consistit, aspi- 
rante gratia Dei, conservabitur. 

5 Siquis divisionis vel dissensionis eorum, qui una vivunt, 
inter se, vel cum suo capite autor esse cerneretur ; dili- 
gentissime ab ea Congregatione velut pestis, quae eam 
potest summopere inficere, si praesens remedium non 
adhibeatur, separandus est. 

6 Ex parte Praepositi GeneraKs, quae ad hanc unionem 
animorum couferent, sunt eae dotes, quibus (ut in nona 
parte dicetur) eum exornari oportet ; quibus cum prae- 
ditus fuerit, erga omnia membra Societatis suo fungetur 
officio, capitis videhcet, a quo in iUam influxus ad prae- 
fixum ipsi finem necessarius descendat : et sic a GeneraU 
Praeposito, ut a capite, universa facultas ProvinciaUum 
egrediatur, ac per eos ad Locales, per hos autem ad sin- 
gulares personas descendat : sic etiam ab eodem capite 
(vel certe eo suam facultatem communicante, et rem 
approbante) missiones procedant. De communicatione 
gratiarum Societatis tantundem sit dictum. Quo enim 
magis inferiores a suis Superioribus pendebunt ; eo 
mehus amor obedientiae atque unio inter eos retinebitur. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 93 

7 Et ut locus magis conveniat ad communicationem capitis 
cum suis membris ; conferre plurimum potest, ut Prae- 
positus Generalis magna ex parte Romae resideat, ubi 
cum aliis omnibus locis Societatis faciliori utetur com- 
mertio. Provinciales itidem in iis locis diutius versa- 
buntur, unde cum inferioribus, et cum superiori Prae- 
posito commoda fuerit communicatio, quantum in Domi- 
no id effici poterit. 

8 Praecipuum utriusque partis vinculum ad membrorum 
inter se et cum capite suo unionem amor est Dei ac Do- 
mini nostri JESU Christi, cum cujus divina ac summa 
bonitate si Superior et inferiores valde uniti fuerint, per- 
facile inter seipsos unientur; idque per eundem illum 
amorem fiet, qui a Deo descendens ad omnes proximos 
ac peculiari ratione ad corpus Societatis pertinget. 
Charitas itaque, et, ut in universum dicatur, omnis pro- 
bitas ac virtus, qua juxta spiritum Dei procedatur, ad 
unionem ex utraque parte juvabit, et, (quod inde sequi- 
tur) omnis rerum temporalium contemptus, in quibus sui 
ipsius amor, gravissimus hujus unionis ac boni univer- 
salis hostis, errare solet. Multum etiam conferet con- 
sensio tum in interioribus ; ut est doctrina, judicia, ac 
voluntates, quoadejus fieri poterit ; tum etiam in exteri- 
oribus ; ut est vestitus, ceremoniae missae, et reliqua, 
quantum personarum, et locorum, et caeterorum varietas 
permittet. 

9 Magnopere etiam juverit litterarum ultro citroque mis- 
sarum inter inferiores et Superiores frequens commer- 
tium, et crebro alios de aliis certiores fieri ac audire 
quae ex variis locis ad sedificationem, et eorum^ quae 
geruntur, cognitionem, afferuntur ; cujus rei Superiori- 
bus, ac praecipue Generali, et Provincialibus cura erit, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



94 CONSTITUTIONUM 



eo constituto ordine^ ut quovis in loco^ quae ad mutuam 
consolationem et aedificationem in Domino faciimt^ ex 
aliis sciri possint. 



QUIBUS IN CASIBUS CONGREGATIO GENERALIS 
FIERI DEBEAT. 

CAP. II. 

1 Ad unionem personalem ut veniamus, quae in Congre- 
gationibus Societatis fit ; considerandum est, quibus in 
casibus, qui, et per quem, ac itidem, quo in loco, quo 
tempore, et modo debeaut congregari, et id definiri, de 
quo in Congregationibus agetur. Et ut declaretur pri- 
mo loco, quibus in casibus Congregatio, et Conventus 
generalis fiat ; illud in primis suppositum est : quod non 
videtur in Domino in praesentiarum expedire, ut certis 
temporibus aut crebro fiat. Quoniam Praepositus Gene- 
ralis adjutus communicatione, quam cum universa Soci- 
etate habet, et eorum opera, qui cum ipso degunt, hoc 
laboris et distractionis universae Societati, quantum fieri 
poterit, adimet. Aliquando tamen congregari, omnino 
erit necessarium; ut, cum erit de electione Praepositi 
Generalis agendum, sive eligendus sit, qui in demortui 
locum succedat, sive qui subrogetur alteri Praeposito, 
quem cedere officio propter aliquam causam ex iis, quae 
postea dicentur, conveniat. 

2 Altera causa est, ciim dehberari oportebit de rebus per- 
petuis ac magni momenti, quales essent (verbi gratia) 
CoUegia vel domos dissolvere, aut alio transferre, vel res 
admodum difficiles ad universam Societatem spectantes, 
vel eam rationem procedendi in illa, quae ad implendam 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 95 

Dei voluntatem commodissima videatur, explicare et 
constituere. 



QUI DEBEANT CONGREGARI. 

CAP. III. 

NoN omnes, qui sub Obedientia Societatis vivimt, nec 
Scholastici approbati, veriim Professi duntaxat, et prae- 
terea Coadjutores aliqui^ si ita expedire in Domino vide- 
retur, sunt ad Congregationem generalem convocandi ; 
et quidem ex his non nisi commode venire queant. 
Non itaque infirmi ac valetudinarii, nec qui in regioni- 
bus remotissimis agimt, ut in Indiis ; sed nec iUi, qui 
praemanibus negotia habent magni momenti, quae absque 
gravi incommodo, deseri non possunt, convenient. 
Pendebit autem hoc ex judicio Praepositi Generalis, 
si is conventum indixerit, vel eorum, qui congre- 
gati in singuhs Provinciis fuerint, ut venturos ad 
generalem conventum eligant. Verum ut certa aliqua 
ratio in hac congregatione cogenda praescribatur ; Cum 
conventus celebrabitur ad eligendum Generalem, aut ad 
deliberandum de iis, quae ad Generalem ipsum spectant; 
temi ex singuUs Provinciis veniant, ProvinciaUs videlicet 
Praepositus cum duobus aliis, qui fuerint ad hoc negoti- 
um in Congregatione provinciali electi: quae quidem 
Congregatio in singulis Provinciis ante generalem ad 
hunc finem cogetur. Convenient autem et sufiragii jus 
habebunt in ea Professi omnes Provinciae, qui interesse 
poterunt, Praepositi Domorum atque CoUegiorum, Rec- 
tores, ac Procuratores, vel u, quos tanquam vicarios iUi 
suo nomine miserint. Ciim conventus ad res aUas indi- 
Praepositus ProvinciaUs sine congregatione 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



96 CONSTITUTIONUM 

Provinciae duos ex ea eligere poterit pro arbitrio Prae- 
positi Generalis ; cujus erit pro occurrentium causarum 
ratione constituere, num conventus Provincialis hujus- 
modi ad duorum illorum electionem sit cogendus, an 
Provincialis sine conventu eos debent eligere, prout ei 
videbitur in Domino expedire. His tribus suas vices 
tota Provincia committet, et quicquid a conventu gene- 
rali, cui ipsi interfuerint, constitutum fuerit, ratum 
habebit. Quod si praeter duos electos, quosdam alios 
Praepositus GeneraUs designaret, vel Praepositus Pro- 
vincialis adducendos judicaret; eadem erit horum, et 
aliorum ratio. Sed si Provincialis praeter tres, aliquos 
eligerit ; plures, quam duos, adjicere non poterit, ita, ut 
ad summum quinque ex una Provincia veniant, 
2 Ex Professis, qui Congregationi intererunt, unusquisque 
suflfragium unicum, solus Generalis duo habebit, Sed 
si numerus par esset, Provincialis reUquis praeferetur : 
et si inter ipsos Provinciales esset paritas ; pars illa, in 
quam Praepositus Generalis, vel (si is e vivis excessisset) 
ipsius Vicarius inclinabit, esset praeferenda. Ut enim 
illis magis est necessarium divinae gratiae auxiUum prop- 
ter munus, quod gerunt; ita sperandum est, Deum ac 
Dominum nostrum uberius id iUis, ut sentiant et dicant 
quae ad ipsius gloriam faciant, largiturum. 



AD QUEM SPECTET CON6REGATIONEM GENEBALEM 
INDICERE. 

CAP. IV. 

1 CuM ad eUgendum novum Praepositum, priore vita func- 
to, conventura est Societas: unus ex Professis, quem 
suum in hac parte Vicarium ante mortem Praepositus 
nominaverit, aUos de summa rei certiores faciendos cura- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 9? 

bit. Hic autem Vicarius (ut plurimiim) unus ex iis erit, 
qui adesse Praeposito, et ipsum juvare soliti sunt, vel 
certe ex iis, qui proxime degunt. Hujus officium erit, 
Societatem ad electionem Praepositi faciendam, prae- 
scripto tempore, et loco, quo convenire oporteat, convo- 
care. 
2 Quando non ad electionem congregatiu" Societas ; in 
aliis eventibus Praepositus Generalis eam convocabit, 
praeter quam in illis, qui in nona parte exprimentur : 
et non congregabit frequenter Societatem, ut dictum 
est ; nisi rerum agendarum necessitas urgeret. Sed 
cum generalis Congregatio ad electionem Praepositi con- 
vocata eum jam elegerit ; deinde de rebus aliis graviori- 
bus, quam ut a Generali et iis, qui cum ipso agunt, de- 
cidi debeant, tractari poterit. 



DE LOCO, TEMPORE, ET MODO CONGREGANDI. 

CAP. V. 

1 Locus, quo conveniet Societas ad Generalis electionem, 
videtur ordinarie curia summi Pontificis esse debere, 
ubi plurimiim erit ipsius Generalis residentia ; nisi 
Societas ex composito conveniendum esse in alium lo- 
cum, qui commodior omnibus futurus esset, statueret: ut 
si quis in confinio diversarum l^ovinciarum, in quibus 
manet Societas, esset constitutus, vel alius, qui magis 
accommodus videretur. Si Praepositus Generalis est, 
qui Societatem ad alia negotia congregat : ejus erit, eli- 
gere ac designare locum, quem in Domino aptiorem 
judicaverit. 

2 At spatium temporis, quod cogendae Societati tribuetur, 
ubi de electione Generalis agendum est, quinque aut 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



98 CONSTITUTIONUM 

sex mensium erit a tempore, quo litterae, quae de hac re 
commonefacient^ scriptae fuerint. Prorogari tamen id 
tempus poterit ; cum necessitas postulaverit. Cum 
vero alias ob causas fuerit congreganda, Generalis Prae- 
positus pro suo arbitratu tempus designabit. 

3 Modus in congreganda Societate servandus hic erit ; ut 
ille, cujus hoc est munus, confestim variis viis Provin- 
ciales^ et siqui ex Professis sigillatim convocandi essent, 
adscripta (quantum sat esse ipsi videbitur) causa^ loco, 
et tempore, conventus habendi, certiores faciat, admo- 
nens quoque, ut ubique missae celebrentur, et orationes 
fiant pro felici Praepositi electione. Unusquisque autem 
Provincialium (si ipsi soli eligendi potestatem non 
habuerint) Professos, qui in ipsius provincia versantur, 
Rectores quoque, et locales Praepositos, qui venire sine 
magno incommodo possint^ convocabit. Ubi vero ad 
Congregationem pro^dncialem convenerint, eligent pluri- 
ribus sufiragiis (Provincialis sententia pro duobus suflfra- 
gus numerata) eos, qui ad generalem Conventum mit- 
tantur; qui esse ii debebunt, quos magis expediat ei 
conventui interesse, et quorum absentia minus detri- 
menti Provinciae sit allatura. Ipsi vero, quam primiim 
poterunt, ad constitutum locum, relictis in suis Provinciis 
Vicariis, et rebus omnibus bene compositis, proficiscen- 
tur. 

4 Curabunt praeterea Superiores, ut omnes, qui sub obedi- 
entia Societatis vivunt, quotidie in orationibus et in 
missarum sacrificiis plurimiim Domino commendent eos, 
qui ad generalem Congregationem se conferunt ; et simul, 
ut, quidquid in ea transigetur, ad majus obsequium, et 
laudem^ et gloriam^ divini nominis cedat. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 99 

DB MODO DELIBERATIONIS, CUM DB ELECTIONE 
GENERALIS AGITUR. 

CAP. VI. 

1 Si conventus indictus est ad novi Praepositi, qui in 
demortui locum succedat, electionem ; simul atque om- 
nes convenerint, Vicarius Generalis quatuor dies ante 
Praepositi futuri electionem d^ eadem omnes alloquatur^ 
horteturque ad eam, prout ad majus Dei obsequium, et 
bouam Societatis gubemationem convenit, faciendam: 
et praeter hunc diem, tres sequentes habebunt^ ut se 
Deo commendent, meliusque considerent, quisnam ex 
universa Societate ad hujusmodi curam maxime idoneus 
sit futurus ; et eo tempore certiores reddi de iis, quae 
ad rem pertinent, ab iUis, qui bene poterunt referre, 
curent: donec tamen ingrediantur locum electionis^ et 
in eum includantur^ non definiant apud se^ quem sint 
electuri. 

2 Hoc medio tempore unusquisque sub poena excommuni- 
cationis latae sententiae teneatur Vicario manifestare, vel 
alicui ex antiquioribus Professis (qui cum Vicario con- 
feret) si sciret aUquem hoc munus aifectasse, vel etiam 
tunc affectare, directe aut indirecte id procurando, vel 
signo aliquo id declarando. Q.ui autem de ambitione 
hujusmodi convictus esset, activo et passivo suflfragio 
privetur, ut qui nec ad eligendum alium^ nec, ut ipse 
elegatur, sit idoneus ; unde nec in eam Congregationem, 
nec in aliam unquam admitti possit. 

3 Ipso die electionis, qui hos tres dies consequetur, cele- 
bret aliquis missam de Spiritu sancto, quam omnes 
audiant^ ac in eadem sanctissimum Christi corpus su- 
mant. 

4 Postmodum ad campanae pulsum, qui suffragium habent, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



100 CONSTITUTIONUM 

ad locum Congregationis vocentur ; et unus eorum con- 
cionem habeat, qua in genere (nuUo dato signo quo par- 
ticularis aliqua persona significetur) ad electionem ejus 
Praepositi, qui ad majus Dei obsequium conveniat, ex- 
hortetur; Et postquam hymnum illum simul dixerint, 
Veni Creator Spiritus ; in praedictum locum Congregati- 
onis ab aliquo ex Praepositis, vel Rectoribus, vel aUquo 
quopiam de Societate, cui id officii in domo Congregati- 
onis commissum fuerit, includantur, ita, ut nec inde 
egredi, nec eis aliquid ad victum, praeter panem et 
aquam, dari possit ; donec Praepositum Generalem ele- 
gerint. 

5 Quod si omnes communi inspiratione^ non expectato ordine 
mffragiorum^ quempiam eligerent ; ille sit Prcepositm 
Generalis. Omnem enim ordinem, et eligendi formulam 
Spiritus sanctuSj qui ad hujusmodi electionem movet fa- 
cili supplet. 

6 Quando eo modo non peragetur electio; formula, quae 
sequitur, erit observanda. In primis quisque seorsum 
orabit Deum, et, cum nullo alio loquendo, in Creatoris 
sui ac Domini conspectu ex iis, quae prius intellexit, 
apud se statuet, quem sit electurus ; et in charta scribet 
nomen personae, quam eligit in Praepositum Generalem, 
et suum subscribet ; et ad hoc spatium unius horae ad 
summum praefigatur : deinde ad sedes suas omnes con- 
veniant : Et Vicarius cum Secretario ad hoc ipsum inter 
Professos electo, et aUo tertio, qui eis assistat, exurgens a 

' sede protestetur noUe se admittere quemquam, nec ex- 
cludere, quem non debeat. Det autem omnibus absolu- 
tionem generalem ab omnibus censuris ad hunc canonicae 
electionis eifectum : Postmodum, invocata Spiritus sancti 
gratia, accedat cum duobus sociis ad mensam in medio 
positam ; et ipsimet tres praedicti mutuo sufiragia sua 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 101 

alius ab alio petant : et juret unusquisque prius, quam 
det, quod eum nominat, quem sensit in Domino ad hoc 
munus magis idoneus ; et suffragia in manibus Secretarii 
simul serventur ; deinde a quolibet eorum, qui in Con- 
gregatione sunt^ seorsum, sed tamen coram aliis proprium 
suffragium scripto contentum postulent, quod praevio 
juramento eisdem dabit unusquisque. Deinde in medio 
omnium Secretarius suflfragia, electum solummodo no- 
minando^ promulgabit; ac demum uno suflfragiorum 
numero cum alio coUato, qui plus, quam mediam partem 
suflfragiorum omnium habuerit, sit praepositus Generalis: 
et ita qui primus eum nominavit, vel Vicarius percon- 
tetur alios, an suimi consensum ei praestent, quem 
major pars elegit ; et, utcunque respondeant, formabit 
Decretum electionis, dicendo ; In nomine patris, et filii, 
et spiritus sancti ; EGO N. nomine meo, et omnium idem 
sentientium eligo N. in Praepositum Generalem Societatis 
JESU. Quo peracto statim omnes ad reverentiam ei 
exhibendam accedant, et flexo utroque genu manum 
ejus osculentur. Qui vero electus fuerit, nec electionem, 
nec exhibitam reverentiam (ciim recordari debeat, cujus 
nomine eam admittat) recusare debet. Postremo simul 
omnes dicant, Te Deum laudamus. 

7 Si non fuerit, qui amplius, quam mediam partem suf- 
fragiorum habeat; alia ratio, scllicet compromissionis 
ineatur, electis inter omnes tribus, aut quinque electo- 
ribus (qui nimirum ad id munus plura habuerint suf- 
fragia) et quo major horum trium vel quinque pars 
inclinaverit, ille sit Praepositus GeneraUs, et promulge- 
tur; eique reverentia exhibeatur, et Deo nostro gratiae 
agantur, et superius dictum est. 

8 Post promulgationem nulli integrum erit, suflFragium 

H 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



102 CONSTITUTIONUM 

suum mutare, nec peracta electione aliam tentare : et 
observet, quae dicta sunt^ qui dissidii ac ruinae Societatis 
author haberi, et in poenam excommunicationis latae 
sententiae incidere, aliasque graves censuras pro arbitrio 
Societatis (cui unio, et concordia omnimoda ad Dei 
gloriam convenit) subire nolit. 



DE MODO IN DELIBERATIONIBUS TENENDO, QUANDO IN 

CONGREGATIONE GENERALI NON DE ELECTTONE 

PR^POSITI, SED ALIIS DE REBUS AGITUR. 

CAP. VII. 

1 CuM in Congregatione non de electione Praepositi, sed 
aliis de rebus gravibus, et ad statum Societatis perti- 
nentibus agitur; inclusio necessaria non erit: licet sit 
curandum, ut, quam expeditissime fieri poterit, quae 
tractanda sunt, absolvantur. Sed quia ex prima et 
summa Sapientia descendat oportet lux ea, qua dijudi- 
cari possit, quid statuere conveniat ; in primis Missarum 
sacrificia oiFerentur ; fietque oratio in loco Congregati- 
onis, et aliis partibus Societatis per totum illud tempus, 
quo congregantur, et quo tractantur res in eo Conventu 
definiendae, ad gratiam impetrandam ; ut omnia ad ma- 
jorem Dei gloriam constituantur. 

2 Deinde semel aut saepius omnibus congregatis, Praeposi- 
tus Generalis, deinde Provinciales, Rectores, aliique ad 
Congregationem vocati, quae eis tractanda videbimtur, 
rationesque eorum, quae sentiunt, postquam diligenter 
omnia consideraverint, ac Deo et Domino nostro com- 
mendaverint, coram omnibus breviter proponent; Et 
postquam dixerint sententiam suam, ejus summam scrip- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS OCTAVA. 103 

tam in medio relinquent ; ut siqui velint, eam legant, et 
quod ea de re sentiunt, in sequenti Congregatione di- 
cant. 

3 Rebus agitatis hinc inde in una, vel pluribus Congrega- 
tionibus, si nihil manifeste in alteram partem constitui 
videretur ; communi omnium, vel fere omnium assensu 
quatuor, qui definiant^ ex eis, qui intersunt conventui, 
et in eo jus habent suffragii, plurium sententiis (quibus 
alii se stare velle promittant) eUgantur, qui quoties opus 
fuerit, cum Praeposito Generali congregati omnia ea, de 
quibus agitur, decident. Quod si omnes ejusdem sen- 
tentiae non fuerint ; quo verget major pars, id praeferen- 
dum, et a tota Congregatione ut de manu Domini admit- 
tendum erit. 

4 Si Praepositus Generalis, non erit ea habitudine corporis, 
ut possit rebus omnibus tractandis interesse; posset 
aUum suo loco substituere; et sic sigillatim, omnibus 
rebus constitutis, prout majori parti visum fuerit, quod 
decretum est, scribetur^ et in plena Congregatione lege- 
tur; et, si etiam tunc alicui visum fuerit, quid ea in re 
sentiat, dicere ei licebit; sed omnia tandem arbitrio 
Praepositi cum Definitoribus reliquentur. 

5 Consideratis denuo ilHs, quae discussa sunt, et modo 
jam dicto rursum constitutis, Secretarius in libro ad id 
destinato ea postmodum promulganda scribet. 



h2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



NONA PARS; 

de iisy qtuB ad caput Societatis, et gubemationem ab eo 
descendentem pertinent. 



QUOD PRiEPOSITUM 6ENERALEM, ET QUIDEM PER- 
PETUUM, DUM VIXERIT, ESSE OPORTEAT. 

CAP. I. 

1 TTT in omnibus Rebuspub. vel Congregationibus 
^^ bene constitutis, praeter eos, qui ad fines particu- 
lares in eis tendunt, necesse est, esse aliquem, vel etiam 
plures, qui boni universalis curam habeant^ et, ut ad 
proprium finem, ad id tendant : sic etiam in hac Socie- 
tate, praeter eos, qui particularibus domibus, Collegiis, 
et Provinciis etiam, in quibus hujusmodi sunt domus, 
vel Collegia, praesunt, necesse est esse aHquem, qui 
universae Societatis curam habeat ; qui hunc sibi finem 
constituat, ut bene gubemetur, conservetur, et augeatur 
totum Societatis corpus; et hic est Praepositus Gene- 
raUs ; qui cum duobus modis eUgi posset, sciHcet, ut ad 
tempus ahquod definitum, vel ut quandiu vivet, Societati 
praesit : propterea quod experientia, et in gubemando 
exercitatio, et hominum particularium notitia, et erga 
eosdem authoritas confert magnopere, ut bene hoc 
munus obeat ; ad vitam, et non ad tempus aliquod prae- 
scriptum erit eUgendus. Accedet autem ad caetera hoc 
commodi ex eo, ut Societas in rebus magni momenti ad 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 105 

Dei gloriam satis fere semper occupata^ universalibus 
his conventibus minus laboris et distractionis patiatur. 



QUALIS ESSE DEBEAT PR^POSITUS GENERALIS. 

CAP. II. 

1 Inter dotes varias, quibus ornari Praepositum Gene- 
ralem, optandum est, omnium prima haec erit ; ut cum 
Deo ac Domino mstro quam maanmi conjunctus^ et /a- 
miliaris tam in oratione^ quhm in omnibus suis actionibus 
sit ; ut eo uberius ab ipso, ut boni totius fonte, universo 
corpori Societatis abundantem donorum, ac gratiarum 
ejus participationem, ac multum valoris, et efficaciae 
omnibus iUis rationibus, quibus ad animarum auxiUum 
utetur, impetret. 

2 Secunda, ut vir sit, cujus in omni virtutum genere ex- 
emplum reliquos de Societate juvet ; ac praecipue in eo 
splendor charitatis erga omnes proximos, et in primis 
erga Societatem, ac verae humiUtatis, quae Deo et homi- 
nibus amabilem eum reddant, sit conspicuus. 

3 Liber etiam ab omnibus inordinatis affectionibus, per 
gratiam Dei edomitis et mortificatis, sit oportet; ne 
interius judicium rationis perturbent, et ut exterius 
tam sit compositus, et in loquendo praesertim tam cir- 
cunspectus, ut in eo nihil, ne verbum quidem, notari 
possit, quod non ad aedificationem sive eorum, qui de 
Societate sunt (quibus speculi, et exemplaris loco esse 
debet) sive externorum faciat. 

4 Nihilominus eo modo didicerit rectitudinem, ac severi- 
tatem necessariam cum benignitate et mansuetudine 
miscere, ut nec se flecti sinat ab eo, quod Deo ac 
Domino nostro gratius fore judicaverit : et tamen filiis 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



106 CONSTITUTIONUM 

suis, ut convenit, compati noverit^ eo modo se gerendo, 
ut etiam qui reprehenduntur, vel corriguntur, quanvis 
secundum inferiorem hominem, quod agitur, displiceat, 
agnoscant nihilominus, quod recte in Domino, et cum 
charitate ille suum officium faciat. 

5 Animi etiam magnitudo ac fortitudo est ei pernecessaria 
ad infirmitatem multorum ferendam, et res magnas in 
divino servitio aggrediendas, in eisque constanter, quan- 
do id convenit, perseverandum ; non propter contradic- 
tiones (Ucet a magnis, et potentibus excitatas) animum 
despondendo, nec ab eo, quod ratio, et divinum obsequi- 
um postulat, uUis eorum precibus, aut minis separaii se 
sinendo ; ut omnibus demum casibus, qui incidere pos- 
sunt, sit superior; nec prosperis efferri, nec adversis 
dejici animo sese permittat, paratissimus, cum opus 
esset, ad mortem pro Societatis bono in obsequium Jesu 
Christi Dei ac Domini nostri subeundam. 

6 Tertia est, ut praeclaro inteUectus, ac judicii dono poUe- 
at ; ut nec in rebus ad speculationem, nec ad praxim 
pertinentibus, quae occurrerint, hoc talento sit destitutus. 
Et quanvis doctrina valde ei necessaria sit, qui tam 
multis viris eruditis est praefuturus ; magis tamen est 
necessaria prudentia, et in rebus spirituaUbus et intemis 
exercitatio ad varios spiritus discemendos, ad consiUum 
ac remedium tam muUis, qui necessitatibus spirituaUbus 
laborabunt, adhibendum. 

Discretionis etiam donum in rebus externis, ac modo res 
tam varias tractandi, et cum tam diversis hominum 
generibus in ipsa Societate, et extra Ulam agendi sum- 
mopere erit ei necessarium. 

7 Quarta et in primis necessaria ad res conficiendas est 
vigilantia, et soUicitudo ad eas incipiendas, et strenuitas 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 107 

ad easdem ad finem et perfectionem suam perducendas ; 
ut nec incuria, nec remissione animi inchoatae et imper- 
fectae relinquantur. 

8 Quinta ad corpus pertinet ; in quo^ quod ad sanitatem^ 
speciem extemam, et aetatem attinet, habenda est ratio 
hinc quidem decentiae et authoritatis, inde vero virium 
corporis, quas ejus munus exigit ; ut in eo fungi officio 
suo ad Dei ac Domini nostri gloriam possit. 

9 Sexta circa res externas est, inter quas, quae magis ad 
aedificationem et Dei obsequium in eo officio conferunt, 
praeferri debent. Hujusmodi esse solent, siquis magnae 
sit existimationis, ac celebris nominis: et demum quae 
ex caeteris ad authoritatem cum externis et cum iis, qui 
de Societate sunt, adjuvant. 

10 Denique ex eorum numero esse debet Praepositus Gene- 
ralis^ qui in omni virtutum ornatu clarissimi, et de 
Societate optime meriti, et diu in eadem tales esse per- 
specti sunt. Et si aUquae ex dotibus superius dictis de- 
essent; certe non desit eximia probitas, et amor erga 
Societatem ac judicium bonum, quod etiam idonea doc- 
trina comitetur. In reliquis enim per eos, qui ad ejus 
auxiUum destinandi sunt (de quibus inferius dicetur) 
cum auxilio et favore divino multa suppleri poterunt. 



DE POTESTATE PRiEPOSITI GENERALIS ERGA SOCIE- 
TATEM, AC DE OFFICIO EJUS. 

CAP. III. 
1 Ut bene gubemetur Societas ; expedire in primis duxi- 
mus, ut Praepositus Generalis omnem habeat potestatem 
in Societatem ad aedificationem : quae potestas (unde 
Praepositi officium cognoscitur) haec erit ; primiim Prae- 
positus Generalis per se, et per alios admittere in domi- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



108 CONSTITUTIONUM 

bus, vel CoUegiis, vel ubicunque Ubeat, poterit eos, qui 
ad institutum Societatis ei idonei videbuntur; sive ad 
probationem, sive ad professionem, sive in Coadjutores 
formatos, vel Scholasticos approbatos admittendos cen- 
seat. Poterit etiam eosdem dimittere, et a Societate re- 
movere. 

2 Ejusdem erit, quos mittendos judicaverit, et quocunque 
volet, ad studia litterarum mittere. Poterit et eosdem 
revocare ante, et post absoluta studia, ac transferre ab 
uno in alium locum, prout ad ipsorum particulare, vel 
ad universale bonum Societatis magis convenire in Do- 
mino existimabit. 

3 Totam habebit superintendentiam, et gubemationem 
CoUegibrum; quod ad Scholasticos, et Praeceptores, et 
Officiales attinet ; inter quos primas tenent Rectores ; 
quos constituere, ac removere poterit, eamque facultatem 
eisdem communicare, quam senserit in Domino con- 
venire; et per hujusmodi Rectores administrationem 
CoUegiorum exercebit in iis, quae ad aedificia, et tem- 
poraUa ipsorum bona in Scholasticorum usum com- 
parata pertinent ; ut in Utteris ApostoUcis continetur. 

4 Curabit etiam, ut iUi rationem officu sui eo modo, qui 
convenire maxime videbitur, reddant. Et quod de Col- 
legiis dicitur, de Universitatibus Societatis ejus curae 
commissis dictum intelUgatur. Res enim earum, quae 
ad vitae ac doctrinae institutionem pertinent, adminis- 
trare, Praepositi Generalis munus erit ; quod per Minis- 
tros a se juxta Constitutiones constitutos exercebit. 

5 Erit item penes Praepositum Generalem omnis facultas 
agendi quosvis contractus emptionum aut venditionum 
quorumUbet bonorum temporalium mobiUum tam Do- 
morum, quam CoUegiorum Societatis, et imponendi, ac 
redimendi quosUbet census super bonis stabiUbus ipso- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 109 

rum Collegiorum in eorundem utilitatem ac usum ea 
conditione, ut integrum sit hac se obligatione exuere, 
restituendo pecuniam, quae data fuerit. Alienare autem^ 
aut omnino dissolvere CoUegia vel Domos jam erectas 
Societatis sine generali ejus congregatione Praepositus 
Generalis non poterit. . 

6 De iis vero^ quae Societati ita relinquuntur, ut ipsa pro 
suo arbitratu ea disponat (sive bona stabilia illa sint, ut 
domus aliqua, vel praedium non alicui certo Collegio ab 
eo^ qui relinquit, determinate applicatum vel annexum ; 
sive mobilia, cujusmodi sunt pecunia^ triticum, et quae- 
vis alia mobilia, idem Generalis disponere poterit aut 
vendendo, aut retinendo, aut huic vel illi loco id, quod 
ei videbitur, applicando, prout ad majorem Dei gloriam 
senserit expedire. 

7 Et Praepositi Provinciales, aut locales, et Rectores, et 
Commissarii eam partem hujus facultatis habebunt, 
quam ipsis Generalis communicaverit. Neque vero col- 
legiales ad hujusmodi actus coUegiaKter erunt congre- 
gandi. 

8 Sicut ad Generalem pertinet curare, ut Societatis Con- 
stitutiones ubique observentur; ita ad eundem pertine- 
bit, in iisy qtue accidunt^ uhi dispensatione opus est^ habita 
ratione personaruniy locorum^ temporum^ et aliarum cir- 
cunstantiarum, dispensare : quod munus ea cum pru- 
dentia, quam lua^ aterna communicaverit, finem earun- 
dem Constitutionum intuendo, qui alius non est, quam 
majus Dei obsequium, et eorum bonum, qui hoc vivendi 
institutum sequuntur, praestabit. Idque tam de eaperi- 
mentis eorum^ qui in probationibus versantur, quam de 
aliis rebus, in quibus eam fuisse mentem eorum, qui 
Constitutiones condiderunt, ad gloriam Dei ac Domini 
nostri judicabitur, dictum sit. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



1 10 CONSTITUTIONUM 

9 Idem Generalis in missionibus omnem habebit potesta- 
tem ; eis tamen nuUa ratione repugnando^ quse a sede 
Apostolica (ut in septima parte dicitur) proficiscuntur. 
Mittere ergo poterit omnes sibi subditos^ sive professio- 
nem emiserint, sive non emiserint, (quos mittendos judi- 
caverit) ad quaslibet mundi partes ad quodvis tempus 
vel definitum, vel indefinitum, prout ei videbitur, ad 
quanvis actionem ex iis, quibus uti ad proximorum auxi- 
lium Societas solet exercendam. Poterit etiam missos 
revocare, et in omnihus denique, ut ad majorem Dei 
gloriam fore senserit, procedere, Idem, cum talenta 
hominibus Societatis nostrae donata cognoscat, officia 
Praeiicatorum, Lectorum, et Confessariorum distribuet. 
De aliis officiis tantundem intelligatur : et quemlibet eo 
in munere, quod convenientius ad divinum obsequium, 
et salutem animarum obiturus in Domino videbitur, 
constituet. 

10 Ejus erit, uti facultatibus a Sede Apostolica Societati 
concessis, et eam partem illarum unicuique inferiorum 
communicare, quam in ipso bene collocatam ad finem 
divini obsequii nobis praefixum existimaverit. Ejusdem 
erit, revocare eas, vel contrahere, ad eandem regulam 
divini beneplaciti omnia exigendo. 

11 Ejusdem Generalis officium erit, correctionibus uti, ac 
poenitentias, quae ad satisfactionem quoruncunque de- 
fectuum convenire videbuntur, habita ratione persona- 
rum, et aUarum circunstantiarum, injungere : quarum 
consideratio ejus charitati cum prudentia conjuncta, qua 
ad Dei gloriam utetur, committitur. 

12 Ejusdem erit, convocare Societatem ad generalem con- 
ventum (quando aliis de rebus, quam de electione Prae- 
positi est agendum) et praecipere, ut provincialis etiam 
congregatio convocetur, ciim expedire judicaverit, et 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 111 

moderari eos, qui convenerint, ac suo tempore, iis abso- 
lutis, quae tractanda erant^ dimittere. 

13 Sine ejus facultate et approbatione nullus possit digni- 
tatem ullam extra Societatem admittere ; nec ille facul- 
tatem hujusmodi dabit, nec id approbabit, si sedis 
Apostolicae obedientia ipsum non compelleret. 

14 Constituat idem, ut dictum est, suo arbitrio Rectores 
CoUegiorum et Universitatum, ac Praepositos locales 
domorum, quos aptiores fore judicaverit, Provinciales 
itidem Praepositos ad triennium ut plurimiim ; (quanvis 
et contrahij et prorogari etiam id spatium temporis pos- 
sity quando ad majorem Dei ac Domini nostri gloriam id 
fore videbiturj, Quibus etiam eam potestatem com- 
municabit, quam duxerit, communicandam. 

15 Poterit etiam revocare, restringere, et etiam augere, et 
administrationis rationem ab eis exigere. Quod si Pro- 
vinciali facultatem constituendi Praepositos locales, et 
Rectores communicaverit ; ejusdem Generalis erit, eos- 
dem confirmare, vel removere. 

16 Idem officiales reliquos ad gubernationem necessarios, ut 
Procuratorem generalem, et Secretarium Societatis con- 
stituet, eam illis facultatem, quam pro negotiorum ac 
personarum ratione convenire in Domino judicabit, 
communicando. 

1 7 Idem poterit non expectata generali congregatione Do- 
mos, CoUegia, Universitates Societati oblatas accipere, 
et in Fundatores cum privilegiis in quarta parte dictis 
eos, quos in Domino admittendos duxerit, admittere, et 
Lectores, Sacerdotes, et alia, quae occurrerint, pro- 
videre. Erit tamen ei curandum, ut cum hujusmodi 
conditionibus admittat, ex quibus Societas commoditatem 
ad propositum sibi divini obsequii finem, et non detri- 
mentum sentiat. Sed si experimento compertum esset. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



112 CONSTITUTIONUM 

gravari raagis, quam juvari Societatem, nec Praepositus 
Generalis de remedio prospiceret; in primo generali 
Societatis conventu, utrum hujusmodi Domus, Collegi- 
um, vel Universitas relinqui, an teneri cum tali onere 
expediat, agi poterit. 

18 Transferre, vel dissolvere Domos, vel Collegia jam erec- 
ta, aut in usum Societatis professae redditus eorum con- 
vertere Praepositus Generalis, ut in quarta parte dictum 
est, non poterit. 

19 Cognoscaty quoadejus fieri poterit, conscientias eorum, 
qui sub ejus obedientia svjit^ ac praecipue Praepositorum 
Provincialium, et aliorum, quibus munera majoris mo- 
menti committit. 

20 Generatim loquendo, in rebus omnibus, quae ad pro- 
positum Societati finem perfectionis et auxilii proximo- 
rum ad gloriam Dei faciunt, omnibus praecipere in 
obedientiae virtute possit ; Et quanvis aliis inferioribus 
Prsepositis, vel Visitatoribus, vel Commissariis suam 
facultatem communicet; poterit tamen approbare, vel 
rescindere quod illi fecerint, et in omnibus quod vide- 
bitur, constituere : et semper ei obedientiam ac reveren- 
tiam (ut qui Christi vices geritj praestari oportebit. 



DE FACULTATE, VEL PROVIDENTIA SOCIETATIS 
ER6A PRiEPOSITUM GENERALEM. 

CAP. IV. 

1 Facultas, vel providentia Societatis erga Praepositum, 
habita semper ratione boni universalis, ac majoris aedifi- 
cationis, sex in rebus, quae ad Dei gloriam juvare pos- 
sunt, consistit. 

2 Prima ad res externas pertinet vestitus, victus, et expen- 
sarum quarumlibet ad personam Praepositi spectantium ; 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 113 

quae omnia vel augere, vel imminuere poterit Societas ; 
prout Praepositum ipsum ac se decere, et Deo gratius 
fore judicabit. Et huic Societatis ordinationi Praeposi- 
tum acquiescere oportebit. 

3 Secunda ad corporis curam pertinet, ne in laboribus^ 
vel rigore nimio mensuram excedat. Qua etiam in re 
ad moderationem se reduci sinet Superior, et Societatis 
arbitrio acquiescet. 

4 Tertia ad animam ejus spectat; ciim etiam viris perfectis 
aliquando hujusmodi cura vel circa personam, vel circa 
officium sit necessaria. Habeat ergo Societas cum Prae- 
posito Generali (et idem cum inferioribus fieri posset) 
aliquem, qui accedens ad Deum in oratione, postquam 
divinam bonitatem consuluerit, et aequum esse id judi- 
caverit, cum modestia debita, ac humilitate, quid sentiat 
in ipso Praeposito requiri ad majus obsequium et gloriam 
Dei, admonere debeat; sive ille sit ejus Confessarius, 
sive alius quispiam per Societatem designatus, qui ad 
hoc negotium quam maxime aptus videatur. 

5 Quarta est, quod, siquis urgeret (Ucet eum non obUgan- 
do sub poena peccati) ut dignitatem aUquam admitteret, 
in qua Praepositi officium necessario reUnquendum esset, 
non posset sine consensu Societatis eam admittere. So- 
cietas autem, semper intuendo quae ad majus Dei obse- 
quium et gloriam pertinent, si obedientia sedis ApostoU- 
cae non compulerit, assensum nunquam praestabit. 

6 Quinta locum habet, si accideret, ut valde negUgens, vel 
remissus esset in rebus magni momenti ad Praepositi 
officium pertinentibus propter corporis gravem aegritudi- 
nem, aut senium, spe emendationis ea in parte sublata, 
unde multum detrimenti pubUcum bonum pateretur. 
Tunc enim Coadjutor, vel Vicarius, qui GeneraUs officio 
fungatur, est eUgendus; sive ipsemet Praepositus eum 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



114 * CONSTITUTIONUM 

cum approbatione Praepositorum Provincialium sibi sub- 
stituat ; sive illi cum approbatione duorum Praeposito- 
rum localium, vel Rectorum uniuscujusque Provinciae 
eum per litteras pluribus suffragiis eligant ad Societatis 
gubemationem cum ea facultate, quae Generali, vel ipsi 
Societati, si ea eligeret, communicanda videretur. 
7 Sexta locum haberet in quibusdam casibus ; quos spera- 
mus per Dei bonitatem, aspirante ipsius gratia, nun- 
quam eventuros (cujusmodi essent peccata mortalia in 
extemum actum prodeuntia, ac nominatim copula car- 
nalis, vulnerare quenquam, ex redditibus Collegiomm 
aliquid ad proprios sumptus assumere, vel cuivis extra 
Societatem donare, vel aliqua stabilia bona domomm, 
aut Collegiomm alieiiare, vel depravatam doctrinam 
habere. Siquid ergo homm accideret, potest ac debet 
Societas (si de re sufficientissime constaret) eum officio 
privare, et, si opus est, a Societate removere, in omnibus 
prae oculis habendo quod ad majorem Dei gloriam et 
universale bonum Societatis fore judicabitur. 



DE MODO, QUO PROCEDERE DEBET, SOCIE TAS IN IIS, 
QUiE AD PRiEPOSITUM GENERALEM PERTINENT. 

CAP. V. 

1 In primis Praepositi Provinciales, quos Generalis ipse 
per se constituit, in conspectu Dei considerare et efficere, 
quod universali bono Societatis debent in praedictis ad 
Praepositum Generalem pertinentibus, prout in Domino 
senserint, teneantur. 

2 Deinde in iis, quae ad sumptus et curam corporis ejus, 
et res alias minus graves pertinent, congregatione opus 
non est; sed ut Societas viros quatuor ei assistentes. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 115 

qui discretione, ac zelo communis boni Societatis polle- 
ant, constituat: Qui quidem apud Praepositum ma- 
nentes, in conspectu Creatoris ac Domini sui dicere ac 
efficere, quicquid circa tria prima iii praecedenti capite 
dicta ad majorem Dei gloriam fore senserint teneantur. 

3 Electio vero quatuor hujusmodi assistentium eorum 
erit, qui Praepositum eligent, quando ad id congregan- 
tur. Quod si vel mortem obiret, vel a Praeposito 
Generali diutius abesse propter causas graves aliquem 
ipsorum oporteret ; non repugnantibus Provincialibus 
Societatis, Praepositus Generalis alium substituet, qui 
cum approbatione omnium, vel majoris partis eorum 
manebit in demortui vel absentis loco. 

4 Tertio si accideret aliquod ex peccatis (avertat id Deus) 
quae sufficiunt ad Praepositum officio suo privandum: 
simul atque res per testimonia sufficientia, vel ipsius 
affirmationem constaret; juramento obstringantur qua- 
tuor assistentes ad id Societati denunciandum, et cum 
omnium, vel certe trium subscriptionibus congregatio- 
nem, id est Praepositos Provinciales cum duobus aliis, 
quos singuli ex sua Provincia secum adducent (qui con- 
gregari tenebuntur) convocandam. Et si res divulgata, 
et communiter manifesta esset ; non expectata quatuor 
assistentium convocatione, Provinciales alii alios vocando 
convenire deberent: Et ipso primo die, quo in locum 
hujusmodi congregationis ingredientur, ubi aderunt qua- 
tuor illi, qui convocarunt, cum aliis congregatis, rem is 
aggrediatur, cui omnia notiora sunt, et accusatio dilucide 
explicetur ; qua audita, Praepositus foras egredietur ; et 
antiquissimus ex Provincialibus simul cum Secretario, et 
alio assistente de tota re scrutinium faciat, et primo qui- 
dem, an constet de peccato, quod objicitur, deinde an 
hujusmodi sit, ut propter id privari officio debeat; et 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



1 16 conStitutionum 

idem suffragia promulget, quae, ut sufficiant, duas tertias 
partes excedant oportet ; et tunc eo deposito, statim de 
alio eligendo agatur : et, si fieri potest, non prius inde 
egrediantur, quam Societas Generalem Praepositum ha- 
beat : et si eo die res transigi non poterit, in sequenti, 
vel quam expeditissime iSeri poterit, quemadmodum in 
octava parte dictum est, transigatur. 

5 Si defectus deprehensi non fuerint ejusmodi, ut privan- 
dus officio suo, sed tantum corrigendus videretur ; qua- 
tuor ehgantur, quibus cura injungatur considerandi quae 
correctio ei conveniat : et si non idem omnes sentirent, 
paribus suffi*agiis existentibus, quintus adjungatur, vel 
tres alii ; ut, quid in Domino conveniat, constituant. 

6 Si accideret Praepositum Generalem ad Societatis guber- 
nationem esse inutilem, re partim coram eo, et partim in 
ejus absentia agitata, dispiciatur, an eUgi Vicarium ab- 
soluta cum potestate, quanvis sine nomine Praepositi 
GeneraUs (quandiu vixerit qui tunc erat) oporteat: et 
id, si pluribus, quam dimidiae parti suffiragiorum, visum 
fuerit, sic agendum erit. Si id necessarium fore non 
judicarent, videndum erit, an praeter ministros iUos, quo- 
rum opera GeneraUs utebatur, Societas aUos providere 
debeat, ut, sublevato magis eo et adjuto, non desiderare- 
tur, quod ad gubemationem Societatis conveniret. Et 
ea in re sequi oportebit quod plus, quam media pars 
eorum, qui congregati simt, statuerit. Si ageretur de 
dignitate, quam ut plurimum pati non potest Praepositi 
officium ; si non compulerit taUs obedientia sunami Pon- 
tificis, quae ad peccatum obUgare posset ; res in consul- 
tationem ne adducatur : sed id omnino tanquam certum 
tenendum, nec debere, nec posse consensum ad hujus- 
modi dignitatem admittendam praestari. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 117 

DE IIS, QVM JUVARE POTERUNT PR^POSITUM GENE- 
RALEM^ UT SUO OFFICIO BENE FUNGATUR. 

CAP. VI. 

1 CuM proprium Generalis officium non sit concionari, 
nec confessiones audire, nec alia hujusmodi (in quibus 
tamen ille, ut particularis persona, videbit, quid praestare 
possit, cum ei per alias occupatibnes officii sui proprias 
Kcebit, et non aliter) sed ita regere universum hujus 
Societatis corpus, ut conservetur, et gratia divina aspi- 
rante in bono suo statu, et modo procedendi ad Dei et 
Domini nostri gloriam crescat, ad quem sibi propositum 
finem sua potestate uti debet. 

2 Praeter dona illa perfectionis magnse spiritualis, ac vir- 
tutum, de quibus secundo capite dictum est, bonis etiam 
ministris ad munera particularia obeunda opus habet. 
Quanvis enim per se ipsum aliquando ad illa se vertat ; 
habeat tamen necesse est Praepositos inferiores (quos 
viros selectos esse oportet) quibus multum potestatis 
conferre, et hujusmodi res particulares fere semper com- 
mittere possit. Ejus autem crebrior communicatio inter 
Praepositos inferiores cum Provincialibus erit; horum 
autem cum Rectoribus, et Praepositis localibus, ut meKus 
subordinatio conservetur. Aliquando tamen GeneraKs 
vel ut pleniorem rerum omnium notitiam habeat, vel 
propter aUa, quae saepius accidere solent, ipsemet cum 
Rectoribus, et Praepositis locaUbus, et particularibus 
etiam personis aget, eosdemque consilio, reprehensione, 
et, si opus est, correctione juvare studeat; Quando- 
quidem ejus est munus, defectus Praepositorum inferio- 
rum supplere, ac cum divino favore et auxiUo quod in 
ipsis perfectum non est, ad perfectionem perducere. 

3 Ad omnia etiam conferet, si Generalis litteras Apostoli- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



118 * CONSTITUTIONUM 

cas, et concessiones omnes, quae ad institutionem, 
facultates, vel privilegia Societatis pertinent^ et quoddam 
eorum compendium apud se habuerit, catalogum itidem 
unum omnium Domorum, et Collegiorum Societatis 
cum suis redditibus, et alterum personarum omnium, 
quae in quavis Provincia versantur, non solum Professo- 
rum et Coadjutorum, qui formati, ac Scholarium, qui 
approbati dicuntur, sed etiam illorum, qui in probationi- 
bus exercentur, ubi eorum nomina et dotes scribantur : 
et hunc catalogum renovandum singulis annis^ si con- 
venire videbitur, curabit. Et demum omnia^ quoadejus 
fieri poterit, perspecta habeat, ut in omnibus rebus 
melius possit, quae ad gloriam divinam pertinent, pro- 
videre. 

4 Quod in universum in septima parte dicitur, eos, qui de 
Societate simt, negotiis secularibus, licet pia aUoqui 
essent, implicari non debere ; id GeneraU magis, quam 
reliquis omnibus, convenit; ne in eis, vel aliis etiam 
rebus piis quidem, sed ad Societatem non pertinentibus, 
ita occupari se sinat, ut tempus ac vires ad ea, quae 
pertinent ad ipsius officium (quod quidem magis, quam 
totum hominem requirit) eum destituant. 

5 Sed nec in executione ministeriorum particularium ad 
Societatem pertinentium, quae per alios effici possunt, 
magnopere occupari deberet ; cujusmodi esset peculiaris 
alicujus domus cura, quod ad sustentationem temporal- 
em, et gubernationem ejus attinet : quin potius, ut 
superius dicitur, suos quovis in loco, etiam ubi ipse re- 
sidebit, officiales habeat ; in quos si totam curam non 
rejecerit, sublevetur certe ab eis, et hujusmodi curae 
occupatione liberetur. 

6 Sic etiam in quavis Provincia eos habeat Provinciales 
tam probatae fidei tamque idoneos, ut qui intelligit mag- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS NONA. 119 

na ex parte ex his et localibus bonam gubernationem 
Societatis pendere. Cum autem iUi tales fuerint ; labo- 
rem cum illis in rebus, quae id patiuntur, dividendo, et 
de omnibus gravioribus certiorem se fieri curando, plus 
otii, ac temporis sibi relictum, ut rebus universalibus 
vacet, quae solus ipse obire potest, intelliget. Plus 
etiam lucis ad perspiciendum, quid in illis facto opus 
sit, se habere experietur ; si ipsius intellectus eam, 
qua donatus est, ex parte non amiserit ; ut eis accidit, 
qui plus aequo in rebus particularibus, ac exiguis occu- 
pantur : unde opprimi et debilior reddi intellectus acies 
ad res universales perspiciendas solet. 

7 Nec solum Praepositus Generalis ad res particulares (ut 
dictum est) ministris opus habet ; sed etiam ad imiver- 
sales^ et sui officii proprias, ut eis bene ac suaviter possit 
satisfacere. Habeat igitur necesse est, qui multa in 
memoriam reducendo, ad sollicitudinem curandi res tam 
multas officii sui, qui etiam consilio ad eas ordinandas^ 
demum qui diligentia ac labore ad eas opere complendas 
adjuvet. Id enim compertum est, quod nec viri imius 
memoria tam multarum rerum recordationi satis sit ; 
nec, si id praestaret^ unius intellectus ad easdem bene 
considerandas, et ordinandas satis esset; nec, quanvis 
et hoc posset, vires unius ad easdem exequendas suffice- 
rent. 

8 Ad primum illud de soUicitudine omnia curandi aUquo 
ministro ei opus est ; qui ordinarie apud ipsum maneat ; 
qui pro memoria, et manibus iUi sit ad omnia, quae 
scribenda, et tractanda fuerint, ac breviter ad res omnes 
officii sui obeundas ; qui induat Praepositi personam ; et 
praeter potestatem totum officii ejus pondus humeris suis 
impositum esse existimet. 

9 Hic Praepositi Minister vir esse sollicitus et discretionis, 

i2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



120 CONSTITUTIONUM 

et, si fieri posset^ doctrinae dono, et specie honesta^ ac 
modo agendi verbo et litteris cum omni hominum genere 
praeditus esse deberet; quique in primis esset vir, cui 
confidenter quidvis committi posset, quique Societatem 
in Domino diUgeret ; quo utilius ejus opera ac ministerio 
uti Praepositus Generalis ad gloriam divinam valeat. 
10 Secundum auxiUum, videUcet consiUi ad res graves, quae 
se offerunt^ ordinandas et constituendas, quam sit Gene- 
raU Praeposito necessarium, ex eorum multitudine, et ex 
humani inteUectus imbeciUitate^ qui tam multas in partes 
consideratione dividi nequit, vel certe ad id, quod opor- 
tet, in eis partibus dispiciendum, ac providendum non 
sufficit, potest intelUgi. Videtur ergo pemecessarium, 
ut aUqui sint apud Superiorem viri Utteris et omnibus 
aUis Dei donis clari, qui ei assistant, et considerandi 
pecuUari soUicitudine res universales Societatis a Gene- 
rali commissas curam habeant; quam iUis posset di- 
videre, quo accurauus res omnes perspiciant; ut unus 
rerum Indicarum inspiciendarum, alter Hispaniae et 
PortugaUiae, et alius Germaniae et GaUiae, et aUus ItaUae 
et SiciUae curam haberet ; et sic de aUis ; quando 
Societas in plures partes spargeretur. Quisque autem 
ex eis pecuUari oratione, et suis in sacrificus recordati- 
one Deo partem iUam sibi speciaUter commissam com- 
mendare debet, et considerare, quid in ea magis ad id 
consequendum, quod sibi Societas proponit, juvare pos- 
set. Conferendum etiam cum aliis esset, siquid ad rem 
facere magnopere videretur. Res autem inter se discus- 
sas GeneraU referre possent. lidem etiam attenderent 
iis rebus, quae vel a Praeposito, vel etiam a Secretario 
Societatis proponerentur ; ut magis inter ipsos discussae 
Superiori referantur. Et in imiversum in considerandis 
et tractandis rebus tam ad doctrinam, quam ad praxim 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PAR8 NONA. 121 

pertinentibus, quae altiorem considerationem postulant^ 
juvare Praepositum ac sublevare debent. Praeter id au- 
tem, et quod rebus multis melius provideri per illos 
poterit, praedicationi, lectioni, confessionibus audiendis^ 
et aliis bonis ac piis operibus ad Dei gloriam et anima- 
rum auxilium vacare poterunt. 

11 Numero autem hujusmodi assistentes nunc quidem 
quatuor erunt; et quidem illi ipsi esse poterunt, de 
quibus superius pagina 115 dictum est. Quanvis autem 
res graviores cum eis tractandae sint, statuendi tamen 
facultas, postquam eos audierit, penes Praepositum Gene- 
ralem erit. 

12 In tertio auxilio, videlicet diligentiae ad exequendum vel 
complendum quod ad res Societati necessarias fuerit 
constitutum, cujusmodi essent negotia, quae ad domos 
vel coUegia pertinent, expedire, tum etiam quae illorum 
sunt^ defendere: et generatim ad res omnes agendas 
multmn conferet, immo necessarium est unius Procura- 
toris generalis Societatis auxilium ; qui quidem Romae 
resideat, ac prudentia, fidelitate, et dexteritate cum 
hominibus agendi, et omnibus aliis dotibus poUeat^ non 
tamen Professus sit, nec in domibus Societatis professae 
habitet^ sed in alia (de qua dictum est in quarta parte) 
qui suis etiam auxiliis^ ac ministris ad ea negotia^ quae 
solus non potest conficere, necessariis sublevetur. 

13 Cum ergo Praepositus hujusmodi habeat auxilia^ tempus 
(quod quidem valetudo, et vires corporis permittent) 
partim cum Deo, partim cum officiaUbus, et Ministris 
hujusmodi agendo, partim secum seorsum considerando, 
ac cum auxilio et favore Dei ac Domini nostri, quod 
agendum est, staluendo, impendet. 

14 Praepositi etiam Provinciales, et Rectores CoUegiorum, 
vel Praepositi particulares domorum suis auxiliis pluribus 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



122 CONSTITUTIONUM 

et paucioribus pro necessitate^ ac momento rerum ipsis 
commissarum sublevari debent^ ac prsecipue ad consili- 
um aliquos^ cum quibus res graviores, quae occurrunt, 
communicent (quanvis eis auditis penes eosdem sit sta- 
tuendi facultas) designatos habeant. 



DECIMA PARS; 

de modop quo conservari^ et augeri totum corpus Societatis 
in suo bono statu possit. 



1 /^^UIA Societas, qu€e mediis ktmanis instituta non 
\rjestf per ea nec conservari nec augeri potest, sed per 

gratiam omnipotentis Dei ac Domini nostri Jesu 
Christi ; in eo solo spem constitui oportet, quod conser- 
vaturus sit, et promoturus hoc opus, quod ad obsequium 
et laudem suam, et auxiUum animarum inchoare dig- 
natus est. Et juxta spem hanc primum medium et 
maxime consentaneum orationum et sacrificiorum erit, 
quae hac cum intentione sancta offerri, et singuUs heb- 
domadis, mensibus, et annis in omnibus locis, ubi Soci- 
etas residet, certa ordinatione institui debent. 

2 Ad conservationem et incrementum non solum corporis, 
id est eorum, quae extema sunt, sed etiam spiritus 
Societatis atque ad assecutionem finis, quem sibi prae- 
figit, auxiUi animarum, ad ultimum et supernaturalem 
suum finem consequendum media illa, quae cum Deo 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS DECIMA. 123 

instrumentum conjimgunt, ac disponunt^ ut a divina 
manu recte gubernetur, efficaciora simt, quam quae illud 
disponunt erga homines. Hujusmodi est probitas et 
virtus, ac praecipue charitas, et pura intentio divini ser- 
vitii, et famiUaritas cum Deo in spiritualibus devotionis 
exercitiis^ et zelus syncerus animarum^ ad gloriam ejus^ 
qui eas creavit ac redemit, quovis alio emolumento post- 
habito. Videtur itaque in imiversum curandum esse, 
ut omnes, qui se Societati addixerunt^ in virtutum soUd- 
arum ac perfectarum, et spiritualium rerum studium 
incumbant ; hac in hujusmodi majus momentum, quam 
in doctrina^ vel aliis donis naturahbus et humanis con- 
stitutum esse ducant. Haec enim interiora sunt^ ex 
quibus efficaciam ad exteriora permanare ad finem nobis 
propositum oportet. 

3 Hoc jacto fundamento, media iUa naturaUa^ quae Dei ac 
Domini nostri instrumentum ab ea parte disponunt^ qua 
proximos respicit, in universum ad conservationem et 
incrementum totius hujus corporis conferent : si tamen 
et addiscantur^ et exerceantur syncere ad solum Dei 
obsequium ; non ut iUis fiducia nostra innitatur ; sed 
potius ut divinae gratiae juxta summae providentiae suae 
ordinem per haec cooperemur, qui ad gloriam suam 
tam dona naturaUa^ quae ipse ut Creator^ quam super 
naturaUa, quae ut gratiae author donat, vult referri. Et 
ideo media humana, vel per industriam acquisita, ac 
praecipue doctrina exacta et soUda^ et modus eam pro- 
ponendi populo in concionibus, et lectionibus, et forma 
agendi cum hominibus^ eosdemque tractandi diUgenter 
curanda simt. 

4 Juverit etiam magnopere in suo bono statu ac discipUna 
CoUegia conservare, et ad id eorum superintendentiam 
per iUos exercere, quibus utiUtatis temporalis nihil ex 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



124' CONSTITUTIONUM 

eis potest accedere. Talis est Societas professa^ quae in 
CoUegiis eos instituendos curabit in perfectione vitae, 
litterisque Christiano dignis^ qui talentum ad id sortiti 
esse videbuntur. Hi enim pro seminario Societati pro- 
fessae, et ejus Coadjutoribus erunt ; et, si cum Collegiis 
Universitates etiam curae Societatis commissae fuerint, 
observato illo modo procedendi, de quo in quarta parte 
dictum est, ad finem eundem juvabunt. 

5 Quia paupertas pro vallo firmissimo est Religionibus, ut 
eas in statu suo et disciplina conservet^ et a compluribus 
hostibus defendat (unde etiam Daemon enititur illud 
variis rationibus evertere) refert plurimum ad conserva- 
tionem et augmentum totius hujus corporis, procul ad- 
modum omnem avaritiae speciem ablegasse ; nullos red- 
ditus^ vel possessiones, vel stipendia pro verbi Dei 
praedicatione, aut lectione, aut missis, aut administrati- 
one sac^amentorum, aut demum rebus quibuslibet spiri- 
tualibus (ut est in sexta parte dictum) admittendo, nec 
ad suam utilitatem redditus CoUegiorum applicando. 

6 Erit etiam summi momenti, ut perpetuo foelix Societatis 
status conservetur, diligentissime ambitionem, malorum 
omnium in quavis Repub. vel congregatione matrem, 
submovere, ac aditum ad dignitatem, vel praelationem 
ullam directe vel indirecte quaerendam in Societate prae- 
cludere. Gluod ut fiat, omnes Professi se nihil unquam 
ad eam obtinendam acturos, et quos agere animadverte- 
rint, delaturos, Deo ac Domino nostro voveant : et in- 
capaces ac inhabiles ad praelationem quamvis habeantur 
ii, de quibus probari posset, quod eam ambiissent. 
Promittant etiam Deo ac Domino nostro ad nuUam 
etiam extra Societatem praelationem, vel dignitatem 
obtinendam se quicquam acturos, nec ad sui electionem 
ad hujusmodi munus, quoadejus fieri poterit, consensum 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS DECIMA. 125 

prsestituroB ; si ejus obedientia, qui sub poena peccati 
potest praecipere, eos non compulerit : sed unusquisque 
videat qua ratione animarum saluti juxta nostrse profes- 
sionis humilitatem et submissionem inservire possit ; et 
ne Societas his hominibus^ qui ad propositum sibi finem 
sunt ei necessarii^ privetur. 

7 Promittat etiam Deo quivis Professus, quod, siquando 
dicto modo compulsus praelationem aliquam extra Socie- 
tatem admittet^ audiet postea quovis tempore Prtepositi 
Generalis consilium^ vel alicujv^j quem ille sibi ad hoc 
substitueret ; quodque, si senserit mehus esse quod con- 
suhtur^ sit illud executurus ; non quod habeat qui Prae- 
latus est, aliquem de Societate Superioris loco; sed 
quod sponte in Dei conspectu vult ad id faciendum obli- 
gari^ quod ad divinum obsequium meUus esse intellex- 
erit ; quodque placeat esse aliquem^ qui sibi cum charitate 
ac libertate christiana ad gloriam Dei et Domini nostri 
id proponat. 

8 Ut perpetuo totius hujus corporis bonus status conser- 
vetur, confert plurimim, quod in Prima, Secunda, et 
Ctuinta parte dictum est de turba et hominibus ad no- 
strum institutum ineptis ne ad probationem quidem 
admittendis^ et, si ahqui probationis tempore non esse 
idonei invenirentur, etiam dimittendis. 

9 Si qui vero depravatis moribus essent^ et de quorum 
emendatione parum speraretur, multo minus essent re- 
tinendi. Minus etiam apertum ostium esse debebit ad 
admittendos aliquos in Scholasticos approbatos, et Co- 
adjutores formatos, minime vero omnium in Professos. 
Non enim alii, quam spiritus et doctrinae selectae viri, et 
multum, diuque exercitati, et in variis probationibus 
virtutis et abnegationis suiipsorum cum omnium aedifi- 

j 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



126 CONSTITUTIONUM 

catione et satisfactione perspecti ad professionem admitti 
debent. Sic enim, licet multitudo augescat, non immi- 
nuetur, nec debilior reddetur spiritus, dum tales sint, 
qui in Societatis corpus cooptantur. 

10 Cum bona et mala capitis habitudo in universum corpus 
redundet ; summopere conferet, si electio Praepositi 
Generalis ea sit, quae in nona parte descripta est. Et 
post hanc electionem, illa maximi erit momenti, qua in- 
feriores Praepositi in Provinciis, et CoUegiis, ac Domibus 
Societatis eUguntur. Nam fere quales hi fuerint, tales 
et eorum subditi erunt. Refert etiam magnopere, prae- 
ter electionem, si Praepositi particulares m sibi subditos, 
et GeneraUs in particulares, ac contra Societas in Gene- 
ralem (ut in nona parte declaratum est) multum potes- 
tatis habeant, ita, ut omnes ad bonum omnia possint ; et^ 
si male agerent, omnino subjecti sint. Refert etiam, ut 
Superiores ministros idoneos (ut in eadem parte dictum 
est) ad ordinationem et executionem rerum, quae spec- 
tant ad eorum officium, habeant. 

11 Quod juvat ad unionem membrorum hujus Societatis 
inter se, et cum suo capite, multum etiam ad conservati- 
onem boni status illius juvabit: cujusmodi est in primis 
voluntatum vinculum, quod charitas est, et mutuus 
amor, quem crebra communicatio, et rerum mutua 
notitia, eadem doctrina, et in omnibus, quantum fieri 
potest, uniformitas nutriet. Sed in primis id praestabit 
obedientiae vinculum, quod particulares cum suis Prae- 

" positis, etTios ipsos inter se et cum Provincialibus, et 
utrosque cum GeneraU uniet, ita, ut inter omnes diUgen- 
ter subordinatio servetur. 

12 Moderatio laborum animi et corporis, et in Constitutio- 
nibus, quae ad neutrum extremum rigoris vel dissolu- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



PARS DECIMA. 127 

tionis vergant (ut sic melius observari possint) medio- 
critas conferet ad durationem, et totius corporis in suo 
statu conservationem. 

13 Ad eundem finem faciet, generatim curare, ut amor et 
charitas omnium etiam extemorum erga Societatem 
conservetur, sed eorum praesertim, quorum voluntas 

' bene aut male in nos affecta multum habet momenti, ut 
aditus ad divinum obsequium, et animarum auxilium 
aperiatur, vel praecludatur. In ipsa vero Societate nec 
sit nec sentiatur animorum propensio ad partem alteru- 
tram factionis, quae esset fortassis inter Principes vel 
Dominos Christianos ; sed sit potius quidam universalis 
amor, qui partes omnes (Kcet sibi invicem contrariae sint) 
in Domino nostro amplectatur. 

14 Juverit etiam moderatus et prudens usus gratiarum per 
sedem Apostolicam concessarum^ solius auxilii animarum 
fine syncerissime nobis proposito. Sic enim divina boni- 
tas opus hoc quod coepit, promovebit; ac bonus odor, 
qui veritati bonorum operum innitatur^ hominum de- 
votionem augebit : ut et a Societate ipsi juvari, et ean- 
dem ad propositum sibi finem obsequii et gloriae divinae 
Majestatis juvare curent. 

15 Conferet etiam, rationem habere valetudinis ; ut ea in 
particularibus conservetur ; quemadmodum tertia in 
parte dictum est ; et ut demum omnes observationi Con- 
stitutionum studeant; ad quam easdem scire^ saltem 
quae ad quemlibet pertinent, necesse est. Quare legere, 
vel audire easdem singuUs mensibus oportebit. 

Octavo die Septembris 1558, nomine sanctissimi Domini 
nostri Pauli Papae quarti allocutus est Reverendissimus 
Cardinalis Neapolitanus eos omnes, qui Congregationi 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



128 CONSTITUTIONUM 

generali nostrse Sodetatis intererant^ et proposuit duo^ 

quse sequuntur^ et in Constitutionibus poni jussit. In 

utroque autem Congregatio nostra se obedituram dixit ; 

unde et hic ea posita sunt. 

Unum fuit, placere suse Sanctitati, ut Praepositus Socie- 

tatis nostrse triennalis esset^ et non perpetuus ; quatwis 

post triennium confirmari posset. 

Alterum^ ut Societas nostra chorum ad horas canonicas 

dicendas haberet^ quemadmodum aliae Religiones^ cum 

ea tamen moderatione^ quas Praeposito Generali convenhre 

videretvr. 



FINIS. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



A COLLATION 



FIRST EDITION, ROME, 1558, WITH THAT PRINTED BY 
THE SOCIETY AT ANTWERP, 1702. 



The copy toith which this Collation has been made belongs to the University 
Ldbrary at Cambridge. Corpus Institutorum Societatis Jesu. 



PARS PRIMA. 



ROME, 1558. 



ANTWERP, 1702. 



CAP. I. 
3 — quae ad eorum personam et voca- — quoe eorum sint dotes et vocatio ; 



tionem attinent ; 



3 — in Societate 

4 — ^agendi rationem 

7 — et percepta retinendum. 

8 — Zelo accensi sint pro animarum 

salute ; 
9 — ^facultas 
1 3 — existimationis 
— ciHm suppetent, non 



CAP. II. 

— qui in Societate se oflFerunt 
— ^procedendi modum 
— et fideliter percepta retinendum. 
— Zelum habeant salutis animaruro ; 



— gratia 

— ^bonse famse 

— ciim alia suppetent, haec non 



CAP. III. 

— efficaces 

dele. 
— singula a Societate non excludunt. 



— parum utiiis futurus 
— noceat 



2 — ^multse et graves 

6 — aliquando 

8 — sigillatim accepta a Societate non 

omnino excludant, 
1 1 — inutilis 
16 — ^praevaleat 

CAP. IV. 
1— In Domino persuademus — in Domino valdfe persuademus 

3— perpetub vivat — vivat et moriatur 

— deliberatio — sententia 

K 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



130 



C0LL.AT10N OF THE FIRST EDITION 



ROME, 1558. ANTWERP, 1702. 

— quod Deo magis placere poterit, — majus Dei obsequium spectabit. 

intuebitur. 

6 — ejus consensus ad observanda — quod contentus sit observare 



1 — ad Dei opus 
— ut non nimis faciles 



PARS SECUNDA. 
CAP. I. 

— ad hoc opus 
— ut non faciles 



CAP 
3 — in Examine suppressi 
— si Societati damnum 
— exemplo videretur 
— inquietus esset 
4 — instituto nostro, ac procedendi 
modo convenientibus 



II. 

— quos antek in Examine tacuisset 
— si damnum 
— exemplo judicaretur 
— inquietura se ostenderet 
— quos noster procedendi modus re- 
quirit 



1 — maxim^ satisfaciat 
2 — particularia 

— significare 
6 — dimittendum 

— mutua 
8 — sedulo 
9 — ^ut studeatur 
10 — non annitantur 

— quos tolerari 

CAP. IV. 
1 — ab aliquo loco in alium ejusdem — si 

Societatis 
— injussus 
— alioqui 



CAP. III. 

— magis satisfaciat 
— quis sit pro quo oratur 
— docere 
— dimittere 

dele. 
— quantum fieri poterit 

dele. 
— nollent 
— id quod tolerari 



4 — ^relaxatis votis, si ea emiserint 



— si ad alium locum 
transferant 
dele. 
— Praepositus 
— relaxato illis voto 



Societatis se 



PARS TERTIA. 
CAP. I. 
4 — ^intemperantia vel vitio — inordinatione 

— decore sive gravitate — maturitate 

7 — ^prout intellexeirt — prout in Domino intellexerit 

10 — qu2im fieri potest, diligentissimfe -—quae adhiberi possint ut eas supe- 
conquisitas, quibus et ad super- rent 

andas tentationes utantur 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



WITH THAT OF ANTWERP, 1702. 



131 



ROME, 1558. 

11 — suam conscientiam prorsus ape- 

riat. 
12 — juxta Societatis institutum ac re- 

ligionem 
16 — ^vel censor 

17 — ciHm acciderint, fructum aliquem 
capere non solum ad suam 
— ^patientiam veram habendo in- 

terius et exterius eam prae 
— ^infirmorum prsefecto 
— Domini nostri 

— non inferius est sanitate) admitti. 
18 — ^in concionibus publicis 
— qui quidem sine .... poterunt. 



19 — ^singulis aunis 

21 — assuescant aliqua ratione 

22 — prae caeteris 

— ^largiorem 
23 — im6 necessarium 

— ^tanquam Christum Dominum in- 
tuentes 

— velle ac sentire 
24 — propter quem obediunt 

26 — Omnes rectissimam habere inten- 
tionem non 
— debeant) ut in omnibus 



27 — comparatae sunt 



1 — beneplacitum 



ANTWERP, 1702. 

— ipsius conscientia prorsus aperta 
sit. 
dele. 

dele. 
— fructum capere non solum sibi 

— patientiam magnam habendo et prae 

— infirmario 

— ^Domini nostri acceptari. 

— non minus donum est quam sanitas 

— ^in concionibus et lectionibus publicis 

—qui quidem edi non poterunt in 
lucem sine approbatione atque 
consensu Praepositi Generalis 
(qui eorum examinationem sal- 
tem tribus committat san4 doc- 
trind. et claro judicio in ea 
facultate praeditis. 

— intra annum 

— aliquem usum comparent 

— magis 

— ^liberaliorem 

— et valde necessarium 

— ^loco Christi Domini agnoscentes 

— ^voluntatem ac judicium 

— ^propter quem et cui in omnibus 

obediunt 
— Omnes rectam habere intentionem 

studeant non 
— debeant) et crebr5 admoneantur ut 

in omnibus 
dele. 



CAP. II. 

— obsequium 



— bonum fundamentum 



PARS QUARTA. 

PROCEMIUM. 

— conveniens fundamentum 
K 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



132 COLLATION OF THE FIRST EDITION 

ROME, 1558. ANTWERP, 1702. 

CAP. I. 

1 — Quoniam id maximfe satis- — Quoniam valdfe aequum est, ut (quod 

fiat, quibus divina in nobis erit) illorura devotioni 

ac beneficentiae correspondeamus, 

quibus divina 
5 — ^participes efficiuntur — participes peculiariter efficiuntur 

CAP. II. 
5 — probantur — disponuntur 

CAP. IV. 
1 — ^Ad rerum temporalium et exter- — ^Ad conservationem eorum qui in 
narum ac CoUegialium conser- CoUegiis sunt, in iis quse ad 

vationem in iis, quae ad corpus corpus et res externas attinent, 

pertinent, 

CAP. V. 

2 — solidiorem doctrinam conseque- — solidius fundamentum jaceret, 
tur, 

CAP. VI. 

I — in dbctrina — ^in his facultatibus 

3 — et occupationum — et exteriorum occupationum 

— Est enim laudabile — ^Ast enim consultum 

5 — ordo temporis — hoc 

12 — ^in componendo carmine, aut so- — in componenda soluta oratione, aut 
luta oratione exercebunt ; carmine exercebunt ; 

CAP. VIII. 

3 — utiles — utiliores 

6— ad modum — in modo 

— accommodatus — accommpdus 

CAP. X. 

1 — ^rationi valde consonum est — est vaide probabile 

7 — cui rerum spiritualium cura sit — qui rebus spiritualibus superinten- 

dat 

CAP. XII. 
1— maxime proprium — magis proprium 

CAP. XIII. 
4 — quando quisque eas aggredi — quantum quisque eas discere 

5 — considerationi Rectoris — prudenti considerationi Rectoris 

CAP. XIV. 
3 — doctrinam Aristotelis profiteri — doctrina Aristotelis sequenda est 
oportebit 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



WITH THAT OF ANTWERP, 1702. 133 

ROME, 1558. ANTWERP, 1702. 

CAP. XV. 

4 — mediocritatem excedant — excessus fiat 

CAP. XVII. 
1 — tractare possit. — conferat. 



PARS QUINTA. 
CAP. I. 

2 — quos admitti oportebit --qui admittendi erunt 

CAP. II. 
2 — satis versati esse debebunt dele. 

— retulerunt. — ^haberent. 

f) — atque indole in viros doctos eos — ^speretur, eos in literis profecturos 
evasuros 
— speretur. dele. 

CAP. III. 
4 — ^ut omnium ad gioriam Dei ratio — ut omnia semper constare possint, 
semper constet. ad Dei gloriam. 

CAP. IV. 
3 — fieri solitis dele. 





PARS SEXTA. 
CAP. I. 

1 — in qua quidem virtute omnibus — Quam quidem omnes plurimum ob- 
studiosfe curandum est, ut ex- servare, et in ea excellere stude- 

imium progressum faciant ant ; 

— studio celeriter obediendi dele. 

— ac omnino existimare — pro certo habens 

CAP. II. 

1 — ^immutare per declarationes, vel — immovendo per Declarationes vel 

novas Constitutiones innovationes 

2 — nobis prospiciet. — ipsum nobis prospecturum. 

6 — ^petendas acquiratur — petendas in judicio acquiratur 

— ita, ut in judicio conveniri, qui dele. 
non solveret, posset. 

10 — domus — personae Societatis 

— et eas cum sancta simplicitate — quas eleemosynas simpliciter amore 

propter amorem Dei illi petant. Domini nostri petant. 

12 — expertes — capaces 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



134 



COLLATION OF THE FIRST EDITTON 



ROME, 1558. 
13 — petere debent 

— oflferre 
14 — syncerae 

1 — habitudo 

4 — consentanea. 

7 — 8U08 habeant procuratores 



ANTWERP, 1702. 
— petere possint 
— ^reprsesentent 
— debitse 

CAP. III. 

— ^valetudo 
— ^propria. 
— suum habeant procuratorem 



1 — ^multo impensius 

— peculiari modo 
2 — ad id serio adhibitis 

— jam alia officia parum erunt utilia 
3 — ^vel obligationem ; si qua in Do- 
mino intercedat. 



CAP. IV. 

— multo magis 

dele. 
— ^valde peculiaribus 
— jam aliis rebus juvari non poterit 
— et obligationes quee in Domino in- 
tercedunt. 



1 — non in diversa 

2 — Praepositus Generalis Societatis 

3 — ^velit mitti 

5 — Pontificis intentio 



PARS SEPTIMA. 
CAP. I. 

— sit impendendus, non loca pera- 

grando diversa 
— Superior 
— mittatur 
— Pontificis intentio, et effectum, cujus 

gratia mittitur 



2 — grave 



1 — obtrudere 
— colligi facile potest 
— si privatis id licet 

2 — sexta 
— ibi 



CAP. II. 

— magni momenti 

CAP. III. 

— ^ingerere 
— apparet 

dele. 
— quarta 
— in sexta parte 



2 — ad proximorum auxilium 
— conferet exemplum 
3 — ^pro adversariis itidem, si qui fu- 

erint, 
4 — obtinere curaverint 
1 r— edere non debet, 



CAP. IV. 

dele. 
— conferet bonum exemplum 



dele. 

— particulares petierint 

— edere non debet aliqua scripta, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



WITH THAT OP ANTWERP, 1702. 135 

ROME, 1558. ANTWERP, 1702. 

et aliorum etiam judicio et cen- — et iegi ac examinari faciat 
surse subjiciat 



PARS OCTAVA. 
CAP. I. 

1 — sejuncta — diflfusa 

— ^fieri solitam dele. 

8 — spiritum Dei — spiritum 

CAP. II. 

1 — sive qui subrogetur alteri Praepo- — sive aliquam ob causam ex iis, prop- 
sito, quem cedere officio prop- ter quas Generalis in suo officio 

ter aliquam causam ex iis, quse absolvi potest, ut postea dice- 

postea dicentur, conveniat. tur. 

CAP. III. 
1 — conventum indixerit — ad congregationem convocaverit 

— His tribus suas vices tota Provin- — His tribus, et generali congregationi 
cia committet, et quicquid a quicunque in Provincia rema- 

conventu generali, cui ipsi in- nent, suas vices delegabunt. 

terfuerint, constitutum fuerit, 
ratum habebit. 

CAP. V. 
3 — Conventum mittantur — congregationem venient 

CAP. VI. 

1 — et eo tempore certiores reddi de — informationem capientes, qui eam 
iis, qu8e ad rem pertinent, ab bene dare poterant 

illis, qui bene poterunt referre 

2 — ^ut qui nec ad eligendum — ^ut inhabilis ad eligendum 
— sit idoneus dele. 

6 — cum duobus — cum suis 

8 — dissidii — schismaticus 

— ^haberi — ^haberi nolit 
— subire nolit dele. 

CAP. VII. 
2 — dixerint sententiam suam, ejus — proposuerint 
-4 — non erit ea habitudine corporis — corporis valetudine non esset 



PARS NONA. 
CAP. H. 
9 — siquis magnse sit existimationis, -^xistimatio ac bona fama 
ac celebris nominis 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



136 



COLLATION OF THE FIRST EDITION. 



ROME, 1558. 



ANTWERP, 1702. 



CAP. III. 

1 — potestatem — ^auctoritatem 

5 — ^ac usum ea conditione, ut inte- — ac bonum, cum facultate sese onere 

grum sit hac se obligatione ex- liberandi 

uere 

CAP. VI. 



4 — septima parte 
6 — ^tamque idoneos 
— ^intellectus eam, 
10 — imbecillitate 



— sexta parte, capite tertio 

dele. 
— intellectus eam lucem 
— natura 



PARS DECIMA. 



5 — pro vallo firmissimo 
7 — Generalis consilium 

15— mensibus oportebit. 



— ^velut propugnaculum 

— Generalis qui pro tempore fuit Con- 

silium 
— after mensibus oportebit. follows 

the simple Vow of the Professed 

after Profession. 



THE END. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE CONSTITUTIONS 

OF THE 

80CIETY OF JESUS. 



PRINTED BY THE SOCIETY AT ROME. 1558. 



HotlimD into en0li0t) ttom tt^t ILatin : 



WITH AN APPBNDIX, CONTAINING THB 

THREE BULLS 

FOR THE INSTITUTION, SUPPRESSION. AND RESTORATION OF THE 
ORDER OF JE8UIT8 : 

AND AN 

OUTLINE OF THE PRESENT CONDITION OF THE R0MI8H CHURCH 

IN THIS KINGDOM. 

<xsoooooooocoooocooooooooooooooooooooocooo« 
CACUM 8CBLU8 OMNB. ^VIRO. 

LONDON: 

J. O. AND F. RIVINOTON, ST. PAUL*S CHURCH-YARD, AND WATERLOO 

PLACE, PALL MALL; SIMPKIN, MARSHALL, AND CO., 8TATI0NERS' 

HALL COURT ; AND J. LESLIE, OREAT QUEEN STREET. 

1838. 



Digitized-by VjOOQ lC 



Pope Julius, the successor of Paul ordered the Constitutions to be written. 
Ignatius Loyola applied himself long and considerately to them. Whilst 
meditating them he experienced divine illuminations ; whilst writing them, he 
shed tears. Moreover the Virgin Mother of Christ descended to instruct 

him. ^The Constitutions are decreed to be filled with the Spirit of God. 

Synopsis of the first Century of the Society of Jesus. By 
Jacohus Damianus, of that Society. 1641. 

/. Book, Chap. VII. 

Polancus translated the Constitutions from Spanish into LAtin ; the CoUege 
printed them at Rome, 1558. 

Dam. Syn. II. Book. Chap. X. 

Four Assistants were appointed to the Generai, Natalis, Consalvus, Polancus, 
Madridius — and Polancus was by the Fathers made Counsellor to the General, 
and by him was created Secretary and Procurator General. 

Dam. Syn. II. Book. Chap. II. 

John Polancus died in 1577 — a uscful writer of books. 

Dam. Syn. IV. Book. Chap. VII. 



PRINTED BY ROBERT BEST EDE, DORKING. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



INTRODUCTION. 



1 A LTHOUGH it be the supreme Wisdom, and bounty of 

God our Creator and Lord, which shall preserve, govem, 
and promote to His holy service even as He has deigned to 
commence, this most humble Society of Jesus ; whilst on our 
part, that inward law of Charity and Love which the Holy Spirit 
is wont to inscribe and impress upon our hearts, shall assist 
in the same purpose more effectually than any extemal Consti- 
tutions ; yet since the beneficent arrangement of divine pro- 
vidence demands the co-operation of His creatures ; and since 
the Vicar of Christ our Lord has so decreed, as also we are 
taught in the Lord by the examples of saints, and by reason 
itself, we deem it needfal that our Constitutions be recorded; the 
better to aid our progress in the path of God's service ah*eady 
entered upon, according to the method of our Institute. 

2 Although in our intention, that is of chief and greatest mo- 
ment, which concems the Body of the whole Society; whose 
union, and good govemment, and preservation in its good estate 
to the greater glory of God are the grand objects; yet since 
this body consists of parts, and in its conduct what concems 
individuals first occurs, as well in admitting, as in advancing 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



INTRODUCTION. 

and afterwards in dispersing them throughout the vineyard 
of Christ our Lord; herewith will we commence, under that 
blessing which the etemal Light shall deign to grant us to 
His own honour and glory. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE FIRST PART 



THE CONSTITUTIONS. 



Of admission to Prohation, 



OP HIM WHO HAS THE POWER OP ADMISSION. 

CHAP. I. 

1 rriO whom the power of admitting to probation is to belong, 
J-and how far its hmits are to extend, may be left to the 

judgment of the General ; who, in communicating it, will con- 
sider what is most conducive to the service of God and our 
Lord. 

2 When a person apparently fit to adopt our Institute shall apply 
to one who has not this power of admission, he shall send him 
to the party who has, or write to him, signifying what manner 
of person he is who desires to be admitted, and with what gifts 
of God he is endowed ; and if the other have authority to direct 
in his absence, let him do that which is commanded him in the 
Lord. 

3 Because it greatly concems God's service that a fit selection be 
made of those who are admitted, and that dihgence be used to 
ascertain the particulars respecting their person and calhng : 
whoso has this power of admission, if he cannot himself make 
the inquiry, let him employ from among those who are con- 
stantly about his person some one whose assistance he may use 
to become acquainted with the probationers, to live with them, 
and examine them ; some one endowed with prudence, and not 
unskilled in the manner which should be observed in dealing 
with so many various kinds and conditions of persons ; so that 
this business may be managed with greater intelligence, and 
more satisfaction to either party for the glory of God. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

It is needful that the person having the power of admission, and 
the person whose assistance he uses, shonld each have a know- 
ledge of the interests of the Society, and a zeal for its pros- 
perity ; so that he may be tmned by no consideration from that 
which he shall judge most conducive in the Lord to the seryice 
of God in this Society ; to promote which, it is meet that he be 
not too eager to grant admission. And that he be less Uable to 
any irregular motive, in cases where temptation may occur (as 
with kinsmen and with friends) let no man discharge the duty of 
examination, in whom any danger of this sort may be appre- 
hended. 

But whoever fulfils this office should have everything which 
appertains to it set forth in writing; whereby he may more 
perfectly and surely do that which is demanded of him in this 
respept for God*s service. 



OP SUCH AS MAY BE ADMITTED INTO THE SOCIETY. 
CHAP. II. 

1 Speaking generally of those to be admitted ; their fitness is in 
proportion to the extent to which they are endowed with both 
natural and acquired gifts of God, calculated to promote His 
service according to the purpose of the Society ; and also to the 
certainty of the probation to which they have been subjected. 

2 To speak particularly ; let those who are admitted to be Co- 
adjutors, to conduct the temporal and extemal affairs, (who 
should not be more mmierous than is necessary, to aid the 
Society in such things as the others cannot be employed upon 
without the neglect of more important interests) be men (as 
touching the soul) of good conscience, sedate, tractable, lovers 
of virtue and perfection, given to devotion ; men, in their 
domestic and extemal conduct, of edifying habits ; who, con- 
tented with the part of Martha in the Society, and well affected 
towards its Institute, desire to serve it for the glory of God. 

3 As touching exteraals; they must be gifted with a comely 
presence, health, youth, and energies to sustain their bodily 
labours in the Society ; and apparently having, or likely to have, 
some talent for its service. 

4 Considering the end of our Institute, and our plan of con- 
duct, we persuade ourselves in the Lord, that it is by no 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 7 

means conducive to His greater service and glory to admit men 
of unmanagedble tempers, or unavailable to the Society, how- 
ever advantageous it might prove to the individuals. 

5 It is needful that those who are admitted to aid the Society in 
l^piritual concems, considering what a ministry of this nature 
requires that the souls of their fellow-creatures be benefited, 
be fumished with these foflowing gifts 6f God. 

6 As regards their inteUect ; of soimd doctrine, or apt to leam it ; 
of discretion in the management of business, or, at least of 
capacity and judgment to attain to it. 

7 As to memory ; of aptitude to perceive, and also to retain their 
perceptions. 

8 As to intention ; that they be studious of aU virtue and spiritual 
perfection; cahn, stedfast, strenuous in what they undertake 
for God'8 service ; buming with zeal for the salvation of souls, 
and therefore attached to our Institute ; which directly tends to 
aid and dispose the souls of men to the attainment of that 
ultimate end, from the hand of God, our Creator and Lord. 

9 In extemals ; facility of language, so needful in our intercourse 
with our neighbour, is most desirable. 

10 u4 covnely presence, for the edification of those with whom we 
have to deal. 

11 Good health, and strength to undergo the labours of our 
Institute. 

12 Age to correspond with what has been said; which, in those 
admitted to probation should exceed the fourteenth year, and in 
those admitted to profession the twenty-fifth. 

13 As the extemal gifts of nobihty, wealth, reputation and the 
hke are not sufficient, if others are wanting ; so, if there be a 
sufficiency of others, these are not essential : so fer, however, as 
they tend to edification, they make those more fit for admission, 
who, even without them, would be eligible on account of the 
quahties before mentioned ; in which, the more he excels who 
desires to be admitted, so much the more fit wiU he be for this 
Society, to the glory of God our Lord ; and the less he excels, 
80 much the less serviceable wiU he be. But the sacred unction 
of the divine Wisdom wiU instmct those who undertake this 
duty to His service and more abundant praise, what standard 
should be maintained in aU these things. 

B 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



5 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

OF THE IMPEDIMENTS TO ADMISSION INTO THE SOCIETY. 
CHAP. III. 

1 Although charity and the love of souls, in which this Society 
exerts itself according to the end of its Institute, comprehend 
all classes of men, in order to promote their spiritual advantage,*. 
and assist them in obtaining salvation in the Lord, yet, as to 
admission into the body of Society, it ought not to adopt any 
others than those whom, as aforesaid, it shall judge available to 
the special object of the Society. 

2 Of impediments to admission ; there are some which altogether 
exclude those who would enter ; for which many and weighty 
reasons move us in the Lord. These are as foUow. 

3 To have separated at any time from the bosom of the holy 
Church, by denial of the Faith amongst infidels, or by falling 
into errors contrary to her, in which he shall have been censured 
by pubUc sentence ; or to have departed from the unity of the 
Church after the manner of schismatics. 

4 To have committed homicide ; or to be infamous for enormous 
crimes. 

5 To have assumed the habit of any Order ; or to have become a 
hermit at any period in the monkish habit. 

6 To be bound by the bond of matrimony, or legal servitude. 

7 To be aiflicted with any complaint of the head, which may 
obscure or weaken the judgment ; or if he have any observable 
disposition towards it, as is discoursed more largely in the 
Examen. 

8 Other impediments, though taken singly they do not altogether 
exclude from the Society, yet render him less ehgible who 
desires admission ; and the defect may be of so great moment, 
that it would not conduce to the service of God, that any should 
be received with it. 

9 The secondary impediments, of which we are now treating, are 
such as these. As relates to intemals; passions or affections 
which do not appear to be govemable ; or a habit of sinning, of 
which no great hope of amendment may be entertained. 

10 A motive less direct than is right for entering a ReHgious 
Order ; as blended with some merely human object. 

11 Unsteadiness, or notable fickleness of mind, by which the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JESUS. 9 

candidate for admission may be thought unfit to fnlfil the duties 
of the Society. 

1 2 Indiscreet devotions ; which are often a cause why men fall into 
illusions of the devil, and errors of no small moment. 

13 Want of leaming, or defect of genius, or memory to acquire it, 
or of utterance, in those who express the intention or desire of 
advancing fiirther than temporal Coadjutors usually do. 

14 Defect of judgment, and remarkable pertinacity of opinion; 
which is often the occasion of much trouble to societies of men. 

15 In the external man ; defect of body, disease, debility, or notable 
deformity. Age too tender, or too much advanced. Debt, or 
civil obhgations. 

1 6 The more Hable any person is to these defects, so much the less 
fit is he to serve God our Lord in this Society, to the succour of 
souls : and let him who has the power of admission take care 
that no private regard outweigh the general interest, which, as 
it tends more to the glory and honour of Christ our Lord, ought 
always to have the preference. 



OP THE MANNER OP ADMISSION. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 Because we persuade ourselves in the Lord, that the divine and 
supreme Majesty will deign to use the ministry of this humble 
Society ; it greatly imports, that they who are admitted into it 
should not only imdergo a long trial before they are adopted 
into its body, but that they be also thoroughly known before 
they are admitted to that probation which takes place in 
common intercourse with our inmates : it is expedient that som£ 
house be appointed in conjunction with our community, where 
he who is admitted to probation may abide as a guest for twelve 
days, or even for twenty, or more, at the discretion of the 
Superior ; that, in that period such candidates may be informed 
of the ways of the Society ; and that the Society may obtain a 
more ample knowledge in the Lord of them. 

2 Into this, which is called the House of First Probation, those 
who wish it may be more easily admitted, if they clearly appear 
to be available in this Society to the service of God and our 
Lord Jesus Christ ; and contrariwise, those who are clearly per- 
ceived not to be so may be dismissed forthwith, aided with good 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



10 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

counsel (and whatever else charity may suggest) that they study 
to serve God and our Lord elsewhere. 

3 But if the matter be not so clear to the Society as it ought, 
when he who desires to be admitted has expressed his wish, 
and has been interrogated with deUcacy on the chief impedi- 
ments, and has comprehended the object of our Institute, 
together with the probations and difficulties inherent therein; 
although he may seem eamestly to desire to be admitted into 
the Society, to live in it for ever, (without which desire no one 
ought to be admitted to probation) still, the reply, and the final 
determination may be put ofi* for awhile ; that, in the interval 
the matter may be better considered, and comn^nded to God ; 
and proper dihgence be used ; that he may be more thoroughly 
scrutinized, and his stedfastness be put to the test. How long 
this may be postponed, and what dihgence be used, is to be left 
to the prudent consideration of the person having the power of 
admission, who will ever regard that which shall be most 
pleasing to God. 

4 When it shall be determined in the Lord, that it is fit that any 
one be admitted to probation, he may enter, dressed in his usual 
attire, or each according to his respective devotion (except the 
Superior determine otherwise} and shall be settled as a guest in 
the aforesaid house of probation, or in some place appointed for 
the purpose ; and on the foUowing day it shaU be declared to 
him, how he should conduct himself in that place; and ex- 
pressly, that he hold no intercourse, unless for some cause of no 
sUght moment it seems otherwise to the Superior, either by word 
or writing, with those within or those without, except with such 
as are for that purpose designated by the Superior; which is 
done, that he may more freely weigh with himself and with God 
his caUing, and resolution of serving the divine and supreme 
Majesty in this Society. 

5 Two or three days after his entrance into the house of pro- 
bation, a more accurate exarnination may be commenced, as is 
s6t forth in the duty of the Examiner ; and a written examina- 
tion may be left with him, that he may more maturely consider 
it alone ; then, the ApostoUc Diplomas may be shown to him ; 
and the Constitutions ; and the Rules to be observed in the 
Society, and in the house which he enters; and those who 
have paid attention to Uterature, may read distinct lessons in 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 11 

the several faculties in which they are versed ; and that before 
persons appointed by the Superior to ascertain the talent of 
each in leaming, and in the manner of showing it. 
During the period of this first probation, the novice shall open 
his conscience to the Superior, or to one appointed by him, 
(except this business with the Superior*s consent be postponed to 
another time) and he shall make a general confession, (if he 
has not done so already) and that, too, to the Confessor who 
shall be designated by the Superior to receive it. And when 
all that he brought to the house, and his promise to observe all 
things proposed to him, shall have been entered into a book kept 
for that purpose, and subscribed with his own hand ; at last, 
after absolution having received the most holy sacrament of the 
Eucharist, he shall enter the house of the general community, 
where the novices are hving with the rest, and are further 
exercised in their second probation. 

What is here said of those who are first admitted to the Society, 
shall for the most part be observed with those who come from 
their studies, or other houses of the Society, where they have 
not been dihgently examined ; whilst those who have not been 
admitted into the body of the Society to be Professed, or Co- 
adjutors, let such remain, each in his own caUing; that the 
proceeding may be more clear, and the Society may better 
discem whethcr it conduce to the greater honour and glory of 
God, and our Lord, to retain him within it. 



THE SECOND PART ; 

which treats of the dismissal of those who have been admitted to 
Probation, and are found unfit for the Society, 



WHAT PERSONS MAY BE DISMISSED, AND BY WHOM. 
CHAP. I. 

I A S it conduces to the end proposed by this Society, viz. the 
-lJL service of God, and the salvation of souls, that labourers fit 
and useful to promote the work of God be maintained and increased 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



12 THK CONSTITU-TIONS Or 

in number; so ought those to be dismissed who are not so; 
and of whom it may appear, in the com^e of time, either that 
that this is not their calling, or that it is not to the common 
interest of the Society that they continue in it. But as we 
ought not to be too ea^y in granting admission; so, still less 
should we be too free in dismissing ; but proceed with all con- 
sideration and circumspection in the Lord. And although it is 
proper that the causes deserving dismissal be the more weighty, 
in proportion to the closeness of the individual*s connexion with 
the body of the Society ; still, however intimately he may be 
imited, in certain cases he may and ought to be removed ; as 
will appear in the following chapter. 
2 The power of dismissal belongs, in the first place, to the Society 
at large, when it may assemble in general Congregation. It is 
vested also in the General in all cases excepting those con- 
ceming his own person. So much of this power may be con- 
ferred upon other members of this Society as the General shall 
determine. On Provincials it is expedient that very ample 
power be conferred ; and in due proportion, also, upon local 
Superiors and Rectors of colleges, in cases where it shall seem 
fit ; that thus, throughout the body of the Society, the sub- 
ordination of holy Obedience be better maintained ; whereby 
inferiors may more distinctly imderstand that they depend upon 
their immediate superiors, and that it is highly expedient, and 
even necessary, to obey them in all things, for the sake of 
Christ our Lord. 



OF THB CAUSES FOR WHICH IT 18 EXPBDIENT THAT 
ANY ONE BB DISMISSED. 

CHAP. IL 

1 The prudent charity of the Superior who has this power should 
weigh before the Lord the causes which may justify the dis- 
missal of any one; but generally speaking, there seem to be 
four kinds of them. 

2 First ; if it should appear in the Lord to be contrary to His 
honour and glory, that an individual should continue in this 
Society, who seems to be incorrigible in any depraved affections 
or vices offensive to the divine Majesty ; which should be the 
less tolerated, the more serious and culpable they are : and that 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



OP THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 13 

too in cases where, being concealed, they give no ofFence to 
others. 

3 Secondly ; if it should be considered in the Lord, that to 
retain any person would be prejudicial to the interest of the 
Society, which as it is a matter of universal concem, should 
doubtless be preferred to the private advantage of any one who 
is sincerely seeking the service of Grod. Such should be the 
case, if in the course of probation any impediments or notable 
defects concealed in the examination should be discovered ; or 
if upon trial it should be found that he would be very useless, 
and that he would rather impede than aid the Society through 
his obvious inaptitude to its several duties ; and still more if 
he should be injurious to it by the evil example of his hfe, 
especially if he be unquiet and oflPensive to others, either in his 
words or actions. To tolerate this would not be charity, but 
the very contrary, in him who is bound to maintain the peace 
and good estate of the Society entrusted to him. 

4 Thirdly ; if it should appear that it would be contrary to the 
interest of the Society and of the person also about to be 
dismissed ; which as relating to the body may happen, if during 
Probation, disease or debiHty be perceived in any one, by which 
it is probable he could not advance in his studies according to 
our Institute and method of proceeding in fiirtherance of God's 
service : as conceming the mind ; when the probationer cannot 
settle himself to a life of Ohedience, to be regulated according 
to the Society*s manner of proceeding ; if he cannot, or will not, 
subject his own opinions and judgment ; or for other impediments, 
whether natural or habitual. 

5 Fourthly ; if it should appear prejudicial to others who are not 
of the Society ; as if the bond of matrimony should be dis- 
covered, or of legal servitude, or debt of great amount, wherein 
upon his first examination he had concealed the tmth. Any 
one of these four reasons appears sufficient for judging it more 
agreeable to God, that he in whom it is foimd should be 
honourably dismissed, than an impmdent charity be exercised in 
retaining him. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



14 THB C0NSTITUTI0N8 OP 

OF THB MANNBR OF OISMISSAL. 
CHAP. III. 

1 It will be meet to observe such a method with those who are 
dismissed as shall be most satisfactory in the sight of God to 
him who dismisses, to him who is dismissed, and ail others 
whether within or without. As to him who dismisses, for any 
of the causes before stated, let three things be observed. 

2 The first is, that he pray the Lord, and see that prayers be 
made within the house to the same e£Pect (although particulars 
be not known), that our Lord would vouchsafe to signify his 
most sacred will respecting the business in hand. 

3 The second is, that he consult with several, or some one of the 
inmates, who seem best adapted for this purpose, and hear their 
opinion. 

4 The third is, that divesting himself of every affection, and 
setting before his eyes the greater glory of God, and paying 
attention to the general interest, and as far as possible, the 
individual's also, he weigh attentively the reasons either way, 
and so determine whether he should dismiss him or not. 

5 Three things also should be observed with regard to him who 
is dismissed. The first, of an extemal nature ; that he retire 
from the House with the least possible disgrace or ignominy, and 
carry with him all that belongs to him. 

6 The second, of an intemal nature ; that the Superior take care, 
as far as possible, that he be sent away with mutual kindness, 
and a feeling of good-will towards the House, and with all 
possible consolation in the Lord. 

7 The third; that he study to direct him with regard to his 
condition of Hfe, so that he may enter upon some fitting way of 
serving God, either in a ReUgious Order, or not, as shall seem 
more agreeable to the divine will. In short, that he study to 
assist him with advice and prayer, and whatever else his charity 
shall suggest. 

8 Let three things be observed to satisfy the rest, whether within 
or without. 

The first is ; that great care be taken, that no irritation be 
allowed to remain in any one's mind on account of the dismissal, 
a sufficient reason being given where it is necessary, and silence 
being observed, as f ar as possible, conceming all defects not of 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE 80CISTT OF JESUS. 15 

a public nature, even though several be discovered in the party 
who is dismissed. 
9 The second is ; that attention be given lest any animosity be felt 
against the dismissed person ; and as f ar as possible, that they 
may think no ill of him, but rather regret him, and love him in 
Christ, and commend him to the divine Majesty in their prayers, 
that He may vouchsafe to direct him, and shed His mercy upon 
him. 
10 The third is ; that pains be taken, should any be conducting 
themselves in the House with less edification than they ought, 
that they profit by his example ; and beware, lest the same 
thing befell them, if they strive not to improve. Persons not 
of the Society also, to whom it is known, may take waming, 
that none will be tolerated in the House, who ought not to be 
tolerated to the glory of Grod. 



HOW THK SOCIBTY SHOULD BEHAVB TOWARDS THOSB WHO LEAVE 
IT OF THEIR OWN ACCORD, OR THOSB WHOM IT DISMISSES. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 Those who are dismissed, or go without permission from one 
place to another within the Society, appear to us in the Lord 
not to be re-admitted, unless he who discharged them» or the 
Superior of the place he leit without permission, or the General, 
or his vice-gerent, being made acquainted with the case, first 
jdeld his assent ; that no want of in^rmation of any error 
either of things or persons, be a cause of ofience to God. 

2 It is evident, that whatever power or influence may have been 
imparted to the several members of the Society as such, must 
cease whenever they cease to be members. 

3 It shall be declared to those that are dismissed, that they stand 
absolved from the simple vows, if they have uttered them 
according to the usual form of the Society (which will be seen 
in the fifth part) ; and that they need no further cUspensation. 

4 There will be no exertion needful to bring those back who 
have gone away without permission, if they have previously 
been considered as possessing Uttle talents for the benefit of the 
Society ; but rather let them be directed to some other institu- 
tion, wherein they may serve God, being disengaged from their 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



16 THE CONSTITUTIONS. 

vows, if they have taken them, so that all scruples may be 
removed. 

5 If they are of that description, that it would appear to be 
agreeable to God not thus to give them up, more especially if 
they appear to have gone away under any violent temptation, or 
deceived by others, some pains may be taken to bring them 
back ; and it will be lawful to use the privileges to this eflPect 
granted by the Apostohcal Chair, so far as the Superior shall 
see fit in the Lord. And when any one shall be so brought 
back, he shall be committed to the prudence of the aforesaid 
Superior, who shall see whether any punishment be necessary, or 
determine whether it may not be altogether better to proceed in 
the spirit of lenity : in all which, the interest and edification, 
both of him who is brought back, and hkewise of all the 
inmates must be considered. 

6 But if any one of his own accord retum to the College or 
House which he had left without permission, and he is thought 
useful in other respects to the service of God ; it must be con- 
sidered whether he bring with him a true purpose of persevering, 
and be ready to make any satisfaction and probation : if other- 
wise, and he shows no signs of true penitence, he will not be 
worthy of re-admission. 

7 If any one who has been justly dismissed retum to the House 
whence he was discharged, prepared for any punishment ; if the 
same reasons yet remain, for which he was dismissed ; it is 
clear that he should not be re-admitted. If they do not 
remain, and he who dismissed him should judge it to be agree- 
able to God, that he be again received into the same or any 
other House ; let him inform the General, or Provincial, and do 
what is commanded by him. 

8 Whether he who retums went of his own accord, or was dis- 
missed ; if he be re-admitted, he ought to be again examined, 
and a general confession should be made, beginning from that 
which he last made in the House down to his retum ; and he 
shall be put to other probations and trials, as shall seem good in 
the Lord to the Superior, with a view both to the general and 
individual edification. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE THIRD PART; 

Of superintending and advancing those who remain in Probation. 



OP THB SUPERINTENDBNCK IN THOSB THING8 WHICH CONCBRN THB 
SOUL, AND IMPROVBMBNT IN VIRTUB. 

CHAP. I. 



'A^ 



by granting them talents suitable thereto ; and in the dis- 
missal of those who manifest by the want of such talents, that 
they have no call from the divine Wisdom ; those particulars 
must be considered which we have before treated of : so there 
is need of consideration and due prudence to superintend in their 
vocation those retained under probation within the Houses and 
Colleges, and to assist them so to advance in spirit and virtue 
along the way of God, that attention be paid to the health and 
vigor of the body which are necessary to labour in the vineyard 
of the Lord : and therefore, in the first place, what relates 
to the soul shall be treated of ; what to the body, in the 
second. 

2 As touching the soul ; since it is so important to remove those 
who are imder probation from all imperfections and hindrances 
of any kind to their further spiritual advancement ; it greatly 
tends to this, that they forego all intercourse either by words 
or writing, with those who may cause them to grow luke- 
warm in the course proposed by themselves ; and that in their 
progress along the spiritual path they converse only with such 
persons, and on such subjects, as may assist them in attaining 
that object to the service of God, which, at their entrance into 
this Society, they proposed to themselves as their aim. 

3 For the same reason, they should not leave the House, except at 
such time and with such companion as the Superior shall allow ; 
nor within the House shall they converse without restraint with 
any at their own pleasure, but with such only as shall be 
appointed by the Superior; by whose example and spiritual 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



18 THK CONSTITUTIONS OF 

conversation they may receive edification and not detriment; 
and may profit in the Lord. 

4 Let all most diligentiy guard the gates of their senses (of their 
eyes especially, their ears, and tongue,) from all intemperance or 
vice ; and maintain themselves in peace and true intemal 
humility, and manifest it in silence, when silence is to he 
ohserved ; when speaking is allowed, in circumspection and 
edification of words, in modesty of features, in decorum and 
gravity of gait and attitude, without any token of impatience or 
pride ; in endeavouring and desiring to give the preference to 
others in everything; considering all in their own minds as 
their superiors, and extemally paying that honour and reverence 
which every condition demands, with rehgious simpUcity and 
moderation; that so it may come to pass, that mutually regarding 
one another, they may grow in devotion ; and praise God our 
Lord, whom each one should endeavour to recognise in another, 
as in his image. 

5 In the refection of the body, care must be taken that in all 
things temperance, moderation, and decorum be observed in- 
temally and extemally. Let a blessing go before, and a giving 
of thanks follow ; which all should ofFer with that reverence and 
devotion which is due. And whilst the body is refreshed with 
eating, let food be also ministered to the soul, in the reading of 
some pious rather than difficult book, which all may understand, 
and from which all may profit ; or on these occasions, some one 
appointed by the Superior may preach ; or somewhat of the 
same sort be done to the glory of God. 

6 Let all who are in good health have some occupation either in 
spiritual or extemal matters. And they who have any par- 
ticular duty or office should be assisted, if necessary ; and so 
when they are at leisure, they should be occupied with other 
things; that idleness, the source of all evils, may, as far as 
possible, have no place within our Houses. 

7 That they may know the value of holy Poverty, let all be taught 
to use nothing as their own ; although in the time of probation 
it be not necessary to give up the possession of their own pro- 
perty, except at the bidding of the Superior after the end of 
the first year, if he think it fumishes an occasion of temptation, 
and hinders any person's proficiency in the spirit by his cleaving 
to it with immoderate fondness and confidence ; and then let 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JESUS. 19 

him who strips hnnself of his possessions follow Christ*s com- 
mands : he may, however, in his devotion bestow his property, 
or a portion of it, upon one object rather than another, as he 
shall perceive it most agreeable to the divine pleasm-e, as is 
set forth in the Examen. 

8 Let them leam, also, that they may by no means borrow, or 
lend, or give away an)rthing that is in the House, except with 
the kriowledge and consent of the Superior. 

9 Whoever at his entrance, or after his entrance, impelled by his 
own feehngs of devotion to Obedience, may desire to dispense 
his property, or a part of it, to tlie benefit of the Society, would 
doubtless accompUsh a work of greater perfection, alienation, 
and denial of all self-love, by not descending through any weak 
regard into particulars, nor from such regard applying his 
property to any one object rather than another : but by desiring 
the wider and more general interest of the Society (which is 
wholly instituted to the greater glory of God, the universal 
advantage, and the salvation of souls) let him leave its disposal 
to him who has the care of the whole Society, whether it should 
be appHed to any one place rather than another within the same 
province : since he must know better than any other, what is 
most needful, and what most urgent, in every place connected 
with it, regard being paid to kings, princes, and other govemors, 
that no oflPence be given them ; but that all things give way to 
the greater edification of all, the spiritual benefit of souls, and 
the glory of God. 

10 Let them be taught how to detect the illusions of the devil in 
their spiritual exercises, and how to defend themselves against 
all temptations ; at the same time let them leam the means, 
sought out with all possible dihgence, to be resorted to in 
overcoming temptations, and employed in acquiring real and 
soUd virtues ; whether their spiritual visitations be more or less 
frequent, let them always make advancement in the way of God's 
service. 

1 1 Let them daily resort to an habitual examination of their con- 
science, and at least once a week go to the sacraments of Con- 
fession and the Communion; except for some reason the Superior 
determine otherwise ; and let there be appointed one Confessor 
for all by the Superior : and if this is not practicable, let each 
have his own regular Confessor, to whom he may unreservedly 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



20 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

open his conscience. Which Confessor ought not to be at a loss 
what cases should be reserved for the Superior. Those then 
shall bereserved which shall seem necessary or highly expedient 
to be known by liim ; in order that he may the better apply a 
remedy, and preserve those committed to his care from all things 
hurtful. 

1 2 It will be highly useful, that there be in every House a faithful 
man, sufficiently skilled in spiritual concems, to instruct and 
teach them how they ought to behave themselves, both interr 
nally and extemally, according to the Society*s Institute and 
religion ; and to encourage, remind, and lovingly persuade them 
to it: whom all imder probation should love, to whom they 
should have recourse in their temptations, disclose all their co.n- 
cems with confidence, and from whom in all cases they may 
hope ,for consolation and assistance in the Lord : and let them 
be admonished to hide no temptation, but to disclose it either to 
him, to their Confessor, or to their Superior ; nay more, to take 
a pleasure in thoroughly manifesting their whole soul to them; 
not only disclosing their defects, but even their penances or 
mortifications, their devotions, and all their virtues; desiring 
with perfect concurrence to be guided by them, wherever they 
have deviated from the direct path ; and not wishing to be led 
by their own judgment, except it agrees with that of those who 
are to them in stead of Christ our Lord. 

13 Temptations may be encountered, by applying their opposites : as 
when an individual is observed to be disposed to pride, he should 
be employed in the more abject occupations which may seem 
good to humble liim, and so of the other depraved propensities 
of the soul. 

14 Moreover, it is a matter of propriety and decency, that no 
, woman enter our Houses and CoUeges, but our Churches only ; 

and that neither arms nor other instruments of vanity be 
allowed, but only those things which conduce to the object 
which the Society has in view, the service and praise of Grod. 

15 What measure should be observed in enjoining penances and 
corrections, must be left to the pmdent charity of the Superior, 
and those whomhe has deputed; who in these matters will regard 
the dispositions of persons, and the general and individual edifi- 
cation to the glory of God. Every one must undergo penances 
of this sort with prompt compHance and an unfeigned desire of 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THK SOCIBTY OF JESUS. 21 

amendment and spiritual improvement ; even though they be 
enjoined for a defect not culpable. 

1 6 Let a Syndic or Censor be appointed in the House, whose duty 
it shall be to notice whatever relates to decorum and extemal 
decency, superintending both Church and House ; observing and 
communicating with the Superior, or remonstrating with him 
who is in fault, if so much power is granted to him the more 
efFectually to discharge his duty in the Lord. 

17 Let all take care to derive some profit from bodily disease, 
whenever it occurs, not to their own edification only, but to that 
of others also; not showing themselves impatient or morose; 
but rather internally maintaining and extemally manifesting 
patience, and obedience to the physician and superintendent of 
the sick, using pious language tending to edification, to prove 
that sickness is accepted as a gift, since it is not less so than 
health itself, from the hand of our Creator and Lord. 

18 Let aU think, let all speak, as far as possible, the same thing, 
according to the Apostle. Let no contradictory doctrines' there- 
fore be allowed either by word of mouth, or public sermons, or 
in written books, which last shdll not be published without the 
approbation and consent of the General (who shall submt them 
to the censure of three at least of kaming and clear judgment 
in that department.J And indeed all diflPerence of opinion re- 
garding practical matters should be avoided as much as possible 
which is usually the source of discord, and unfriendly to mutual 
good-will ; and on the other hand, let union and reciprocal con- 
formity be diligently upheld, and whatever is destractive of them 
be discouraged : so that thus united in the bonds of fratemal 
love individuals may more efficaciously and successfuUy employ 
themselves in the service of God, and the benefit of their fellow- 
creatures. 

19 Since the example of the elders greatly conduces to advancement 
in virtues, by which others may be animated to their imitation ; 
the Superior (except it is judged for particular reasons to be in- 
expedient) and all the priests he may approve of, at some period 
in every year shall take upon themselves the duty or duties of 
those who officiate at home, that so this office may be rendered 
more acceptable to others, to which they have been ordained to 
the greater service and glory of God. 

20 On certain days in every week let the Catechism be explained 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



22 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

and the method of confessing rightly and with profit be taught ; 
also of communicating, of hearing the mass, and ministering in 
it ; of praying, meditating and reading according to each man's 
talent ; and let it be seen to that they not only leam what they 
ought, but that they remember, and practise what they leam : 
let all employ their time in spiritual concems, and persist in 
acquiring habits of devotion according to the measure of the 
grace of God communicated to them; to which it will greatly 
contribute to assign certain or even all the spiritual exercises to 
such as have not hitherto employed themselves in them; as shall 
be judged most expedient for each in the Lord. 

21 It is fit that all be practised in preaching at home (except the 
Superior exempt any one) so that beyond the useful employment 
of an hour after dinner, they may be encouraged and habituated 
in s6me degree (as to voice, and manner, and other particulars) 
to discharge that duty ; and to give some evidence of the talent 
which the Lord communicates to them in this department; 
and also to express their good conceptions to their own and 
their -neighbours* edification, frequently treating of those subjects 
which relate to self-denial, advancement in virtue, and perfections 
of all sorts ; mutually exhorting one another to these things, 
and above all to union and brotherly love. 

22 It will assist greatly to discharge those duties with all possible 
devotion, in which humility and charity are more especially 
necessary. And generally speaking, the more closely each one 
has imited himself to God, and thrown himself freely upon the 
supreme Majesty ; so much the more bountiful he will find Grod 
towards him ; and he will daily become more qualified to receive 
grace and ampler spiritual gifts. 

23 It is especiaUy conducive to advancement, nay even necessary, 
that all yield themselves to perfect Obedience, regarding the Su- 
perior (be he who he may) as Christ the Lord; and submitting 
to him with inward reverence and afiection ; let them obey not 
only in the outward performance of what he enjoins ; entirely, 
promptly, resolutely, and with aU due hmnihty, without excuses, 
or murmurs, even though he order things hard to be done, and 
repugnant to their own sense; but let them also strive to acquire 
perfect resignation and denial of their own tmll and judgment, 
in all things conforming their will and judgvfient to that which 
the Superior wills and judges (where sin is not perceivedj the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE 60CIETT OF JESUS. 23 

will and judgment of the Superior being set hefore them as tlie 
rule of tlteir will and judgment ; whereby they may more exacdy 
be confirmed to that chief and supreme rule of all good-will 
and judgment, which is the etemal Goodness and Wisdom. 

24 And the more to exercise themselves in the virtue of Obedience, 
it is expedient, and even necessary, that they obey not only the 
Superior of the whole Society or House, but the subordinate 
officers also, who have from him derived any authority, in all 
those things in which they have power, and accustom themselves 
not regard him whom they obey, but rather Him for whose sake 
they obey, namely, Christ the Lord. 

25 Let all love Poverty, as their Mother, and according to the 
measure of holy discretion let them try some of its results at 
proper periods ; and, as is set forth in the Examen, let them be 
prepared, at the end of the first year to distribute their temporal 
goods, when it is enjoined by the Superior, under the regulations 
stated in the flxamen. 

26 Let all struggle to maintain an upright. intention not only in 
their condition of life, but in every single action, ever studying 
sincerely to serve and please the divine Goodness, for its own 
sake, and for Love^s sake, and those inestimable benefits with 
which It has anticipated our wants, not for the fear of punish- 
ment, or the expectation of rewards (although these may assist 
higher motives) so that in all things they may seek God, 
divesting themselves, as far as possible, of their love of all 
creatures ; so as to tum this imiversal afiection towards the 
universal Creator, loving Him in all, and all in Him, according 
to His most holy and divine Will. 

27 The study to which those should apply themselves who are 
under probation in the Houses of the Society should be that 
which will most advance them in the aforesaid denial of them- 
selves and their progress in virtue and devotion. But generally 
speaking, there shall be no literary studies within our Houses, 
imless a dispensation should appear necessary for pecuHar rea- 
sons. For Colleges have been provided for the study of Litera- 
ture ; and the Houses for the practice of what they have leamt, 
and for laying a foundation of humihty and every virtue in those 
who are to bestow their labour upon them. 

28 Let there be some one in each House who once a week, or at 
least once a fortnight, shall refresh the memory of all in these 

c 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



24 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

and the like matters ; or they may be bound to read them over r 
lest through the constitution of our frail nature they ceaseirom the 
performance of them in forgetfuhiess. And several times every 
year let all petition the Superior that penances be enjoined them 
for neglecting the observation of the Rules; that this concem may 
be an evidence of that which every one should maintain for his 
spiritual advancement in the path of God. 



OF THE SUPERINTENDENCE OF THE BODY. 
CHAP. II. 

1 As overmuch soUcitude in those things which pertain to the 
body is reprehensible ; so a moderate regard for the preservation 
of health and strength of body to the service of God is com- 
mendable, and to be observed by all : and for this reason, when- 
ever they discover anything to be hurtful to them, or anything 
to be necessary for their food, clothing, habitation, attention to 
duty, or other things, let all inform the Superior, or whomsoever 
the Superior may appoint, observing, in the interim, two things: 
first, that before they refer anything to him, they betake them- 
selves to prayer ; and after prayer, if they still think the matter 
should be communicated to the Superior, let them do so : 
secondly, when they have briefly explained it to the Superior, 
verbally, or in writing (that it may not escape his memory) they 
leave to him the entire settlement of the question, and consider 
whatever he determines to be best ; nor proceed to argue or 
urge it, either themselves or by another (whether that which is 
desired be conceded or not) seeing they should persuade them- 
selves that what the Superior determines after due consideration 
is most conducive to the divine pleasure, and their own benefit. 

2 Let a time for eating, skeping and rising be appointed for 
general observation. 

3 In all those things which relate to food, dothing, habitation, and 
other things needful for the body, let care be taken with the 
divine aid, that in every probation of virtue and act of self- 
denial, nature be nevertheless sustained and preserved for the 
honour of God, and His service, due regard being paid to pwsons 
in the Lord. 

4 As it is not expedient that any one be burdened with so much 
bodily labour, that the intellect be overwhehned, and the body 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JBSUS. 25 

su£Per detriment ; so any bodily exercise, which aids either, is 
generally necessary for all, those not excepted who ought to be 
occupied in mental pursuits, which should be interrupted by 
extemal employments, and not continued nor taken up without 
some measure of discretion. 

5 The castigation of the body should neither be immoderate nor 
indiscreet in vigils, fastings, and other extemal penances and 
labours, which usually do harm, and hinder better things. It is 
expedient therefore that whatever is done in this way be disclosed 
by each one to his Confessor, who should refer it to the Superior 
if he thinks that moderation is exceeded, or even doubts of 
the excess. All these things, however, are done, that we may 
proceed more clearly, and that greater glory be given to God 
our Lord, both in our souls and bodies. 

6 Let there be some one in every House to preside over everjrthing 
that relates to the good health of the body, and as well for 
maintaining it in the healthy as in those more especially who from 
age and other causes are more weakly, as in restoring it to the 
sick, to which person all ought immediately to refer, if they 
feel themselves unwell ; that the convenient remedy be provided, 
as charity requires. 

7 In whatever relates to the protecticm of temporal property, 
beyond that duty which reason and charity impose upon all, it 
wiU be proper that some one be delegated to the office, to watch 
over it, as though it belonged to our Lord Jesus Christ. 

For all other duties, and those especially which are performed 
more decently at home than abroad, care must be taken that an 
adequate number of officials be appointed; and let the Coad- 
jutors in extemal things leam these . duties if they are ,not al- 
ready acquainted with them, always directing everything ^to the 
greater glory of God our Creator and Lord. i 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE FOURTH PART ; 

of the instruction of those who are retained in the Society, in literature 
and other studies which tend to assist their fellow-creatures. 



INTRODUCTION. 
1 CJINCE the object at which the Society directly aims is to aid 
Otheir own souls and those of their fellow-creatures in attaining 
that ultimate end for which they were created ; and since leam- 
ing and the method of propomiding it, as well as the example 
of life are necessary to this object ; as soon as a good foundation 
of self-denial, and the needful advancement in virtue has been 
laid in those admitted to probation ; the next care will be the 
edifice of Hterature, and the manner of employing it, by which 
they may promote the better knowledge and the better service 
of Grod our Creator and Lord. 

For this the Society comprehends Colleges, and also Univer- 
sities, or general studies; in which those who have given 
satisfactory evidence of themselves in the Houses of probation, 
but have entered without adequate instruction in the leaming 
indispensable for our Institute, may be taught that and other 
things which conduce to the salvation of souls. First then, let 
the discourse tum on those things which pertain to CoUeges; 
afterwards of what relates to general studies, with that favour 
which the divine Wisdom shall vouchsafe to grant us to His 
own greater honour and glory. 



OF THB COMMEMORATION OF FOUNDBRS, AND BENBFACTORS 
OF THB COLLBGES. 

CHAP. I. 

1 CJINCE it appears most agreeable to reason that a due retum 
kJbe made, as far as in us lies, to the piety and beneficence of 
those whom the divine Bounty has used as instruments for the 
foundation and endowment of our Colleges ; first, in every Col- 
lege of our Society let Masses be celebrated once a week for 
ever for its Founder and benefBWJtors, whether alive or dead. 

2 At the beginning of every month all the priests who are in the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JESUS. 27 

College ought to offer the same sacrifice for them for ever. On 
that day, moreover, in every year, on which possession of each 
College was given to the Society, let it be solemnized with a 
Mass for the Founder and benefactors; and whatever Priests 
are present in the College at that time, let them all celebrate 
their sacrifices there. 

On that day let a wax candle be offered to the Founder, or to 
one nearest allied to him in family, or to him whom the Founder 
himself appoints, in which candle there shall be the arms of the 
Foimder, or the emblems of devotion. In that shall the Society 
testify the gratitude which it owes to its Founder in the Lord. 
As soon as the Society shall come into possession of any Col- 
lege, let the General see that it be communicated to the whole 
Society, that every Priest may thrice say Mass for the Hving 
Founder of the College and its benefactors ; that the Lord may 
guide them with His benignity in all things, and enrich them 
ever with His gifts. Agaiii, when they shall have departed this 
hfe, the General will take care, as soon as he hears of it, that 
throughout the Society every Priest say three Masses for their 
souls. And as often as it is said, Masses are to be solemnized 
by the Priests ; all the rest who hve in Colleges, and are not 
Priests, ought to pray to the same purpose ; since they are all 
bound in the Lord to the same gratitude. 

The Foimders moreover, and the benefactors of Colleges are 
made partakers of all the good works which are done, hy the 
grace of God, not only in the Colleges, but in the whole 
Society. 

In general, however, the Society should understand that it is 
pecuHarly bound in Charity, as well to Founders, as to their 
connexions, as long as they hve, and after their decease, to do 
them every service which can be rendered by us according to 
our humble profes£(ion to the glory of God. 



OF THOSE THINOS WHICH RELATE TO THB ADMISSION AND RELIN- 
QUISHING OF COLLEGES, AND THEIR TEMPORAL CONCERNS. 

CHAP. II. 

1 The General shall have fiill power, in the name of the whole 
Society to admit those Colleges which are freely offered to the 
Society, to use them in fiill accordance with its Constitutions. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



28 THE C0NSTITUTI0N8 OP 

2 If the Founder should exact any conditions at all contrary to the 
order and manner of proceeding usual with the Society, it may 
be left to the consideration of the General (after hearing the 
opinions of those whom he shall think most capable of judging 
in such matters) whether it will be useful to the Society, aU 
things being considered, with a view to Grod's service, which it 
has proposed to itself, to admit this College, or not. But if in 
the course of time the Society finds itself burdened with the 
load, it may propose and determine, in a general Congregation, 
that such College be rehnquished ; or see that the burden be 
lightened, or at least that ampler means be provided to bear it. 
This is meant however, if before a Congregation of this sort, the 
General have not remedied the evil, as is proper in the Lord. 

3 In conjunction with the whole Society, the General shall have 
the power.of rehnquishing or alienating Colleges or Houses 
already admitted. But as this is as it were to remove a hmb 
from the body, and is altogether a matter of perpetual and 
serious moment, it is better that the whole be consulted. 

4 Within the Colleges of the Society, let no care of souls, nor 
obhgations to say Mass nor other things of this sort be allowed 
which are very apt to divert their inmates from their studies, 
and interfere with the benefits which are sought from them to 
the service of God : in the same way also, they shall not be 
allowed in the other Houses, nor the Churches of the Professed 
Society, which, as far as possible, ought to be left at hberty to 
undertake the missions of the ApostoHc Chair, and other works of 
piety to the service of Grod, and the salvation of souls. 

5 The Society shall take possession of the Colleges with the Tem- 
poral Property which belongs to them, and shall appoint Rectors 
duly qualified for the office, who shall imdertake the care of 
maintaining and managing their temporal concerns, and provide 
for the wants as well of the Building, as of the Scholars (who 
reside in the Colleges) and of those who are under Probation 
for admission, and those also who without the Colleges conduct 
their afiairs. The conduct of the entire administration shall 
remain in the Rectors : so as to enable them to render an 
account, whenever and to whom the General shall appoint : and 
since the General can neither convert the temporal goods of the 
CoUeges to his own use, nor that of his rektions, nor of the 
Professed Society ; he may therefore conduct himself the more 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETT OF JESUS. 29 

completely above all suspicion in their superintendence, to the 
greater glory and service of God. 

In those Colleges which, besides Preceptors, can maintain twelve 
Scholars out of their own incomes, for the greater edification of 
the people ahns should neither be required, nor received, nor 
any other gifts. If the revenues are less than sufficient to 
maintain this number, ahns may be received but not solicited ; 
unless the College be labouring imder so great poverty that it be 
necessary to ask, at least from some. Then indeed (keeping 
ever before their eyes the service of God and the general good) 
not only may alms be solicited, but they may beg from door to 
door for a season, whenever necessity requires it. 



OF THE SCHOLARS WHO ARE SETTLED IN THB COLLEOB8. 
CHAP. III. 

1 As regards the Scholars, for whose instruction the Colleges are 
appointed, it will first be necessary to consider in the Lord what 
kind of persons they ought to be who are sent, or admitted to 
them. 

2 First of aU, no one shall be placed in any College of the Society 
amongst the Scholars with any of the five impediments men- 
tioned in the Second Part. And besides the Coadjutors neces- 
sary to the service or assistance of the CoUege, the rest ought 
to be such that it may reasonably be hoped they wiU prove useful 
in the vineyard of the Lord Christ after our example, and in 
the cultivation of leaming. 

These, the more inteUectual they are, and the more adomed with 
good morals, and the more healthy to sustain the labour of 
study, the more proper wiU they be, and the sooner they may 
be sent, to be admitted into our CoUeges. 

3 In addition to this, they only shaU be admitted among the 
Approved Scholars, who have been under Probation in our 
Houses and CoUeges, and at the end of two years spent in 
various trials and proofs, and after taking the vows, with a 
promise to enter the Society, they shaU be admitted to spend 
their Uves within it for ever to the glory of God. 

4 Besides these, some may be admitted to study, who, before the 
two years, and the probation above-mentioned, are sent to the 
CoUeges from the Houses (because such a course seems ex- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



30 THB C0N8TITUTI0NS OP 

pedient in the Lord) or are admitted into them : but they shall 
not be deemed Approved Scholars, until at the expiration of 
the two years, and after their vows and promise have been made, 
they are placed among the nmnber of the Approved. 



OP THB SUPBRINTENDBNCB OP THB ADMITTBD SCHOLARS. 
CHAP. IV. . 

1 Lbt that suffice, which is set forth in the Third Part, of the 
superintendence of temporal and extemal afiairs of the Colleges, 
in all that relates to the body. This however must be noted 
with peculiar care, that the Scholars study not at seasons im- 
favourable to bodily health ; that they devote sufficient time to 
sleep, and observe moderation in their mental labours. So will 
it come to pass that they will be able longer to persevere both 
in the acquisition of leaming and in employing it to the glory 
of God. 

2 In what relates to spirituals ; the ordering of those who are 
admitted into the Colleges, and of those admitted into the 
Houses will be the same, so long as they are imder Probation. 
After Probation, when they are at leisure to acquire leaming, as 
on the one hand care must be taken lest in the eagemess of 
study the love of the solid virtues and a reUgious life grow cold; 
so, on the other, too much time must not be given to mortifica- 
tions, prayers, and lengthened meditations. Since to labour in 
leaming which is acquired with the sincere purpose of serving 
God, and in a certain sense requires the whole man, will not be 
less pleasing to God, and our Lord, but even more so, than to 
be occupied in rehgious exercises during the time of study. 

3 Therefore, besides the Sacraments of Confession and Com- 
munion (in which they must participate once a week) and the 
Mass which they must hear daily, let them employ one hour in 
reciting the Office of the most blessed Virgin Mary, and in 
examining their consciences twice a day, with other prayers 
according to their particular devotion to fill up the hour, if not 
akeady occupied. AU which they shall do at the appointment 
and judgment of their Superiors to whom as in the place of 
Christ they owe Obedience. 

4 Others, such as those Coadjutors who have not leamed to read, 
besides Mass, inay spend an hour also in reciting their Rosary, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



OP THE SOCIBTY OP JESUS. 31 

or Crown of the most blesssed Virgin Mary, with a double 
examination daily, or other prayers, according to their particular 
devotion, as was set forth for the Scholars. 

5 As an increase of devotion, and to raise the sense of obligation 
with which they are bomid to God, and for a greater confirma- 
tion of the students in their calling, it will be expedient to renew 
twice a year, viz. at the feasts of the Resurrection and the 
Nativity, the simple vows which they have taken according to the 
formulary in the Fifth Part, chapter IV. And let him who did 
not take them at the conclusion of the two years, as is set forth 
in the Examen, take them now. 

6 In their way to the public Schools (and let them go nowhere 
else without permission of the Superiors) let them go and retum 
together with that exterior and interior modesty which is suit- 

* able to the edification of themselves and others ; and let their 
conversation with the exterior Scholars be hmited to Hterature 
or spiritual advancement ; as shall be thought more profitable to 
aU to the greater glory of God. 



OP THB STUDIES TO WHICH THB SCHOLARS OP THB SOCIBTY 
SHOULD APPLY. 

CHAP. V. 

1 As the object of the leaming to be acquired in this Society is by 
the divine favour to benefit their own and their neighbours* 
souls; this will be the measure in general and in particular 
cases, by which it shaU be determined to what studies our 
Scholars should apply, and how far they should proceed in them. 
And since, generally speaMng, the acquisition of divers lan- 
guages, Logic, Natural and Moral Philosophy, Metaphysics, and 
Theology, as well Scholastic, as that which is termed Positive, 
and the Sacred Scriptures assist that object ; they who are sent 
to our Colleges shall give their attention to the study of these 
faculties ; and they shall bestow greater diligence upon those 
which the supreme Moderator of the studies shall consider most 
expedient in the Lord to the aforesaid end, the circumstances of 
time, place, and person being considered. 

2 Descending to particular persons ; what each individual shaU 
study must be left to the prudence of the Superiors. But the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



32 THB CONSTITUTIONS OP 

services of any one endowed with good natural abilities will be 
useful in proportion to his attainment of solid leaming in the 
feculties above-mentioned. 

3 The Rector shall consider and determine of the time to be spent 
on any of these sciences, and when to proceed to more usefol 
things, after a fitting examination. 

4 Let them foUow in each faculty the safer and more approved 
doctrine, and those authors who teach it : the care of this shall 
bdong to the Rector, who shall foUow that which is established 
throughout the Society to the greater glory of God. 



HOW THE SCHOLARS MAT BE ASSISTED IN SUCCESSFULLT 

STUDTINO THESE FACULTIES. 

CHAP. VI. 

1 That the Scholars may make the greater proficiency inleaming, 
let them in the first place labour to watch over the purity of 
their souls, and to maintain the proper object of their studies, 
aiming at nothing else in their hterary pursuits than the divine 
glory and the advantage of souls ; and in their prayers let them 
often beg for grace, that they may improve in leaming to this 
end. 

2 Let them besides seiiously and constantly resolve to apply their 
thoughts to study, and assure themselves that they can do no- 
thing more acceptable to God in the CoUeges, than if with the 
intention above expressed, they give themselves dihgently to 
leaming. And even though they never caU into exercise what 
they have leamed, let them persuade themselves that to have 
undertaken the labours of study, as is fitting, out of mere 
obedience and charity is a work of great merit in the sight of 
the divine and supreme Majesty. 

3 Let aU impediments which distract the thoughts from study be 
removed, whether of devotion, and mortification, which are 
undertaken exorbitantly, or without due order, or of cares and 
occupations which arise at home from domestic duties, or abroad 
in conferences, confessions, and other duties towards our neigh- 
bours : so far at least as they may be decHned in the Lord. For 
it is praiseworthy that these emplojrments be deferred, however 
piou8,"until their studies be completed, that hereby they may 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OF JBSU6. 33 

afterwards render themselves more useful to others with that 
leammg which they may have acquired. And let all these 
things be done with greater zeal for God's service and glory. 

4 Order must be observed m study, that they lay a soHd founda- 
tion in the Latin language sooner than in the Liberal Arts ; and 
in these before they attend to Scholastic Theology ; and in this, 
before Positive Theology. The Sacred Scriptures may be taken 
in hand either at the same time, or afterwards. 

5 Those languages in which they were either written or translated 
may be leamed sooner or later as the Superior in the variety of 
concurring causes and the difference of persons may think best. 
So the order of time will be left to his prudence. But if our 

, Scholars apply to the study of languages, among other objects 
to which their attention may be directed, let this be one, namely, 
to defend the version sanctioned by the Church. 

6 Let all the Scholars attend the lectures of the pubUc Professors 
at the pleasure of the Rector of the College : which Professors, 
whether they belong to the Society or not, it is to be wished, 
should be leamed, diligent, assiduous, and anxious for the im- 
provement of the students as well in the lectures as in their 
other Uterary employments. 

7 Let there be a common Library in the Colleges, if possible ; of 
which a key should be given to those who in the Rector*s judg- 
ment ought to have it. Besides these, however, every one shall 
have such other books as are necessary. 

8 Let the Scholars be assiduous in attending lectures, and diligent 
in preparing for them ; and when they have heard them, in 
repeating them ; in places which they have not understood, 
making inquiry ; in others, where needful, taking notes, to pro- 
vide for any future defect of memory. 

9 It shall be the duty of the Rector of the CoUege to see whether 
Masters and Scholars do their duty in the Lord, or not. 

10 Since the habit of debating is useful, especiaUy to the Students 
of Arts and Scholastic Theology ; let our Scholars attend the 
ordinary disputations of the Schools to which they belong 
(though they be not under the control of the Society) and see 
that they afford a distinct i^ecimen of their leaming, but with 
aU modesty. It is proper ako that on every Simday, or on some 
other day of the week some one in our CoUege appointed by the 
Rector from any Class of students, of Arts or Theology, after 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



34 THK CONSTITUTIONS OF 

dinner should undertake some positions to be maintained (if np 
impediment intervene from any peculiar cause) to be afi&xed to 
the School-doors the previous evening, where all who please may 
assemble to dispute or hsten ; which being briefly stated by him 
who is to reply, it shall be permitted to all to debate whether 
within or without our College ; but some one should preaide to 
moderate the debaters, and ehcit and demonstrate to tlie benefit 
of the audience the doctrine which ought to be hdd : and also 
to give the signal to those who dispute to conclude, and so to 
divide the time that an opportunity of speaMng be allowed to all 
as far as possible. 

11 Besides these two sorts of disputations above-mentioned, let a 
time be set on each day, for debating in the Colleges, a mode- 
rator being appointed, as we have said: so that, by these means, 
their talents- may be exercised, and the difficulties which occur 
in these faculties may be the better ducidated to the glory of 
God. 

12 Those who are studying polite literature shall have their ap- 
pointed times also for conferring and disputing on what pertains 
to those studies, before some one who shall direct them ; and on 
Sundays, or other appointed days after dinner they shall alter- 
nately either maintain positions in their own studies, or exercise 
themselves in writing verse or prose ; whether it be done ex- 
tempore, the subject being then proposed to discover their readi- 
ness ; or whether they read in public what they have composed 
in private on a theme previously given them. 

13 Let all speak Latin commonly, but especially the Students in 
Humanity, and commit to memory whatever shall be set by their 
Masters, and diligently cultivate their style in composition : and 
let some one take the trouble to correct them. It shall also be 
allowed to some, at the Rector's pleasure, to read certain other 
authors in private, besides those which are pubUcly studied ; and 
every week on an appointed day, after dinner, let one of the 
more advanced pronounce a Latin or Greek oration on a subject 
tending to the edification of the inmates, by which they may 
be animated to greater perfection in the Lord. 

14 Moreover, the Students of Arts and Theology espedally, and 
all the others should have their private quiet study, where 
they may leam better and more exactly what has been treated 
of. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OF JKSUS. 35 

15 As the over eamestness of some in their studies ought to be 
repressed, so others who require it ought to be stimulated, 
incited, and animated to their duties ; and that the Rector may 
more eiectually do this, he should ascertain himself, from 
personal observation and by means of another to whom he shall 
have entrusted the office of Syndic or Visitor of Stiidies, in what 
way the Scholars do their duty. And if he shall perceive that 
any one during his studies wastes his time, that he is unwilling, 
or unable to make progress in Hterature ; it will be proper to 
remove him, and put some one in his place, who shall make 
more proficiency in the object appointed in the Colleges for 
God*s service. 

1 6 The study of any faculty being completed, it will be well to go 
over it again in private, reading one or more authors than before, 
at the Rector*s discretion. He may moreover reduce to writing, 
if the Rector thinks proper, more briefly, distinctly, and ac- 
curately, whatever in that same faculty he had previously written 
during the course of lectures when he had less skill than now at 
the conclusion of the course. 

17 At the appointed times let them prepare themselves for the 
public examinations and responses ; and they who after diligent 
scrutiny may be found worthy shall be advanced to the usual 
degrees. Let them not however assume any particular places, 
although such as are generally assigned in the University 
wherein they take their degree, that they may avoid every ap- 
pearance of ambition and other inordinate passions ; but let them 
all arrange themselves together without precedence, and incur no 
expense unbecoming paupers in these degrees, to which they 
should be advanced without detriment to their humility, and 
with no other motive than to render themselves more usefiil to 
their neighbours to the glory of God. 

1 8 Whether it may be better for their own benefit or that of others 
for those who have accomplished the course of their studies, to 
read privately or publicly, shall be left to the judgment of the 
Superior who shall determine whatever he may think most ex- 
pedient in the Lord. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



36 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

OF THE SCHOOLS OF THE COLLEGES BELONOINO TO THE SOCIETF. 

CHAP. VII. 

1 Regard being had not only to the progress of our own Scholars 
in literature, but to the progress ako of those not of our 
Society in literature and morals, whom we have admitted into 
our Colleges to be instructed, let pubhc Schools be opened, 
wherever it may conveniently be done, at least for Pohte Leam- 
ing. In the more important studies, they may be opened with 
reference to the circumstances of the places where our CoUeges 
exist, always keeping before our eyes what shall be most pleasing 
to God. 

2 In these Schools let that method be pursued by which the ex- 
temal Scholars may be well instructed in all that relates to 
Christian Leaming ; and let care be taken, as fBr as possible, 
they may attend the Sacrament of Confession once a month, fre- 
quently hear the word of God, and in short imbibe, together 
with leaming, morals becoming Christians. And because, in 
particular subjects, there must needs be much variety, according 
to the di£ference of places and persons, we shall not here insist 
upon them severally : but this may be declared that rules should 
be estabUshed in every College which shall embrace all necessary 
points. And we may in this place recommend that the correction 
which the extemal Scholars require shall never be withheld : 
only let it be administered by some one who is not of our Sodety, 

3 As it is peculiar to our profession to receive no temporal remune- 
ration for ^iritual services, in which according to our Institute 
we are engaged for the service of our fellow-creatures ; it is not. 
expedient to receive any endowment of a College, by which the 
Society shall be bound to maintain a Preacher, or Confessor, or 
Lecturer in Theology. For although a regard to equity and 
gratitude should stir us to attend with increased diligence to the 
said ministrations which bdong to our Institute; yet in our 
Cofleges which have been founded with greater Uberality and 
devotion, no obligations or conditions shall be admitted, which 
may derogate from the sincerity of our manner of proceeding, 
namely to give freely what we have freely received ; stiU, for the 
support of those who labour or study for the common good of 
the Coflege, that endowment may be accepted which the charity of 
Foimders assigns to the glory of God. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JESUS. 37 



OF INSTRUCTING OUR SCHOLARS IN THOSB THINGS WHICH RELATE 
TO THE SERVICE OF THEIR FELLOW-CREATURES. 

CHAP. VIII. 

1 LooKiNG to the object to which the studies of our Society are 
dir»ted, it will contribute to that end, that they begin to 
habituate themselves to wield their spiritual weapons for the 
benefit of their neighbours. For although this should be done 
in our Houses more properly and continuously, it should yet be 
commenced in our Colleges. 

2 First of aU, those who in the judgment of the Superior are to 
be admitted to sacred orders, should be instructed in the method 
of saying Mass, so that besides intelHgence and intemal devo- 
tion, they may exhibit a becoming extemal manner to the 
edification of the hearers : and that all the Society, as far as 
possible, may use the same ceremonies : in which so far as the 
variety of countries shall allow, it shall follow the Roman prac- 
tice as being more general, and that which the Apostolic See has 
adopted in a more peculiar manner. 

3 Let them accustom themselves also in setting forth their sermons 
and sacred lectures to the way best adapted for the edification of 
the people, which difiers from the Scholastic method ; and to 
discharge this duty let them labour to acquire the vernacular 
tongue of the country thoroughly. There are other things 
which they should have studied, and have at their fingers' ends, 
which will be usefiil to this duty ; and in short, they should 
employ all means which may assist them to discharge this ofiice 
the better, and with greater spiritual profit to others. 

4 Let them be accustomed also to the ministration of the Sacra- 
ments of Confession and Communion, and endeavour to compre- 
hend and discharge that duty not only as relates to themselves 
but also to the penitents and communicants, that they may 
understand and receive the same duly and usefully to the glory 
of God. 

5 Let them accustom themselves to communicate their spiritual 
exercises to others, when each has experienced them in himself ; 
and let all be dihgent not only to give an explanation of them, 
but also to acquire a readiness in wielding this kind of spiritual 
arms which by the grace of God is felt to contribute so largely 
to His service. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



38 THK CONSTITUTIONS OF 

6 Let due diligence be employed in acquiring the proper method 
of teaching the Catechism, accommodated to the intelHgence of 
children and ignorant persons. 

7 As in the foregoing, om* neighbom^s are helped forward in hving 
well ; so care must be taken that they be instructed in whatever 
is available towards dying well : and let it be imderstood what 
method ought to be observed at that hour which is so mo- 
mentous to the ultimate attainment or loss of everlasting happi- 
ness. 

8 Grenerally speaking, they should be taught what method should 
be pursued by the labourers of this Society, (who must be 
engaged in such various quarters of the world, and with such 
different classes of men), in preventing the inconveniencies which 
may arise, and in securing the emoluments which contrUmte to 
the greater' glory of God, hy employing all the means which can 
possihly be employed, And although that unction of the Holy 
Ghost, and that wisdom which God is wont to communicate to those 
who confide in his divine Majesty, can only teach this ; a way may 
still be opened in some measure by those lessons which tend and 
dispose to the furtherance of divine Grace. 



OP RBMOVING SCHOLARS FROM THE STUDY OF LITERATURE. 
CHAP. IX. 

1 SoMB are removed from the Colleges for the reasons set forth in 
the Second Part, and in the manner there explained ; that others 
may succeed them who shall make more progress to the service 
of God. The method is the same both for Houses and CoUeges. 

2 Sometimes individuals shall be removed, because to be sent else- 
where tends to their greater improvement in religion or leaming, 
or to the general advantage of the Society ; as it might happen, 
if one who had akeady passed through the course of Arts, in a 
certain College should repeat it elsewhere, before the study of 
Theology be commenced. And the same may be said, if they 
are to be occupied in any other thing to the greater service and 
glory of God. 

3 The ordinary method of removing Scholars from any CoUege 
where aU the aforesaid Sciences are taught, shaU be, when each 
shall have accomplished his studies, his Course of Arts being 
completed, and four years spent in the study of Theology. And 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETT OF JESUS. 39 

towards the conclusion of this period the Rector shall under- 
stand that it is his duty to inform the General or Provincial, and 
represent what proficiency they have made ; and then he shall 
follow whatever instructions he may receive to the glory of God. 



OF THE OOVERNMENT OF THB COLLEOES. 

CHAP. X. 

1 Thb Professed Society shall have the supreme care or superin- 
tendence of the Colleges according to the letters of the Apostolic 
See. For since the Professed cannot apply any portion of those 
revenues to their private advantage or their own use ; it is most 
consonant to reason that they will proceed with greater purity 
and religion more constantly and perseveringly in those things 
which are necessary to the good govemment of the Colleges to 
the greater service of God and our Lord. 

2 Except tohat relates to the ConstitutionSy and the dissolution or 
alienation of our Colleges, the whole power and administration, and 
(generally speaking) the execution of this superintendence shall 
helong to the General, who keeping before his eyes the object 
towards which the Colleges and the Society at large are directed, 
shall best perceive what is beneficial for them. 

3 The General himself therefore, or some one empowered by him 
for this duty, shall appoint one of the Coadjutors of the Society 
to preside over each College ; who shall give an account of the 
duty assigned to him to the Provincial, or whomsoever the 
General shall nominate. And the General also may remove the 
Rector, and reUeve him from his responsibiHty, as shall appear 
to him most desirable in the Lord. 

4 Care should be taken that he who undertakes the office of 
Rector should be most exemplary, of great edification, and strict 
mortification in all depraved inchnations, and tried especially in 
Obedience, and in humility; one endowed with discretion, skilled 
in govemment, versed in business, and experienced in spiritual 
concems ; knowing how to interchange severity with mildness 
in due time and place, anxious, laborious, leamed ; in short one 
in whom the Superiors may confide, and to whom they may 
safely communicate their power ; since, the ampler this autho- 
rity, the more efifectually the Colleges will be directed to the 
gi'eater glory of God. 

D 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



40 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

5 It wiU be the Rector's duty, in the first place, to sustain, as it 
were upon his shoulders, the whole College by prayer and holy 
desires ; in the next, to see that the Constitutions be observed, 
to watch over all the Collegians with all sohcitude ; to defend 
them from all that may hurt them at home and abroad, as well 
by prevention, as by applying a remedy when mischief occurs ; 
according both to the general interest and also that of the 
individual ; by seeing that they improve in virtue and leaming ; 
securing their health, and Hkewise the property of the College 
as well moveable as immoveable ; prudently appointing those 
who hold domestic employments, and observing how they dis- 
charge their duty ; and as he shall judge most expedient in the 
Lord, keeping them in their places, or removing them : and 
generally speaking, he shall see that that which has been set 
forth in the previous chapters relating to the Colleges, be 
observed. Let him be mindftd also of the suhordination to be 
entirely maintained in Obedience, not only to the General, but 
to the Provincial also, informing him of all things needful to be 
communicated, and referring to him everything of moment ; 
obeying all his injunctions (seeing he also has a Superior) ; as it 
is just that matters be referred to him, and obedience be yielded 
by those who live in the College ; who should greatly revere and 
venerate their Rector, as one who holds the place of Christ our 
Lord, leaving to him the free disposition of themselves and their 
concems with unfeigned ohedience ; keeping nothing concealed from 
himy not even their consciences, which they should disclose to him^ as 
is set forth in the Emmeny at the appointed seasons, and oftener if 
any cause require it ; not opposing, not contradicting , not shmviny 
an opinion in any case opposed to his opinion ; so that by the union 
of the same sentiment and will, and by due submission, they may 
the better be maintained and forwarded in the service of God. 

6 Let the Rector provide not only the necessary number of officers 
for the good management of the House, but let him see that 
they are competent, as f ar as possible, to their employinents ; to 
every one let him give his regulations, containing all that relates 
to their several duties, and see that no one intermeddle with 
another's department. Moreover, as whenever it is necessary, he 
should provide assistance for them, so whenever they have time to 
spare, he should see that they spend it profitably to the service 
of God. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JESU8. 41 

7 Among the officers necessary for tlie Rector, in the first place, 
a proper person must be selected to be Sub-rector, or Major 
Domo, and to see to all things which appertain to the general 
good. There should be a Syndic also to superintend extemal 
concems ; one to see to spiritual afiairs, and two or more 
besides, in whose probity and pmdence the Rector has great 
reliance ; and with whom he may consult on the more difiicult 
occasions, and such as seem to involve the greater glory of God. 
Others also are needful for particular duties. 

8 Let the Rector see that the Collegians pay to every man in the 
discharge of his duty an entire obedience; that the other ofiicers 
obey the Sub-rector, and himself also, just as he commands 
them. 

It may be well to state this in general, that those who have to 
exact obedience from others should set them an example of that 
obedienc^ which they should pay to their Superiors in the place 
of Christ. 

9 The mEontenance of regularity as to time in studies, prayers, 
masses, lectures, food, sleep, and other things will be useful in 
all respects ; and a signal should be given at stated hours ; at 
the sound of which, let all forthwith betake themselves to that 
whereto they are summoned, not stopping to complete even a 
single letter. It will however pertain to the Rector, or to him 
who superintends, to see when these hours are to be changed 
according to the seasons or other sufficient causes ; and let what 
he determines be observed. 

10 The Rector should himself read or teach the Catechism forty 
days. Let him see also which of the CoUegians, especially 
towards the condusion of their studies, and to what extent at 
home and abroad, should impart instmction to others in con- 
ferences, in setting spiritual exercises, in hearing confessions, in 
sermons, lectures, or explanations of the Catechism, partly for 
their own improvemeut, partly for the benefit of others as well 
within as without ; and all things duly considered, let him pro- 
vide for whatever he shall perceive most pleasing to the divine 
and supreme Goodness, and His greater service and glory. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



42 THK CONSTITUTIONS OP 

OP ADMITTING UNIVBRSITIBS INTO THE SOCIBTY. 
CHAP. XI. 

1 The same reason in charity, for which Colleges are admitted, 
and public Schools maintained in them not only for the edifica- 
tion of our own Scholars, in leaming and morals but still more 
of those that are without, may be extended to the undertaking 
of the care of Universities ; that in them this benefit may be 
enlarged, and be wider spread as well in the Sciences which are 
taught as in the men who frequent them, and the degrees to 
which they attain ; so that in other places they may teach with 
authority, what they have in these thoroughly leamed to the 
glory of God. 

2 On what conditions and obUgations, and in what places these 
Universitie^ shall be admitted, is left to the judgment of the 
General of the Society : who having heard the opinions of his 
Assistants, and of others whom he may choose to consult, shall 
determine within himself whether they shall be admitted. But 
when they have been once admitted he shall have no power to 
dissolve them without the concurrence of a General Congrega- 
tion. 

3 Since reUgious peace and spiritual occupations allow not that 
distraction of mind nor other annoyances to the Society which 
attend the duty of judging in civil or criminal proceedings, no 
jurisdiction of this kind shaU be permitted which the Society 
might exercise either of itself, or by others depending on it : 
although it is proper in aU that pecidiarly relates to the welfare 
of the University that the ministers of ordinary Justice whether 
secular or ecclesiastical should fulfil the pleasure of the Rector 
of the University as signified to them touching the punishment 
of its Scholars, and generaUy promote the interests of leaming, 
especiaUy when recommended to them by the Rector. 



OF THB SCIBNCBS, WHICH ARB TO BB TAUGHT IN THB 
UNIVBRSITIBS OP THB SOCIETY. 

CHAP. xn. 

1 As the object of the Society and its studies is to assist their 
neighbours in the knowledge and love of God and the sal- 
vation of their own souls ; and as to this end the most proper 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE 80CIBTT OF JESUS. 43 

means is the study of Theology, the Universities of the Society 
shall chiefly labour therein, and diHgently teach by sufficient 
masters whatever relates to the Scholastic doctrine and the Holy 
Scriptures, and so much of the Positive as contributes to this 
our appointed end, without entering upon the portion of the 
Canons which ministers to contentious courts of law. 

2 And since both the study of Theology and its practice demand,. 
especially in these times, a knowledge of Humanity, and the 
Latin, Greek and Hebrew languages, competent Professors of 
these shall be appointed in adequate numbers. Professors also 
may be appointed for other languages, as Chaldaic, Arabic, and 
Indian, wherever they shall appear necessary or useful to the 
aforesaid end, regard being paid to the various regions, and the 
motives which lead to their study. 

3 And since the Arts, or natural Sciences dispose the mind to 
Theology, and contribute to its perfect study and practice, and 
of themselves assist in the same object ; let them be taught by 
leamed Preceptors, and with proper dihgence, sincerely seeking 
the honour and glory of Grod in all things. 

4 The study of Medicine and of the Law shall not be engaged in 
within the Universities of our Society ; or at least, the Society 
shall not take that duty upon itself , as being remote from our 
Institute. 



OP THE MANNER AND ORDER OP STUDYING THB AFOREBAID 
PACULTIES. 

CHAP. XIII. 

1 A proper arrangement and order of study must be observed 
both moming and evening for the subordinate faculties and 
Theology. 

2 And though some variety may occur in this arrangement, and 
in the hours assigned to study in diflPerent countries and seasons, 
let all at least agree in this that everywhere that only be done 
which shall be deemed most expedient to the greatest progress 
in leaming. 

3 The lectures which are read in pubhc, and the various Professors 
shall be appointed with reference to the inteUigence and 
number of the audience; they shall particularly inspect the 
progress of every one of their Scholars, and demand an account 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



44 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

of tlie lectures ; see that they are repeated, and that the 
Students in Humanity cultivate their conversational powers, 
speaking Latin and improving their style by writing : enjoining 
frequent disputations, and especially on the superior stiidents ; 
for which certain days and hours shall be appointed, when they 
shall debate, not only with their equals, but the inferior with the 
more advanced on subjects of their own selection ; which also in 
turn the more advanced shall do with the less forward, descend- 
ing (in their turn) to the studies in which these are engaged, 
and the Preceptors with one another, due moderation being 
mEiintained, and a President appointed, to break oiF the debate, 
and to declare what doctrine should be ehcited from the discus- 
sion. 

4 It will be the duty of the Rector either by himself or the Chan- 
cellor ever to see that the new-comers be examined, and placed 
in those classes, and under those Preceptors which are most 
fitting; and it shall be left to his discretion, after hearing the 
opinion of the persons appointed to that duty, whether they 
should remain longer in the same class, or be advanced to a 
higher. He also shall decide respecting the study of languages, 
except Latin, whether they should be engaged in before or after 
Arts and Theology, and how long each Student should apply to 
them. So in any of the higher Sciences, he shall settle with 
due regard to the inequality of talents and age, when each 
should commence and how long occupy himself in them : al- 
though it will be best that they who are in the vigour of hfe and 
intellect should endeavour to advance in all, and become con- 
spicuous to the glory of God. 

5 As assiduity in hterary pursuits is necessary, so is some relaxa- 
tion also. Although it shall be left to the Rector to consider 
what this should be, and at what periods, the circumstances of 
persons and places being attended to. 



OF THE BOOKS WHICH SHOULD BE STUDIED. 

CHAP. XIV. 

In general, as was observed in treating of the Colleges, those 
books shall be read which are esteemed of more solid and safe 
doctrine in any faculty. Nor shall those be entered on, whose 
doctrine or authors are svspected. In every University they 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCTETY OF JESUS. 45 

sliall be particularly specified ; in Theology, the Old and New 
Testament shall be read, and the Scholastic Divinity of St. 
Tliomas ; and in that branch of divinity called Positive, those 
authors shall be selected which appear best adapted to our object. 
As touching Latin and Greek books of Humanity, both in our 
Universities and Colleges, as far as possible, those shall not be 
used which contain anything prejudicial to good morals ; except 
they have been previously purified of improper things or words: 
In Logic and Natural and Moral Philosophy and Metaphysics, 
the Doctrine of Aristotle should be professed; and in other 
Hberal Arts, and in commentaries as well of these authors as 
those of Humanity, a choice being made of them, let those be 
selected which the Scholars ought to see, and the Teachers 
chiefly to follow in the doctrine which they dehver. But in all 
his determinations, let the Rector proceed in the way which he 
shall judge most conducive in the whole Society to the glory of 
God. 



OF TERMS AND DEGREES. 

CHAP. XV. 

1 In Humanity and the Languages the period for the completion 
of the course cannot be determined, by reason of the difference 
of talent and information of the Students, and many other 
causes, which admit of no other hmitation of time than that 
which shall appear suitable in every case at the pleasure of the 
discreet Rector or Chancellor. 

2 In the study of Arts the terms shall be arranged, in which the 
Natural Sciences shall be read, and for which not less than three 
years will be sufficient ; besides these a further period of six 
months shall be reserved for repetitions, and keeping the acts of 
the Schools, and taking the Master^s degree, by those who shall 
take it. There will elapse a period therefore of three years and 
a half before any advancement to the Master's degree. And in 
every year one such course shall be commenced, and another by 
God*s help, accomphshed. 

3 The course of Theology shall comprise six years. In the first 
four all that is necessary shall be read ; in the other two, be- 
sides the repetition, the usual acts for the Doctor^s degree shall 
be kept by those who are to be raised to it. Every fourth year 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



46 THB CONSTITUnONS OV 

the course shall ordinarily be cominenced, the books to be read 
bemg 80 arranged that a Student may begin on any one of the 
four years ; and through the remainder of the four years com- 
menced, and of so much of the four years to follow, down to 
the period corresponding to the term when he began, he may 
complete a course of Theology in four years. 
4 In the degrees as well of Masters of Arts, as of Doctors of 
Divinity, let three things be observed : First, let no one be 
advanced until he be dihgently and pubUcly examined by persons 
appointed, who shall carefully perform this duty, and he shall be 
found qualified for that Science, whether he belong to the 
Society, or not ; Secondly, That the door may be closed against 
Ambition, no fixed places shall be assigned to those who are 
raised to Degrees ; but let them rather study in honour to 
prefer one another, without observing any difference of places : 
Thirdly, As the Society instructs gratuitously, so let it raise to 
degrees gratuitously ; and to those without the Society, let very 
little expense, although voluntary, be permitted, lest custom at 
length obtain the force of law ; and in this point in the course 
of time they exceed moderation. Let the Rector take care also 
not to permit the Masters, or any others of the Society to re- 
ceive, for themselves or the College, money, or any gift from any 
one for anything done for his service ; since the Lord Christ 
alone is to he our reward, our exceeding great reward, according to 
our Institute. 



OF WHAT RELATES TO GOOD MORALS. 

CHAP. XVI. 

1 Lbt diligence be used that they who come to the Universities 
of the Society to study hterature, acquire also good morals 
worthy of Christians : to which it will greatly assist, if all go 
to the sacrament of Confession at least once a month, and hear 
Mass every day, and a Sermon every holy-day, when one is 
preached. And each of the Preceptors will take care that this 
be done by his pupils. 

2 The Catechism shall be rehearsed in College, on a certain day of 
every week, and care shall be taken that boys shall leam and 
repeat it, and that all of more advanced age, if possible, may 
know it. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 47 

3 Every week also there shall be a declamation, (as was said in 
treating of the Colleges,) by one of the Students on subjects 
tending to the edification of the hearers, and inciting them to 
increase in all purity and virtue ; that thus their style may not 
only be exercised, but their morals improved. And all those 
who understand Latin shall attend these declamations. 

4 Neither oaths nor injuries by word or deed shall be permitted 
in the Schools, nor anything indecorous or dissolute in such 
persons not belonging to the Society as frequent them. Let the 
special attention of Preceptors be tumed to this, as well in the 
lessons, when occasion offers, as at other times, to incite their 
pupils to the service and love of God and of all virtues, by 
which they may please Him, and to refer all their studies to this 
object. To keep this in mind, at the commencement of every 
lesson, let some one pronounce a short prayer to this effect, 
which the Preceptor and all the Students shall Hsten to un- 
covered. 

5 Let a Corrector be appointed, tvho shall not he of the Society, for 
those who offend as well in what concems diligence in their 
studies, as against good morals» and for whom kind words alone, 
and exhortation are not sufficient, and let him keep the boys in 
fear, and chastise those who need it, and who are capable of this 
sort of correction. And when neither words, nor the office of 
the Corrector shall suffice, and amendment in any individual is 
quite hopeless, whilst he seems to be injurious to others, it is 
better to remove him from the Schools, than to retain him where 
he does no good to himself, and only harm to others. 

But this decision shall be left to the Rector of the University, 
that all things may proceed, as is meet, to the glory and service 
of God. 



OF THE OFFIGIALS OR MINISTERS OF THE UNIVERSITY. 

CHAP. xvn. 

1 The whole care, or superintendence and govemment of the 
University shall in the Rector, who may also be head of the 
leading College of the Society, and endowed with such gifts of 
God, of which mention has been made, that he may satisfy the 
whole University in the fiilfihnent of the duty committed to 
him in leaming and morals. His election shall belong to the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



48 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

General, or him to whom he shall depute it, as the Provin- 
cial or Visitor; but the confirmation shall always rest with 
the Greneral. The Rector shall have four Counsellors, or as- 
sistants, to help him in whatever relates to his duty, and with 
whom he may regulate things of moment. 

2 There shall be a Chancellor also, a man well versed in literature, 
abounding with right zeal and judgment in what is committed to 
him : whose office shall be to be the general instrument of the 
Rector in the due arrangement of studies, and in conducting the 
debates in pubUc acts, and in ascertaining that the leaming of 
those who are to be admitted to acts and degrees, (wliich he 
shall himself confer) be sufficient. 

3 Let there be a Secretary, of the Society, who shall keep a book, 
in which the names of all the Students diligently attending the 
Schools shall be written ; and who shall receive their engage- 
ments of obedience to be paid to the Rector, and of submission to 
the Constitutions ; and who shall keep the Seal of the Rector and 
of the University : all which shall be done without any expense 
to the Students. 

4 There shall be a Notary also to give pubhc assurance of degrees 
taken and other occurrences. Let there be also two or three 
Beadles, one appointed for the faculty of Languages, another of 
Arts, the third of Theology. 

5 The University shall be divided into these three faculties ; and 
in each of them let there be appointed a Dean, and two more 
selected from among those most leamed in that faculty ; who, 
being summoned by the Rector, may declare what they think 
most expedient to the good of their faculty ; and if anything of 
this sort occur to them whilst engaged together in these affairs, 
they shall communicate it to the Rector, even without any 
summons from him. 

6 In matters which concern one faculty only, the Rector shall 
summon not only the Chancellor and his assistants, but the 
Dean also and his assistants of that faculty : in matters which 
relate to all, the Deans and assistants of all shall be summoned. 
And if the Rector should think proper to summon others to the 
Convocation whether belonging to the Society or not, he may 
do so ; that when he has heard all their opinions, he may better 
determine what is most expedient. 

7 There shall be one general Syndic, to advise the Rector and 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THK SOCIETY OP JESUS. 49 

Provincial and General as well conceming persons £is things, as 
he shall see fit ; which Syndic should be a man of great fidelity 
and judgment. Besides him, the Rector shall have his special 
Syndics, to bring before him occurrences requiring his inspection 
in every class. And as he shall write once a year to the General, 
and twice to the Provincial, (who shall inform the General when 
necessaryj respecting all the Preceptors, and others of the Society ; 
so also his Colleague, and Syndic, and Counsellors shall write 
respecting him and others : so that in all things they may proceed 
with greater circimispection and diligence each in his own 
pecuhar duty. 
8 It shall be left to the consideration of the General when any 
University is admitted, whether the Rector, Chancellor, Beadles, 
Doctors, and Masters should wear any distinctions by which 
they may be recognized in the University, or in the PubHc Acts, 
or not ; and if they wear them, what they shall be. And he 
shall appoint either by himself or another whatever he shall judge 
after duly weighing all the circumstances to be most conducive 
to the greater glory and service of God and the general good, 
which is our only aim in this and all other our doings. 



THE FIFTH PART ; 

of those things which relate to admission into the Body of the Society. 



OF ADMISSION, TO WHOM THE POWBR BELONGS, AND WHBN 
TO BE £X£RCISBD. 

CHAP. I. 
1 nnHEY who have been sufficiently and so long proved in the 
-L Society, that it may be thoroughly ascertained that it will 
conduce to the greater service and glory of God, for them to 
remain in it, may be admitted, not as before, to probation, but 
in a more*intimate manner, to be members of one and the same 
body of the Society. Of this sort chiefly are those who are 
admitted to Profession, or as formed Coadjutors. But as the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



50 THB CONSTITUTIONS OP 

approved Students are adopted into the body of the Society in a 
more intimate manner than those admitted to Probation ; in this 
fifth part shall be said what appears needful to be observed in 
the Lord, conceming their admission. 

2 First, the power of admitting into the body of the Society such as 
ought to be admitted, shall be vested in its head ; as reason 
demands. But as the General cannot be present in every place, 
he may communicate to others of the Society so much of this 
power, as shall seem advantageous to the whole body. 

3 The time for admission in the aforesaid manner, generally 
speaking, should be after two years ; but if any one should have 
been long observed before he is sent to his studies, or whilst 
occupied in them, he shall still have a whole year of probation 
after he has accomplished them, if he is to be admitted to 
Profession; that he may be still further observed, before he 
engages in it. And this time may be protracted, as is set forth 
in the Examen, when the Society, or he who holds this duty of 
it in the Lord, desires to be further satisfied. 



WHAT KIND OF PERSONS ARE TO BE ADMITTED. 
CHAP. II. 

1 As he only who appears fitted in the Lord should be admitted 
by any of these methods ; so they shall be accounted fit, whose 
hves have been thoroughly scrutinized and approved of by 
continued and diligent probations by the Greneral, to whom 
subordinate Grovemors shall refer, or others whose testimony the 
General shaU require. It will much conduce to this, for those 
who have been sent to their studies, having bestowed that care 
and diligence which was necessary to the culture of the intellect, 
to exercise themselves diligently in schooling their affections 
through the period of their final probation, and to be very 
eamest in the spiritual and bodily exercises which pertain to 
their improvement in humility, in the denial of all sensual love, 
of tlteir own will and privaie judgment, and in the greater know- 
ledge and love of God : so that when these feehngs have pre- 
dominated in their own hearts, they may better assist others in 
the progress of the Spirit to the glory of God and our Lord. 

2 Their instmction of this kind must be sufficient, and besides 
Humanity and the Liberal Arts, they ought to be adequately 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOGIETY OF JESUS. 51 

versed in Scholastic Divinity, and the Sacred Scriptures. And 
although some in a shorter time are ahle to make no less 
progress than others in a longer; nevertheless, that some 
common standard may he adopted, a distinct period of time 
shall he prescrihed, and this shall he four entire years spent in 
Theology after accomplishing their studies of the Liheral Arts 
and Philosophy. For any one, therefore, to be admitted to 
Profession, it is needful that he should have exercised himself 
during this time in that faculty, and that he he sufficiently 
advanced in it to the glory of God: and in proof of this 
proficiency, let each man before his Profession maintain positions 
in Logic, Philosophy, and Scholastic Theology. Let four be 
chosen to debate and determine, whether their leaming be what 
it ought, as they sincerdy think, according to the truth. But 
if they be not found qualified with sufficient leaming, it will be 
better to wait until they acquire it : as they also ought to wait, 
who with regard to self-denial and the virtues becoming a 
rehgious man have not obtained such a testimonial as is meet. 

3 Others than these may be admitted to the profession of the 
three solemn vows, although rarely, and not without peculiar 
reasons of great weight ; and they too ought to have been 
known in the Society at least seven years, and to have given in 
it no small satisfeu^tion of their talents and virtues to the glory 
of God. 

4 For any one to be admitted as a Coadjutor, it is necessary that 
the Society be satisfied of his hfe and good example, and talents 
to assist it either with leaming in spiritual afiairs, or without it 
in extemal matters, as the divine Groodness shall have com- 
municated His gifts. The pmdence of the Greneral should 
measure this, unless he has seen fit to entrust the duty to some 
one in whom he has great confidence in the Lord. 

5 To be admitted to be approved Scholars, the same things in due 
proportion are required, and that in a pecuHar manner : so that 
in the judgment of the General, or of the person to whom he 
shall have confided the duty (trusting to the wisdom and probity 
bestowed on him by God) it may be hoped from their talents 
and disposition that they will tum out leamed men. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



52 THK CONSTITUTIONS OF 

OP THE MODE OP ADMITTING TO PROPESSION. 
CHAP. III. 

1 When any are to be admitted to Profession, the period of 
probation being past, and the proofs and other things contained 
in the Examen being completed, and the Society or its General 
is thoroughly satisfied in the Lord, Profession shall be made in 
the fpllowing manner. 

2 First of all, the General, or some one empowered by him to 
admit to Profession, when he has ofFered the sacrifice of the 
public Mass in the Church^ before inmates and others there 
present, shall tum to the person who is about to make Pro- 
fession with the most holy Sacrament of the Eucharist : and he, 
after the general confession and the words which are used before 
the Communi6n, shall with a loud voice pronounce his written 
Vow, (which it is meet that he should have meditated on for 
several days ;) whereof this is the form. 

3 I. N. make profession, and promise Almighty God before His 
Virgin mother, and before all the heavenly host, and before all 
by-standers, and You, Reverend Father, General of the Society 
of Jesus, holding the place of God, and your Successors ; or, 
You, Reverend Father, vice-General of the Society of Jesus and 
of his successors, holding the place of God, perpetual Poverty, 
Chastity and Obedience, and therein, pecuUar care in the educa- 
tion of boys, according to the form of Hving contained in the 
ApostoHc Letters of the Society of Jesus, and in its Consti- 
tutions. Moreover I promise special Obedience to the Pope in 
Missions; as is contained in the same ApostoUc Letters, and 
Constitutions : At Rome, or elsewhere, on such a day, month 
and year, and in such a church. 

4 After this, let him take the most holy Sacrament of the Eucha- 
rist. Which being done, the name of him who makes pro- 
fession shall be written in a book, which the Society shall keep 
for that purpose, the name of the person to whom he made it, 
the day, month and year being also set down : and his written 
Vows shall be preserved ; that an account of all the particulars 
may appear for ever to the glory of God. 

5 Those who shall be admitted to the profession of the threc 
solemn vows only shall read their written Vow in the Church, 
and before inmates and strangers there present, previously to 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIBTY OP JESUS. 53 

their receiving the most ho,ly body of Christ, according to the 
following form. 

I. N. make profession, and promise Almighty God before His 
Virgin mother, and before all the heavenly host, and before all 
by-standers, and You, Reverend Father, General of the Society 
of Jesus, Jiolding the place of God, and your Successors ; or, 
You, Reverend Father, vice-General of the Society of Jesus and 
of his successors, kolding the place of God, perpetual Poverty, 
Chastity and Obedience, and therein, peculiar care in the educa- 
tion of hoySy according to the form of living contained in the 
ApostoHc Letters of the Society of Jesus, and in its Consti- 
tutions. Moreover I promise special Obedience to the Pope in 
Missions; as is contained in the same Apostolic Letters, and 
Constitutions : At Rome, or elsewhere, on such a day> month 
and year, and in such a ohurch. 
Then shall follow the Communion, and the rest as aforesaid. 



OF ADMITTING COADJUTORS AND SCHOLARS. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 Those who are admitted to be spiritual Coadjutors with simple, 
and not solemn vows, shall make their vow in the Church, 
or chapel of the House, or other fitting place, before inmates 
and strangers there present, to him who is to admit them, in 
the following form, reading it ; 

2 L N. promise Almighty God, before His Virgin mother, and 
before all the heavenly host, and You, Reverend Father, General 
of the Society of Jesus, holding tlw place of God, and your 
successors ; or You, Reverend Father, vice-General of the 
Society of Jesus, and of his successors, holding the place of God, 
perpetualPoverty, Chastity and Obedience, and therein, peculiar 
care in the education of hoys, according to the manner expressed 
in the ApostoHcal Letters, and in the Constitutions of the said 
Society ; At Rome, or elsewhere, in such a place, day, month 
and year. 

Then let him take the most holy body of Christ, and let the 
rest of the ceremony be the same as in the case of the Pro- 
fessed. 

3 The form for admitting Coadjutors in temporals shall be the same, 
the clause of peculiar care in the education of hoys alone removed. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



54 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

Those who, at the conclusion of their first probation and proofs 
usual in the biennium, are admitted to be Scholars, in the 
■ presence of certain inmates, though not to any person, shall make 
their Vows in this manner. 

4 Ahnighty, Everlasting God, I. N. albeit every way most unwor- 
thy in Thy holy sight, yet relying on Thine infinite pity and 
compassion, and impelled by the desire of serving Thee, in the 
presence of the most holy Virgin Mary, and before all Thine 
heavenly host, vow to Thy divine Majesty, perpetual Poverty, 
Chastity and Obedience in the Society of Jesus, and promise 
that I will enter the same Society, to live in it perpetually ; 
understanding all things according to the Constitutions of the 
Society. Of Thy boundless goodness and mercy through the 
blood of Jesus Christ I humbly pray that Thou wilt deign to 
accept this i^acrifice in the odour of sweetness, and, as Thou 
hast granted Thine abundant grace to desire and offer, so Thou 
wilt enable me to fulfil the same ; At Rome, or elsewhere, 
in such a place, day, month and year. 

Then shall they take, as the others, the most holy body of 
Christ, and the rest of the ceremony shall proceed as before. 

5 When any one shall be adopted into the body of the Society in 
any degree, he ought not to be anxious to proceed to another ; 
but to be perfect in his own, employing himself in the service of 
God, and leaving the care of all other things to his Superior, 
who doubtless holds the place of Christ our Lord. 

6 Those who live in our Houses after two years should take the 
same vows as the Scholars, and bind themselves to Christ our 
Lord; and that, although they be not put to studies, and al- 
though it be not thought expedient that they be admitted so 
early among the Coadjutors or the Professed. But if any one, 
urged by his private feelings of devotion should wish, before this 
period of two years to offer himself to God by Vows, he may 
use the same form, and delivering to the Superior one copy of 
his written Vow, keep another himself, that what he has offered 
to God and our Lord may be remembered. And to this end, 
and likewise to increase devotion, it will conduce, at certain 
stated and convenient seasons to renew their Vows. Which is 
not to bind themselves by a new obUgation, but to call to mind 
in the Lord and confirm that by which they are ahready bound. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SIXTH PART; 

of those who are admitted and adopted into the body of the Society ; 
what relates to their persons. 



OF THOSE THINGS WHICH PERTAIN TO OBEDIENCB. 

CHAP. I. 

1 nnHAT tliey who have been admitted to be Professed, or Co- 
-Ladjutors may devote themselves with more abundant profit 
according to our Institute to the service of God, and the suc- 
cour of their neighbours, they should observe certain things in 
themselves : the chief of which, although comprehended in 
those Vows offered up to God and our Creator according to the 
Apostolical Letters, shall nevertheless be set forth, in this sixth 
part, in order that they may be more distinctly declared and 
recommended. And since what pertains to the Vow of Chastity 
requires no explanation, it being clear how perfectly it should 
be observed, namely by striving to imitate the Angelic holiness 
in the purity both of our mind and body : This being stated, 
Holy Obedience shall be spoken of, in which virtue all must 
studiously endeavour to make large progress, not only in things 
obhgatory, but in others, even where there should appear the 
slightest indication of the Superior^s pleasure, without any eapress 
command. God our Creator and Lord should be set before our 
eyes, for whose sake Obedience is paid to men : and care must 
be taken to proceed in the calm spirit of love, and not in the 
troubled spirit of fear, so that we may all strive with stedfast 
purpose to neglect no point of perfection, to which by the divine 
grace we can attain, in the absolute observance of all the Con- 
stitutions, and the ftdfilment of the pecuhar object of our Insti- 
tute: and may most unremittingly exert every effort in displaying 
this virtue of Obedience, first to the Pope, then to the Superiors 
of the Society ; so that in all things whereto Obedience pro- 
ceeding from love can extend itself, we may be most prompt to 
attend to his voice, just as if it proceeded from Christ our Lord 

E 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



56 THK CONSTITUTIONS OP 

{forasmuch as we pay ohedience to His place, and for His love and 
reverence) leaving every other thing, not staying to finish a 
letter even which the pen is tracing, in our eagemess for instant 
comphance : directing all our energies to this ohject and inten- 
tion in the Lord ; so that Holy Obedience may be perfect in us 
in every point, in execution, in will, in intellect ; doing whatever 
is enjoined us with all celerity, with spiritual joy and per- 
severance ; persuading ourselves that everything is just ; suppress- 
ing every repugnant thought and judgment of our oum in a certain 
Obedienccy and that moreover in all things which are determined 
by the Superior, wherein it cannot be defined (as is said) that 
any kind of sin appears. And let every one persuade himself, 
that they who hve under Obedience should permit themselves to 
be moved and directed under divine Providence by their Su- 
periors justflw if they were a corpse, which allows itself to be 
moved and handled in any way ; or 9& the staff of an old man, 
which serves him wherever and in whatever thing he who holds 
it in his hand pleases to use it. Thus obedient he should execute 
anything on which the Superior chooses to employ him in the 
service of the whole body of the Society, with cheerfuhiess of 
mind, and altogether believe that he will answer the divine will 
better in that way, than in any other which he can foUow in 
comphance with his own will and differing judgment. 

2 Likewise it is eamestly recommended to all, to show great 
reverence to their Superiors (and especially in the inner man) 
to consider and revere Jesus Christ in them, to love them sin- 
cerely as fathers in Him, and so to proceed in the spirit of 
charity in all things as to conceal no extemal or intemal 
matter from them ; but rather wish them entirely to know 
everything, thereby the better to direct them in the way of 
safety and perfection. And for this reason, all, as well Professed 
as Coadjutors once a year (and oftener if the Superior sees fit) 
should be ready to open their consciences to the same person in 
confession, either secretly or in any other way, by reason of its 
great utihty (as is set forth in the Examen) and also to make a 
general confession, which should commence from the last general 
confession, to him whom the Superior shall substitute for himself . 

3 All should inform their Superior what things appear to be desirable 
for themselves : and let no private person, without his permission 
and approbation seek or cause to be sought any favour for his 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 57 

own private use or that of another, from the Pope, or any other 
without the Society, directly or indirectly : and let each man 
persuade himself, if he obtain not what he desires, either of his 
Superior or with his consent, that it would not be conducive to 
God's service ; and that if it is conducive, he will obtain it with 
his Superior's consent, as one who with regard to him holds the 
place of Chrkt our Lord. 



OP THB THINGS WHICH PERTAIN TO POVERTY, AND WHICH 
FOLLOW FROM IT. 

CHAP. II. 

1 PovERTY is to be loved and maintained in its purity, as the 
firmest bulwark of Rehgion, as far as possible by the assistance 
of the divine Grace, 

And since the enemy of the human race is wont to endeavour to 
weaken this defence and refuge (with which God our Lord has 
inspired the Rehgious against him and the other adversaries of 
Rehgious perfection) by changing the wholesome regulations of 
the first Founders, by declarations and new Constitutions httle 
corresponding to their first intention: as far as in us Hes, we will 
in this part secure the Society ; Whoever shaU make profession 
in it, let them promise that theywill do nothing towards an 
iimovation of the Constitutions in what relates to Poverty, 
except they should judge that it should be in any way yet 
further restricted in the Lord on account of occurring circum- 
stances. 

2 In Houses or Churches which are admitted by the Society for 
the succour of souls, no revenues may be kept, not even to be 
apphed to Vestry or Fabric, nor in any other way so that the 
Society may have any power over the disposal of them : but let 
confidence be placed in God alone, whom by His grace it serves, 
Who without any revenues wiU provide all things for us con- 
ducive to His greater praise and glory. 

3 Let the Professed live on alms, and in the Houses, when they 
are not sent elsewhere ; and let them not undertake the duty of 
ordinary Rectors in the CoUeges or Universities of the Society 
(except necessity or some exceeding advantage demand itj nor em- 
ploy their revenues on the Houses. 

4 So long as the Coadjutors shaU remain in the Houses, which 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



58 THB CONSTITUTIONS OP 

subsist on alms, they also shall hve in the same way. If they 
are Rectors of CoUeges, or Lecturers, or useful in any other 
necessary or advantageous employments, they shall Hve as the 
others do, out of the CoUege-revenues, so long as these shaU 
require their service. When they shaU cease to be useful to the 
CoUeges, let them no longer Hve in them ; and they shaU dweU 
in the Houses of the Society, as is said of the Professed. 

5 Not only shaU the Houses and Churches of the Society have no 
revenues, but not even any possessions whether pecuUar or com- 
mon, except what is needful, or exceedingly convenient to them 
for habitation or use ; of which kind it might be considered 
if a place were allowed remote from general habitation, enjoying 
a salubrious air, and other advantages, for the use of the con- 
valescent, or of those who withdraw from the intercourse of the 
world to be at leisure for spiritual concems ; and even then it 
shaU not be let out to others, nor produce anything which may 
be looked upon as revenue. 

6 Although it is praiseworthy to incite men to good and holy 
works, and especiaUy to such as shaU endure for ever ; yet for 
greater edification no member of our Society ought nor is 
aUowed to stimulate any one to leave perpetual alms to the 
Houses or Churches of this Society : and if any persons leave 
such spontaneously, no civfl right is acquired to secure them, so 
that he who refuses to pay them can be sued for them. But 
when the Love of God moves them to do so, then they may 
bestow them, 

7 AU who are under Obedience to the Society should remember 
that they ought to give gratuitously what they have gratuitously 
received, neither demanding, nor receiving pay, or ahns, by 
which Masses, or Confessions, or Sermons, or Lessons, or Visi- 
tations, or any other duty of aU those which the Society can 
render according to our Institute, may appear to be remunerated ; 
that so it may proceed with greater Uberty and edification of our 
neighbours in God's service. 

8 To avoid aU appearance of covetousness, especiaUy in offices of 
piety which the Society discharges for the succour of souls, let 
there be no box in the church, into which alms are generaUy put 
by those who go thither to Sermons, Mass, or Confession, and 
other spiritual concerns. 

9 For the same reason let no trifles be presented to the great 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THK SOCIBTY OF JBSUS. 59 

which are usually given with a view of obtaining some more valu- 
able retum ; and let none of our Society habituate themselves to 
the frequent visiting of leading men, except when induced by the 
holy love of pious works, or when they are united in such 
intimate friendship in the Lord, that such a duty appears some- 
times due to them. 

10 Let them be prepared to beg from door to door, when either 
obedience or necessity demands it. And if one, or more are 
appointed to ask alms, by which our Houses may be sustained, 
let them beg them with a holy simplicity for the love of God. 

i 1 As no private property can be held at home, neither can it be 
kept elsewhere by others. And when all superfluities are re- 
moved let every one be contented with what is allowed him from 
the common stock for his needful or convenient use. 

12 That the purity of Poverty, and that tranquility which accom- 
panies it, may be secured ; not only the Professed individually, 
or Coadjutors shall be incapable of hereditary succession ; but 
neither Houses nor Churches nor Colleges shall inherit in their 
right. For thus, all suits and controversies being cut off, 
charity shall be better preserved with all men to the glory of 
God. 

13 Whenever the Pope, or a Superior shall send the Professed or 
Coadjutors to labour in the vineyard of the Lord ; they should 
seek no viaticum, but present themselves freely, to be sent, as 
shall seem good to them to the greater glory of God. 

14 And to proceed in this particular in a manner according with 
real poverty, no horses shall be ordinarily kept within the 
Houses of the Society for riding. for the service of any member 
of the Society, whether Superior or subordinate. 

15 In regard to dress also let three things be observed ; First, that 
it be becoming ; Secondly, accommodated to the customs of the 
place where they live ; Thirdly, that it contradict not the pro- 
fession of poverty. It would seem to be repugnant should we 
use silk or expensive cloth, from which we must abstain, that in 
all things due regard to humility and submission be paid to the 
greater glory of Grod. 

16 In all that concems food, sleep, and the use of other things 
needftd or convenient for life, although it be the general fare, 
and in nowise differing from what the Physician of the place 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



60 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

where they live shall recoinmend, so that whatever each man 
reduces of this, he may dimmish it in devotion, not from obliga- 
tion ; still regard shall ever be paid to hmnility, poverty and 
spiritual edification, which should always be before our eyes in 
the Lord. 



OF THOSE THINGS, IN WHICH THE SOCIETY SHOULD BB OCCUPIED, 
AND FROM WHICH IT SHOULD ABSTAIN. 

CHAP. III. . 

1 Regard being paid to the time and expectation of hfe whereby 
some are admitted to profession, or to be Coadjutors in the 
Society, since it is considered as certain that they will prove 
spiritual men ; and being so proficient in the way of Christ our 
Lord, that they can continue their course therein, so far as 
constitution and the extemal occupations of charity and obedi- 
ence permit, no rule appears necessary to be prescribed in things 
relating to prayer, meditation and study, nor in the extemal 
practice of fasting, watching, and other things pertaining to 
austerity, or the castigation of the body, except what a discem- 
ing charity shall dictate to each, so long as a Confessor is always 
consulted, and whenever a doubt occurs, the question is referred 
to the Superior. This is said in general : but care must be 
taken, that overmuch attention to things of this kind weaken 
not the powers of the body, nor occupy so much time, as to 
render them finally inadequate to the spiritual succour of their 
neighbours according to the object of our Institute ; on the 
other hand let not the relaxation be so great, that the fervour 
of the spirit growing cold, human and inferior affections acquire 
warmth. 

2 A frequenting of the Sacraments may be greatly commended ; 
and the Communion, or the celebration of the Mass ought not 
to be deferred beyond a week except for reasons allowed of by 
the Superior : and let aU confess, each to the Confessor assigned 
to him, or otherwise according to the order which every one 
has prescribed to him by the Superior. 

3 Of the special Rules which are observed in the Houses, where 
they reside, they should carefiilly attend to that part which is 
apphcable and directed to themselves in the judgment of the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JE8US. 61 

Superior ; whether it be to their own imprdvement and edifica- 
tion, or of others, among whom they live. 

4 Since those occupations which are undertaken for the succour of 
souls are of great moment, and peculiar to our Institute, and 
very frequent ; and since moreover our dwelling is so uncertain 
in one place or another ; our members shall not serve the Choir 
at canonical hours, or the saying of Masses or other offices : as 
there wiU be abundant opportunity for them who are led by 
devotion to hear them to satisfy themselves. But that should 
be attended to by us which is more agreeable to our calling to 
the glory of God. 

5 Since.hkewise the members of this Society should always be 
prepared to go to any quarter of the globe, to which they shall 
be sent by the Pope, or their Superiors ; they should not under- 
take the care of souls, nor of ReHgious, or any other women 
whatsoever, so as commonly to hear their Confessions, or direct 
them ; although there is no objection to their receiving the Con- 
fessions of a Monastery once and for special reasons. 

6 It is by no means right for them to be bound to say perpetual 
Masses in their Churches, or to any similar duty, which the 
hberty necessary to our method of proceeding in the Lord does 
not aUow of. 

7 That the Society may be at greater leisure for spiritual concems 
according to its Institute ; let them abstain, as far as possible, 
from secular affairs, such as the making of wills, executorships, 

or the management of civil business, or duties of that kind : nor 
undertake them, nor allow themselves to be occupied with them 
under any urgency of entreaty. And if any afiairs of the 
CoUeges require attention, let them have their own proctors, to 
manage them, and uphold their rights. But if they concem 
the Houses of the Society, or its whole body ; that the Society 
may better maintain its tranquiUity, the same proctor may 
defend its rights, or some one of the Coadjutors, or some one 
even without the Society, or some FamUy, which shaU take 
upon itself the patronage of the House, to the greater glory of 
God. 

8 For the same reason, and that occasions of disturbance contrary 
to our profession may be avoided, and peace and good-wiU be 
better maintained with aU, to the greater glory of God, no one of 
the Professed, or Coadjutors, or even Scholars of the Society 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



62 THE CON8TITUTIONS OP 

may allow himself to be examined without the licence of the Superior 
in Civil or Criminal causes, unless he who can oblige him under 
sin should compel him, and the Superior will never grant per- 
mission, except in causes "which relate to the (Roman) Catholic 
Religion ; or at least in rehgious causes which tend to its ser- 
vice, so that they end not in the injury of another. For it is 
the character of our Institute, to promote the service of all in 
the Lord, as far as possible, without offending any. 



OF THE ASSISTANCE WHICH SHOULD BE RENDERED TO THOSE WHO 
DIE IN THE SOCIETT, AND THB DUTIES WHICH ARE PAID TO ITS 

DEAD. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 As in the whole course of Hfe, so in death also, every member 
of our Society more especially should be eamest and watchful 
that God and our Lord Jesus Christ be glorified in him, and His 
good pleasure be obeyed and our neighbours edified, at least in 
the example of patience and fortitude, with a Hvely faith, hope 
and desire of those everlasting blessings which Christ our Lord 
merited and obtained for us by the incomparable labours of His 
temporal Hfe and by His death. But as it often happens that 
mortal disease almost entirely overpowers the faculties of the soul ; 
and the removal from this temporal hfe is of such a nature as to 
require in a pecuhar manner the support of brotherly love, by rea- 
son of the fierce assualts of the Devil, by whom it concems us much 
at that time not to be overcome ; let the Superior dihgently take 
care that he who in the Physician's opinion is in danger of death, 
arm and strengthen himself with the weapons provided for us 
by the bounty of Christ our Lord for his passage from this 
temporal to eteraal Hfe, by receiving, before he is deprived of 
his mental powers, all the holy Sacraments. 

2 At the same time he shaU see that the sick person be assisted 
by the prayers of all the inmates seriously directed to that 
object, until he shaU resign his soul into his Creator's hands. 
And besides others who may approach, more or fewer at the 
Superior's pleasure, some ought to be especiaUy selected to visit 
the d)dng man, to assist and encourage him, to suggest such 
things, and lend him such aid as befit the occasion : and when 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOGIETY OF JBSUS. 63 

all other duties shall be of no avail, to commend him to the 
Lord, mitil He shall vouchsafe to receive the soul departing from 
the body to Himself, who at the vast price of His blood and hfe 
hath redeemed him. 

When he has expired, let his body be kept decently for burial, 
as long as it is proper. Then let him be buried as the custom 
is, the service being performed before the inmates, and on the 
moming following his death, let all the Priests within the place 
offer the sacrifice of the Mass for his soul ; and let all the others 
implore in his behalf the divine clemency in a particular prayer, 
and further continue therein at the Superior*s pleasure, or the 
individual's private devotion, or obhgation, if there be any 
between them in the Lord. 

Let others of the Society be informed wherever the Superior 
shall deem right, that they may bestow the like offices of 
Charity, which ought to be rendered in the Lord to those who 
have departed this Hfe, not less than to the hving. 



THAT THB CONSTITUTIONS INVOLVB NO OBLIGATION TO COMMIT 

SIN. 

CHAP. V. 
1 Although the Society desires all its Constitutions, Declarations, 
and order of life to be observed according to our Institute, in no 
way deviating in any particular ; it desires nevertheless all its 
members to be secured, or at least assisted against falling into 
the snare of any sin which may originate from the force of its 
Constitutions or injunctions ; It seems good to us in the Lord 
that excepting the express Vow by which the Society is bound 
to the Pope for the time being, and the three other essential 
Vows of Poverty, Chastity and Obedience, no Constitutions, 
Declarations, or any order of hving can involve an obHgation to 
sin, mortal or venial ; UNLESS THE SUPERIOR COM- 
MAND THEM IN THE NAME OF OUR LORD JESUS 
CHRIST, OR IN VIRTUE OF HOLY OBEDIENCE ; 
WHICH SHALL BE DONE IN THOSE CASES OR 
PERSONS, WHEREIN IT SHALL BE JUDGED THAT 
IT WILL GREATLY CONDUCE TO THE PARTICU- 
LAR GOOD OF EACH, OR TO THE GENERAL AD- 
VANTAGE; AND IN STEAD OF THE FEAR OF 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



64 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

OFFENCE LET THE LOVE AND DESIRE OF ALL 
PERFECTION SUCCEED ; THAT THE GREATER GLO- 
RY AND PRAISE OF CHRIST OUR CREATOR AND 
LORD MAY FOLLOW. 



THE SEVENTH PART; 

of what relates to the distrihution of those admitted into the hody of 

the Society for the service of their fellow-creatures through 

the Vineyard of the Lord. 






OF THE POPE S MISSIONS. 

CHAP. I. 

S in the Sixth Part those things have been mentioned which 
are to be observed by each member of the Society towards 
himself ; so in this Seventh those shaU be enumerated which 
should be observed towards our neighbours, the more especial 
object of our Institute, whilst our members are scattered through 
the Vineyard of Christ to employ themselves in that portion of 
it, and that duty which is committed to them ; whether they be 
sent through various regions by the chief Vicar of Christ our 
Lord, or by the Superiors of the Society, who also are over them 
in the place of the divine Majesty ; or whether they determine 
for themselves, where and in what they should be employed, if 
it be left to their own judgment to proceed whithersoever they 
think they can most effectually accomphsh the greater service of 
God and our Lord, and the benefit of souls ; or whether their 
labour be employed in a settled and continued and not a varying 
habitation, where great advancement of God's glory and service 
may be expected. And in the first place, to treat of the mission 
of the Pope, the most important of all, it is to be observed that 
the intention of the Vow wherewith the Society has bound 
itself in obedience to the supreme Vicar of Christ without any 
excuse, is that we must go to whatever part of the world he 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OP JESUS. 65 

shall determine to send us, amongst believers or unbelievers, to 
the greater glory of God and the succour of souls. Nor has 
the Society had in view any particular part ; but that it may 

_ be scattered by him in divers regions and countries throughout 
the world : seeing it would of itself select the most beneficial 
course, and would expect no other, if the chief Pontiff should 
direct the distribution of its members. 

And on this point, since the Society has engaged every thought 
and will of its own to Christ our Lord, and his Vicar, neither 
the General of the Society for himself, nor any subordinate 
member for himself or for another may directly or indirectly 
treat or negociate with the Pope or his Ministers, to remain or 
be sent into any one part rather than another : but inferior 
members shall leave all congiderations of this kind to the 
supreme Vicar of Christ and their Superior, whilst the Superior 
shall leave whatever relates to his own person to the Pope and 
the Society in the Lord. 

i Moreover, whoever shall be appointed by the Pope, to go to 
any place, let him yield himself freely, without demanding any 
temporal thing either by himself or by any other person for his 
Viaticimi ; but rather let him desire to be sent by the Pope in 
whatever way his Holiness shall deem to be conducive to the 
more acceptable service of God and the Apostohc See, without 
respect to any other thing. 

[ If the Pope designates no individual, but orders one or more to 
go to this or that place, leaving it to the Superior*s determina- 
tion, as to the persons best adapted to the mission : the Superior 
shall select those in comphance with his command who shall 
seem best suited and qualified for it. In which he shaU chiefly 
regard the general good, and how other duties undertaken for 
the service of God may sustain the least injury. 

3 It is proper that his whole mission be ftdly disclosed to the 
party thus sent, and the object of the Pope*s intention ; and, if 
possible, in writing, that what is enjoined him may be more 
exactly accomphshed. The Superior wiU take care to assist him 
with advice and instruction, as far as possible, so that he may 
more usefuUy discharge his duty in all things to the service of 
God and the Apostohc See. 

S If he be sent to particular places, without the specification of 
any period by the Pope : let it be understood that he shaU 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



66 THE C0NSTITUTI0N8 OP 

remain there for three months, more or less, according to the 
measure of the spiritual advantage which may be derived from 
thence, or hoped for elsewhere ; or in short, as it shall be con- 
sidered most conducive to the general benefit. All which shall 
be conducted at the Superior^s determination, who shall regard 
the Pope*s sacred intention for the service of Christ our Lord. 

7 When he shall continue longer in these appointed places, if it 
may be done without detriment to the principal mission, and the 
object of the Pope, it will not be improper to make excursions, 
if possible, and if he shall think them likely to be beneficial to 
God's service ; so that contributing to the succour of souls in 
the neighbourhood, after a while he may retum to the place of 
his own residence ; in which also besides the business especially 
enjoined him (on which he shall bestow his best endeavours, 
and never ne^lect for other occupations however useful in the 
service of God) he may and ought to consider in what other 
objects conducive to the glory of God and the salvation of souls 
he may employ his efibrts without detriment to his mission, as 
said before. He shall not allow any opportunity to escape, 
which God shall grant him, so far as he shall think expedient. 

8 The better to secure the object of our profession and promise, 
whenever a new Vicar of Christ shall be elected to the Apos- 
tohc See, within a year from his creation and coronation the 
General either by himself or by another shall be obhged to 
declare to his HoHness the profession and express promise of 
Obedience, by which the Society has bound itself by its peculiar 
Vow regarding missions to the glory of God. 



OP THE MISSIONS OP THE SUPERIOR OP THB SOCIBTT. 

CHAP. II. 
1 That relief may be given to the spiritual necessity of souk in 
many places with the greater facility and security of those who 
are appointed to this duty, the Generals of the Society according 
to the power granted them by the Pope, may send whomsoever 
they wiU of the Society, wheresoever they shall judge most 
expedient ; who, nevertheless, wherever they may be, shall be 
prepared to obey the Apostolic See. And since there are many 
who may soUcit some members of our Society to be allowed 
them : regarding rather their peculiar spiritual obHgations 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JBSUS. 67 

to their own flock, or otlier interests more remote from 
our Institute, than the common or general concems ; let the 
General or his deputy diligently look to these missions, that in 
sending his subordinates to one part rather than another, and to 
one duty rather than another, and one person rather than ano- 
ther, in this or that method, for a longer or a shorter period, 
whatever is most conducive to the greater service of God, and 
the general good may always be determined on. With this 
most upright and sincere intention maintained in the sight of 
God and our Lord ; and the subject being commended to the 
divine Majesty in his prayers and sacrifices and those of the 
inmates, should this seem needful on account of the difficulty or 
importance of the dehberation ; and also being communicated to 
some one or more of the Society then at hand; he shall of 
himself determine, whether to send or not; and so of other 
circimistances, as he shall deem most conducive to the greater 
glory of God. And it shall be his duty who is sent to yield the 
full and free disposal of himself to his Superior, who govems 
him in Chrisfs stead, to His greater service and glory, without 
in any way interfering to procure his going, or staying in one 
place rather than another. In Uke manner no one ought to 
trouble himself in any way for others to remain in any place, or 
remove elsewhere without the consent of his Superior, by whom 
he is govemed in the Lord. 
2 Whithersoever the Superior shall send any one, he should in- 
stmct him perfectly (and generally in writing) as well in the 
method of proceeding, as the means which he wishes him to 
employ to attain the object which he has in liis mind. Being 
informed as f ar as possible by the frequent interchange of letters 
of the whole issue, from the place where he resides, he will 
provide by his counsel and aU other assistance which can be 
rendered, as persons and things require, that the greater service 
of God be accomplished, and the general good forwarded by 
the members of the Society : which ought to be attended to 
with the more dihgence, as the character of the business, 
whether onerous or difficult, and of the missionaries, whether 
requiring counsel or instmction, may demand. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



68 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 



OP A WILLING MISSION IN ANY DIRBCTION. 
CHAP. III. 

1 Although tliey who live under the obedience of the Society 
ought not to obtrude themselves directly or indirectly into any 
mission, whether sent by the Pope, or by their Superior in the 
name of Jesus Christ ; yet he who is dispatched to any exten - 
sive region, (such as India or other Provinces) if no district is 
assigned to him with express hmitation, may remain in one 
place or another, more or less, or move about as he shall think 
most conducive to the glory of Grod weighing all circum- 
stances, and using prayer, in perfect indiflference as to his own 
gratification. Hence it may easily be coUected, if this is per- 
mitted to individuals, when not repugnant to the great and chief 
obedience to (he Pope, that much larger power shall be given 
to the Superior in missions of this kind to order them to any 
one place rather than another, as he shaU deem expedient ia 
the Lord. 

2 Wheresoever any one remains, if he has no orders to use any 
specified method, such as lectures or sermons, he shaU employ 
himself in the way which the Society adopts, as stated in 
the Sixth Part, and to be set forth in the foUowing chapter, as 
he shaU judge most convenient ; and on the other hand, he shaU 
avoid what is there ordered to be avoided, to the greater service 
of God. 



IN WHAT THINGS THE HOUSES AND COLLEGES OP THE SOCIETY 
MAY ASSIST THEIR NEIGHBOUR. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 As the Society endeavours to aid their feUow-creatures, not only 
by missions to various places, but also by constantly residing in 
some (as in their Houses and CcUeges) : it is worth whUe to 
observe by what method souls may be assisted in such places ; 
so that every possible portion may be occupied to the glory of 
God. 

2 And in the first place, the honourable example of every Christian 
virtue wiU conduce to the advantage of our neighbour ; so that 
they endeavour to edify those amongst whom they dweU, not 
less, nay, much more by their good deeds than by good words. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIBTT OF JBSUS. 69 

3 Our neighbour is assisted also by holy aspirations and prayers in 
the sight of God for the nniversal Church, and for those espe- 
cially, who, spread abroad for its general welfare, are of much 
value; for friends also, and benefactors, both Hving and departed 
this hfe, whether they desire our prayers or not ; for our enemies 
also, if any there be ; and for those in whose service, they and 
the rest of the Society in various places, amongst behevers and 
unbehevers, pecuharly employ themselves ; that God may 
vouchsafe to dispose all men to receive His Grace by the feeble 
means of this humble Society. 

4 They may assist also in the sacrifice of Masses, and other holy 
offices, without receiving ahns for them ; whether others desire 
to obtain them, or the individual ofiers them to God in his own 
devotion. And as to Masses, besides those which are said in 
behalf of Founders, let one, two, or more, (according to the 
nimiber of priests, and generally as may he convenient) be said 
every week for benefactors, Hving or dead, entreating Grod and 
our Lord that He wiU vouchsafe to accept this hoiy sacrifice for 
them, and that in His infinite and supreme bounty, the beneficence 
which they have shown towards this our Society in godly love 
and reverence may be retumed to them in everlasting rewards. 

5 Our neighbour is assisted also by the admihistration of the 
Sacraments, and especially by hearing confessions (to the dis- 
charge of which duty some must be appointed by the Superior) 
and in administering the sacrament of the holy Eucharist in the 
Church, except at the feast of Easter. 

6 Let the word of Grod be dihgently propounded to the people in 
Church, in Sermons, Lectures and Catechising by such as the 
Superior shall approve of and appoint to this duty, at such times 
and in such. a manner as shall seem expedient to him, to the 
greater glory of God and the edification of souls. 

7 This may be done also out of the Church of the Society; in 
other Churches, in the streets, or other placeSy when the Superior 
shall deem it conducive to the greater glory of God. 

8 They shall study also to stimulate their neighbour by pious 
discourse to amendment, by advice and exhortation to good 
works, and by appointing spiritual exercises. 

9 They shall devote themselves also to extemal works of piety, so 
fer as spiritual labours, which are of greater moment, shall 
allow, and their strength will admit of ; as in assisting the sick ; 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



70 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

visiting vthem, especially in Hospitals, and sending people to 
attend upon them; and in restoring contending parties to 
harmony; in relieving the poor and prisoners as far as they 
can, and urging others to reheve them. The prudence of the 
Superior shall determine how much attention shall be given to 
these occupations, ever keeping before his eyes the service of 
Grod, and the general good. 

10 In Colleges and their Churches as much as possible shall be done 
of those things which are appointed for the Houses ; and so far 
as in the Superior*s judgment, as aforesaid, shall be deemed 
expedient. 

1 1 Whoever is endowed with the talent of writing hooks conducive to 
the common good, and shall compose any such; nevertheless shall not 
puhlish them except the General shall previotisly see them, and suh- 
ject them to 'the judgment and censure of others ; that, if they 
shall seem good for edijication, they may come hefore the puhlic, 
and not otherunse, 

12 What relates to domestic duties and other special subjects shall 
be set forth in the rules for the Houses : nor will it be requisite 
to proceed any further with missions, or the distribution of the 
members of the Society through the vineyard of our Lord Jesus 
Christ. 



THE EIGHTH PART; 

of what relates to the mutual union of those who are dispersed, 
with their Superior, and among themselves. 



OF THOSB THINOS WHICH CONTRIBUTE TO THE UNION OF MINDS. 
CHAP. I. 

1 rpHE more difficult it is for the members of this Society to be 
-»- united with their Head, and with one another reciprocally, 
scattered as they are among behevers and unbelievers in the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OP JBSUS. 71 

various regions of the world, the more diligently should the 
means of maintaining that union be secured ; since the Society 
can neither be preserved, nor govemed, nor, consequently, can 
the object be attained at which it aims, to the greater glory of 
God ; imless its members be united among themselves, and with 
their Head. We will speak therefore of those things which 
relate to the usual personal union in Congregations or convents. 
Now towards this union of minds, some things on the part of 
inferiors, some on the part of Superiors, some originating in 
both wiU be conducive. 

2 With regard to inferiors, it will be well that no great nimiber of 
persons be admitted to Profession ; and not every one, but select 
men only should be retained among the Coadjutors or Scholars. 
For a great multitude of such as have not quite subdued their 
faults, as they cannot endure subordination, so neither can they 
secure union, which is so needful in Christ our Lord, for the 
preservation of the good estate and method of proceeding of 
the Society. 

3 And since a great union of this sort is secured chiefly by the 
bond of Ohedience; this must ever be maintained in all its vigour : 
And those who are sent forth from the Houses to labour in the 
Lord's harvest, should be well exercised therein, as far as possi- 
ble : and in this virtue, such as take the lead in the Society 
should outshine the rest in their good example ; and always in 
harmony with their Superior should persevere promptly, hiunbly 
and devotedly in their obedience to him. And if any one has 
failed in giving unquestionable proof of his obedience, an asso- 
ciate should always be united with him, who has been more 
conspicuous therein. For, for the most part, an associate who 
is more perfect in Obedience will by the divine favour therein 
assist him who is less so. And otherwise, although this object 
be not aimed at, a Colleague should be appointed to him who 
shall be sent in any charge of govemment, if it should appear to 
the Superior, that the duty thus committed to him will be better 
performed ; and the CoUeague shaU so behave towards him who 
is over the rest, and he in tum towards his CoUeague, that the 
Obedience and reverence of the inferiors for their Superior be 
not impaired : but rather that the one may find the other to 
have been given to be a true and faithful assistant and supporter, 
as weU to himself as to those committed to his care. 

F 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



72 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

4 Subordination duly maintained among tbe Superiors tbemselves, 
of wbom some are subject to otbers, and of inferiors towards 
tbem, pertains to tbis virtue of Obedience, so tbat all wbo reside 
in any House or CoUege sbould refer to tbeir local Superior, or 
Rector, and permit tbemselves to be ruled by bun in all tbings. 
But tbey wbo reside apart in any province in various places must 
refer to tbe Provincial or some local Superior nearer at band ; 
as tbey sball be commanded. But all local Superiors or Rectors 
sball bold frequent communication witb tbe Provincial, and con- 
duct tbemselves in all tbings according to bis pleasure. In tbe 
same way sball tbe Provincials bebave to tbe General. For 
tbus, subordination being observed, union wbicb entirely depends 
upon it, will by tbe Grace of God be maintained. 

5 If any one sball seem to be tbe autbor of division or dissension 
among tbose Wbo live togetber, or witb tbeir Head ; be sball be 
separated witb all diligence from tbat Congregation, as a plague 
wbicb will infect tbe wbole, if an immediate remedy be not ap- 
plied. 

6 On tbe part of tbe General, tbese are tbe qualities wbicb con- 
duce to tbis mental union, and witb wbicb, as is set fortb in tbe 
Nintb Part, be ougbt to be endowed: and provided witb tbese, be 
sball do bis duty to every member of tbe Society,tbe duty, namely, 
of Head, namely, from wbom tbe influence necessary to tbe office 
assigned to bim sball descend : and tbus, from tbe Greneral, as 
from the Head, all tbe power of tbe Provincials sball issue, and 
tbrougb tbem to local Superiors, and tbrougb tbem it sball reacb 
individual members : so also, from tbe same Head (or at least 
from bis deputation of autbority, and witb bis approval) sball 
tbe missions proceed. Let tbus mucb suffice on tbe communi- 
cation of tbe powers of the Society. For tbe more inferiors 
depend upon their Sup^ors, tbe better tbe love of Obedience 
and Union will be preserved between tbem. 

7 And to tbe end tbat position may be more conducive to tbe in- 
tercourse of the head with its members ; it will be most proper 
that tbe General should chiefly reside at Rome, wbere he can 
enjoy the readiest intercourse with all other places of tbe Society . 
Provincials also shall settle for tbe most part wbere convenient 
communication may be held witb tbe subordinates, and witb the 
General, so far as it can be arranged in tbe Lord. 

8 The chief bond of union respectively of the members with one 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIBTT OF JESU8. 73 

another and with their head is the Love of God and our Lord 
Jesus Christ, with whose divine and supreme goodness, if the 
Saperior and inferiors are dosely united, they will easily be 
united among themselves; and this will be effected by that 
same love which coming down from God extends to all our 
neighbours, and in an especial manner to the body of the So- 
ciety. Charity, therefore, and to smn up all, probity and every 
virtue, by which we may walk according to the Spirit of God, 
will assist each party to union, and subdue every idea of 
temporal property, in which self-love, the fiercest foe of union 
and the general good, habitually offends. Unanimity also in 
more intemal concems will contribute much to this ; as leaming, 
opinions, aspirations, as far as possiUe : in extemals also ; as 
habits, the ceremonies of the Mass, and other things, so far as 
the difference of persons, places, &c. shall permit. 
A frequent intercourse of letters between inferiors and Superiors, 
and immediate intelligence of one another ; and the knowledge 
of all that is communicated from various places for edification, 
and of all that happens, will greatly assist also ; the management 
of all which shall be in the Superiors, and especially in the 
Genend, and the Provincials ; such arrangements being made, 
that in every place whatever tends to mutual consolation and 
edification in the Lord may be known from the others. 



IN WHAT CASES A GENERAL CONGREGATION SHOULD BE HELD. 

CHAP. n. 

1 To come to the personal union which takes place in the Congre- 
gations of the Society ; we must consider as well in what cases, 
as what persons ought to be called together, and by whose au- 
thority ; where, when, and how this should take place, and what 
business should be transacted in the Congregations. And in 
the first place, that it may be set forth in what cases a general 
Congregation and Assembly shall be held ; this is especially laid 
down: that it seems by no means expedient in the Lord at 
present, that they occur at certain seasons or frequently. For 
the General, aided by the intercoinrse which he maintains with 
the whole Society, and the assistance of those who hve with him, 
shall prevent, as far as possible, so much labour and intermption 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



74 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

to the whole Society. To be called together will nevertheless be 
sometimes unavoidable ; as to conduct the election of a General, 
whether he shall be chosen instead of one deceased, or be sub- 
stituted for another, who must resign his office for some one of 
those reasons, hereafter to be enumerated. 
2 Another cause is, when they shall have to dehberate on subjects 
of lasting and exceeding interest, such as for example, to dis- 
solve Colleges or Houses, or to remove them elsewhere, or other 
matters conceming the whole Society of great difficulty, or to 
explain and settle that method of procedure which shall seem 
most expedient to the fulfilment of the will of God. 



WHO SHOULD BB ASSEMBLBD. 

CHAP. m. 

1 NoT all who live under Obedience to the Society, nor approved 
Scholars, but the Professed alone, with certain Coadjutors, if it 
should seem expedient in the Lord, are to be summoned to a 
general Congregation ; and of these only such as can come 
conveniently. Neither therefore shall the sick and feeble, nor 
they who Hve in very distant countries, such as India, assemble ; 
nor they who are occupied in affkirs of moment, which may not 
be left without great inconvenience. 

But this will depend on the judgment of the General, if he 
calls the meeting, or of those who shall be congregated in the 
separate Provinces, to choose the delegates to the general assem- 
bly. But that some certain method for caUing the meeting 
together may be appointed ; When an assembly shall be held to 
elect a General, or to dehberate on matters which concem the 
General ; three shall come from every Province ; the Provincial, 
namely, with two others elected for this purpose in their provin- 
cial Congregation : which Congregation shall be summoned to 
that end in the separate provinces previous to the general as- 
sembly. All the Professed in every Province who can attend, 
the Principals of Houses and Colleges, Rectors and Proctors, or 
those whom they shaU send in their name as their representa- 
tives, shall meet and exercise the right of voting. When the 
assembly shall be summoned for other afiairs, the Provincial 
without a Congregation of the Province may select two, at the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 75 

discretion of the Greneral, who under occurring circumstances 
shall determine whether a provincial meeting shall be held for 
the election of these two, or whether the Provincial without a 
meeting shall choose them, as he shall deem expedient in the 
Lord. To these three the whole Province shall entrust it? in- 
terest, and whatever shall be settled by the general assefmbly 
in which they attend, shall be estabhshed. If besides these two 
delegates» the General shall appoint certain others, or the Pro- 
vincial resolve to bring them, their right shall be the same as 
the rest. But if beyond the three, the Provincial should select 
more ; he shall not add more than two, so that, in all, five may 
come from one Province. 

Of the Professed who shall attend in the Assembly, each shall 
have a single vote, the General alone shall have two. But if 
the mmibers are equal, the Provincials shall be preferred to the 
rest ; and if among the Provinciak there is an equality, that 
part to which the General, or, in case of his death, his Vicar 
shall inchne, shall have the preference. For as the help of the 
divine Grace is more necessary to them by reason of the office 
they bear, it is to be hoped that God and our Lord will more 
largely bestow it on them, that so they may think and speak 
whatever tends to His glory. 



TO WHOM IT BELONGS TO CALL A GENERAL CONGREGATION. 
CHAP. IV. 

Whbn the Society is to be assembled to elect a new Greneral, 
on the death of the former, one of the Professed, whom the 
General has nominated before his death to be his Vicar in this 
respect shall take care to inform the rest of that event. This 
Vicar shall be for the most part one of those assistants usually 
about the General, or at least, one of those who hve near him. 
His duty will be to summon the Society to the election of the 
Gr^eral, the time and place being named for their attendance. 
When the Society is not summoned to an election, in other 
cases the General shall convoke it, except in those to be set 
forth in the Ninth Part ; and as before said, he shall not call the 
Society together frequently, except the necessity of its affairs 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



76 THB CONBTITUTIONS OF 

compel him. And when a general Congregation, summoned to 
the election of a General, has made its choice ; it may then 
proceed to treat of other more important affiBurs than ought to 
he decided hy the General and those who act with him. 



OF THB PLACB, TIME, AND MANNER OF ASSEMBLING. 
CHAP. V. 

1 Thb place where the Society shall meet for the election of a 
General should commonly be the Comt of the Pope, where for 
the most part shall be the residence of the General ; except the 
Society shall deliberately determine that it should assemble in 
some other place, more convenient for all ; as if a place should 
be appointed.in the confines of various Provinces where the 
Society dwells, or any other, which shall appear more proper. 
If it is the General who summons the Society for other busi- 
ness : he shall select and appoint the place which he shall think 
best in the Lord. 

2 The time which shall be allowed to assemble the Society for the 
election of a Greneral shall be five or six months from the date 
of the letters written to give notice of it. And this period may 
be extended in case of necessity. But when it shall be sum- 
moned for other aflairs, the General shall appoint the time at 
his own pleasure. 

3 This method shall be observed in convoking the Society : the 
person whose duty it is shall immediately inform the Provinciak 
in various ways, and such of the Professed as are specially 
summoned, assigning the cause, as f ar as shall seem sufficient to 
him, the place and time of the meeting, and recommending also 
that masses be celebrated and prayers ofiered everywhere, for 
the favourable election of the General. Every Provincial (not 
having the power of the selection in himself ) shall convene the 
Professed residing within his Province, the Rectors also and 
local Superiors who can assemble without great inconvenience. 
When they are collected in provindal congregation, they shall 
elect such as are to be sent to the general meeting by a majority 
of votes, the Provincial having two. These ought to be such 
as it shall be most expedient to send to the Congregation, and 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OF JB8US. 77 

whpse absence will be least injurious to the Province : and they 
shall set forth to the appointed place, leaving deputies in their 
provinces, and all things duly arranged. 

The Superiors shall moreover see that all who Hve under Obe- 
dience to the Society shall daily recommend those who are gone 
to the general Congregation most devoutly to Grod in their 
prayers and the sacrifice of the mass ; and implore that what- 
ever is transacted therein may tum out to the greater service 
and praise and glory of God'8 name. 



OP THB MANNBR OF DBLIBERATION, WHBN A OBNBRAL 18 
TO BB BLECTBD. 

CHAP. VI. 

1 If the meeting is appointed for the election of a new General 
to take the place of one deceased ; as soon as all are assembled, 
the Vicar General shall address them on the subject, four 
days before tlie election of the future General, and exhort them 
to conduct it as becomes the greater service of God, and the 
good govemment of the Society : and besideB this day, they 
shall have the three foUowing, to commend themselves to God, 
and more maturely to consider, who of all the Society is best 
qualified for this trust ; and they shall take care to be informed 
in this period of everything relating to the business, by those 
who can properly instruct them : but they shall not until they 
enter the place of election, and are confined within it, determine 
in their own minds, whom they will elect. 

2 Throughout this intervening time every one shall be bound on 
pain of the sentence of excommunication being passed upon 
him, to communicate to the Vicar General, or to some one of 
the elders among the Professed, who shall communicate with 
the Vicar General, if he knows that any member has aspired to 
this office, or is even then aspiring, procuring it directly or 
indirectly, or manifesting it by any sign. And he who shall be 
convicted of such ambition, shall be deprived of his sufirage, 
active and passive, as one not competent to elect another, nor to 
be himself elected ; for which reason he shall not be admitted 
to that nor any future meeting. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



78 THB CONSTITUTIONS OP 

3 On the day of election, foUowing these three days, some one 
shall celebrate the Mass of the Holy Ghost, which all shall 
attend, and partake of the most blessed body of Christ in the 
same. 

4 Afterwards, at the soimd of a bell, those who have the right of 
voting shall be simimoned to the place of Congregation ; and 
one of them shall preach a sermon, wherein, generally, but 
without giving any hint by which any particular person shall be 
understood, he shall exhort them to elect such a General as 
shall conduce to the greater service of God ; and when they 
have recited together the hjrmn, Veni Creator Spiritus ; they 
shall be shut up in the aforesaid place of Congregation by some 
one of the Superiors, or Rectors, or other member of the So- 
ciety, to whom this duty in the house of Congregation shall 
have been assigned, so that they can neither go out, nor can 
anything be given them for food, except bread and water, until 
they have elected a General. 

5 And if hy general inspiration, without awaiting the process of 
voting, all should elect the same, he shall he the General. For the 
Holy Ghost Who impels to such an election, easily supplies the want 
of every order and form of electing. 

6 When the election shall not be conducted in this way, the 
foUowing form shaU be observed. In the first place, every one 
shaU privately pray to God, and without uttering a single word, 
in the sight of his Creator and Lord he shaU determine within 
himself whom he wiU elect, according to the information he has 
previously obtained ; and he shaU write on a paper the person*s 
name whom he elects to be General, and shaU subscribe his 
own ; and for this, the space of one hour shaU be aUowed in aU: 
then shaU aU take their seats : and the Vicar General, with a 
Secretary chosen for the purpose from the Professed, and a third 
person also to assist them, rising from his seat, shaU protest 
that he wiU neither admit nor exclude whom he ought not. He 
shaU also give them aU a general absolution from aU censures in 
the matter of this canonical election : Afterwards, the grace of 
the Holy Spirit being invoked, he shaU approach the table 
standing in the midst ; and the fore-mentioned three shall de- 
mand of each other their votes, each swearing before he gives 
it, that he names the man whom he beUeves in the Lord to be 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OF JESUS. 79 

best qualified for the office ; and the votes shall be gathered 
into the hands of the Secretary ; then froca every one of those 
present in Congregation, apart, but in the presence of the rest 
they shall demand his suffrage contained in writing, which he 
shall give them with the previous oath. Then in the midst of 
all, the Secretary shall divulge the votes, giving the name only 
of the person elected ; and then, each number of votes being 
compared with the rest, he shall be the General who has more 
than one half of the votes : after which, he who first nominated 
him, or the Vicar Greneral shall ask the rest whether they assent 
to him whom the majority has chosen; and, as they may 
answer, he shall pronounce the Decree of the election, saying ; 
In the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy 
Ghost; I. N. in my own name, and of all so minded elect N. 
to be General of the Society of Jesus. Which being done, all 
shall come forthwith to do him reverence, and on hoth their knees 
shall kiss his hand, And he who shall be elected should refuse 
neither the election nor the reverence paid, remembering in 
whose name he receives it. In fine they shall all rehearse to- 
gether the Te Deum. 

7 If there be no one who has more than a half-part of the votes ; 
another method, that of compromise, shall be resorted to, three 
or five out of all the electors being chosen (those namely who 
have most votes for this duty) and he shall be General to which 
the greater part of these three or five shall incUne, and he shall 
be proclaimed ; and reverence shall be paid to him, and thanks 
retumed to God, as before said. 

8 After the declaration, it shall be permitted to none to change 
his vote, nor when an election is completed, to attempt a new 
one ; and let him observe what is said who would not be looked 
upon as the author of dissension and of the ruin of the Society, 
and who would not incur the penalty of the sentence of excom- 
munication pronounced against him, and other weighty censures 
at the pleasure of the Society, whose union and perfect concord 
conduces to the glory of God. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



80 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 



OF THB MANNER OF DBLIBBRATION, WHEN THE OBNBRAL CON- 

GRBGATION IS OCCUPIED, NOT IN THE BLECTION OF A 

GBNERAL, BUT IN OTHER THINGS. 

CHAP. VII. 

1 Whbn the Congregation is occupied, not in the election of a 
General, hut in other important concems, pertaining to the 
state of the Society ; the confinement wiU not be necessary : 
although care should be taken that the afiairs to be treated of 
be settled as soon as possible : but as that light by which it 
shall be determined what ought to be decreed must needs de- 
scend from the supreme Wisdom ; let the sacrifices of Masses 
be first offered ; and let a sermon be preached in the place of 
Congregation, and other places of the Society throughout the 
period in which they are assembled, and whilst those matters 
are debated which shall be determined by that meeting, to 
obtain grace that all may be settled to the greater glory of God. 

2 Then when all have been assembled once or oftener, the Genend, 
the Provincials, the Rectors and the others summoned to the 
Congregation shall briefly set forth in the presence of all whatever 
shall appear to require attentipn, and the reasons of their own 
opinions, after having duly considered and commended them to 
Grod and our Lord ; and when they have each given his opinion, 
let them leave its substance in writing openly, so that those 
who please may read it, and pronounce their opinion thereon in 
the foUowing assembly. 

3 The business being discussed on aU sides in one or more Con- 
gregations, if nothing should be clearly settled either way ; by 
the common consemt of aU, or ahnost aU, let four of those pre- 
sent in the assembly, and entitled to vote therein be elected, 
(whom the rest shaU engage to support) and they shaU settle 

. it by the opinions of the greater number, and assembled with 
the General as often as needful they shaU decide everything 
which is agitated before them. And if all be not of the same 
opinion, that shaU be carried to which the majority shaU indine, 
and shaU be received by the whole Congregation as from the 
hand of the Lord. 

4 If the General have not strength of constitution to enable him 
to take part in aU these aflairs, he may appoint another in his 
place ; and thus, everything being separately arranged, as seems 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB 80CIBTY OF JBSUS. 81 

best to tbe majority, what is determined shall be written down, 
and read in fiill assembly ; and even then, any member shall be 
allowed to give his opinion on the subject if he will, although it 
shall be left to the decision of the General and his Committee 
(of four). 

Subjects thus discussed and reconsidered, and in the manner 
aforesaid once more determined, shall be recorded by the Secre- 
tary in a book kept for the purpose to be afterwards promul- 
gated. * 



THE NINTH PART; 

of those things which relate to the Head of the Sodety, and to the 
authority emanating from him. 



THAT THB GBNBRAL SHOULD BB APPOINTBD FOR LIFE. 
CHAP. I. 

1 4 S in all well-constituted Commonwealths, or Societies, be- 
-lI. sides those who labour therein for certain objects, it is 
requisite that there be some one, or even more to undertake the 
care of the general interest, and to look after it as their peculiar 
duty : so also in this Society, besides those who preside over 
the several Houses, Colleges, and Pr^vinces wherein such 
Houses and Colleges exist, it is needfcd that there be some one to 
undertake the care of the whole Society; who shall make it 
his business that the entire body of the Society be properly 
govemed, preserved, and enlarged; and this is the General, 
who, seeing he may be elected in two ways, namely, to preside 
over the Society for a definite time, or as long as he Hves : 
because experience and practice in govemment, and the know- 
ledge of individual men, and authority over them greatly assist 
in the due discharge of this duty ; he shall be chosen for life, 
and not for any appointed time. To other advantages this also 
shall thence accrue, that the Society, almost always abundantly 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



82 THK CONSTITUTIONS OF 

occupied in conceras of great moment to the glory of Gk)d, will 
suffer less labour and interruption from these general meetings. 



WHAT SORT OF MAN THE 6ENERAL SHOULD BE. 
CHAP. II. 

1 Amonost the various endowments with which it is desirable the 
General should be gifted, this is the most important : that he 
be most intimate and familiar with God and our Lord, as well in 
prayer as in all his actions ; so that, thereby, he may more 
abundantly obtain from Him, as the fountain of all good a plen- 
tiful participation of His gifts and graces for the whole body of 
the Society, and much profit and efficacy in all the means which 
it shall employ for the assistance of souls. 

2 The second is, that he be a man, whose example in every kind 
of virtue may assist the other members of the Society; aiid 
chiefly let the splendour of his charity be conspicuous towards 
all his neighbours, but especially towards the Society ; and let 
his true humihty render him dear to God and men. 

3 He should be free too from all inordinate affections, subdued 
and mortified by the grace of God; so that, internally, they 
shall not disturb the decisions of reason, and extemally that he 
shaU be so composed and circumspect especially in speaking, 
that nothing, not even a single word may be observed in him, 
not tending to the edification of the members of the Society, to 
whom, as well a? to strangers, he should serve for a mirror and 
model. 

4 Nor should he the less have leamed to interchange necessary se- 
verity and firmness with mildness and mercy, so as not to aUow 
himself to be tumed from what he has determined to be most 
acceptable to God and our Lord; but yet still that he should know 
how to sjrmpathize with his children as he ought, behaving him- 
self so that even those who are censured or corrected, however 
it may mortify their inferior nature, may nevertheless acknow- 
ledge that he is doing his duty justly and lovingly in the Lord. 

5 Strength of mind and firmness also are very necessary for him 
to bear the weakness of so many, to undertake important enter- 
prises in the service of God, and steadfastly to persevere in 
them when needful ; neither by reason of contradictions (raised 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THK SOCIBTY OP JESUS. 83 

by the great and powerfiil) losing confidence, nor sufiering liim- 
self to be driven by any threats or entreaties from that which 
reason and the service of God demand ; so as to be superior, in 
short, to all the chances which may betide ; and not to allow 
himself to be elevated by prosperity, nor dejected by adversity ; 
prepared, whenever it may be needful, to submit to death for 
the interests of the Society in the service of Jesus Christ our 
God and Lord. 

6 The third is, that he excel in the bright endowment of intellect 
and judgment, so that in occurrences involving either specula- 
tion or practice he may not want that talent. And although 
leaming is highly necessary for him who is to govem so many 
leamed men ; prudence is still more necessary, and in spiritual and 
intemal matters, skill to discriminate various tempers, and to give 
advice and relief to numbers labouring under spiritual necessi- 
ties. The gift of discretion in extemal matters, and in the 
method of conducting such various concems, and managing 
such diflFerent classes of men within the Society and without 
will be absolutely necessary. 

7 The fourth is vigilance, essential to the transaction of business, 
eamestness to commence and strenuousness to bring it to con- 
clusion and perfection ; that nothing once commenced be left 
incomplete through carelessness and negligence. 

8 The fifth concems the person of the General ; in which in all that 
relates to health, extemal appearance and age, regard must be 
paid on the one hand to dignity and authority, on the other 
to that strength of constitution which his station demands, to 
enable him to discharge his duty therein to the glory of God 
and our Lord. 

9 The sixth relates to extemal matters, amongst which, those 
most conducive to edification and the service of God in that 
office ought to be preferred. Such are, if a man be of great 
character, and celebrated name, and in short, every quality 
contributing to maintain authority over those who are, and those 
who are not, of the Society. 

10 Finally the General should be of the number of those who are 
most illustrious in all the grace of virtue, who have best de- 
served of the Society, and have long been recognized as such 
within it. And if any of the gifts aforesaid are wanting ; at 
least let there be exemplary probity, and afiection for the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



84 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

Society ; and a sound judgment, accompanied by uaefal leanung. 
For in the rest, much may be suppUed through the divine help 
and favour by those appointed to assist him, and of whom men- 
tion shall be made hereafter. 



OF THB POWBR OF THB OENBRAL OVER THB SOCIBTY, AND OF HIS 

DUTY. 

CHAP. III. 

1 That the Society may be well governed, we have judged it 
especially expedient that the General should have all power over 
the Society for edification ; which power, showing also the duty 
of the Greneral, shall be this ; first : the General, by himself or 
others, shall admit into Houses or CoUeges, or elsewhere, those 
who shall to him seem adapted to the Institute of the Society ; 
whether he shall determine to admit them to probation, or to 
profession, or to be Coadjutors, or approved Scholars. He can 
dismiss them also, and remove them from the Society. 

2 He shall send such as he shall so determine to the study of 
literature, wherever he pleases. He may recall them before and 
after the completion of their studies, and transfer them from one 
place to another, as he shall think most expedient in the Lord 
to their own or the general benefit. 

3 He shall have the whole superintendence and govemment of 
the CoUeges; whatever pertains to Students, Preceptors and 
Officials, amongst whom Rectors stand first, whom he shall 
appoint and remove, and invest with that authority which he 
shaU think necessary in the Lord ; and by the Rectors he shaU 
conduct the govemment of the CoUeges in whatever relates to 
the edifices, and temporal property provided for the use of the 
Students, as is set forth in the ApostoUcal Letters. 

4 He shaU see also that they render him an account of their duty 
in such wise as he shaU deem most expedient. And what is 
said of the CoUeges, may be understood of the Universities of 
the Society committed to his care. For it shaU be the General's 
duty to regulate those matters pertaining to the instruction of 
Ufe and doctrine, which he wiU discharge by officers appointed 
by himself according to the Constitutions. 

5 Also the General shaU have aU power to make contracts of pur- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIBTY OF JESUS. 85 

chase and sale of all temporal goods whatsoever as well of the 
Houses as the Colleges of the Society, and of raising and re- 
deeming any revenues on the freeholds of the Colleges for their 
use and benefit, on condition that it may be lawful to acquit 
himself of the obligation on restoring the money which shall 
have been received. But the General shall not alienate nor 
altogether dissolve the Colleges or Houses of the Society once 
raised, without a general assembly. 

6 Of such things as are left to the Society to dispose of at its 
pleasure, whether they be real property, as a house or estate 
not specifically appHed or annexed to any particular CoUege by 
the donor ; or whether they be goods, as money, corn, or other 
moveables, the General may dispose of them by seUing, or re- 
taining, or applying to this or that place, whatever he shall think 
expedient to the greater glory of God. 

7 The Provincials, or local Superiors, Rectors and Commissioners 
shall have so much of this power, as the General shaU impart 
to them. But the officers of CoUeges shaU not be corporately 
assembled for acts of this nature. 

8 As it belongs to the General to see that the Constitutions of 
the Society be every where observed ; so shaU it belong to him 
to grant dispensation in all cases where dispensation is necessary ; 
which duty he wiU execute with that prudence which the Light 
etemal shaU communicate, keeping in view the object of these 
Constitutions, which is no other than the greater service of 
God, and the good of those who foUow this manner of Ufe. 
And this is said as much of the trials of those who are under 
probation, as of other things in which it shall be judged that 
such was the intention of the framers of the Constitutions to 
the glory of God and our Lord. 

9 The General shaU have aU power in missions, in nowise however 
opposing those which originate from the ApostoHc See, as is set 
forth in the Seventh Part. He may send aU that are subject to 
hun, whether Professed or not, (whom he may resolve to send) 
to any parts of the world, for any period, definite or indefinite, 
as he shaU determine, to do any action of those which the 
Society is wont to exercise for the succour of souls. He may 
recaU missionaries, and in short, proceed in all things, as he shaU 
think wUl be to the greater glory of God. 

He shaU arrange the duties of Preachers, Lecturers and Con- 

o 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



86 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

fessors, being acquainted with the talents bestowed upon the 
members of our Society ; and the same shall be understood of 
other offices : and he shall place each man in that station which 
he shall consider he will most advantageously fiU to God's ser- 
vice, and the salvation of souls. 

10 He shall avail himself of the powers conferred upon the Society 
by the ApostoHc See, and communicate so much of them to 
each inferior member as he shall judge to be usefully imparted 
to him to the end set before us, the service of Grod. He shall 
recall, or contract such delegated powers, reducing every thing 
to the same rule of the divine pleasure. 

1 1 It shall be the General's duty to employ corrections and enjoin 
penances, adequate to the satisfaction of all defects, regard being 
had to persons and other circumstances : the consideration of 
which is committed to his charity tempered with prudence which 
he shall use to the glory of God. 

12 He shall convoke the Society in a general assembly (whenever 
other subjects than the election of a General are in agitation,) 
and shall order provincial congregations to be holden whenever 
he thinks fit, and those to preside who are best qualified, and in 
due time to dismiss them on the completion of the business to 
be discussed. 

13 Without his license and approbation no one can accept any 
dignity out of the Society ; nor shall he grant such permission, 
nor approve of it, except obedience to the Apostohc See compel 
him. 

14 He shall appoint at his pleasure Rectors of Colleges and Uni- 
versities, and local Superiors of Houses, whom he shall think 
best qualified, and Provincials also generally for three years ; 
(Tind even that period may he shortened and extended, when it shall 
seem to he to the greater glory of God and our LordJ to whom he 
shall communicate so much power as he shall deem expedient. 

1 5 He shall revoke, restrain or even enlarge the power of adminis- 
tration, of appointing local Superiors and Rectors which he has 
communicated ; and he shall confirm or remove them. 

1 6 He shall appoint the other officials necessary for govemment ; 
as the Proctor general, and the Secretary of the Society, com- 
municating to them so much power with regard to aflfairs and 
persons as he shall think proper in the Lord. 

1 7 He may accept of Houses, Colleges, and Universities offered to 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB 80CIKTY OP JESUS. 87 

the Society, no general assembly being in contemplation, and 
admit those whom he deems admissible amongst the Fomiders, 
with the privileges stated in the Fourth Part, and provide Lec- 
turers and Priests, and for other things as they occur. But he 
must take care to admit them on such conditions that the Society 
may derive advantage and not detriment to the end proposed to 
it, the service of God. But if it is foimd by experience that 
the Society is rather burdened than assisted, and that the 
General can provide no remedy ; in the first general assembly of 
the Society it shall be determined whether it is expedient that any 
House, College or University of this sort be given up, or retained 
with such a burden. 

18 The General as is said in the Fourth Part can neither tronsfer 
nor dissolve Houses or CoUeges once erected, nor convert their 
revenues to the use of the Professed Society. 

1 9 He shall scrutinize, as far as possible, the consciences of those who 
are under his obediencCy and especially of Provincials, and of 
others to whom he entrusts duties of great importance. 

20 Generally speaking, in all things which pertain to the end pro- 
posed by the Society, the perfection and succour of our neigh- 
bour to the glory of God, he shall order all in the virtue of 
Obedience ; and although he may impart his authority to inferior 
Chiefs, or Visitors, or Commissioners, he may neverthdess sanc- 
tion or annul what they have done, and determine as he sees 
good in every thing : and obedience and reverence should always 
be paid him, as one who holds the place of Christ, 



OP THB POWER OR SUPKRINTENDBNCB OP THB SOCIBTY 
OVBR THE GBNBRAL. 

CHAP. IV. 

1 Thb power or superintendence of the Society over the General 
consists of six things which may assist to the glory of God, 
regard being ever paid to the general good and the greatest 
edification. 

2 The first concems things.extemal, as the dress, food, and ex- 
penses of all kinds for the General's person ; all which the 
Society may increase or diminish ; as it shall consider becoming 

G 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



88 THE CONSTITUTIONS OF 

the General and itself, and pleasing to God. And the General 
ought to acquiesce in the Society*s decision. 

3 The second relates to the care of the body, that he exceed not 
prudence in laboriousness or extreme severity. In which also 
the Superior shall allow himself to be brought back to modera- 
tion, and shall acquiesce in the Society*s judgment. 

4 The third relates to his soul ; since even to perfect men a care of 
this kind is at times necessary either as to person or duty. The 
Society shall have therefore near the General (and with inferiors 
also this may be done) some one, who applying to God in 
prayer, and having consulted the divine Goodness, and deter- 
mined that it is right, should with due modesty and humiHty 
inform the General what he beUeves is required of him to the 
greater service and glory of God ; whether he be his Confessor, 
or some other appointed by the Society best qualified for this 
duty. 

5 The fourth is that if any one urge him to accept a dignity (not 
compeUing him under pain of sin) by which the duty of General 
must necessarily be resigned, he cannot accept it without the 
consent of the Society. And the Society, ever regarding the 
greater service and glory of God shall not yield its assent, ex- 
cept obedience to the Apostolic See compel it. 

6 The fifth occurs, if it should happen that he become exceedingly 
neghgent or remiss in things of great moment pertaining to the 
duty of the General through bodily sickness, or old age, without 
hope of amendment, whence the pubhc interest would sustain 
much detriment. A Coadjutor or Deputy must then be selected, 
to discharge the Greneral's duty, whether the Greneral appoint 
him in his own place with the approbation of the Provincials ; 
or they appoint him with the concmTence of two local Superiors, 
or of the Provincial Rectors ; or they, with the approbation of 
two local Superiors, or the Rectors of all the Provinces elect 
him by a majority of votes by letters to the govemment of the 
Society, with so much power as the General shall think should 
be allowed, or the Society, if it made the election. 

7 The sixth would take place in certain cases which we hope by 
the goodness of God and the communication of His grace will 
never happen, such as mortal sins proceeding to extemal acts, 
namely, copula carmlis ; wounding any one ; applying to his 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 89 

own use any of the revenues of the Colleges, or giving them to 
any one not of the Society ; or alienating any real property of 
Houses or Colleges ; or holding depraved doctrine. If any of 
these things should happen, the Society may and ought to 
deprive him of his office, (if the evidence is sufficiently con- 
clusive); and if need be, remove him from the Society, in all 
things keeping before their eyes whatever shall be judged to be 
to the greater glory of God, and the general good of the 
Society. 



OF THE MANNER IN WHICH THB SOCIETY SHOULD PROCEED IN 
THINGS PERTAINING TO THE GENERAL. 

CHAP. V. 

1 FiRST, the Provincials whom the General himself has appointed, 
are bound to consider in the sight of God and do what they 
ought for the general interests of the Society, in things afore- 
said pertaining to the General, as they shall judge in the Lord. 

2 In the next place, whatever relates to the charges and care of 
the General's person, and other less important matters, needs no 
general assembly ; but it is necessary that the Society should 
appoint four men of great discretion and zeal for the general 
good of the Society to be his Assistants. These shall reside 
with the General, and shall be bound in the sight of their 
Creator and Lord to say and do whatever they shall judge con- 
ducive to the greater glory of God touching the three things 
first-mentioned in the preceding chapter. 

3 The election of these four Assistants shall belong to those who 
elect the General, when assembled for that purpose. But if 
one should die, or it should become necessary for him for im- 
portant reasons to be away from the General during a consider- 
able time, the General shall substitute some one else, provided 
the Provincials of the Society do not object, and he shall remain 
in the place of the dead or absent Assistant, with the concur- 
rence of all, or of the majority. 

4 In the third place, if any of those sins occur (may God forbid) 
which suffice to deprive the General of his office ; as soon as 
the charge is proved, by adequate evidence, or his own confes- 
sion ; let the four Assistants be bound by oath to denounce it to 
the Society, and under the signatures of all, or three at least, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



90 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

convoke a Congregation ; namely, the Provincials with two 
others whom each shall bring with him from his Province, who 
shall be bound to assemble. And if the matter is divulged, and 
generally known, without waiting for the summons of the four 
Assistants, the Provincials ought to assemble summoning one 
another : and the very first day in which they shall enter the 
place of assembly, where the four who convoked them shall be 
present, with the others assembled, he to whom eveiything is 
best known shall open the business, and the accusation shall be 
distinctly unfolded; which being heard, the General shall re- 
tire ; and the eldest of the Provincials with the Secretary and 
another assistant shall make inquiry into the whole matter ; and 
first, whether the imputed offence is proved ; and in the next 
place, whether it be such that he should be deprived of his 
office ; and the same Provincial shall declare the votes, which to 
be sufficient should exceed two-thirds ; thereupon, the General 
being deposed, the election of another shall be commenced, and 
if it can be done, they shall not leave the place until the Society 
has a General ; and if the choice cannot be made on that day, 
it shall be determined on the next, or as soon as possible. 

5 If the fault be not sufficient to justify a deprivation of his office, 
but deserving of correction only ; let four be elected, on whom 
the duty shall be enjoined to consider what correction is most 
expedient : and if all are not agreed, and the votes are even, let 
a fifth be associated, or three others, to determine what is ex- 
pedient in the Lord. 

6 If it should happen that the General become disqualified for the 
govemment of the Society, the question being debated partly in 
his presence, and partly in his absence, let it be considered 
whether there is need of electing a Vicar with absolute power, 
although without the name of General (so long as he lives, who 
was so) : and it shall be so arranged, if it seems good to more 
than one half of the voters. If they shall not deem it neces- 
sary, they shall consider whether besides those four whose 
assistance the General enjoyed, the Society should provide 
others, so that he being better aided and assisted thereby, 
nothing essential to the govemment of the Society may be 
wanting. And in this matter such resolution shall be adopted 
as the majority, greater than one-half of those who are assem- 
ble.d, shall determine. If it be a question of dignity which is 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THK SOCIETY OP JKSUS. 91 

upon the whole incompatible with the office of General, unless 
such obedience to the Pope, as is compulsive under the penalty 
of sin, obhge him, the matter shall not be brought into consul- 
tation : but this is to be altogether held as certain, that no 
consent may or ought to be yielded for the accepting of such 
dignity. 



OP THOSE THINGS WHICH ASSIST THE GKNERAL TO DISCHARGE 
HIS DUTY PROPERLY. 

CHAP. VI. 

1 SiNCE the pecuhar duty of the General is not to preach, nor 
hear confessions, nor the like, (in which notwithstanding in a 
private capacity he will consider what he can do, when he shall 
be allowed by the other more especial avocations of his duty, 
and not otherwise) but so to govem the whole body of the 
Society, that it may be maintained and increased to the glory 
of God and our Lord by the assistance of the divine Grace in 
its good estate and manner of proceeding, to attain which pro- 
posed end he should employ all his energies. 

2 Besides those gifts of great spiritual perfection and virtues 
mentioned in the second chapter, he will require eflfective officers 
to fiilfil their several duties. For although he may sometimes 
attend to them himself, he must have subordinate Directors 
(who should be select men) on whom he may confer much 
power, and almost always commit particular matters of this 
nature. His correspondence shall be very frequent with the 
inferior officers and Provincials : and theirs with the Rectors 
and local Superiors, that subordination may be more perfectly 
maintained. Sometimes however the General shall communi- 
cate with the Rectors and local Superiors and even with 
private persons in order to acquire fiiller information on all 
subjects, or for other reasons which may frequently occur ; and 
he shall endeavour to assist them with advice, censure and cor- 
rection if it be needful ; because it is his duty to supply the 
defects of subordinate Superiors, and to bring to perfection by 
the divine favour and assistance, whatever is not perfect in 
them. 

3 It wiU conduce to all these if the General keep by him the 
Apostolic Letters ; and all grants relating to the institution. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



92 THB CONSTITUTIONS OF 

powers or privileges of the Society, with an abstract of them, 
and a catalogue of all Houses and Colleges of the Society with 
their revenues, and another of all the persons who live in each 
Province, not only of the Professed and formed Coadjutors, and 
approved Scholars, but of those also who are under probation, 
wherein their names and qualities are recorded ; and he wiU see 
that this catalogue is renewed every year, if necessary. And in 
short he will keep all things in view as far as possible, that he 
may better provide in all for the divine glory. 

4 What is said universally in the Seventh Part concems the 
General more than all the rest, namely that the members of the 
Society should not engage themselves in secular aifairs, however 
pious ; nor should he allow himself to be occupied in them nor 
any rehgious employments even in not pertaining to the Society, 
lest his time and strength fail him for what concems his duty, 
which indeed requires more than all the man. 

5 Nor should he be deeply occupied in the performance of parti- 
cular duties pertaining to the Society, which can be performed 
by others; such as the peculiar care of any House, in what 
relates to its temporal support and govemment, but rather, as 
before said, have his officials in every place even where he 
resides himself : on whom if he cast not the whole responsi- 
bility, he may be at least reheved by them, and freed from 
attention to that duty, 

6 So too, in every Province he shall have Provincials of such ap- 
proved fidehty, and such usefiihiess, as one who understands that 
the good govemment of the Society depends very much upon 
them and the local Superiors. And when these are so, by 
dividing the labour with them where it may be done, and taking 
care to obtain inteUigence in all important cases, he will feel 
that he has greater leisure and time left him to attend to general 
afiairs which he alone can conduct. He will find that he will 
have more hght to perceive what is needful to be done, if his 
intellect have not lost some of its original powers ; as happens 
to those who are overburdened with minor particulars whereby 
the strength of the intellect is often oppressed and disqualified 
for the apprehension of general matters. 

7 Nor has the General need of officers for particular employments 
only, as is set forth, but for the universal concerns also, and 
those pecuhar to his own duty, that he may get through them 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OP JBSUS. 93 

well and pleasantly. It is needful therefore that he have some 
one to assist hhn, ia his anxiety to attend to so many points 
of duty, by recalling things to memory ; in the arrangement of 
business; by good advice; and lastly, in his exertions to ac- 
compUsh them, by dihgence and labour. For it is evident that 
the memory of no one man is sufficient for the recollection of 
so many things ; nor were that possible, could the intellect of 
any one be equal to their full consideration and arrangement ; 
nor were that also possible, could the powers of any one suffice 
for their performance. 

8 For the first point then, namely, the sohcitude of attending to 
every thing, there is need of some minister ordinarily to reside 
with him, and to strengthen both his memory and his hands in 
things to be written and transacted, and in short to take upon 
himself all parts of his duty ; to sustain the character of Grene- 
ral ; and except the authority, to feel that the whole burden of 
his duty is laid upon his shoulders. 

9 This minister of the Greneral should be a careful and discreet 
man, and if possible, endowed with the gift of leaming, of an 
agreeable aspect and manner in dealing with all kinds of men, 
personally and by correspondence ; a man especially to whom 
any thing may be confidently entrusted, and who loves the 
Society in the Lord, that the General may employ his aid and 
ministry more usefuUy to the glory of Grod. 

10 How necessary the second assistance to the Greneral is, namely, 
that of council in the ordering and constituting of important 
matters which occur, may be understood from their multitude, 
and from the feebleness of the human intellect, which cannot 
sustain its attention when distracted by so many concems, or at 
least is not equal to the ascertaining and providing what is 
needfrd in every respect. It seems therefore absolutely neces- 
sary, that certain men celebrated for learning and all other gifts 
of God, may reside with the Superior to assist him, and take 
upon them the care of considering with peculiar solicitude all 
the afiiEdrs of the Society committed to them by the General, 
which he may divide among them, thereby the more accurately 
to examine every thing ; as, one to inspect the concems of In- 
dia ; another of Spain and Portugal ; another of Germany and 
France ; and another of Italy and Sicily ; and so of the rest, 
when the Society is scattered over other parts. And every one 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



94 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

of them ought to recommend to God that part specifically en- 
trusted to him by private prayer, and remembrance in his sacri- 
fices ; and consider what will be most beneficial within it in 
securing that which the Society proposes to itself. 
He should confer with the rest, whenever it seems essential to 
do so ; and they may refer to the Greneral what they have so 
discussed. They shall attend to subjects proposed by the 
General or the Secretary of the Society : that when they are 
thoroughly discussed they may be referred to the Greneral. 
And in a word they should assist and relieve the Greneral by 
weighing and arranging things relating as well to leaming as to 
practice which require very great consideration. Besides this, 
and whatever else they can do in many things more usefully, 
they may find leisure for preaching, lecturing, hearing confes- 
sions, and othfer good and pious works'to the glory of God and 
the assistance of souls. 

1 1 The number of these Assistants at present shall be four ; and 
they may be the same as those mentioned before, page 89. 
And although highly important matters are to be handled by 
them, still the power of determining shall remain with the 

General after he has heard them. 

1 2 In the third kind of assistance, namely, diligence to accomphsh 
and fulfil whatever is resolved upon for the necessary interests 
of the Society ; such as to expedite all manner of business per- 
taining to the Houses or CoUeges, and also to protect their 
property ; and generally to transact all afiairs, the aid of one 
Proctor general will be very usefiil, and is indeed essential ; he 
shall reside in Rome, and shall be rich in prudence, fidelity and 
dexterity in dealing with mankind, and in all other good quali- 
ties ; but he shall not be Professed, nor hve in any of the 
Houses of the professed Society, but in some other (of which 
mention is made in the Fourth Part) and he shall be assisted by 
his agents and officers necessary for those matters which he can- 
not efiect alone. 

13 Provided with assistance of this extent the General shall occupy 
that time which his health and bodily strength permit, partly 
with God, partly in business with his officials and ministers, 
partly in solitary contemplation and in resolving what is to be 
done with the aid and favour of God and our Lord. 

14 Provincials also, and Rectors of Colleges or Superiors of Houses 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIETY OP JKSUS. 95 

should be supported by assistants, more or less numerous 
according to the importance and weight of the business confided 
to them, and above all, they shall have certain members ap- 
pointed of their council to whom they shall communicate the 
more important occurrences, although, after hearing their opin- 
ions, the power of determining shall remain with themselves. 



THE TENTH PART; 

of tJie manner in which the whole hody of the Society may he 
mantained and increased in its good estate. 



1 CJINCE the Society, which was not instituted hy human means, 
^can neither be maintained nor increased by them, but by the 
Grace of Almighty God and our Lord Jesus Christ ; in Him 
alone ought our hopes to be fixed, that He will preserve and 
promote this work which He has vouchsafed to commence to 
His own service and praise, and the succour of souls. 

And in this hope, the first and most congruous means will be 
those of prayers and sacrifices, which with this holy intention 
ought to be ofifered, and settled in a fixed succession, through 
the several weeks, months and years, in all those places where 
the Society resides. 

2 For the preservation and increase not only of the body of the 
Society, that is, of things extenial, but of the spirit also, and 
for fiilfilling the object which it proposes to itself, the succour 
of souls, those means of attaining its idtimate and supematural 
end are the more efficacious which unite the inst^ument with 
God, and dispose it to be well directed, by the divine hand, 
than those which connect it with mankind. Of this sort are 
probity and virtue, and above all charity, and a pure intention 
of serving God, and a famiharity with God in spiritual exercises 
of devotion, and a sincere zeal for souls, to the glory of Him 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



96 THE CONSTITUTIONS OP 

who created and redeemed them, all other gam being disre- 
garded. It seems therefore to be an object of universal care, that 
all who miite themselves to this Society give themselves to the 
study of the solid and perfect virtues, and of spiritual concems, 
and consider that more depends on these than on leaming or 
other human and natural gifts. For these are the more intemal 
means, from which efficacy should be derived in the more 
extemal towards the object proposed by us. 

3 This foundation being laid, the natural means which procure the 
instrumentality of God and our Lord in what regards our neigh- 
bours, wiU conduce entirely to the preservation and increase of 
its whole body : because they are acquired and employed sin- 
cerely in God's service only, and our dependance is not placed in 
them, but rather that by them we may co-operate with the 
divine Grace according to the order of His supreme providence, 
who decrees that the natural gifts which He bestows as the 
Creator, as well as the supematural which He vouchsafes as the 
Author of Grace should be referred to His own glory. And 
therefore human means or those acquired by dihgence are to be 
diligently cultivated, and especially exact and solid leaming, and 
the manner of setting it before the people, in sermons and lec- 
tures, and the mode of dealing with and managing mankind. 

4 It wiU be highly conducive to maintain the Colleges in their 
good estate and discipHne, and for this purpose to direct their 
superintendence by men to whom no temporal advantage can 
accme from them. Such are the professed Society which will 
labour in the Colleges to instract those in perfection of life, and 
leaming worthy of Christians, who shall appear to have a talent 
for it. And these shall be the nursery to the professed Society, 
and its Coadjutors : and if with the Colleges, Universities also 
are committed to the care of the Society, and the method of 
proceeding described in the Fourth Part is observed, it will con- 
tribute to the same end. 

5 And since Poverty is as the strongest rampart to ReUgious Orders, 
to maintain them in their due estate and discipUne, and defend 
them from numerous enemies (for which reason the DevU labours 
to destroy it in various ways) it greatly concems the security and 
extension of the whole body entirely to remove every appearance 
of avarice ; accepting no revenues, nor possessions, nor stipends 
for preaching the word of God, or lectures, or masses, or for 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB SOCIBTY OF JESUS. 97 

the administration of the Sacraments, or in short for any spiri- 
tual concems (as is declared in the Sixth Part), nor applying 
the incomes of the Colleges to their own use. 

6 It will be also of great importance for the perpetual preservation 
of the Society in its prosperous condition most dihgently to 
remove ambition, the mother of all evils in every commonwealth 
and society, and to preclude all approach to dignity, and the 
seeking of any preferment in the Society directly or indirectly. 
To effect this, let all the Professed vow to God and our Lord 
that they will never do anything to obtain it, and that they will 
inform against any whom they discover so doing; and they 
shall be accounted incapable and disqualified fof any preferment, 
of whom it can be proved that they solicited it. They shall 
promise also to God and our Lord that they will not treat for 
any preferment or dignity out of the Society, nor yield their 
assent to their own election to any such ofEce, as far as possible, 
if Obedience to him who can enjoin them under penalty of sin 
compel them not : but let every one consider by what means he 
can promote the salvation of souls in the humihty and submis- 
sion of our profession ; and let not the Society be deprived of 
the men who are necessary to the end it has in view. 

7 Each of the Professed shall promise also to God, that if he 
should accept of any preferment without the Society, on the 
compulsion above-mentioned, he shall at all times listen to the 
advice of the General, or of any person appointed hy him; and 
if he thinks what is so recommended to be desirable, he wiU per- 
form it ; Not that he who is perferred holds any member of 
the Society in the place of Superior ; but that he would 
spontaneously be bound in the sight of God to do that which 
he shall perceive to be best for God's service ; and that he is 
happy there is any one to propose it in charity and Christian liherty 
to the glory of God and our Lord. 

8 That the good estate of the whole body be perpetually main- 
tained, that conduces very much which is set forth in the First, 
Second, and Fifth Part, of not admitting a multitude of men 
useless to our Institue, to probation even ; and of dismissing 
such as during probation are found to be unfit. 

9 But if any are discovered of depraved morak, and of whose 
amendment Uttle hope can be felt, stiU less shaU these be 
retained. The admission to be approved Scholars and Coad- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



98 THK CON8TITUTIONS OF 

jutors shall be very difficult, whilst to be Professed shall be 
still more so. None others than men of the Spirit and of 
choice leaming, long and much practised, and proved by various 
trials of virtue and self-denial to the edification and satisfaction 
of all, should be admitted to profession. For so whilst those 
who are admitted to the Society are of this kind, although the 
numbers increase, the spirit shall not be weakened nor di- 
minished. 

10 Seeing the good or evil state of the head affects the whole 
body ; it will be very expedient if the election of the General be 
such as is described in the Ninth Part. And next to this elec- 
tion that will be of greatest moment, in which the subordinate 
Chiefs for Provinces, Colleges and Houses are appointed, For 
as these are, so commonly will their subjects be. Besides elec- 
tions, it is very important that the several Superiors should have 
great power over their subjects, the General over them, and on 
the other hand, the Society over the General (as is set forth in 
the Ninth Part) so that aJl may have all power for good ; but if 
they do evil, may be altogether powerless. It is important also 
that the Superiors have proper ministers (as is said in the same 
part) for the arrangement and execution of business pertaining 
to their duty. 

11 Whatever contributes to the union of the members of this 
Society among themselves, and with their Head will contribute 
also greatly to the preservation of its good estate : such is 
especially that bond of our desires, Charity and mutual affection, 
which frequent intercourse, and communication of events, the 
same doctrine, and uniformity in all things possible will cherish. 
But the bond of Obedience wiU most effectually secure this, 
which will unite individuals with their Superiors, these with one 
another and with their Provincials, and all with the General, so 
that subordination may thus be diligently maintained by all. 

12 Moderation in the labours of the mind and body, and the mean 
in constitutions verging to neither extreme of rigour or facility 
(which may most easily be observed) will conduce to the dura- 
tion and preservation of the whole body in its due estate. 

13 It will serve to the same end generally to endeavour that the 
love and charity of all, even of those without the Society to- 
wards it be secured, and those especially whose good or ill will 
towards us is of much consequence, towards opening or closing 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 99 

to us the way to God's service and the succour of souls. With- 
in the Society, let there neither he nor he shewn any tendency of 
feelings for either side of any faction which may perchance occur 
among Christian Princes or Rulers ; but rather let there be a 
certain universal love, embracing all parties in the Lord, even 
though opposed to each other. 

14 A prudent and moderate use of concessions granted by the 
Apostohcal See will assist to the end most sincerely proposed by 
us, the succour of souls only : For thus the divine bounty will 
promote this work which He has begun ; and the good odour 
which depends upon the reality of good works will increase the 
devotion of men ; so that they will desire to be aided by the 
Society, and will take care to aid it towards the end proposed, 
the service and the glory of the divine Majesty. 

15 It will be well also to pay attention to the health, and its pre- 
servation in individuals, as is set down in the Third Part ; and 
that all in short study to obey the Constitutions, for which it is 
needful to know them, at least as they concern the individual. 
Wherefore it will be well to read or hear them every month. 



On the eighth day of September, 1558, in the name of our 
most holy Lord, Pope Paul IV. the most reverend Cardinal 
Pachecco addressed eJI those who were present in the general 
Congregation of our Society, and proposed the two foUowing 
things, and commanded them to be placed among the Constitu- 
tions. In each of them our Congregation said it would comply ; 
wherefore they are placed here. 

The first was, that it pleased his Holiness, that the General 
of our Society should be triennial, and not perpetual ; although 
after the three years he might he confirmed. 

The second was, that our Society should observe the canonical 
hours in the choir, after the manner of the other Orders ; but 
with that moderation which should seem expedient to the GeneraL 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE FIRST APPROBATION 

OF THE 

INSTITUTE OF THE SOCIETY OF JESUS 

BY PAUL III. 

WITH THE LIMITATION TO THE NUMDER OF SIXTY PERSONS ONLY. 

\N THE YEAR 1540. 



PAUL, BisHOP, Sbrvant of the Servants of God, for a 

PBRPBTUAL RBCORD, 

Presiding by God'8 will over tlie govemment of the Church militant, 
aibeit undeserving, and seeking with anxious earnestness the salva- 
tion of souls as in the duty of our pastoral charge We are bound, 
We encourage with the grace of Apostolic favour certain faithfiil 
men, who therein express their desires, and We otherwise determine 
moreover as, considering the character of the times and places, We 
deem it wholesome and expedient in the Lord. Whereas we have 
lately leamed, that our beloved sons, Ignatius de Loyola, and Peter 
Le F^vre, and James Laynez, and also Claudius Le Jay, and Pas- 
chasius Broet,* and Francis Xavier, and also Alphonso Salmeron, 
and Simon Rodriguez, and John Coduri and Nicholas de Bobadilla, 
priests of the cities and dioceses respectively of Pampeluna, Ceven- 



* Gailo-Belga et Sacerdos. Gallum et hunc olim credidit fama: etPlcardum 
se gessit ipse, utili admodum causi. Nimirum ne Cameracensi ex Agro, et 
adeo fe Caesaris Ditione oriundus, Parisiis et Gallii pelleretur, exorto jam inter 
illum et Franciscum Regem bello. Et valiut ea dissimulatio ad Decuriae 
numerum. Synopsis Damiani primi sceculi Societatis Jesu. Prcenarratio. 

A Belgian priest. He was formerly believed to be a Frenchman, and 
he himself gave out he was of Picardy, for a very useful reason ; namely, 
lest he should be driven from Paris and France, on the breaking out of the 
war between king Francis and thc Emperor, he being born in Cambray, 
and therefore a subject of the latter. This dissimulation made up the 

MILITARY BAND OF TEN. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE FIRST APPROBATION 

OF THB 

INSTITUTE OF THE SGCIETY OF JESUS 

BY PAUL III. 

WITH THE LIMITATION TO THE NUMBER OF SIXTY PERSONS ONLY. 



IN THE YEAR 1540. 



PAUL, BiSHOP, Sbrvant of the Servants op God, for a 

PERPETUAL RECORD, 

Presiding by God*s will over the government of the Church militant, 
albeit undeserving, and seeking with anxious earnestness the salva- 
tion of souls as in the duty of our pastoral charge We are bound, 
We encourage with the grace of Apostohc favour certain faithfiil 
men, who therein express their desires, and We otherwise determine 
moreover as, considering the character of the times and places, We 
deem it wholesome and expedient in the Lord. Whereas we have 
lately leamed, that our beloved sons, Ignatius de Loyola, and Peter 
Le F^vre, and James Laynez, and also Claudius Le Jay, and Pas- 
chasius Broet,* and Francis Xavier, and also Alphonso Salmeron, 
and Simon Rodriguez, and John Coduri and Nicholas de Bobadilla, 
priests of the cities and dioceses respectively of Pampeluna, Ceven- 



* Gallo-Belga et Sacerdos. Gallum et hunc olim credidit fama: et Picardum 
se gessit ipse, utili admodum caus^. Nimirum ne Cameracensi ex Agro, et 
adeo h Caesaris Ditione oriundus, Parisiis et Galli^ pelleretur, exorto jam inter 
illum et Franciscum Regem bello. Et valiut ea dissimulatio ad Decuriae 
numerum. Synopsis Damiani primi sceculi Societatis Jesu. Pr^marratio. 

A Belgian priest. He was formerly believed to be a Frenchman, and 
he himself gave out he was of Picardy, for a very useful reason ; namely, 
lest he should be driven from Paris and France, on the breaking out of the 
war between king Francis and the Emperor, he being born in Cambray, 
and tlierefore a subject of the latter. This dissimulation made up the 

MILITARY BAND OF TEN. 

H 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



102 BULL OF PAUL III. 

nes, Saguntum, (Morviedro) Toledo, Viseu, Embrun and Palencia, 
Masters of Arts, graduated in the University of Paris, and for 
several years versed in theological studies, inspired, as is piously 
beheved, by the Holy Ghost, coming from various regions of the 
globe, are met together, and become Associates, and renouncing 
the seductions of this world, have dedicated their Hves to the per- 
petual service of our Lord Jesus Christ and of us, and of others, 
our successors, Roman Pontiffs ; and have ah-eady during several 
years laudably exercised themselves in the vineyard of the Lord ; 
publicly preaching the word of God with sufficient previous hcense, 
privately exhorting the faithful to lead a good and blessed life, and 
exciting them to godly meditations; attending hospitals, teaching 
boys and ignorant persons things necessary for the Christian in- 
struction of man ; and in fine, fulfiUing, with great praise, the duties 
of charity, and whatever tends to the consolation of souls in all 
parts of the world where they have travelled. And since they 
came to this holy city, persisting in the bond of charity in 
perfecting and preserving the imion of their Society in Christ, and 
promulgated a certain formulary of hfe, in accordance to what 
they have by experience ascertained to be conducive to the end 
proposed by them, aud conformable to evangeUcal designs and to 
the canonical sanctions of the Fathers ; it has come to pass that 
the manner of Hfe of their associates, contained in the said for- 
mulary is not only applauded by many good men, zealous towards 
God ; but is also so much approved by some, that they desire to 
foUow the same. The tenor of which formulary is as foUows, to 
wit : 

Whosoever desires to become God*s soldier under the banner of 
the Cross, and to serve the Lord alone, and his representative upon 
earth the Roman Pontiff, in our Society, which we wish to desig- 
nate by the name of Jesus, after a solemn vow of perpetual Chastity, 
shaU determine in his own mind to form a part of this Society 
instituted to this special end, namely, to offer spiritual consolation 
for the advancement of souls in Christian Ufe and doctrine, for the 
propagation of the faith, by pubUc preaching, and the ministration 
of the word of God, spiritual exercises, and works of charity, and 
expressly, for the instruction of boys and ignorant people in 
Christianity, and above aU for the spiritual consolation of the faith- 
ful in Christ, by hearing confessions ; and he shaU strive to keep 
God always before his eyes, and the method of this His Institute, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



INSTITUTION OF THE SOCIBTY OF JESUS. 103 

which is the way to Him, and with all his energies shall aim at 
this object set before him by God ; each one according to the grace 
ministered to him by the Holy Spirit, and the due place of his 
vocation, lest perchance he have a zeal, but uot according to know- 
ledge. The determination of each member*s peculiar degree, and 
the appointment and entire distribution of his duties shall be in 
the hands of a General or Head to be chosen by Us, that a 
cpnvenient order may be observed, needful in every well-regulated 
community: which Chief with the advice of his associates shall 
have authority to draw up Constitutions conducing to the formation 
of the object proposed to us, the larger number of votes always 
having the right of determination. This Council shall be under- 
stood to be the greater part of the whole Society which can be 
conveniently convoked by the General, on the more important and 
lasting concems : whUst in the lighter and more transient, all those 
who shall happen to be present in the place where the General shall 
reside. But the whole right of issuing commands shall be in the 
General. Let all the Associates know, and that not only at 
their entrance into Profession, but so long as they hve, let them 
daily revolve iii their mind, that this entire Society, and all its 
members become God*s soldiers under the faithful Obedience of the 
most sacred Lord the Pope, and the other Roman Pontiffs, his 
successors. And although we are taught in the Gospel, and in the 
orthodox faith acknowledge and firmly profess, that all Christ*s 
faithful people are subject to the Roman Pontiff, as their head, and 
the Vicar of Jesus Christ ; nevertheless, for the greater humility of 
our Society, and the perfect mortification of every member, and for 
the denial of our own wills we have deemed it highly conducive, 
that each one of us be bound by a special vow, beyond that general 
obhgation, so that whatsoever the present and other Roman Pontifis 
for the time being shall ordain, pertaining to the advancement of 
souls, and the propagation of the faith, and to whatever provinces 
he shall resolve to send us, we are straightway bound to obey, as 
far as in us Hes, without any tergiversation or excuse ; whether he 
send us among the Turks, or to any other unbehevers in.being, 
even in those parts called India : or to any hereticks or schis^ 
maticks, or likewise to any behevers. Wherefore they who shall 
join us, before they put their shoulders to the burden should 
consider long and carefuUy, whether they are so rich in spiritual 
goods, as to be able to finish their tower, according to the counsel 

H 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



104 BULL OF PAUL III. 

of the Lord : that is, whether the Holy Spirit Who guides them, 
promises to them so mueh grace, that they may hope ydth His 
assistance to sustain the burden of this vocation : and when, by the 
inspiration of God, they have enrolled their name in this warfare of 
JESUS Christ, their loins should be girded night and day, and they 
should be ready for the discharge of so great a debt. And that 
there may be no seeking or refusing among ourselves of missions 
or provinces of any kind, let each profess that he will never directly 
or indirectly soHcit any thing of the Roman Pontiff touching such 
missions : but refer all this care to God, and the PontifF as his 
Vicar, and to the General of the Society. The General also shall 
profess, like the rest, that he will not sohcit of the said Pontiff 
touching his own mission into any part, except with the con- 
currence of the Society. All shall vow that they will be obedient 
to the Head of tHe Society in aU things which tend towards the 
observation of this our Rule. And he shaU ordain whatever 
he shaU deem expedient to the attainment of the object proposed to 
him by God and by the Society. And in his own elevation, He 
shaU always be mindful of the benignity, and gentleness, and love 
of Christ, and of the example of Peter and Paul : and both he and 
his counsel shaU diligently regard this rule ; and they shaU have 
expressly recommended to them the instruction of boys, and 
ignorant people in the Christian doctrine of the ten commandments, 
and other the Hke rudiments, as shaU seem expedient to them 
according to the circumstances of persons, places, and times. For 
it is most necessary that the General and his council diHgently 
watcH over the management of this business ; seeing that the 
edifice of faith cannot be raised in our neighbours without a 
foundation, and there may be danger among ourselves, lest, as each 
shaU be more leamed he may endeavour to evade this duty, as at 
first sight perhaps less engaging : whUst in fact none is more 
productive, either of edification to our neighbour, or of the prac- 
tice of the duties of charity and huimlity to ourselves. Inferiors 
moreover shall be always bound to obey the General in aU things 
pertaining to the Institute of the Society, as weU for the great 
advantages of order, as for the never-to-be-sufficiently lauded 
dUigent exercise of HumiHty ; and shaU recognize Christ, as tkough 
present in him, and as far as is becoming, worship him. And since 
we have experienced that a Hfe most remote from every contagion 
of avarice, and most nearly resembHng evangeHcal poverty is more 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



INSTITUTION OP THB SOCIBTY OP JESUS. 105 

delightful, more pure, and more conducive to the edification of our 
neighbour; and since we know that our Lord Jesus Christ will 
supply all things needful for food and clothing to his servants 
seeking only the kingdom of God; all and ^ingular shall vow 
perpetual poverty, declaring that they cannot acquire either sepa- 
rately or in common for the sustentation or use of the Society any 
civil rights to any real property, or to its proceeds or incomes : but 
shall be content to receive the use only of what is given them to 
provide things needful. But they may have in their Universities a 
College or CoUeges holding revenues, estates or possessions to be 
applied to the wants and necessities of the students ; the govem- 
ment or superintendence of the said Colleges, and the said students, 
as touching the election of Rectors, and students, their admission, 
discharge, reception, exclusion, the appointment of statutes for the 
instruction, erudition, edification and correction of the students, the 
manner of supplying their food and clothing, and all other govem- 
ment, regulation and care, being always secured to the General and 
the Society ; yet so, that the students shall not abuse the aforesaid 
goods, nor the Society convert them to their private use, but 
minister to the necessity of the students. And these last also may 
be admitted into our Society when their progress in the spirit and 
in leaming has been ascertained, and after sufficient probation. 
All Associates whatsoever in holy orders, although they hold no 
ecclesiastical benefices, nor incomes therefrom, shall, nevertheless, 
be bound each one privately, and separately, and not as a body to 
say the service according to the ritual of the Church. These 
are the matters which with the allowance of our said Lord 
Paul, and the Apostolic See, we can in some manner explain of 
our profession : which we have now done, that by this writing we 
may briefly inform not only those who question us touching our 
manner of life, but our successors also, if by God*s favour we shall 
have followers of this way, and since we have found many 
and great difficulties aimexed to it, we have judged it right 
to determme that no one be received into this Society, except he 
shall have been long and diligently tried : and when he shall be 
found pmdent in Christ, and conspicuous in leaming, or in the purity 
of the Christian life; then at length he may be admitted to the 
warfare of Jesus Christ, who will vouchsafe to favour these our 
humble beginnings to the glory of Grod the Father, to whom only 
be praise and honour for ever and ever : Amen. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



106 BULL OP PAUL III. 

Now seeing that We find nothing in the premises, wliich is not 
godly or holy ; We, (that these same Associates who have most 
hmnbly petitioned Us herein may be so much more eamest in this 
their pious intention of Hving, and the more because they know that 
they are cherished by the favour of the ApostoUc See, and may per- 
ceive that the premises are approved of by Us,) by our Apostolical 
authority, according to the tenor of these presents, of our certain 
knowledge approve, confirm, and bless, and strengthen with the 
protection of perpetual steadfastness all and singular the premises 
as meet for the spiritual advancement of the Associates, and 6f all 
the rest of the Christian flock : and we receive the Associates 
under our protection, and that of the holy ApostoHc See : con- 
ceding to them moreover, that some -among them may freely and 
lawfully draw up such Constitutions as they shall judge to be 
conformable to theobject of the Society, and to the glory of Jesus 
Christ our Lord, and the advantage of our neighbour. Any other 
Apostolical Constitutions and decrees of the general Council, and 
of our predecessor, Pope Gregory X. of happy memory, and any 
others whatsoever to the contrary, notwithstanding. We will 
moreover that in this Society there be admitted to the number of 
sixty persons only, desiring to embrace this rule of living, and no 
more ; and to be incorporated into the Society aforesaid.* 

Let no man therefore infringe, or with rash audacity contravene 
this document of our approbation, confirmation, benediction, cor- 
roboration, reception, concession, and pleasure. And if any man 
should presume to attempt it, let him know that he will incur the 
indignation of Almighty God, and of St. Peter and St. Paul his 
Apostles. 

Given at Rome, at St. Mark's, in the year of the 
Incamation of our Lord, 1540. September 
27. In the sixth year of our Pontificate. 



* This limitation of the number to sixty was abrogated by the Bull of the 
same Pope Paul III. bearing date 14 March, 1543. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



A TRANSLATION 

OP THB 

BULL rORTHE EFFECTUAL SUPPRESSION 

OF THE ORDER OF JESUITS.» 



CLEMENT XIV. Popb, &c. 

Jesus Christ oiir Saviour and Redeemer was foretold by the 
Prophets as the Prince of Peace : the angels proclaimed him under 
the same title to the shepherds at his first appearance upon earth ; 
he afterwards made himself known repeatedly as the sovereign 
pacificator ; and he recommended peace to his disciples before his 
ascension to heaven. 

Having reconciled all things to God his Father, having pacified 
by his blood and by his cross every thing which is contained in 
heaven and in earth, he recommended to his Apostles the ministry 
of reconciHation, and bestowed on them the gift of tongues, that 
they might pubhsh it ; that they might become ministers and 
envoys of Christ, who is not the God of discord, but of peace and 
love ; that they might announce this peace to all the earth, and 
direct their efForts to this chief point, that all men being regene- 
rated in Christ, might preserve the unity of the Spirit in the 
bond of peace ; might consider themselves as one body and one 
soul, as called to one and the same hope, to one and the same 
vocation, at which, according to St. Gregory, we can never arrive, 
unless we run in concert with our brethren. The same word of 
reconcihation, this same ministry, is recommended to us by God in 
a particular manner. Ever since we were raised (without any 
personal merit) to the chair of St. Peter, we have called these 
duties to mind day and night ; we have had them without ceasing 
before our eyes ; they are deeply eugraven on our heart ; and we 



* Reprinted from the Protestant Advocate (1815), Vol. III. p. 153, &c. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



108 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

labour to the utmost of our power to satisfy and to fulfil them. 
To this effect we implore without ceasing the protection and the aid 
of Grod, that he would inspire us and all his flock with counsels of 
peace, and open to us the road which leads to it. We know, 
besides, that we are established hy the Divine Providence over king- 
doms and nations, in order to pluck up, destroy, disperse, dissipate, 
plant or nourish, as may best conduce to the right cultivation of 
the vineyard of Sabbaoth, and to the preservation of the edifice of 
the Christian religion, of which Christ is the chief comer-stone. 
In consequence hereof we have ever thought and been constantly 
of opinion, that as it is our duty carefully to plant and nourish 
whatever may conduce in any manner to the repose and tranquillity 
of the Christian republic, so the bond of mutual charity requires 
that we be equally ready and disposed to pluck up and destroy even 
the things which are most agreeable to us, and of which we cannot 
deprive ourselves without the highest regret and the most pungent 
sorrow. 

It is beyond a doubt, that among the things which contribute to 
the good and happiness o/ the Christian republic, the religious orders 
hold as it were the first place. It was for this reason that the 
Apostolic See, which owes its lustre and support to these orders, has 
not only approved, but endowed them with many exemptions, prtvUeges 
and faculties, in order that they might be so much the more excited 
to the cultivation of piety and religion : to the direction of the 
manners of the people, both by their instructions and their exam- 
ples ; to the preservation and confirmation of the unity of the faith 
among the behevers. But if at any time any of these religious orders 
did not cause these abundant fruits to prosper among the Christian 
people, did not produce those advantages which were hoped for at 
their institution ; if at any time they seemed disposed rather to 
trouble than maintain the public tranquiUity ; th^ same Apostolic 
See, which had availed itself of its own authority to establish these 
orders, did not hesitate to reform them by new laws, to recall them 
to their primitive institution, or even totally to abolish them where 
it has seemed necessary. Upon motives like these, Innocent III. 
our predecessor, having considered that the too great multiplicity of 
regular orders served only to bring confusion into the church of 
God, did, in the fourth Council of Lateran, forbid all persons to 
invent any new religious institution, and counsel all those who were 
called to the monastic life, to embrace one of the orders already 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OF THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 109 

established. He determined, also, that whoever was disposed to 
found any new religious house, should submit it to some of the 
rules or institutions aheady approved. From hence it results that 
no one has a right to found any new order, without the special 
permission of the Roman pontiff, and that with very good reason ; 
the r^ther, as the end of the new institutions being the attainment 
of a greater degree of perfection, it is proper that the ApostoHc 
See should previously and carefully examine the rules of conduct 
proposed to be laid down, lest great inconveniencies, and even 
scandals, should be introduced into the church of Grod, under the 
specious appearance of a greater good. 

Notwithstanding the wisdom of these dispositions of Innocent 
III. in after times excess of importunity wrung /rom the Holy 
See the approbation of divers regular orders; nay, such was the 
arrogant temerity of many individuals, that an infinite number of 
orders, especially mendicants, started up without any permission at 
all. To remedy this abuse, Gregory X. hkewise our predecessor, 
renewed the constitution of Innocent III. in the General Council at 
Lyons, and forbad every one, under the most severe penalties, to 
invent thereafter any new orders, or to wear the habit of them. 
And as to the new institutions and mendicant orders, estabhshed 
after the Council of Lateran, and not then approved by the Holy 
See, he abohshed them all ; and with regard to those which had 
then been confirmed by the Apostohc See, he ordained, that those 
who had already taken the vows might, if they saw good, remain 
in them, on condition that they received no new members, that 
they acquired no new houses, lands, or possessions whatever, and 
that they did not aUenate the possessions they then had, without 
the express permission of the Apostolic See. And further, he 
reserved to the said See the disposition of all the goods and pos- 
sessions, to be carried to the subsidies destined for the Holy Land, 
or for the poor, or for other pious uses, and that through the channel 
of the Ordinary of the place, or of such other person as the Holy 
See should appoint. He prohibited hkewise the members of the said 
orders to preach, confess, or even inter any other dead except those 
of their own order. He declared, however, that the orders and 
preachers called **Fratres Minores/' should be exempted from this 
constitution, inasmuch as the evident advantage the Catholic church 
reaped from them, entitled them to an entire approbation. He 
ordained, Hkewise, that the order of the Hermits of St. Augustine, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



110 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

and that of the Carmehtes, should remain on theh" ancient footing, 
inasmuch as their institution was prior to the Council of Lateran. 
And finally, he permitted the individuals of the orders comprised in 
the said constitution, full Hberty of transporting themselves and 
their effects into any other order already approved ; provided only 
that no whole order or convent should pass with all their effects 
into any one other order, without a previous and express permission 
of the Holy See. 

The other Roman pontiffs, our predecessors, foUowed the same 
steps, as circumstances required. Among others, Clement V. by a 
letter suh plumbo, expedited the 3d of May, in the year 1312, 
induced thereto by the general discredit into which the order of 
Templars was fallen, did entirely suppress and abolish the said 
order, though it had been legally approved, and though, on account 
of the services it had rendered to the Christian republic, the Holy 
See had heretofore bestowed on it many and important privileges, 
faculties and exemptions ; and though the General Council of 
Vienna, to whom the examination of this affedr had been com- 
mitted, had not thought proper to pronounce a formal and definitive 
sentence. 

St. Pius V. likewise our predecessor, whose eminent virtues are 
honoured by the church, suppressed and entirely aboHshed the 
order called " Tlw Humble Brothers/' though it was anterior to the 
Council of Lateran, and had been approved by Innocent III. 
Honorius III. Gregory IX. and Nicholas III. ponti£fe of blessed 
memory, and our predecessors ; his reasons for which were, that 
the disobedience of this order to the apostohc decrees, their quarrels 
among themselves and with strangers, left no room to hope from 
them any example of virtue ; and that besides some individuals of 
this order had made an infamous attempt on the life of St. Charles 
Boromseus, a cardinal of the holy church, and apostolic visitor of 
the said order. 

The Pope Urban VIII. our predecessor, of blessed memory, did 
in the same manner, by a brief dated the 6th of February, abohsh 
and for ever suppress the congregation of '*Fratres Conventuales 
reformati" though this order had been approved by Pope Sixtus V. 
who had distinguished it by particular benefactions and favours. 
Urban VIII. suppressed it, because the church of Grod did no 
longer receive any spiritual advantages from it ; and because violent 
disputes had arisen between this order and those of the " Fratres 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OF THE SOCIETY OF JBSUS. 111 

Conventuales non reformati/* He ordained that the houses, con- 
vents and goods, moveable and immoveable, belonging to their 
congregation, shoidd be assigned over to the " Fratres Minores 
Conventuales** of St. Francis, except only the house at Naples, and 
that of St. Anthony of Padua, called " De Urbe." This last he 
incorporated, and appHed to the apostoHc chamber, leaving the 
disposition of it to his successors. Lastly, he permitted the 
brothers of the said congregation to pass into the houses of 
Capuchins, or into those of the brothers called **De Ohservantid'* 

This same Urban VIII. by another letter in the form of a brief, 
dated the 2d of December, 1643, suppressed for ever, extinguished 
and aboUshed the regular order of the Saints Ambrose and Bamaby, 
ad nemus, submitting the regulars of the said order to the juris- 
diction and govemment of the Ordinary, permitting the individuals 
thereof to pass into other regular orders approved by the Holy See. 
Innocent X. confirmed this aboHtion afterwards by his letter sub 
plumbo of the first of April, 1645. He further secularized afl the 
benefices, monasteries, and houses of the said order, which were 
heretofore regular. The same Innocent X. our predecessor, having 
been informed of the great disorders which had arisen among the 
regulars of the pious schools of " The Mother of God;*' and not- 
withstanding the said order had been solemnly approved by Gregory 
XV., did, after a mature examination, and by his brief, dated 16th 
of March, 1645, reduce the said order to a simple congregation, 
dispensing with all obligation to make any vow, in imitation of the 
institution of the congregation of secular priests of the oratory, in 
the church of St. Mary, at Valicella de Urbe, or, as it is commonly 
called, of St. Philip of Nersea; he granted the said regulars the 
permission of passing into any other order, forbad the fiirther 
admission of novices ; and the administration of the vows to the 
novices already received. And, lastly, he transferred to the Or- 
dinaries all the superiority and jurisdiction which had heretofore 
been vested in the minister general, the visitors, and superiors. 
And these dispositions had their fiill effect for some years ; till at 
last the Holy See, convinced of the utihty of this institution, 
recalled it to its first form, re-.ordained the ancient solemn vows, 
and reinstated it as a fixed regular order. 

By another brief, of the 29th of October, 1650, this same 
Innocent X. totally suppressed the order of St. BasiHcus of the 
Arminians; and that on the same account of dissensions and 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



112 BULL OF CLBMENT XIV. 

troubles arisen therein, he invested the ordinaries with full power 
and authority over the members of the orders thus suppressed, 
commanding them to take the dress of the secular clergy, and 
assigning them annuities out of the revenues of the suppressed 
convents, granting withal the permission to enter into such other 
orders as they should see fit. 

The same Innocent X. having considered that no spiritual ad- 
vantages could be derived from the regular congregation of the 
priests of the good Jesus, did, by another brief of the 22d of 
June, 1651, abolish the same for ever. He submitted the said 
regulars to the jurisdiction of their Ordinary, assigned them a 
convenient portion of the revenues of the congregation, permitting 
them to enter into any other approved order, and reserving to 
himself the disposition of the goods of the said congregation, to 
be appHed as he shduld see fit to works of piety. 

Lastly, Clement IX. our predecessor, of blessed memory, having 
considered that the three regular orders of the regular canons of 
St. Gregory in Alga, of the Jeromites of Fiesole, and of the 
Jesuits instituted by St. Colombanus, were of no further use to the 
Christian world, and that no hopes remained of rendering them 
hereafter useful, resolved to abolish them„ and did actually do so, 
by his brief bearing date the 6th of December, 1668. With 
regard to their goods and revenues, which were very considerable, 
at the request of the republic of Venice he assigned them for the 
carrying on the war of Candia against the Turks. 

Our predecessors, in taking and executing these resolutions, have 
very wisely preferred this method to afl others ; they regarded it 
as the only one calculated to calm the agitation of men's minds, 
and to stifle the spirit of party and dissension. They therefore 
avoided the slow and fallible method of proceeding in ordinary 
contestations before the courts of justice, contenting themselves to 
follow the laws of prudence, and reljdng wholly on tkat plenitude of 
power which they possessed in so eminent a degree as vicars of Christ 
upon earthy and as sovereign moderators of the Christian repuhlic; 
they executed all these changes without giving the regular orders, 
which they proposed to suppress, the faculty of producing any 
arguments in their defence, or of clearing themselves from the 
heavy accusations brought against them, or of opposing the power- 
fiil motives by which the holy pontiffs were induced to take such 
resolutions. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRKSSION OF THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 113 

We, therefore, having these and other such examples before our 
eyes, examples of great weight and high authority ; animated, 
besides, with a Uvely desire of walking with a safe conscience and 
a firm step in the deliberations of which we shall speak hereafter, 
have omitted no care, no pains, in order to arrive at a thorough know- 
ledge of tlw origin, the progress, and the actual state of that regular 
order commonly called " The Compatiy of Jesiis" In the course of 
these investigations, we have seen that the holy founder of this 
order did institute it for the salvation of souls, the conversion of 
heretics and infidels, and, in short, for the greater advancement of 
piety and reUgion, And in order to attain more surely and happily 
80 laudable a design, he consecrated himself rigorously to God, by 
an absolute vow of evangelical poverty, ydth which to bind the 
society in general, and each individual in particular, except only the 
colleges, in which polite Hterature and other branches of knowledge 
were to be taught, and which were allowed to possess property, but 
so that no part of their revenues could ever be applied to the use 
of the said society in general. It was under these and other holy 
restrictions, that the Company of Jesus was approved by the Pope 
Paul III. our predecessor, of blessed memory, by his letter suh 
plumbo, dated 27 September, 1540, He granted them besides, the 
power of forming laws and statutes, to secure the advantages, 
stability, and good order of the society on a more solid footing. 
And though Paul III. did at first restrain this company to the num- 
ber of sixty ; yet, by his letter of the 14th of March, 1543, he gave 
the superiors of the said company power to admit as many mem- 
bers as they pleased. Afterwards the same pontiflT, by his brief, 
dated May 15, 1549, favoured the said company ydth many and 
extensive privileges ; among others, he willed and ordered that the 
indult, which he had already accorded to the preceding generals, 
should be extended to all such as the generals should think worthy 
of it. This indult has hitherto been restrained to the power of 
admitting only twenty priests, as spiritual coadjutors, to whom were 
to be granted all the same privileges, and the same authority, as to 
the professed companions of the order. Further, he exempted and 
withdrew the said order, its companions, persons, and possessions 
whatever, from all dominion and jurisdiction of aU ordinaries what- 
ever, taking them under the immediate protection of himself and 
the Holy See. 

The munificence and liberality of other pontifi*s, our predecessors. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



114 BULL OP CLEMENT XIV. 

towards this society, have not been less remarkable. It is well 
known, that Julius III. (1550), Paul IV. (1560), Pius IV. & V. 
(1566), Gregory XIII. (1572), Sixtus V. (1585), Gregory XIV. 
(1590), Clement VIII. (1592), Paul V. (1605), Leo XI. (1605), 
Gregory XV. (1621), Urban VIII. (1623), and other Roman 
pontiffs of blessed memory, have either confirmed the privileges 
already granted to the society, or have explained and augmented 
them. 

Notwithstanding so many and so great favours, it appears from 
the apostolical constitutions, that almost at the very moment of its 
institution, there arose in the bosom of this society divers seeds of 
discord and dissension, not only among the companions themselves, 
but with other regular orders, the secular clergy, the academies, 
the universities, the pubhc schools, and lastly, even with the princes 
of the states in which the society was received. 

These dissensions and disputes arose sometimes conceming the 
nature of their vows, the time of admission to them, the power of 
expulsion, the right of admission to holy orders without a sufficient 
title, and without having taken the solemn vows, contrary to the 
tenor of the decrees of the Coimcil of Trent, and of Pius V. our 
predecessor. Sometimes conceming the ahsolute autkority assumed 
by the General of the said order, and on matters relating to the good 
govemment and discipline of the order. Sometimes concerning 
different points of doctrine, conceming their schools, or such of 
their exemptions and privileges as the ordinaries, and other civil or 
ecclesiastical officers, declared to be contrary to their rights and 
jurisdiction. In short, accusations of the greatest nature and very 
detrimental to the peace and tranquillity qf the Christian repuhlic, 
have heen continually received against the said order. Hence the 
origin of that infinity of appeals and protests against this society, 
which so many sovereigns have laid at the foot of the throne of 
our predecessors Paul IV. Pius V. and Sixtus V. 

Among the princes who have thus appealed, is Philip II. King of 
Spain, of glorious memory, who laid before SLxtus V. not only the 
reasons of complaint which he had, but also those alleged by the 
inquisitors of his kingdom, against the excessive privileges of the 
society, and the form of their govemment. He desired likewise 
that the Pope should be acquainted with the heads of accusation 
laid against the society, and confirmed by some of its own members 
remarkable for their leaming and piety, and demanded that the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRBSSION OF THB SOCIBTY OF JBSUS. 115 

society should undergo an apostolic visitation. Sixtus V. convinced 
that these demands and solicitations of Philip were just and well 
foundedy did, without hesitation, comply therewith; and in conse- 
quence, named a bishop of distinguished prudence, virtue, and 
leaming, to be apostoHcal visitor, and at the same time deputed a 
congregation of cardinals to examine this matter. 

But this pontiff having been carried off by a premature death, 
this wise undertaking remained without effect. Gregory XIV. 
being raised to the supreme apostolic chair, approved, in its utmost 
extent, the institution of the society, by his letter sub plumho, dated 
the 28th of July, 1591. He confirmed all the privileges which 
had been granted by any of his predecessors to the society, and 
particularly the power of expelling and dismissing any of its 
members, without any previous form of process, information, act or 
delay ; upon the sole view of the truth of the feict, and the nature 
of the crime, from a sufficient motive, and a due regard of persons 
and circumstances. He ordained, and that imder pain of excom- 
munication, that all proceedings against the society should be 
quashed, and that no person whatever should presume, directly 
or indirectly, to attack the institution, constitutions, or decrees of 
the said society, or attempt in any manner whatever to make any 
changes therein. To each and every of the members only of the 
said society, he permitted to expose and propose, either by them- 
selves or by the legates and nimcios of the Holy See, to himself 
only, or the popes his successors, whatever they should think 
proper to be added, modified or changed in their institution. 

Who would have thought that even these dispositions should 
prove ineffectual towards appeasing the cries and appeals against the 
society ? On the contrary, very violent disputes arose on all sides, 
conceming the doctrine of the society, which many represented as 
contrary to the orthodox faith and to soimd morals. The dissen- 
sions among themselves and with others, grew every day more 
animated ; the accusations against the society were multiplied 
without number, and especially with regard to that insatiable avidity 
of temporal possessions with which it was reproached. Hence the 
rise, not only of those well-known troubles which brought so much 
care and soUcitude upon the Holy See, but also of the resolutions 
which certain sovereigns took against the said order. 

It resulted, that instead of obtaining from Paul V. of blessed 
raemory, a fresh confirmation of its institute and privileges, the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



116 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

society was reduced to ask of him, that he would condescend to 
ratify and confirm by his authority, certain decrees formed in the 
fifth general congregation of the company, and transcribed word 
for word in the brief of the said pope, bearing date September 4, 
1 606. In these decrees it is plainly acknowledged, that the dissen- 
sions and intemal revolts of the said companions, together with 
the demands and appeals of strangers, had obhged the said com- 
panions assembled in congregation to enact the following statute, 
namely : 

"liie Divine Providence having raised up our society for the 
propagation of the faith and the gaining of souls, the said society 
can, by the rules of its own institute, which are its spiritual arms, 
arrive happily, under the standard of the Cross, at the end which 
it has proposed for the good of the Church and the edification of 
our neighbours. Bnt the said society would prevent the effect of 
thesie precious goods, and expose them to the most imminent 
dangers, if it concemed itself with temporal matters, and wMch 
relate to political affairs, and the administration of govemment : in 
consequence whereof it has been wisely ordained by our superiors 
and ancients, that confining ourselves to combat for the glory of 
God, we should not concem ourselves with matters foreign to our 
profession : but whereas in these times of difficulty and danger it 
. has happened, through the fault perhaps of certain individuals, 
through ambition and intemperate zeal, that our institute has been 
ill spoken of in divers places, and before divers sovereigns, whose 
affection and good will the Father Ignatius, of holy memory, 
thought we should preserve for the good of the service of God : 
and whereas a good reputation is indispensably necessary to make 
the vineyard of Christ bring forth fruits; in consequence hereof 
our congregation has resolved that we should abstain from all 
appearance of evil, and remedy, as far as in our power, the evils 
arisen from false suspicions. To this end, and by the authority of 
the present decree of the said congregation, it is severely and 
strictly forbidden to all the members of the society, to interfere in 
any manner whatever in puhlic affairs, even though they be thereto 
invited; or to deviate from the institute through intreaty, per- 
suasion, or any other motive whatever. The congregation recom- 
mends to the fathers-coadjutors, that they do propose and deter- 
mine, with all diligence and speed, such further means as they may 
think necessary for remedying this abuse/' 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRBSSION OF THE SOCIBTY OF JBSUS. 117 

We have seen, in the grief of our heart, that neither these 
remedies, nor an infinity of others, since employed, have produced 
their due effect, or silenced the accusations and complaints against 
the said society. Our other predecessors, Urban VII. Clement 
IX. X. XI. and XII. Alexander VII. and VIII. Innocent X. 
XII. and XIII. and Benedict XIV. employed without effect all 
their efforts to the same purpose. In vain did they endeavour, by 
salutary constitutions, to restore peace to the Church ; as well with 
respect to secular afiairs, with which the company ought not to 
have interfered. as with regard to the missions ; which gave rise to 
great disputes and oppositions on the part of the company with the 
ordinaries, with other religious orders, about the holy places, and 
commimities of aU sorts in Europe, Africa, and America, to the 
great loss of souls, and great scandal of the people ; as likewise 
conceming the meaning and practice of certain idolatrous ceremonies 
adopted in certain places, in contempt of those justly approved by 
the CathoKc Church ; and further, conceming the use and explica- 
tion of certain maxims, which the Holy See has, with reason, pro- ' 
scrihed as scandalouSy and manifestly contrary to good morals ; and, 
lastly, conceming other matters of great importance and prime 
necessity towards preserving the integrity and purity of the 
doctrines of the gospel, from which maxims have resulted very 
great inconveniencies and great detriment, both in our days and in 
past ages ; such as tlie revolts and intestine troubles in some of the 
Catholic stateSy persecutions against the Church in some countries of 
Asia and Europe, not to mention the vexation and grating solicitude 
which these melancholy affairs brought on our predecessors, princi- 
pally upon Innocent XI. of blessed memory, who jfound himself 
reduced to the necessity of forbidding the company to receive any 
more novices; and afterwards upon Innocent XI 11. who was obliged 
to threaten the company with the same punishment ; and, lastly, 
upon Benedict XIV. who took the resolution of ordaining a general 
visitation of all the houses and colleges of the company in the 
kingdom of our dearly beloved son in Jesus Christ, the most faithfiil 
King of Portugal. 

The late apostolic letter of Clement XIII. of blessed memory, 
our immediate predecessor, by which the institute of the Company 
of Jesus was again approved and recommended, was far from 
bringing any comfort to the Holy SeCy or any advantage to the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



118 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

Christian repuhlic. Indeed, this letter was rather extorted than 
granted, to use the expression of Gregory X. in the above-named 
General Council of Lyons. 

After so many storms, troubles, and divisions, every good man 
looked forward with impatience to the happy day which was to 
restore peace and tranquillity ; but under the reign of this same 
Clement XIII. the times became more difficult and tempestuous ; 
complaints and quarrels were multipUed on every side ; in some places 
dangerous seditions arose, tumults, discords, dissensions, scandals, 
which weakening or entirely hreaking the bonds of Christian charitg, 
excited the faithful to all the rage of party, hatreds, and enmities, 
Desolation and danger grew to such a height, that the very 
Sovereigns, whose piety and hberality towards the company were so 
well known as to be looked upon as hereditary in their famiUes, — 
we mean oin* dearly-beloved sons in Christ, the Kings of France, 
Spain, Portugal, and Sicily, — found themselves reduced to the necessity 
of expelling and driving from their states, kingdoms, and provinces, 
these very companions of Jesus; persuaded that there remained m 
other remedy to so great evils ; and that this step was necessary in 
order to prevent the Christians from rising one against another, 
and from massacring each other in the very bosom of our common 
mother the Holy Church. The said our dear sons in Jesus Christ 
having since considered that even this remedy would not be 
sufficient towards reconciling the whole Christian world, unless the 
said society was absolutely abolished and suppressed, made known 
their demands and wills in this matter to our said predecessor 
Clement XIII. They united their common prayers and authority 
to obtain that this last method might be put in practice, as the 
only one capable of assuring the constant repose of their subjects, 
and the good of the Cathohc Church in general. But the unex- 
pected death of the aforesaid pontiff rendered this project abortive. 

As soon as by the divine mercy and providence we were raised to 
the chair of St. Peter, the same prayers, demands, and wishes were 
laid before us, and strengthened by the pressmg soHcitations of 
many bishops, and other persons of distinguished rank, leaming, 
and piety. But that we might choose the wisest course in an affidr 
of so much importance, we determined not to be precipitate, but to 
take due time not only to examine attentively, weigh carefuUy, and 
wisely debate, but also, by unceasing prayers, to ask of the Father 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OP THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 119 

of Lights his particular assistance under these circumstances ; ex- 
horting at the same time the faithful to co-operate with us by their 
prayers and good works in obtaining this needful succour. 

And first of all we proposed to examine upon what groimds 
rested the common opinion, that the institute of the clerks of the 
company of Jesus had been approved and confirmed in an especial 
manner by the Council of Trent. And we found, that in the said 
oouncil nothing more was done with regard to the said society, 
only to except it from the general decree, which ordained that in 
the other regular orders, those who had finished their noviciate, 
and were judged worthy of being admitted to the profession. 
should be admitted thereto; and that such as were not found 
worthy, should be sent back from the monastery. The same 
council declared, that it meant not to make any change or innova- 
tion in the govemment of the clerks of the company of Jesus, that 
they might not be hindered firom being usefiil to God and his 
church, according to the intent of the pious institute approved by 
the Holy See. 

Actuated by so many and important considerations, and, as we 
hope, aided by the presence and inspiration of the Holy Spirit, 
compelled besides by the necessity of our ministry, which strictly 
obUges us to concihate, maintain, and confirm the peace and 
tranquiUity of the Christian republic, and remove every obstacle 
which may tend to trouble it ; having further considered that the 
said Company of Jesus can no longer produce those abundant fruits 
and those great advantages, with a view to which it was instituted, 
approved by so many of our predecessors, and endowed with so 
many and extensive privileges ; that on the contrary it was very 
difficult, not to say impossible, that the Church could recover a firm 
and durable peace so long as the said society subsisted; in consequence 
hereof, and determined by the particular reasons we have here 
alleged, and forced by other motives which prudence, and the good 
govemment of the Church have dictated, the knowledge of which 
we reserve to ourselves, conforming ourselves to the examples of 
our predecessors, and particularly to that of Gregory X. in the 
General Council of Lyons ; the rather as, in the present case, we 
are determining upon the fate of a society classed among the 
mendicant orders, both by its institute and by its privileges. After a 
mature dehberation, we do, out of our certain knowledge, and the 
fulness of our apostolical power, suppress and abolish the said 

I 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



120 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

CGMPANY : we deprive it of all activity whatever, of its houses, 
schools, colleges, hospitals, lands, and in short every other place 
whatever belonging to the said company in any manner whatsoever, 
in whatever kingdom or province they be situated ; we ahrogate and 
anml its statutes, rules, customs, decrees, and constitutions, even 
though confirmed hy oath, and approved hy the Holy See, or otherwise ; 
in Hke manner we annul all and every its privileges, indults, general 
or particular, the tenor whereof is, and is taken to be, as fully and 
as amply expressed in the present brief, as if the same were inserted 
word for word ; in whatever clauses, form or decree, or under 
whatever sanction their privileges may have been conceived. We 
declare all, and all kind of authority, the General, the provincials, 
the visitors, and other superiors of the said society to be for ever 
ANNULLED AND EXTiNGuiSHED : of what uature soever the said 
authority may be, as well in things spiritual as temporal. We do 
likewise order that the said jurisdiction and authority be transferred 
to the respective ordinaries, ftOly and in the same manner as the 
said generals, &c. exercised it according to the form, places, and 
circumstances, with respect to the persons, and under the conditions 
hereafter determined. Forbidding, as we do hereby forbid, the 
reception of any person to the said society, the noviciate or habit 
thereof. And with regard to those who have aL*eady been ad- 
mitted, our will is, that they be not received to make profession of 
the simple solemn absolute vows under pain of nullity, and such 
other penalties as we shall ordain. Farther we do wiU, command, 
and ordsiin, that those who are now performing their noviciate, be 
speedily, immediately, and actually sent back to their own homes : 
we do further forbid that those who have made profession of the 
first simple vows, but who are not yet admitted to either of the 
holy orders, be admitted thereto under any pretext or title what- 
ever : whether on account of the profession they have already made 
in the said society, or by virtue of any privileges the said society 
has obtained, contrary to the tenor of the decrees of the Council of 
Trent. 

And whereas all our endeavours are directed to the great end of 
procuring the good of the Church, and the tranquillity of nations ; 
and it being at the same time our intention to provide all necessary 
aid, consolation, and assistance to the individuals or companions of 
the said societ}% every one of which in his individual capacity we 
love in the Lord with a truly patemal aflfection ; and to the end 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OP THE SOCIETY OF JESUS. 121 

that they, bemg delivered on their part from the persecutions, 
dissensions, and troubles with which they have for a long time 
been agitated, may be able to labour with more success in the 
vineyard of the Lord, and contribute to the salvation of souls : 
therefore, and for these motives, we do decree and determine, that 
such of the companions as have yet made professions only of the 
first vows, and are not yet promoted to holy orders, being absolved, 
as in fact they are absolved, from the first simple vows, do without 
fail quit the houses and colleges of the said society, and be at fuU 
liberty to choose such course of life as each shall judge most con- 
formable to his vocation, strength, and conscience, and that within 
a space of time to be prescribed by the Ordinary of the diocese : 
which time shall be sufficient for each to provide himself some 
employment or benefice, or at least some patron who will receive 
him into his house, always provided that the time thus allowed do 
not exceed the space of one year, to be counted from the day of 
the date hereof. And this the rather, as, according to the privi- 
leges of the said company, those who have only taken these first 
vows, may be expelled the order upon motives left entirely to the 
prudence of the superiors, as circumstances require, and without 
any previous form of process. As to such of the companions as 
are already promoted to holy orders, we grant them permission to 
quit the houses and colleges of the company, and to enter into any 
other regular order already approved by the Holy See. In which 
case, and supposing they have already professed the first vows, 
they are to perform the accustomed noviciate in the order into 
which they are to enter, according to the prescription of the 
Council of Trent ; but if they have taken all the vows, then they 
shall perform only a noviciate of six months, we graciously dis- 
pensing with the rest. Or otherwise we do permit them to Hve at 
large, as secvlar priests and clerks, always under a perfect and 
absolute ohedience to the jurisdiction of the Ordinary of the diocese 
where they shall estabhsh themselves. We do Hkewise ordain, 
that to such as shall embrace this last expedient, a convenient 
stipend be paid out of the revenues of the house or college where 
they resided; regard being paid, in assigning the same, to the 
expenses to which the said house shall be exposed, as well as to 
the revenues it enjoyed. With regard to those who have made 
the last vows, and are promoted to holy orders, and who, either 
through fear of not being able to subsist for want of a pension, or 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



122 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

from the smallness thereof, or because they know not where to fix 
themselves, or on accoimt of age, infirmities, or other grave and 
lawful reasons, do not choose to quit the said coUeges or houses, 
they shall be permitted to dwell therein, provided always that they 
exercise no ministry wliatsoever in the scud houses or colleges, and he 
entirely subject to the Ordinary of the diocese ; that they make no 
acquisitions whatever, according to the decree of the Council of 
Lyons, that they do not alienate the houses, possessions, or funds 
which they actually possess. It shall be lawful tounite in one or 
more houses the nimiber of individuals that remain ; nor shall 
others be substituted in the room of those who may die ; so that 
the houses which become vacant, may be converted to such pious 
uses as the circumstances of time and place shall require, in con- 
formity to the holy canons, and the intention of the founders, so 
as may best promote the divine worship, the salvation of souls, and 
the pubUc good. And to this end a member of the regular clergy, 
recommendable for his prudence and sound morals, shaU be chosen 
to preside over and govern the said houses ; so that the name of the 
company shall he, and is, for ever extinguished and suppressed, 

In Uke manner we declare, that in this general suppression of 
the company shaU be comprehended the individuals thereof in aU 
the provinces from whence they have aL*eady been expeUed ; and 
to this efiect our wiU is, that the said individuals, even though they 
have been promoted to holy orders, be ipso facto reduced to the 
state of secular priests and clerks, and remain in absolute subjection 
to the Ordinary of the diocese, supposing always that they are not 
entered into any other regular order. 

If, among the subjects heretofore of the Company of Jesus, but 
who shaU become secular priests or clerks, the Ordinaries shaU find 
any quaUfied by their virtues, leaming, and purity of morals, they 
may, as they see fit, grant or refuse them power of confessing and 
preaching ; but none of them shaU exercise the said holy function 
without a permission in writing ; nor shaU the Bishops or Ordinaries 
grant such permission to such of the society, who shall remain in 
the coUeges or houses heretofore belonging to the society, to whom 
we expressly and for ever prohibit the administration of the 
sacrament of penance, and the function of preaching ; as Gregory 
X. did prohibit it in the coimcU already cited. And we leave it to 
the consciences of the Bishops to see that this last article be 
strictly observed ; exhorting them to have before their eyes the 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OP THE SOCIETY OP JESUS. 123 

severe account which they must render to God of the flock com- 
mitted to their charge ; and the tremendous judgment with which 
the great Judge of the hving and the dead doth threaten those 
who are invested with so high a character. 

Further we will, that if any of those who have heretofore 
professed the institute of the company, shaU be desirous of dedi- 
cating themselves to the instruction of youth in any college or 
school, care be taken that they have no part in the govemment or 
direction of the same, and that the Uberty of teaching be granted 
to such only whose labours promise a happy issue, and who shall 
shew themselves averse to all spirit of dispute, and untainted with 
any doctrines which may occasion or stir up frivolous and dangerous 
quarrels. In a word, the faculty of teaching youth shall neither be 
granted nor preserved hut to those who seem inclined to maintain 
peace in the schools and tranquillity in the world. 

Our intention and pleasure is, that the dispositions which we 
have thus made known for the suppression of this society, shall be 
extended to the members thereof employed in missions, reserving 
to ourselves the right of fixing upon such methods as to us shaU 
appear most sure and convenient for the conversion of infidels, and 
the concihation of controverted points. 

All and singular the privileges and statutes of the said company 
being thus annulled and entirely abrogated, we declare that as soon 
as the individuals thereof shall have quitted their houses and 
coUeges, and taken the habit of secular clerks, they shall be 
qualified to obtain, in conformity to the decrees of the holy canons 
and apostolic constitutions, cures, benefices without cure, offices, 
charges, dignities, and all employments whatever, which they could 
not ohtain so long as they were members of the said society, according 
to the wiU of Gregory XIII. of blessed memory, expressed in his 
BuU beariDg date Sept. lOth, 1548, which Brief begins with these 
words : Satis superque, &c. Likewise we grant them the power 
which they had not before, of receiving alms for the celebration of 
the mass, and the fuU enjoyment of aU the graces and favours 
from which they were heretofore precluded as regular clerks of the 
Company of Jesus. 

We likewise abrogate aU the prerogatives which had been 
granted to them by their General and other superiors, in virtue of 
the privUeges obtained from the Sovereign PontiflPs, and by which 
they were permitted to read heretical and impious books, proscribed 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



124 BULL OF CLEMENT XIV. 

by the Holy See ; likewise the power they enjoyed of not observing 
the stated fasts, and of eating flesh on fast days : Hkewise the 
faculty of reciting the prayers called the canonical hours, and all 
other Hke privileges, our firm intention being, that they do conform 
themselves in all things to the manner of hving of the secular 
priests, and to the general rules of the church. 

Further we do ordain, that after the pubhcation of this our 
letter, no person do presume to suspend the execution thereof, 
under colour, title, or pretence of any action, appeal, reUef, expla- 
nation of doubts which may arise, or any other pretext whatever, 
foreseen or not foreseen. Our wiU and meaning is, that the 
suppression and destruction of the said society, and of aU its parts, 
shaU have an immediate and instantaneous efiect in the manner here 
above set forth ; and that imder pain of the greater excommunica- 
tion, to be immediately inciu*red by whosoever shaU presume to 
create the least impediment, or obstacle, or delay, in the execution 
of this our wiU : the said excommunication not to be taken ofF but 
by ourselves, or our successors, the Roman Pontifiis. 

Further, we ordain and command, by virtue of the holy obedi- 
ence, to all and every ecclesiastical person, regular and secular, of 
whatever rank, dignity and condition, and especiaUy those who 
have been heretofore of the said company, that no one of them 
do carry their audacity so far as to impugn, combat, or even write 
or speak about the said suppression, or the reasons and motives of 
it, or about the institute of the company, its form of govemment, 
or other circumstance thereto relating, without an express per- 
mission from the Roman PontifiF, and that under the same pain of 
excommunication . 

We forbid aU and every one to ofifend any person whatever on 
account of the said suppression, and especiaUy those who have 
been members of the said society, or to make use of any injurious, 
malevolent, reproachful or contemptuous language towards them, 
whether verbaUy or by writing. 

We exhort aU the Christian princes to exert aU that force, 
authority and power which God has given them for the defence of 
the holy Roman Church, so that in consequence of the respect and 
veneration which they owe to the ApostoHc See, things may be so 
ordered, that these our letters have their fuU efiect, and that they, 
attentively heeding aU the articles therein contained, do pubUsh sach 
ordonnances and regulations, as may prevent all excesses, disputes. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



SUPPRESSION OP THK SOCIBTY OP JKSUS. 125 

and dissensions among tlie faithful, whilst they carry this our will 
into execution. 

Finally, we exhort all Christians, and intreat them by the bowels 
of our Saviour Jesus Christ, to remember that we have one 
Master who is in heaven, one Saviour, who has purchased us by 
his blood ; that we have all been again bom in the water of 
baptism, through the word of eternal Hfe ; that we have all been 
declared sons of God, and co-heirs with Jesus Christ ; all fed with 
the same bread of the CathoUc doctrine, and of the divine word ; 
that we are all one body in Jesus Christ, of which we are mem- 
bers ; consequently it is absolutely necessary, that united by the 
common bond of charity, they should Uve in peace with all men, 
and consider it as their first duty to love one another, remembering 
that he who loveth his neighbour fulfilleth the law; avoiding 
studiously all occasion of scandal, enmity, division, and such hke 
evils, which were invented and promoted by the ancient enemy of 
mankind in order to disturb the church of God, and prevent the 
etemal happiness of the faithful, under the false title of schools, 
opinions, and even of the perfection of Christianity. On the 
contrary, every one should exert his utmost endeavours to acquire 
that tme and sincere wisdom of which St. James speaks in his 
canonical Epistle, ch. iii. v. 13. 

Further, our will and pleasure is, that though the superiors and 
other members of the society, and others interested therein, have 
not consented to this disposition, have not been cited or heard, still 
it shall not at any time be allowed them to make any observations 
on our present letter, to attack or invalidate it, to demand a further 
examination of it, to appeal from it, make it a matter of dispute, 
to reduce it to the terms of law, to proceed against it by the 
means of restitutionis ad integrum, to open their mouth against it, 
to reduce it ad viam et terminos juris, or, in short, to impugn it by 
any way whatever, of right or fact, favour or justice : and even 
though these means may be granted them, and though they should 
have obtained them, still they may not make use of them in 
court or out of court ; nor shall they plead any flaw, subreption, 
obreption, nidlity, or invalidity in this letter, or any other plea, 
how great, unforeseen, or substantial it may be, nor the neglect of any 
form in the above proceedings, or in any part thereof, nor the neglect 
of any point founded on any law or custom, and comprised in the 
body of laws, nor even the plea of enormis enormissima et totalis 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



126 BULL OF CLBMBNT XIV. 

lasiofUs, nor in short any pretext or motive, however just, reason- 
able, or privileged, not even though the omission of such form or 
point should be of such a nature as, without the same being 
expressly guarded against, would render every other act invalid. 
For aU this notwithstanding, our will and pleasure is, that these 
our letters should for ever and to all etemity he valid, permanent, 
and efficacious, have and obtain their full force and effect, and be 
inviolably observed by all and every whom they do or may concem, 
now or hereafter, in any manner whatever. 

In hke manner, and not otherwise, we ordain that all the matters 
here above specified, and every of them, shall be carried into 
execution by the ordinary judge and ddegate, whether by the 
auditor, cardinal, legate ci latere, nimcio, or any other person who 
has, or ought to have, authority or jurisdiction in any matter or 
suits, taking from all and every of them all power of interpreting 
these our letters. And this to be executed, notwithstanding all 
constitutions, privileges, apostoHc commands, &c. &c. &c. And 
though to render the abohtion of these privileges legal they should 
have been cited word for word, and not comprised only in general 
clauses, yet for this time, and of our special motion, we do derogate 
from this usage and custom, declaring that all the tenour of the 
said privileges is, and is to be supposed, as fully expressed and 
abrogated as if they were cited word for word, and as if the usual 
form had been observed. 

Lastly, our will and pleasure is, that to aU copies of the present 
Brief, signed by a notary pubUc, and sealed by some dignitary of 
the Church, the same force and credit shall be given as to this 
original. 

Given at Rome, at St. Mary the Greater, under 
the seal of the Fisherman, the 21st day of July, 
1773, in the fifth year of our Pontificate. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



A TRANSLATION 

OP THE 

BULL FOR THE RE-ESTABLISHMENT 

OF THE ORDER OF JESUITS.* 



PIUS, BiSHOP, Sbrvant op the Sbrvants op God. 

(Ad perpetuam rei memoriam.) 

Thb care of all the Churches confided to our humility by the 
Divine will, notwithstanding the lowness of our deserts and abilities, 
makes it our duty to employ all the aids in our power, and which 
are furnished to us by the mercy of Divine Providence, in order 
that we raay be able, as far as the changes of times and places 
will allow, to reheve the spiritual wants of the Catholic world, 
without any distinction of people and nations. 

Wishing to fiilfil this duty of our Apostolic ministry, as soon as 
Francis Kareu (then living) and other secular priests resident for 
many years in the vast empire of Russia, and who had been 
members of the Company of Jesus suppressed by Clement XIV. of 
happy memory, had supphcated our permission to unite in a body, 
for the purpose of being able to apply themselves more easily, in 
conformity with their institution, to the instruction of youth in 
religion and good morals, to devote themselves to preaching, to 
confession, and the administration of the other sacraments, we felt 
it our duty the more wiUingly to comply with their prayer, inas- 
much as the then reigning Emperor Paul I. had recommended the 
said priests in his gracious dispatch dated llth August, 1800, in 
which, after setting forth his special regard for them, he declared 
to us that it would be agreeable to him to see the Company of 
Jesus estabhshed in his empire under our authority : and we, on 
our side, considering attentively the great advantage which these 

* Reprinted from the Protestant Advocate, Vol. III. p. 13, &c. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



128 BULL OP PIUS VII. 

vast regions might thence derive ; considering how useful those 
ecclesiastics, whose morals and leaming were equally tried, would 
be to the Catholic religion, thought fit to second the wish of so 
great and beneficent a Prince. 

In consequence, by our Brief, dated 7th March, 1801, we granted 
to the ssiid Francis Kareu, and his colleagues residing in Russia, or 
who should repair thither from other countries, power to form 
themselves into a body or congregation of the Company of Jesus ; 
they are at liberty to unite in one or more houses, to be pointed 
out by their superior, provided these houses are situated within 
the Russian einpire. We named the said Francis Kareu General of 
the said congregation : we authorized them to resume and foUow 
the rule of St. Ignatius of Loyola, approved and confirmed by the 
constitutions of Paul III. our predecessor, of happy memory, in 
order that the companions, in a reHgious union, might freely 
engage in the instruction of youth in rehgion and good letters, 
direct seminaries and colleges, and with the consent of the 
Ordinary, confess, preach the word of God, and administer the 
sacraments. By the same Brief we received the congregation of 
the Company of Jesus under our immediate protection and de- 
pendence, reserving to ourselves and our successors the prescription 
of every thing that might appear to us proper to consolidate, to 
defend it, and to purge it from the abuses and corruptions that 
might be therein introduced ; and for this purpose we expressly 
abrogated such apostoUcal constitutions, statutes, privileges, and 
indulgences granted in contradiction to these concessions, especially 
the ApostoHc Letters of Clement XIV. our predecessor, which 
begin with the words Dominus ac Redemptor Noster, only in so far 
as they are contrary to our Brief, beginning CathoUctB, and which 
was given only for the Russian empire. 

A short time after we had ordained the restoration of the order 
of Jesuits in Russia, we thought it our duty to grant the same 
fiavour to the kingdom of Sicily, on the warm request of our dear 
son in Jesus Christ, King Ferdinand, who begged that the Com- 
pany of Jesus might be re-established in his dominions and states 
as it was in Russia, from a conviction that in these deplorable 
times, the Jesuits were instructors most capable of forming youth 
to Christian piety and the fear of God, which is the beginning of 
wisdom, and to instruct them in science and letters. The duty of 
our pastoral charge leading us to second the pious wishes of these 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



RKSTORATION OF THE SOCIKTY OF JKSUS. 129 

illustrious monarchs, ani having only in view the glory of God and 
the salvation of souls, we by our Brief, beginning Per alidSy and 
dated the 30th July, 1 804, extended to the kingdom of the Two 
Sicilies the same concessions which we had made for the Russian 
empire. 

The Catholic world demands with unanimous voice the re-estabHsh- 
ment of the Company of Jesus. We daily receive to this effect 
the most pressing petitions from our venerable brethren, the Arch- 
bishops and Bishops, and the most distinguished persons, especially 
since the abundant fruits which this company has produced in the 
above countries have been generally known. The dispersion even 
of the stones of the sanctuary in those recent calamities (which it 
is better now to deplore than to repeat) ; the annihilation of the 
discipline of the regular orders (the glory and support of reHgion 
and the CathoHc church, to the restoration of which all our 
thoughts and cares are at present directed), require that we should 
accede to a wish so just and general. 

We should deem ourselves guilty of a great crime towards God, 
if, amidst these dangers of the Christian repubhc, we neglected the 
aids which the special providence of God has put at our disposal ; 
and i/, placed in the hark of Peter, tossed and assailed hy continual 
storms, we refused to employ THE VIGOROUS AND EXPERI- 
ENCED ROWERS who volunteer their services, in order to hreak 
the waves of a sea which threaten every moment shipwreck and death. 
Decided by motives so numerous and powerful, we have resolved 
to do now what we could have wished to have done at the com- 
mencement of our pontificate. After having by fervent prayers 
implored the Divine assistance, after having taken the advice and 
counsel of a great number of our venerable brothers the cardinals 
of the holy Roman Church, we have decreed, with full knowledge, 
in virtue of the plenitude of apostoHc power, and with perpetual 
validity, that all the concessions and powers granted by us solely to 
the Russian empire and the kingdom of the Two Sicihes, shall 
henceforth extend to all our ecclesiastical States, and also to all 
other States, We therefore concede and grant to our well-beloved 
son, Taddeo Barzozowski, at this time General of the Company of 
Jesus, and to the other members of that company lawfully delegated 
by him, all suitable and necessary powers in order that the said 
States may freely and law^fully receive all those who shall wish to 
be admitted into the regular Order of the Company of Jesus, who, 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



130 BULL OF PIUS VII. 

under the authority of the General ad interim, shall be admitted 
and distributed, according to opportunity, in one or more houses, 
one or more colleges, and one or more provinces, where they shall 
conform their mode of life to the rules prescribed by St. Ignatius 
of Loyola, approved and confirmed by the Constitutions of Paul 
III. We declare besides, and grant power that they may freely 
and lawfully apply to the education of youth in the principles of 
the Catholic faith, to form them to good morals, and to direct 
colleges and seminaries ; we authorize them to hear confessions, to 
preach the word of God, and to administer the sacraments in the 
places of their residence, with the consent and approbation of the 
Ordinary. We take under our tutelage, under our immediate 
obedience, and that of the Holy See, all the colleges, houses, 
provinces, and members of this Order, and all those who shall join 
it ; always reserving to ourselves and the Roman PontiiFs our 
successors, to prescribe and direct all that we may deem it our 
duty to prescribe and direct, to consolidate the said company more 
and more, to render it stronger, and to purge it of abuses, should 
they ever creep in, which God avert. It now remains for us to 
exhort with all our heart, and in the name of the Lord, all 
superiors, provincials, rectors, companions, and pupils of this re- 
established society, to shew themselves at all times and in all places, 
faithful imitators of their father ; that they exactly observe the rule 
prescribed by their great founder ; that they obey with an always 
increasing zeal the useful advices and salutary counsels which he 
has left to his children. 

In fine, we recommend strongly in the Lord, the company and 
all its members to our dear sons in Jesus Christ, the iUustrious and 
noble Princes and Lords temporal, as well as to our venerable 
brothers the Archbishops and Bishops, and to all those who are 
placed in authority ; we exhort, we conjure them not only not to 
suffer that these rehgious be in any way molested, but to watch that 
they be treated with all due kindness and charity. 

We ordain that the present letters be inviolably observed accord- 
ing to their form and tenour, in all time coming ; that they enjoy 
their full and entire efiect ; that they shall never be submitted to 
the judgment or revision of any judge, with whatever power he 
may be clothed ; declaring null and of no effect any encroachment 
on the present regulations, either knowingly or from ignorance ; 
and this notwithstanding any apostoHcal constitutions and ordi- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



RESTORATION OP THE SOCIETY OF JBSUS. 131 

nances, especiaUy the Brief of Clement XIV. of happy memory, 
beginning with the words Dominus ac Redemptor Noster, issued 
under the seal of the Fisherman, on the 22d of July, 1773, which 
we expressly abrogate as far as contrary to the present order. 

It is also our will that the same credit be paid to copies, whether 
in manuscript or printed, of our present Brief, as to the original 
itself, provided they have the signature of some notary public, 
and the seal of some ecclesiastical dignitary ; that no one be 
permitted to infringe, or hy an audaciovs temerity to oppose any part 
of this ordinance ; and that should any one take upon him to 
attempt it, let him know that he will thereby incur the indignation 
of Almighty God, and of the holy Apostles Peter and Paul. 

Given at Rome, at Sancta Maria Major, on the 7th of 
August, in the year of our Lord 1814, and the 
15th of our Pontificate. 

(Signed) Cardinal Prodataire. 
Cardinal Braschi. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



AN OUTLINE 

OF THB 

PRESENT CONDITION OF THE ROMISH CHURCH 

IN THIS KINGDOM* 



Thb present condition of the Romish Church in this kingdom is 
not the growth of yesterday, but appears to have arisen firom 
causes which, though Uttle known or noticed, have been many years 
in operation. This history, it is hoped, may be hereafter written 
more in detEul from materials which have been coUected for that 
purpose. Here an outUne only can be given. 

About the year 1795, a smaU fratemity of Jesmts, described m 
th Laity*s Directory for that year as " the gentlemen of tJie English 
Academ at Liege." were driven by the fmy of the French R«volu- 
tion to seek an asylum in this country. They estabUshed them- 
selves at Stonyhurst. near Clithero, in Lancashire ; of which house 
and estate a long and advantageous lease was granted to them by 
the owner Mr. Weld, a gentleman of an ancient and wealthy 
Roman Catholic family. They consisted at this time. accordmg to 
the description given by their apologist, Mr. DaUas, of " a few 
ancient men," whose settlement in the country excted no suspicion 
or alarm; but was rather greeted with a share of that pubhc 
svmpathy which was so honourably and charitably displayed to- 
wardB aU the victims of revolutionary violence. The professed 
de^ign of these fugitives went at first no further than to undertake. 
as a means of providing for their own subsistence, the education of 
youth The title assumed in the prospectus of the infant estabhsh- 



• This Outline formed the Appendix to a Sermon preached in Canterbury 
Cathedral, by the Rt. Rev. William Geant Brougbton, D.D. Bishop of 
Australia. 



Digitized by CjOOQIC 



THE ROMISH CHURCH. 133 

ment, is that of " The CoUege of Stonyhurst ;" which was described 
as conveniently prepared for the accommodation of 150 scholars. 
In addition to the pupils whose circumstances enabled them to pay 
the regulated charges for boarding and tuition, it was generally 
understood that a certain number of the children of poorer parents 
were received, for gratuitous education, upon the foundation of the 
coUege ; who might be afterwards adopted into the Society and 
employed in forwarding its designs, as they should be found to 
unite a suitable inclination for the service, with promising talents 
and the requisite degree of flexibihty. Thus without one dissenting 
voice was a foundation laid for the re-estabUshment of an order 
which had been finaUy expeUed from England, A.D. 1604. An 
instance was now to be given of the pertinacity with which it 
adheres to the design of its institution; and of the expansive 
vigour with which its growth advances wherever any germe is 
suffered to make a lodgment. The design proceeded prosperously. 
The proposed number of pupUs was speedUy obtained ; and with 
the funds thus placed at their disposal, the directors proceeded to 
prepare for far more extended operations. Continued improve- 
ments of the estate were accompUshed. The mansion, which when 
first occupied by the society, had become much dUapidated by time 
and neglect, was graduaUy put into a state of complete repair : and, 
at a very great expense, a large and handsome buUding was added 
to the original fabric. Means were thus obtained for a great ex- 
tension of the original scheme; insomuch that the number of 
students for several years past may not have been short of 300. 
As their resources thus increased, more extended plans occupied 
the thoughts of the fathers ; and while, by means of the infiuence 
which their large expenditure secured to them, the work of pro- 
selytism continued to extend in the neighbourhood of Stonyhurst, 
and to make some progress in other parts of the kingdom, through 
the exertions of those judiciously planted agents who were issuing 
yearly from the coUege, the immediate successors of that feeble 
band which had professed to seek no more than a refuge from 
overwhelming misfortune, found themselves in a situation to extend 
their exertions beyond the Umits of England. 

The ParUamentary foundation of the CoUege of Ma^mooth had 
given in Ireland the first promise of a revival of Roman CathoUc 
influence. Yet there were stiU some circumstances which di- 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



134 PRESENT CONDITION OF 

minished the satisfaction with which the institution was regarded 
by such of the titular hierarchy as held what are termed ultra- 
montane sentiments. The heads of the Roman Cathohc Church 
in Ireland had generally sided with the Jesuits. They are beUeved 
to have unanimously accepted the Bull Unigenitus; and to have 
acquiesced in other edicts which had a like tendency to exalt the 
papal power. They appear, therefore, to have viewed with dis- 
pleasure and alarm the disposition towards Jansenism manifested at 
Maynooth, and even threatening to obtain there a positive ascen- 
dancy. As an instance of its prevalence may be mentioned that 
Dr. Ferris, one of the Professors, a man of leaming, and highly 
esteemed among the pupils, had in lecturing his class ventured so 
near the borders of heresy as to affirm that **the merits of the 
saints, compared with the merits of Christ, were no more than a 
drop of wat^r compai^ed with the ocean." It was thence obvious 
that measures could not be too speedily taken to meet this pressing 
danger, and to restore the tenets of Jesuitism to their proper 
ascendancy. For the accompUshment of this object recourse was 
had to the establishment of Stonyhurst ; on the perfect orthodoxy 
of which not a shade of suspicion had ever been cast, and which 
was now in circumstances to afford very important aid. The Rev. 
Peter Kenny, who had been educated partly at Stonyhurst, and 
afterwards in the CoUege of Palermo, was translated from the 
former residence to Majmooth, where he fiUed the office of Vice- 
President : that of President being at the same time held by Dr. 
Murray, the present titular Archbishop of DubUn. In addition to 
the proper duties of his coUegiate office, Mr. Kenny was also 
entrusted with the occasional charge of conducting the " Retreats," 
or those seasons at which the students are accustomed to retire for 
the sake of meditation and discussion. The subjects for consider- 
ation at such times are fixed by the conductor, who also deUvers 
every day one or more hortatory discourses ; and may, at the 
conclusion of the Retreat, hear the confessions of such students as 
apply to him. Mr. Kenny thus enjoyed most ample and favourable 
opportimities of inculcating the principles of his order, and of 
eradicating any opinions of an opposite complexion which, through 
his intimate acquaintance with the most secret sentiments of the 
students, he might discover the sUghtest tendency in any of them 
to adopt. The testimonies which he had given of the most devoted 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THB ROMISH CHURCH. 135 

and resolute attachment to the cause of the Society, were so many 
proofs of the wisdom of those who selected him to fill these 
situations, where his zeal and his talents might be directed to the 
best account. He had, it appears, from his own evidence, taken 
the simple vows of the Order during his residence in England ; 
but doubts have arisen whether he could be lawfully aggregated in a 
coimtry where a restoration of the Society by the Pope had not 
taken place, he was compelled to seek elsewhere an opportunity of 
being unquestionably incorporated. The Order. most seasonably 
for his purpose, had been re-established in Sicily by a special brief 
of the Pope in 1 804 : and Mr. Kenny, therefore, proceeded to 
Palermo, where in 1808 he became formally and certainly aggre- 
gated as a member of the Society of Jesuits. This display of 
resolution, and of indefatigable perseverance in the cause, clearly 
pointed out this individual as one whose services might be rehed on 
whenever a suitable opportunity should present itself for emplojdng 
them in the great and growing design of which the Jesuits were 
at the head. And such an occasion was not long wanting. The 
College of Majmooth it should be observed, being expressly limited 
to the education of ecclesiastics, did not completely fiilfil the 
wishes of the leaders of the Society ; whose object was then, as it 
ever has been, by means of their peculiar system of education to 
obtain influence not over the clergy alone, but over the minds of 
men of all ranks and professions ; especially of those who might 
probably rise to eminence and influence in political and secular 
pursuits. An attempt had, therefore, been made to erect a lay- 
college within the walls of Majmooth ; but the design was defeated, 
after having made some progress, by the firmness of the late Mr. 
Abbot, afterwards Lord Colchester, who justly thought that such 
a proceeding was a plain infraction of the condition upon which 
the college was endowed. The design, however, was too advan- 
tageous to be altogether abandoned. Negotiations were set on 
foot for the purchase of a suitable property in a convenient situa- 
tion, and towards the close of 1818 an agreement was made with 
the proprietor of Clongowes Wood, in the county of Kildare, and 
six miles from Majmooth, for the surrender of that estate as the 
site of the proposed lay-seminary or college. It was opehed in 
July 1814, for the reception of scholars; Mr. Kenny having been 
appointed to the office of President. AU circumstances, indeed, 

K 2 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



136 PRESBNT CONDITION OF 

seemed to concur most favourably for the advancement of tbe 
design ; for at the same precise period of time, (viz. in August, 
1814), the Pope, with a memorable coincidence, issued his BuU for 
the restoration of the order of Jesuits ; and, so far as the validity 
of the vows is concemed, they were from that moment re-established 
throughout the world. There was now, therefore, no longer any 
question as to the regularity and sufficiency of a profession miule 
in this country ; and great facility was thus afforded for the aggre- 
gation of members. Mr. Kenny was joined at Clongowes by 
others of his order, who undertook with him the task of education ; 
and the affiliation of the younger establishment with the parent 
institution of Stonyhurst, was thus rendered complete. The two 
societies have since maintained constant intercourse and mutual 
good understanding ; and, with force more effective because united, 
have proceeded in the' design to catholicize the British empire. A 
striking circumstance in illustration of the rapid revival of the 
influence of Romanism may be mentioned upon the authority of 
Mr. Kenny, who states upon oath, that there were but two mem- 
bers of the Jesuit order besides himself in the whole of Ireland, 
when he was appointed Vice-President of Ma)mooth. When he, 
after a short interval, removed to Clongowes, the number of priests, 
and of those who might become priests, had increased to nearly 
twenty. And from a retum ordered by the House of Commons to 
be printed, 15th of June, 1830, the number of persons in Ireland 
bound by the Jesuit vows appears to have been 58 ; in England at 
the same time, 117. All these,' with any augmentation which may 
have taken place during the ensuing five years, have grown up as 
suckers from that, in appearance exanimate, root which was planted 
at Stonyhurst not forty years before. 

This design for reviving the Roman Catholic Faith in England 
has been thought deserving of more than domestic encouragement. 
It has attracted the attention of foreign states, and has its branches 
extended especially to Rome. '* The English Catholic Library " is 
established with the avowed purpose of obtaining prosel^rtes, by 
lending gratuitously books treating of religious controversy and 
piety " especially to their Protestant countrymen " when under the 
influence of admiration of the ceremonies of the Church in " that 
seat of Catholicity." "Many proofs," it is boasted, have lately 
been given "of the happy effect of those books of instruction ;" 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



THE ROMISH CHURCH. 137 

and certainly, when it is considered what crowds are attracted to 
Rome of Protestants ill-grounded in the principles of their own 
faith, and most favourably situated for receiving the desired 
impression, as well as how extended may be their influence in 
multiplying the same impression on their retum home, this source 
of conversions is not to be thought hghtly of . An Institution of 
more direct influence is " the English College " at Rome, which is 
carefully cherished and mainly relied on, as an eflFective instrument 
for advancing the cause of the Romish Church in this country. A 
very remarkable proof of the deep pohcy by which it has recently 
been thought worth while to attach the students of this institution 
by redoubled ties to the service for which they are destined, was 
afforded in October, 1827 ; when, for the first time during several 
centuries, the Pope himself visited their summer retreat about 
fourteen miles from Rome. A very striking account is extant, 
written by a former student of Stonyhurst, but then a member of 
the English coUege, who was present on the occasion. A most 
animated picture is drawn of the extreme af^bihty and condescen* 
sion of His Holiness, allowing them to kiss his foot and his hand, 
blessing their beads, dining at their table, conferring upon them as 
they knelt before him the very significant appellation of "the hope 
of the Church,** and after his departure sending them as a present 
a beautiful young calf, omamented with flowers, and moreover 
issuing directions to his masters of ceremonies that in the pro- 
cession of Corpus Christi the students of the English College 
should carry the Baldacchino, or hangings, which are borae over 
the Pope as he carries the Holy Sacrament. Such attentions are 
not lavished without an object; and when the period chosen for 
this manifestation is considered in connexion with other well- 
known circumstances, but slender doubts can remain as to what is 
" the hope of the Church," or how it is expected to be realized, 

These, among many other indications furnish the ground upon 
which it is assumed that a design is now in progress of executioQ, 
for re-establishing in England the Roman Catholic Rehgitm. The 
chief agency is evidently entrusted to the Jesuits ; upon which part 
of the -subject an observation must be ofiered, which highly con- 
ceras all who even without any particular regard for reKgion, are 
anxious for the general welfare of the community, The restora- 
tion of that order by Pius VII. has given compactness and 
momentum to elements which before that were scattered and 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



138 PRESENT CONDITION OF 

comparatively inert. Under what circumstances was this efFected, 
and how is it Hkely to involve us ? The Jesuits within little more 
than two centuries (1555 to 1773), had sufFered thirty-seven 
expulsions from various states. Such of these as took place during 
the 18th century had occured in those states of Europe which are 
most devoted to the Romish faith : viz. Savoy, 1729; Portugal, 
1759; Spain and the two SiciUes, 1767; Parma, 1768; Malta, 
1768. Lastly, as if to crown the whole by a most signal and 
exemplary instance, they were in 1773, suppressed at Rome and in 
all Christendom by a Bull of Pope Clement XIV. This prelate 
was cautious and temperate in disposition, not imaware of the 
importance to the Church of the services of this Order, nor of 
the scandal which must arise from his suppression of it. He had 
within his reach in the archives of the Propaganda, sources of infor- 
mation to which the rest of the world had not access. He dehberated 
upon these and upon the pleadings of the Society in its own justifi- 
cation during four years, and at the conclusion of that interval, 
dehberately set his hand to the instrument of suppression. Thus 
ex Cathedra he pronounced the Society to be inherently wicked and 
mischievous, dangerous to the peace of the world, and unworthy of 
any longer toleration. Severe as this censure may appear, the 
Abb^ de Bemis, at that time Ambassador from France to Rome, 
declares from his own acquaintance with the facts, that the Sove- 
reign Pontiff " would have been more than sufficiently justified, if 
the love of peace had not closed his mouth." Forty years after 
this the world beheld with astonishment the issue of a Bull by the 
reigning Pope, reversing the decree of his predecessor, legalizing 
the vows of that so often prohibited Society, and placing it in a 
condition to exercise, in all the countries of the world, that dis- 
cipline which all had united in pronouncing injurious to their 
welfere. The BuU of Pope Clement amounted to a verdict against 
the Jesuits, who had been accused of insatiable avidity for temporal 
possessions, dangerous seditions, massacres, hatreds, enmities, 
prevaricatioiis which must destroy all social confidence, and trea- 
sonable practices such as endangered the safety of all govern- 
ments. Yet Pope Pius, uniaccountably forgetting or purposely 
omitting to notice this condemnation, festored the Society in a 
most unqualified manner. He without any reserve recalled to 
existence an Order agamst which the most papistical states, and 
the papacy itself had united in pronouncing sentence ; and their 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 



THE ROMISH CHURCH. 139 

unanimous conclusion was, that the Jesuits did not compensate, 
even by their exertions on behalf of the Church, for the horrible 
mischiefs of which they were in other respects the authoi*s. Yet 
the head of the Church of Rome restored this Society in all its 
plenitude; neither accompanying his rescript with any refutation 
or denial of the odious doctrines and practices which had been 
imputed to it, nor expressing his own disapprobation of them, nor 
80 much as giving a pubUc caution against their re-introduction. 
The only reason dwelt upon in justification of his proceeding is 
the security of the Church. Placed as he is in the bark of St. 
Peter, and tossed with continual storms, he should deem himself on 
his pontifical responsibiUty guilty of a great crime towards God, if 
heshouldneglectto employ "THESE VIGOROUS AND EX- 
PERIENCED ROWERS" who volunteer their services. Verily 
it must be assumed that the end sanctifies the means, or how 
could the Church have lent its sanction to the restoration of a 
fratemity which the Church itself had condemned and suppressed 
as the sources of ineffiible enormities ? 

But whether the Church of Rome is prepared to justify this 
proceeding, or whether, having resorted to it in a moment of 
desperation, yet now, finding how well it has answered, she will 
set all censure at defiance, the consequence to ourselves is precisely 
the same. The Society being restored and once again planted in 
England, has directed all its energies to recover for the Roman 
Cathohc Faith, its lost dominion over the people. Other of the 
regular orders, encouraged by the example of the Jesuits, have 
resumed operations. Six Colleges, besides Stonyhurst, under the 
direction of one or other of these orders, are now in activity upon 
a very extended scale, in various parts of the kingdom; and, as 
described in the Laity's Directory for the present year, the Roman 
CathoHc Chapels in England and Wales are in number 410."' A 



* It will thus appear from the accounts that have reached' your Com- 
mittee— chiefly from the pubiished statements of Roman Catholics them- 
selves — ^that there are now 519 chapels open for service, and 43 in progress of 
erection in this island. 

Tenth Annual Report of the British Society for 
promoting the religious principles of the 
Reformation. . 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



' 140 PRBSBNT CONDITION OF THB RQ^ISH CHURCH. 

mere inspection of the newspapers from day to day will fumish 
evidence of their rapid increase; and confirmation, if it were re- 
quired, that not one of these establishments is reared up withdUt 
fumishing its sheaf to the harvest of proselytes. 

These truths are stated here with a view of at once confirming 
the assertion in the Sermon, and of awakening the attention of 
the Protestant Clergy and people to the actual position occupied by 
their adversaries. Our engagement is an arduous one; for it 
requires us to keep the middle path between two equally dangerous 
extremes : to maintain liberty of conscience, and to excite attach- 
ment for purity of doctrine, yet at the same time not to 
give occasion or countenance to that irregular intemperate zeal 
which threatens to dash in pieces like a potter*s vessel the very 
frame and fabric of the Church. If we would preserve what is 
left us of our Prot^stant institutions, we must be carefiil above 
ali things to have union among ourselves. 



THE END. 



PRINTED BY ROBERT BBST EDB, DORKING. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



ERRATA. 

CONSTITVTIONBS. 

Page 11, line 7, for Scismatorum, read Scismatlcorum. p. 30, l. 23, ^br alium, 
aliud. p. 34, l. 20, for ubique, utrique. p. 37, l. 13, for nostro exemplo ac 
doctrinam, nostri exemplo ac doctrina. p. 40, l. 15, for utiliores, ulteriores. 
p. 56, l. 26, 29, for quanvis, quavis. p. 66, l. 1, for donata, donatae. p. 77, 
L 17, /or missa, missse. p. 79, /. 11, /or eadem, in eadem. p. 81, l. 2, /or 
oportet, optet. j». 85, l. 11, /or facultate, facilitate. />. 96, /. 5, for debent, 
debeat. 

Translation. Part IX. Chap. III. 15. substitute 

15 He shall revoke, restrain, and enlarge their authority, and demand an account 
of their Government. And if he shall have conceded to a Provincial the power of 
appointing local Superiors and Rectors, the General may confirm or supersede 
them. 
Part IX. Chap, IV. 6.^ remone 

or they appoint him with the concurreuce of two local Superiors, or of the 
Provincial Rectors ; 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



9:. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



inDfllfl3E37D 




B89081832370A 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



I. 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



<nDfllfl35370 




B89081832370A 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC 



Digitized by VjOOQ lC